LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 


OIF-T 


.  .T. 


O         CC 


I    <  <f 


-**>' 
5r^ 


.^-*       <    , 


MANUAL 


TOR 


ENGINEER   TROOPS; 


CONSISTING    OP 


PART     I.— Ponton  Drill, 

PART    II— Rules  for  Conducting  a  Siege, 

PART  III.— School  Of  the  Sap, 

PART  IV.— Military  Mining, 

PART    V.— Construction  of  Batteries, 


BY  CAPT.  J.  C.  DUANE, 

CORPS  OP   EXOIXEERS   U.   8.   ARMY. 


THIRD    EDITION. 


NEW  YORK: 
D.  VAN  NOSTRAND,  192  BROADWAY. 

1804 


vv     .«%v  %%**>"   •       •        .  • 

"    • 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1862, 
BY  D.  YAN  NOSTRAND, 

la  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States, 
for  the  Southern  District  of  Xew  York. 


O.  A.   ALVORD,  8TERKOTYPER  AND  PRINTJEB. 


£8 


PEEFACE. 

THE  following  Manual  is  a  compilation  from  English, 
French,  and  Austrian  Military  Authors,  with  such  al- 
terations, as  appeared  necessary  to  adapt  the  work  to 
our  service. 

In  the  instruction  for  the  Pontonier,  it  has  been  at- 
tempted to  devise  a  drill  applicable  to  the  various  Pon- 
ton Trains  now  in  use  in  our  Army. 

The  first  part  of  the  instruction  for  the  Sapper  is,  with 
a  few  alterations,  a  reprint  of  General  Pasley's  Rules 
for  conducting  the  Practical  Operations  of  a  Siege.  The 
second  is  a  translation  of  the  French  Sapper  Manual. 

That  part  which  relates  to  Military  Mining  is  taken 
from  the  English  and  French  Aides  Memoire. 


PONTON    DRILL 


"HE 


UNIVERSITY  1 


I. 


PONTON  DRILL. 


CHAPTER  I. 


PASSAGE  OF  RIVERS. 

WHEN  an  army  in  the  field  finds  its  march  interrupted  by 
a  river,  it  may  effect  the  passage  of  this  obstacle  either  by 
fording,  by  ferrying  in  boats,  rafts  or  flying  bridges,  or 
by  military  bridges. 

The  selection  of  the  place  and  means  of  crossing  a  river, 
is  determined  by  a  reconnoissance,  which  should  be  as  de- 
tailed and  extensive  as  circumstances  will  permit. 

For«l§. 

A  river  with  a  moderate  currrent  may  be  forded  by  in- 
fantry when  its  depth  does  not  exceed  three  feet,  and  by 
cavalry  and  carriages  when  its  depth  is  about  four  feet. 

The  requisites  for  a  good  ford  are,  that  the  banks  are  low 
but  not  marshy,  that  the  water  obtains  its  greater  depth 
gradually,  the  current  moderate,  the  stream  not  subject  to 
freshets,  and  that  the  bottom  is  even,  hard  and  tenacious. 

In  mountainous  countries,  the  bottom  is  frequently  covered 
with  large  stones,  rendering  the  passage  of  carriages  nearly 
or  quite  impracticable. 


8  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

In  level  countries,  the  case  is  often  still  worse,  the  bottom 
being  either  of  mud  or  quicksand,  rendering  it  impassable 
for  both  men  and  carriages.  Sometimes  the  bottom  is  com- 
posed of  fine  sand,  which  is  hard  enough,  but  by  the  action 
of  the  hoofs  of  animals  is  stirred  up  and  washed  away,  in- 
creasing the  depth  until  it  is  unfordable. 

The  best  bottom  is  coarse  gravel. 

Fords  are  usually  found  in  the  wider  and  more  rapid  parts 
of  the  river. 

Their  position  may  be  determined  by  sending  a  number 
of  mounted  men  across  wherever  there  is  a  probability  of 
the  river  being  shallow  enough. 

The  most  certain  method  is  to  float  down  the  stream  in  a 
boat,  keeping  it  in  the  swiftest  part  of  the  current,  where 
the  stream  is  usually  the  deepest.  Over  the  stern  a  sounding 
line  of  the  proper  length  is  hung ;  when  this  touches  bot- 
tom the  river  is  sounded  across. 

When  the  ford  is  discovered,  the  remarkable  objects  on 
the  shore  should  be  noted,  that  the  ford  may  be  easily  recog- 
nized, and  a  picket  planted  at  the  water's  edge,  in  order  that 
uny  variation  in  the  height  of  the  water  maybe  ascertained. 

Rivers  which  are  not  fordable  may  sometimes  be  rendnvl 
so,  when  the  only  obstacle  is  a  too  great  depth  of  water 
over  an  extent  of  eight  or  ten  yards,  by  filling  in  this  por- 
tion of  their  bed  with  fascines  loaded  with  stones,  or  with 
stone  and  gravel. " 

When  the  water  is  sluggish,  or  muddy,  a  ford  may  be  im- 
proved by  covering  the  bottom  with  bundles  of  coarse  grass, 
rushes  or  twigs. 

There  have  been  instances  of  rivers  rendered  fordable  by 
diverting  a  portion  of  the  water  from  its  natural  course. 

When  the  river  is  wide  and  rapid,  the  ford  must  first  be 
carefully  examined  and  staked  out.  The  troops  pass  in  column 
of  platoons,  with  sufficient  interval  to  avoid  choking  the 
current. 


PASSAGE    OF   RIVERS.  fl 

When  boats  are  to  be  had,  a  few  should  be  stationed  be- 
low the  ford,  to  assist  those  who  may  be  carried  down  by 
the  current. 

When  boats  are  wanting,  this  duty  may  be  performed  by 
mounted  men,  or  a  life-hue  may  be  stretched  across,  sup- 
ported on  casks  or  other  floats.  The  force  of  the  current 
may  be  broken  in  a  measure  by  stationing  cavalry  in  tho 
stream  above  the  ford. 

After  a  freshet,  the  ford  should  be  re-examined,  lest  some 
alteration  may  have  taken  place  in  the  bed  of  the  river. 

In  marching  in  retreat,  it  is  frequently  advisable  to  destroy 
a  ford  after  having  used  it.  This  may  be  effected  by  dig- 
ging trenches  across  it,  or  filling  in  the  deepest  part  with 
harrows,  teeth  up,  plank  filled  with  spikes,  crow's  feet,  &c. 

Ice. 

In  high  latitudes,  during  the  winter,  rivers  are  frequently 
covered  with  ice  of  sufficient  thickness  to  sustain  the  heavi- 
est loads.  This  means  of  communication  should  be  used 
with  great  circumspection.  A  change  of  temperature  may 
not  only  suddenly  destroy  this  natural  bridge,  but  render 
the  river  impassable  by  any  method  for  a  considerable  time, 
in  consequence  of  the  floating  ice. 

The  thickness  of  ice  should  be,  to  allow  the  passage  of 
infantry  in  single  file,  on  a  line  of  planks  and  two  yards 
apart — two  inches;  cavalry,  or  light  guns,  with  intervals, 
four  inches ;  12-pounder  field-pieces,  unlimbered  and  on 
sleds,  five  inches;  12-pounder  field-pieces,  limbered  and 
drawn  by  horses,  with  intervals  between  pieces,  six  to  seven 
inches.  Ice  when  ten  to  twelve  inches  thick,  bears  the  heavi- 
est loads. 

Two  tracks  of  planks  laid  on  the  ice,  for  the  carriage- 
wheels  to  run  on,  may  be  employed  when  there  is  any  doubt 
as  to  its  strength,  or  the  wagons  may  be  transformed  into  a 

sort  of  sled  by  fastening  two  planks  under  the  wheels. 
1* 


10  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

The  thickness  of  the  ice  may  be  increased,  when  the 
temperature  is  low  enough,  by  throwing  water  on  it. 

AVhen  the  river  is  frozen  on  each  side,  but  open  in  tlu- 
middle  in  consequence  of  the  velocity  of  the  current,  a  boom 
stretched  across  the  open  space  will  often  check  the  veloci- 
ty sufficiently  to  cause  the  ice  to  freeze. 

Passage  oil  Boats,  Rafts,  &c.,  &c. 

The  point  of  passage  being  selected,  all  the  boats  that 
can  be  procured  will  be  collected — in  default  of  a  sufficient 
number  of  boats,  lumber,  casks  and  other  material  suitable 
for  rafts — and  the  rafts  constructed  without  delay.  The 
banks,  if  too  steep,  will  be  cut  down  ;  the  landing  on  the 
opposite  shore  should  be  further  down  the  stream  than  I  lie 
point  of  embarkation,  as  the  loaded  boats  will  drift  with  the 
current.  The  boats  will  be  arranged  along  the  shore  ac- 
cording to  size,  and  numbered ;  the  rafts  moored  below  the 
boats. 

The  infantry  will  be  divided  into  sections,  depending  in 
size  upon  the  capacity  of  the  boats  in  which  they  are  to 
embark ;  each  section  is  provided  with  the  number  of  its 
boat ;  great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  overload  the  boats  or 
to  crowd  the  boatmen. 

The  soldiers  will  enter  the  boats  one  by  one,  alternately 
against  the  right  and  left  gunwale  ;  they  will  be  cautioned 
not  to  stir  from  the  places  assigned  them,  and  above  all,  not 
to  spring  up  when  the  boat  lurches ;  they  will  disembark  in 
the  same  order,  i.  e.,  one  by  one. 

When  the  river  is  shallow  near  the  shore,  the  boat  must 
not  approach  the  bank  near  enough  to  ground  as  it  fills  with 
men. 

In  the  passage  of  artillery,  it  is  usually  necessary  to  dis- 
mount the  piece. 

Cavalry  are  not  often  passed  over  in  boats.  When  boats 
of  sufficient  size  can  be  obtained,  their  bottoms  must  b*> 


PASSAGE   IN  BOATS,   RAFTS,   ETC.  11 

covered  over  •with  plank,  the  horses  placed  crosswise,  facing 
alternately  up  and  down  stream,  otherwise  they  may  be 
thrown  down  by  the  rolling  of  the  boat. 

The  passage  of  all  arms  may  be  facilitated  by  construct- 
ing a  floating  bridge  formed  of  two  boats,  covered  with  a 
platform  constructed  as  follows  : 

From  five  to  seven  beams  of  the  same  thickness  are  laid 
across  the  two  boats,  the  interval  between  the  beams  equal, 
and  such  that  the  covering  plank  extends  one  foot  beyond 
the  extreme  beams. 

The  interval  between  the  boats  allows  the  beams  to  ex- 
tend two  feet  beyond  the  outer  gunwales.  The  beams  are 
lashed  to  the  boats ;  the  covering  planks  are  kept  in  place 
by  two  side-rails  laid  directly  over  the  outer  beams,  and 
lashed  down  to  them  ;  the  extreme  planks  are  nailed  down. 

The  size  of  the  beams  is  regulated  by  the  load,  and  inter- 
val between  the  boats.  With  seven  beams  27'  long  and  5" 
square,  and  covering  plank  1£"  thick,  a  24-pounder  may  be 
carried. 

Not  only  artillery  and  cavalry  may  be  transported  by  this 
moans,  but  infantry  may  be,  in  much  greater  numbers  than 
by  using  the  boats  separately. 

The  raft  can  be  manoeuvred  by  oars  with  nearly  the  same 
facility  as  a  boat. 

The  same  rules  apply  to  the  passage  of  troops  on  rafts  as 
in  boats,  attention  being  paid  to  the  following  circumstances : 
that  rafts  drift  more  than  boats,  consequently  the  landing 
on  the  opposite  shore  will  be  further  down  stream ;  and 
as  the  embarkation  is  easier,  there  is  more  danger  of  over- 
loading the  rail,  and  of  confusion  in  embarking.  Infantry 
enter  by  the  flank,  and  occupy  first  the  middle  of  the  raft, 
through  its  entire  length  ;  a  rank  is  then  added  alternately 
on  the  up  and  down  stream  side,  until  the  raft  is  loaded. 

Artillery  and  heavy  carriages  are  placed  in  the  centre, 
and  cavalrv  as  in  fl1^  v,o«+" 


12  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

Rafts  possess  these  advantages,  viz.:  the  embarkation  and 
landing  of  all  arms  is  easier. 

They  carry  large  numbers  at  each  trip. 

They  are  not  easily  injured  by  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

They  draw  little  water. 

They  cannot,  however,  be  navigated  with  the  same  facili- 
ty as  boats,  and  move  much  more  slowly  through  the  water, 
thus  keeping  the  troops  a  longer  time  under  fire  when  in 
presence  of  an  enemy. 

They  cannot  be  directed  with  certainty  on  a  fixed  point, 
when  the  stream  is  rapid,  and  in  this  case  it  is  often  impos- 
sible to  bring  them  back  against  the  current  to  the  starting 
point. 

Finally,  the  length  of  time  required  for  their  construction 
forbids  their  use  when  the  passage  is  to  be  effected  secretly. 

When  the  material  is  limited  in  quantity,  the  passage  will 
be  executed  more  readily  by  means  of  the  rope  ferry,  trail 
or  flying  bridge. 

The  first,  which  is  used  in  streams  with  sluggish  currents, 
consists  of  a  floating  support,  either  raft,  floating  bridge  (as 
described  above)  or  a  wide  scow.  This  support  is  provided 
with  two  forked  uprights,  one  near  each  end  of  the  up-stream 
side.  The  forks  support  a  strong  rope,  stretched  across  the 
stream,  and  securely  fixed  at  each  bank.  The  raft  is  caused 
to  traverse  the  stream  by  men  on  its  deck  hauling  on  the 
cable. 

The  trail  bridge  is  employed  on  streams  of  not  more  than 
one  hundred  and  fifty  yards  in  width,  and  with  a  current 
whose  velocity  is  not  less  than  one  yard  per  second.  The 
rope  must  be  maintained  above  the  surface  of  the  water, 
consequently  must  be  drawn  very  tight  by  means  of  wind- 
lass, blocks  and  falls,  or  similar  expedients,  also  raised  at 
each  bank  some  distance  above  the  water. 

The  raft  or  boat  is  attached  to  a  pulley  which  runs  on  a 
sheer  line,  and  by  means  of  a  rudder,  is  given  such  a  position 


TEAIL,    OR   FLYIXQ    BRIDGES.  13 

that  its  side  makes  an  angle  of  about  55°  with  the  direction 
of  the  current. 

The  force  of  the  current  exerted  on  the  side  of  the  float 
may  be  divided  into  two  components,  one  perpendicular  to 
the  sheer  line,  which  is  destroyed  by  the  resistance  of  this 
line,  the  other  parallel  to  it,  which  causes  the  float  to  cross 
the  stream  with  a  velocity  depending  on  the  strength  of  the 
current. 

The  most  suitable  float  for  the  purpose,  is  one  composed 
of  two  long  narrow  and  deep  boats,  with  the  sides  nearly 
vertical,  the  interval  between  the  boats,  such  that  the  cur- 
rent shah1  act  on  the  sides  of  both  through  their  entire  length, 
when  they  form  the  proper  angle  with  it. 

When  timber  rafts  are  used,  they  should  have  the  form 
of  a  lozenge,  whose  acute  angle  is  55°.  When  two  sides  are 
parallel  to  the  current,  the  up-stream  side  will  be  in  the  most 
favorable  position  for  the  passage. 

When  the  river  is  more  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  yards 
in  width,  the  strain  on  the  sheer-line  would  be  very  great ; 
it  is  therefore  usually  replaced  by  a  cable,  one  end  of  which 
is  attached  to  the  float,  the  other  anchored  in  the  stream, 
thus  forming  a  flying  bridge. 

The  cable  is  supported  by  several  floats,  either  small  boats, 
barrels,  logs,  &c. 

When  an  anchor  is  used,  the  first  float  should  be  as  near 
it  as  possible,  without  danger  of  tripping  it;  the  others 
should  be  so  arranged  as  to  maintain  the  cable  above  the 
water.  The  cable  is  anchored  in  the  middle  of  the  stream, 
when  the  current  is  stronger  there  ;  but  when  stronger  near 
one  shore,  it  must  be  anchored  nearer  the  other.  If  no  floats 
for  the  cable  are  used,  it  must  be  passed  over  a  gallows-frame 
on  the  raft  to  keep  it  from  dragging  in  the  water. 

This  bridge  is  manoeuvred  in  the  same  manner  as  the  trail 
bridge.  The  rope-ferry,  trail  or  flying  bridge,  furnish  the 
means  of  passing  any  stream,  and  may  be'  advantageously 


14  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOrS. 

employed  in  many  cases.  They  may  be  established  without 
difficulty  in  a  short  time  with  limited  material,  and  such  as 
can  often  be  found  in  the  vicinity.  They  permit  the  passage 
of  all  arms,  and  the  heaviest  loads. 

They  are  not  liable  to  injury  from  floating  bodies,  and  the 
flying  bridge  does  not  interrupt  navigation. 

Bridges. 

When  a  river  is  more  than  four  feet  in  depth,  or  when  its 
bottom  is  of  mud  or  quicksand,  recourse  must  be  had  either 
to  ferrying,  by  means  of  boats,  rafts,  &c.,  or  to  military 
bridges.  The  latter  method  is  always  to  be  preferred,  when 
circumstances  will  permit  their  establishment. 

Military  bridges  are  composed  of  a  road-way  and  its 
supports;  the  first  consists  of  beams,  or  balks,  reaching 
across  the  adjacent  supports,  and  covered  with  plank,  called 
chess. 

The  supports,  from  which  the  bridge  takes  its  name,  may 
be  either  fixed,  as  trestles,  gabions,  carriages,  piles ;  or  float- 
ing, as  pontons,  boats  of  commerce,  rafts,  <fcc. 

Ponton  bridges  are  preferable  to  all  others  when  the  pas- 
sage by  main  force  or  surprise  is  to  be  undertaken. 

They  may  be  constructed  on  any  stream  of  sufficient 
depth. 

Pontons  may  be  replaced  by  rafts,  when  the  velocity  of 
the  stream  does  not  exceed  6'  per  second.  In  swifter  cur- 
rents, rafts  are  unmanageable,  drag  their  anchors,  and  are 
liable  to  destruction  from  floating  bodies. 

Trestle  bridges  may  be  constructed  in  rivers  whose  depth 
does  not  exceed  9',  and  whose  velocity  is  not  more  than  6'. 

They  may  be  employed  with  advantage  in  rivers  of  mod- 
erate depth  and  gentle  current,  with  hard  even  bottoms; 
when  the  bed  of  the  river  is  uneven,  the  adjustment  of 
the  trestles  to  the  bottom  is  very  tedious,  and  when  the 
current  is  rapid,  almost  impossible ;  when  the  bed  is  of 


BEIDGES.  15 

mud  or  fine  sand,  the  settlement  of  the  legs  is  liable  to  be 
irregular. 

Gabion  bridges  are  used  over  marshes  and  shallow 
streams  ;  they  consist  of  gabions  constructed  in  the  ordinary 
way,  and  of  a  height  necessary  to  give  a  level  road.  These 
are  placed  in  rows  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  bridge, 
filled  with  stones  or  gravel,  and  capped  with  a  piece  of  tim- 
ber, on  which  the  balks  rest. 

Pile  bridges  are  superior,  in  point  of  stability,  to  all  other 
military  bridges,  but  require  much  labor  and  time  in  their 
construction,  and  are  usually  employed  in  securing  the  com- 
munication in  rear  of  the  army. 

Military  bridges  being  gnerely  temporary  expedients,  the 
same  solidity  is  not  required  in  them,  as  in  permanent 
bridges.  It  is  sufficient  to  give  them  the  strength  required 
to  support  the  weight  of  the  heaviest  loads  which  accompany 
an  army,  and  to  resist  the  action  of  the  current,  which  has  a 
tendency  to  tear  away  the  supports. 

The  first  requisite  is  attained  by  giving  sufficient  volume 
to  the  supports,  if  they  are  floating,  vertical  strength  if  fixed, 
and  using  balks  and  chess  of  the  proper  dimensions,  taken 
in  connection  with  their  length  between  bearings. 

To  resist  the  action  of  the  current;  a  good  system  of 
anchorage,  the  greatest  possible  distance  between  supports, 
and  by  placing  these  supports  exactly  in  the  direction  of  tho 
current. 

An  intimate  connection  between  the  parts  of  the  road-way, 
and  between  the  road-way  and  its  supports,  is  also  a  groat 
assistance  in  resisting  the  current ;  sufficient  play  must  how- 
ever, be  left,  to  allow  the  bridge  to  accommodate  itself  to 
the  action  of  a  heavy  load  passing  over  it,  and  the  action  of 
the  waves  when  the  water  is  rough,  otherwise,  however 
firm  the  fastenings  may  be,  they  will  soon  work  loose. 

The  interval  between  the  supports  is  regulated  not  only 
by  the  length  of  the  balks,  but  by  the  cross  section  and  the 


1C  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

buoyant  power  of  the  support.  The  duties  of  an  officer 
charged  with  the  construction  of  a  bridge  are,  to  discover 
and  collect  all  the  material  disposable  for  the  purpose ;  to 
examine  carefully  the  position  chosen  for  the  bridge,  ascer- 
tain the  width  and  velocity  of  the  stream,  and  the  nature  of  its 
bottom  and  banks.  He  can  then  determine  the  composition 
of  the  bridge,  calculating  so  as  to  reserve  sufficient  material 
to  repair  damages,  and  lengthen  the  bridge  in  case  of  a  rise 
in  the  water.  He  will  then  divide  his  force  into  detach- 
ments, assign  to  each  its  task,  and  require  each  to  labor  at  its 
own  task  without  attempting  to  interrupt  or  assist  that  of 
any  other. 

During  the  progress  of  the  work,  he  will  not  allow  any 
unnecessary  person  to  approach  the  working  parties,  or  step 
upon  the  bridge. 


PONTON   AND   TRESTLE   BRIDGES.  17 


CHAPTER  II. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  PONTON  AND  TRESTLE  BRIDGES. 

THERE  are  four  methods  of  constructing  a  bridge  when 
pontons  or  boats  of  commerce  are  employed. 
1  st.  By  successive  boats. 
2d.  By  rafts. 
3d.  By  parts. 
4th.  By  conversion. 

The  modified  French  Bridge  Equipage, 

Prate  1, 

Consists  of  34  Ponton  Wagons,  each  loaded  as  follows, 
viz. : 

7  long  balks  ;  1  ponton,  inside  of  which  are  placed  12  balk 
lashings;  7  rack  lashings  ;  7  rack-sticks;  6  row-locks;  2 
spring-lines;  5  oars;  2  boat-hooks;  under  the  rear  axle  is 
lashed  1  anchor. 

22  Chess  wagons;  load  of  each,  41  chess;  2  cables. 

4  Trestle  wagons ;  load  of  each,  2  trestle  caps ;  4  legs ;  4 
shoes;  4  chains;  14  short,  or  claw  balks. 

4  Abutment  wagons ;  load  of  each,  2  abutment  sills ;  1 
trestle  cap  ;  2  legs;  2  shoes  ;  2  chains  ;  14  short  balks. 

4  Tool  wagons;  loaded  with  carpenter's  and  intrenching 
tools,  spare  cordage,  &c.;  2  travelling  forges. 


18 


i 

MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


Recapitulation    of  Equipage. 

Ponton  wagons 

34 

Pumps 

5 

Chess             " 

-     22 

Buckets 

-      10 

Trestle           " 

8 

Pickets 

24 

Tool               " 

-      4 

Rack-sticks    - 

-  240 

Forge            " 

2 

"     collars 

48 

Trestles  complete  - 

-     12 

Cordage. 

Balks,  long 

-       238 

Cables   - 

-     44 

"       short  (claw) 

-  118 

Spring-lines 

128 

Chess 

-       902 

Lashing  balk 

-  720 

Sills  (abutment) 

-       8 

"       side-rail 

-       360 

Row-locks 

-       200 

Sheer-lines 

•       2 

Oars 

-  192 

Sets  double  blocks, 

large      6 

Boat-hooks 

-       100 

U                   (I                    U 

small      6 

Scoops  - 

-     70 

[Discharge  of  Material. 

The  ponton  is  removed  from  the  wagon  by  twenty  men. 
The  wagon  is  brought  near  the  river  bank,  the  pole  toward 
the  stream,  and  unlimbered.  A  double  row  of  chess  is  laid 
from  the  carriage  to  the  water.  The  lashings  are  removed, 
and  the  boat  is  allowed  to  slide  gently  into  the  water.  The 
balks  are  piled  on  the  left  of  the  entrance  to  the  bridge. 
Two  balks  are  laid  on  the  ground  parallel  and  18  feet  apart; 
on  these  is  a  layer  of  balks  nearly  in  contact  with  each  other, 
then  two  more  directly  over  the  first  set.  Then  a  second 
course,  &c.,  until  the  pile  is  about  5  feet  high. 

The  chess  are  piled  on  the  right  of  the  bridge,  as  follows : 
three  balks  are  laid  on  the  ground  parallel,  and  5  feet  apart ; 
on  these  a  course  of  ten  chess  not  quite  in  contact ;  on  these 
a  second  course  often  chess,  &c.,  until  the  pile  is  5  feet  high. 
Other  articles,  as  trestles,  cables,  &c.,  are  in  separate  piles 
on  the  right  of  the  chess. 


BRIDGES  OVER   KAVINE6. 


19 


Construction  of  Trestle  Bridge  over  Dry  Ravine. 

Plate  4. 


Sections. 
No.  of 

Duty. 

Non-Com. 
Officers. 

Men. 

1st 

Abutment  Section 

1 

8 

Construct  abutments,  &c. 

2d. 

Trestle  Carriers'  " 

1 

8 

Brine;  first  trestle,  then  go  for  another. 

8d. 

"      Builders'  " 

1 

8 

Erect  the  trestle  and  adjust  the  balks 

upon  the  caps. 

4th. 

Balk 

1 

10 

Carry  balks  by  right  side  to  end  of 
bridge,  front  men  give  ends  to  tres- 
tle builders,  take  rear  ends  and  as- 

sist in  placing.    Go  back  for  more 

by  left  of  bridge. 

6th. 

Chess                    " 

1 

24 

22  carry  chess  by  right  of  bridge  to 

other  two  who"  place  them.  Keturn 

by  left 

6th. 

Side-rails             " 

1 

8 

Bring  side-rails,  and  lash  them  down. 

Dismantled  by  reverse  process. 

The  pontoniers  are  divided  into  detachments,  in  which 
each  rank  is  numbered  from  the  right,  so  that  the  front  and 
rear  rank  men  of  each  file  have  the  same  number. 

The  first  section  is  composed  of  one  non-commissioned 
officer  and  eight  men,  whose  duty  is  to  prepare  a  convenient 
entrance  to,  and  exit  from  the  bridge,  and  to  place  the  abut- 
ment sill. 

For  the  latter  purpose  there  will  be  required  picks,  shov- 
els, a  maul,  one  sill  and  pickets,  the  number  and  size  depend- 
ing on  the  nature  of  the  soil. 

A  trench  one  foot  in  depth  is  excavated  to  receive  the  sill, 
which  is  placed  in  a  direction  exactly  perpendicular  to  that 
of  the  bridge,  and  firmly  fixed  in  position  by  pickets  eight 
inches  from  each  end  in  front  and  rear ;  as  soon  as  the  balks 
are  in  place,  a  chess  is  arranged  against  their  ends,  its  upper 
surface  coinciding  with  that  of  the  chess  forming  the  road- 
way, and  retained  by  pickets. 

The  approach  to  the  bridge  is  then  rendered  easy  by  cut- 
ting down  and  levelling  the  bank,  if  necessary ;  the  abutment 


20  MANUAL  FOR  E^GDTEER  TROOPS. 

for  the  other  extremity  of  the  bridge  is  then  arranged  in  the 
same  manner. 

Trestle  Carriers. 

2d  Section. — 1  chief  of  section  and  8  men.  Nos.  1  and  1 
and  Nos.  2  and  2  carry  the  cap,  passing  rack-sticks  through 
the  suspension  rings;  Nos.  3  and  3  the  legs  and  false  legs; 
Nos.  4  and  4  the  chains,  shoes  and  wedges.  The  section  is 
then  formed  and  marched  back  to  the  trestle  depot. 

To  Construct  the  Trestle. 

3d  Section. — 1  C.  S.  and  8  men.  No.  1  inserts  the  leg  in 
the  cap  and  adjusts  the  chain ;  No.  2  the  false  leg  and 
wedge ;  No.  3  the  shoe.  No.  4  is  stationed  at  the  foot,  to 
prevent  it  slipping. 

The  C.  S.  lays  off  the  distance  from  the  sill  or  last  trestle, 
at  which  the  new  trestle  is  to  be  placed ;  he  also  measures 
the  height  the  cap  is  to  be  above  the  ground,  and  from  this 
estimates  the  distance  the  legs  are  to  be  thrust  through  the 
caps. 

Nos.  1,  2  and  3  raise  the  trestle.  No.  4  prevents  the  foot 
from  slipping.  Nos.  3  and  4  hold  the  trestle  erect,  whilst 
Nos.  1  and  2  adjust  the  balk  which  they  receive  from  the 
balk  carriers. 

When  the  cap  is  so  high  that  it  cannot  be  reached  from 
the  ground,  the  manoiuvre  is  performed  as  indicated  in 
plate  4. 

Balk   Carriers. 

4th  Section. — 1  C.  S.  and  10  men.  C.  S.  commands  "lay 
hold,"  "raise,"  "shoulder,"  "forward;"  each  file  seizes  a 
balk,  raises  it ;  the  front  rank  to  the  rigfit,  and  the  rear 
rank  to  the  left  shoulder.  The  section  marches  in  line  to 
the  entrance  of  the  bridge,  the  balk  carriers  on  each  flank 
then  p-recede  the  others,  all  keeping  as  close  as  possible  to 


BRIDGE    OVER    DRY    RAVIXE.  21 

the  right-hand  side  of  the  bridge  ;  on  arriving  at  the  bridge 
head  they  come  into  line,  the  front  rank  pass  their  end  of 
the  balks  to  the  trestle  section,  step  back  and  relieve  the  rear 
rank,  and  assist  in  placing  the  balks.  The  section  is  then 
formed'  in  two  ranks  on  the  left  side  of  the  bridge,  and 
marched  off  by  the  flank. 

Chess. 

5th  Section. — 1  C.  S.  and  24  men  (22  carriers  and  2  cov- 
erers).  22  carry  chess  ;  each  man  carries  a  chess  under  the 
right  arm,  the  forward  end  raised  well  np  in  the  air ;  he 
marches  on  the  right  side  of  the  bridge,  delivers  the  chess 
to  the  coverers,  then  passes  back  to  the  pile  of  chess,  by  the 
left  side  of  the  bridge.  The  coverers  stand  on  the  balks  to 
be  covered  (one  on  the  1st  and  2d,  the  other  on  the  4th  and 
5th  balks),  facing  to  the  rear ;  they  receive  the  chess  and 
place  them. 

Side-Rails. 

Gth  Section. — 1  C.  S.  and  8  men.  Nos.  1  and  1  carry  side- 
rails  for  np-stream,  Nos.  2  and  2  for  down-stream  side  of 
bridge.  They  are  carried  in  the  same  manner  as  balks,  and 
one  laid  on  each  bay  as  soon  as  the  coverers  have  left  it. 
Nos.  3  and  3  lash  up-stream,  Nos.  4  arid  4  down-stream 
rails. 

The  side-rails  are  placed  immediately  over  the  outer  balks, 
and  lashed  by  passing  a  rope  around  the  balk  and  rail,  tying 
it  loosely,  then  twisting  it  up  tight  with  a  rack-stick ;  three 
lashings  are  placed  on  each  rail. 

REMARKS. — The  greatest  attention  should  be  given  to 
placing  the  abutment.  * 

The  stability  of  the  bridge  depends,  in  a  great  measure, 
on  that  of  the  abutment  sill. 

AVlien,  after  raising  a  trestle,  the  cap  is  found  not  to  be 
on  proper  level,  it  is  better  to  lower  the  trestle  to  the  ground 


22 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


to  correct  the  error,  than  to  attempt  doing  so  whilst  it  is 
standing. 

To  Dismantle  Bridge. 

The  sections  remain  the  same  as  in  the  construction,  oper- 
ating in  an  inverse  order — 6th  section  remove  the  side-rails ; 
5th  section  the  chess ;  4th  section  the  balks ;  2d  and  3d 
sections  overturn,  dismember,  and  carry  off  the  trestles;  1st 
section  remove  the  abutments. 

Construction  of  Trestle  and  French  Ponton  Bridge 
I>y  succes§ive  Ponton§  over  Watercourse. — SUMMARY. 

Plates  6  and  7. 


1  No.  of  1 
|  Sections.  | 

Duty. 

Non-com. 
Officers. 

d 

8 
3 

~ 

1st 

Abutment  Section, 

2 

Construct  first  abutment,  take  material  for  sec- 

ond across  river  and  construct  it 

2d. 

Trestle, 

2 

8 

Construct  r:ift  of  two  pontons,  load  it  with  sepa- 
rate trestles,  caps  mid  legs.  &c..  take  raft  to  its 

place,  put  trestle  together,  right  it,  put  claws 
of  balks  to  caps,  haul  on  cables,  drop  1. 

engage  raft. 

3d. 

Up-Stream  Anchor, 

2 

8 

Two  half-suctions.'     Boats  with   up-stream  an- 

chors are  above  abutment  two  half  ft 

cuter  two  boats,  row  to  placv  for  and. 

it  drop  boat  to  place  in  bridge  and  go  ashore 

for  another  boat.     If  boat  is  to   bo   moored, 

4th. 

Down-StreamAnchor 

2 

8 

down-stream  anchor  is  also  placed  in  stern. 
Two  half-sections.     First  with  boat  take  anchor 

from  boat  already  in  bridge,  drop  down  and 
cast    it;     second  half-section  bring  pontons 

with  no  anchors  into  bridge  and  give  them  to 

balk  lashers. 

5th. 

Balk  Carriers, 

1 

10 

Brinj:  balks  by  right  side  of  bridge,  pass  front 

end  to  trc.-tfr  men  or  ponton  la.-lu-rs.  men  at 

front  ends  take  rear  ends  and  assist  in  placing 

them  for  a  ponton,  the  balk  carriers  pu.-h  it  oil' 

and  give  their  end  to  lashers,  all  go  tor  more. 

6th. 

Balk  Lashers, 

2 

17 

Four  men  alternate  by  twos  in  fixing  spring- 
lines;  two  attend  up-stream  cablo.  one  down- 

stream; in  placing  ponton,  ten  (rive  in  alter- 

nate pontons)  receive  bulks  and  lash   them 

down.                t 

7th. 

Chess, 

1 

22 

Twenty  men  bring  chesses  by  right  of  bridge  to 
other  two,  who  'face  to  rear  'and  place  them. 

8th. 

Side-Rails, 

1 

8 

Bring  side-rails  and  lash  them  down. 

When  more  than  seventeen  boats  are  employed,  the  3d 
and  4th  sections  should  be  doubled. 


BRIDGE   OVER   WATERCOURSE.  23 

When  the  current  is  very  rapid,  the  3d  section  must  be 
increased. 

"When  the  bridge  is  composed  of  twenty  bays  or  more, 
there  should  be  two  sections  for  balks  alternating ;  the  same 
for  the  chess. 

To  Con§truct  a  Bridge  over  a  Watercourse. 

Plate  5. 

The  axis  of  the  bridge  should  be  as  nearly  as  possible  per- 
pendicular to  the  direction  of  the  current  of  the  stream.  This 
direction  is  determined  by  throwing  a  floating  body  into 
the  stream  where  the  current  is  the  strongest,  and  as  it  floats 
down,  mark  (with  two  boat-hooks)  a  line  as  nearly  perpen- 
dicular to  this  as  can  be  determined  by  the  eye.  The  wag- 
ons are  unloaded  as  has  already  been  described ;  the  pon- 
tons launched. 

At  the  command  "  Construct  the  Bridge" — 

1st  Section  construct  the  first  abutment,  as  in  the  pre- 
vious  chapter ;  then  embark  in  a  ponton  with  the  material 
for  second  abutment ;  pass  over  the  river,  determine  its  po- 
sition by  sighting  at  the  two  boat-hooks  marking  the  axis ; 
construct  this  abutment  and  the  road  leading  from  it.  If 
no  trestles  were  used,  they  would  plant  pickets  thirty  paces 
above  and  below,  and  three  and  one-half  paces  above  and  two 
and  one-half  below — the  1st  for  anchoring  cables,  the  2d  for 
spring-lines. 

2d  Section  construct  a  raft  (Plate  5)  with  two  pontons, 
(I)  two  balks,  (bb)  lashed  firmly  to  the  gunwales ;  a  deck 
is  formed  of  chess  (hh)  covering  part  of  first  ponton,  and 
the  interval  between  the  two. 

The  different  members  of  the  trestles  are  embarked,  the 
caps  and  legs  are  laid  alternately  on  the  balks  over  the  sec- 
ond ponton,  the  chains  on  deck  over  the  first,  the  false  legs 
and  shoes  in  the  bow  and  stern  of  first  ponton ;  the  raft  is 
brought  opposite  the  abutment. 


24  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOrS. 

The  corresponding  files  in  front  and  rear  rank  of  the  sec- 
tion have  the  same  numbers.  The  rear  rank  performs  the 
same  operations  for  the  down-stream  part  of  the  bridge  that 
the  front  rank  does  for  the  up-stream  side ;  No.  4  holds  the 
raft  in  position  by  the  guys  or  shore  lines  until  they  receive 
cables  from  the  anchor  detachment;  Nos.  1,  1  and  2,  2  bring 
forward  a  sill,  lay  it  on  its  side,  the  bottom  toward  shore ; 
Nos.  1,  1  introduce  the  legs  in  the  mortices  of  the  sill,  Nos. 
2,  2  the  false  legs  and  chains,  Nos.  3,  3  place  and  secure  the 
shoes. 

The  C.  S.  commands — "raise"  the  trestle  is  righted;  Nos. 
1, 1  step  on  the  trestle  and  hold  the  legs  to  keep  them  from 
sliding  down.  Nos.  2,  2  adjust  the  ends  of  the  balks,  which 
are  passed  to  them  by  balk  carriers;  the  raft  is  then 
pushed  off  by  the  balk  carriers  pushing  on  the  shore  end  of 
the  balks  until  the  proper  distance  is  attained. 

The  Nos.  4,  4  are  directed  by  the  C.  S.  to  haul  or  slacken 
their  cables  as  circumstances  may  require,  until  the  trestle  is 
in  its  true  position.  Nos.  1,  1  then  thrust  down  the  legs, 
pressing  them  firmly  into  the  bottom  of  the  river ;  Nos.  2,  2 
hook  the  chains,  Nos.  3,  3  drive  in  the  wedges ;  C.  S.  com- 
mands— "  disengage"  All  lift  on  the  cap  of  the  trestle  just 
placed,  in  order  to  sink  the  ponton  sufficiently  to  disengage 
the  balks  (bb)  from  under  this  cap. 

3d  Section  is  divided  into  two  half  sections,  for  casting 
up-stream  anchors.  The  pontons  which  nre  to  receive  up- 
stream anchors  are  moored  above  the  abutment.  If  the 
ponton  is  to  be  anchored  down  stream,  a  second  anchor  and 
cable  are  placed  in  the  stern.  Each  half-section  embarks  in 
a  ponton  with  an  anchor.  The  anchor  is  placed  in  the  bow, 
the  flukes  projecting  over,  the  cable  coiled  immediately  be- 
hind it.  No.  1  front  rank  attends  the  cable ;  No.  1  rear 
rank  steers ;  Nos.  2,  2  row.  The  line  on  which  the  anchors 
are  to  be  cast  is  marked  by  two  boat-hooks,  placed  about 
twenty  paces  apart,  on  shore.  Arriving  on  this  line,  and 


BRIDGE   OVER   WATERCOURSE.  25 

opposite  the  position  which  the  ponton  is  to  have  in  the 
bridge,  the  C.  S.  commands — "  cast  anchor"  No.  1  throws 
over  the  anchor  and  pays  out  the  cable  until  the  boat  arrives 
at  its  place  in  the  bridge,  the  cable  is  made  fast,  and  the 
ponton  brought,  with  the  boat-hook  and  oar,  along  the  bridge 
head ;  the  short  balks,  supports,  block  and  sill  are  arranged, 
and  turned  over  to  the  cable  detachment,  the  anchor  detach- 
ment passing  to  the  shore  by  the  bridge  after  another  ponton. 

The  distance  of  the  anchors  above  the  bridge  should  be  at 
least  ten  times  the  depth  of  the  stream,  otherwise,  when  a 
strain  is  brought  on  the  cables,  the  anchors  will  trip. 

In  ordinary  circumstances,  an  up-stream  anchor  is  required 
for  the  alternate  pontons,  and  an  anchor  down-stream  for 
every  fourth  ponton. 

When  the  river  is  not  over  seventy  or  eighty  yards  wide, 
or  the  current  is  gentle,  a  sheer-line  may  be  used  in  place  of 
anchors. 

The  sheer-line  is  a  cable  stretched  across  the  river  sixteen 
or  twenty  yards  above  the  bridge,  to  which  the  pontons  are 
attached  by  lines.  As  the  strain  on  this  line  is  generally 
very  great,  the  points  of  attachment  on  the  shore  must  be 
secured  with  great  care.  An  arrangement  similar  to  the 
abutment  sill  may  be  used,  or  if  the  soil  is  firm,  an  anchor 
buried  in  the  ground. 

4th  Section. — Two  half-sections.  First  half-section  cast 
down-stream  anchor ;  half  section  embark  in  a  ponton 
moored  below  the  bridge ;  proceed  to  the  first  ponton  in 
the  line  of  the  bridge,  which  lias  an  anchor  on  it.  No.  1 
holds  the  two  pontons  together,  whilst  Nos.  2,  2  remove 
the  anchor  and  cable  to  the  anchor  boat,  having  previously 
made  the  end  of  the  cable  fast  to  the  ponton.  The  anchor 
boat  is  then  allowed  to  float  down  to  the  line  of  anchors, 
No.  1  paying  out  the  cable.  The  anchor  is  then  cast,  and 
the  boat  hauled  back  to  the  bridge  by  means  of  the  cable 
of  the  anchor  just  cast. 
2 


26  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

The  boat  proceeds  to  the  next  boat  having  a  down-stream 
anchor.  Second  half-section  brings  into  line  those  pontons 
which  are  not  provided  with  anchors. 

These  pontons  are  brought  into  their  proper  places  and 
held  alongside  the  nearest  ponton  between  thein  and  the 
bridge,  until  the  cable  men  are  ready  to  take  charge.  The 
detachment  then  passes  ashore  by  the  bridge. 

5th  Section — Balk  Carriers.  Duty  the  same  as  4th  sec- 
tion in  chapter  2d,  except  that  the  front  rank  push  off  the 
ponton  before  giving  the  balks  to  the  balk  lashers. 

6th  Section. — Balk  Lashers.  When  the  French  train  is 
used,  an  additional  section  is  required  to  lash  the  balks  to 
the  gunwales  of  the  ponton. 

This  section  is  composed  of  two  non-commissioned  officers 
and  seventeen  men. 

Four  men  alternate,  two  and  two,  in  fixing  the  spring-lines, 
which  connect  the  pontons  bow  and  stern,  and  are  made  fast 
to  the  mooring-posts  ;  three  men  at  the  cables — two  for  the 
up-stream  and  one  for  the  down-stream  cable ;  ten  balk  lashers. 
The  five  front-rank  men  enter  the  first  ponton,  station  them- 
selves opposite  the  lashing  hooks,  facing  down  stream.  They 
receive  the  ends  of  the  balks  from  the  balk  carriers,  lay  them 
in  their  places  on  the  outer  gunwale,  and  overlapping  it  by  six 
inches.  They  then  throw  their  weight  on  the  balks  to  keep 
them  in  place  whilst  the  boat  is  being  pushed  off.  In  the 
mean  while,  the  rear  rank  lash  the  shore  ends  of  the  balks  to 
the  abutment  sill,  if  claw  balks  are  not  used,  and  pass  over  into 
the  second  ponton.  When  the  second  ponton  is  pushed  off, 
the  lashers  in  the  first  ponton  receive  the  ends  of  the  second 
set  of  balks  from  the  carriers,  place  them  on  the  gunwales  of 
the  ponton  in  contact  with  the  first  set,  and  overlapping  the 
inner  gunwale  six  inches,  lash  them  firmly  to  both  gunwales, 
then  pass  over  to  the  third  ponton. 

7th  Section. — Chess  Carriers.  The  same  as  5th  section, 
chapter  2d. 


DISMANTLING   BRIDGES.  27 

8th  Section. — Side-Rail  Carriers.  The  same  as  6th  sec- 
tion, chapter  2d. 

dismantling  Bridge  over  Watercour§e. 

8th  Section — Remove  the  side-rails. 

7th  Section — Remove  the  chess. 

6th  Section — Act  on  spring-lines  and  cast  them  off,  tend 
cables,  and  unlash  balks. 

5th  Section — Remove  the  balks. 

4th  Section — Two  half-sections  remove  the  pontons  with- 
out anchors ;  take  up  the  down-stream  anchors  ;  the  anchor 
boat  is  brought  up  to  the  ponton ;  sufficient  cable  is  taken 
into  the  boat  to  allow  it  to  drop  down  the  stream  to  the 
line  of  anchors ;  the  anchor  is  raised,  and  the  anchor  boat 
hauled  back  to  the  bridge.  This  operation  is  repeated  until 
three  anchors  are  weighed,  when  the  anchor  boat  returns 
to  the  shore.  If  the  cable  to  the  up-stream  anchor  is  long 
enough,  the  readiest  way  is  to  allow  the  ponton  to  drop 
down  stream  by  this  cable,  coiling  the  down-stream  cable 
until  the  ponton  arrives  at  the  lower  anchor  line ;  the  anchor 
is  then  weighed,  and  the  ponton  hauled  by  the  up-stream 
cable  to  the  upper  line  of  anchors ;  when  the  upper  anchor 
is  weighed,  the  anchor  boat  is  then  dispensed  with. 

3d  Section — Weigh  the  up-stream  anchors,  and  take 
the  boats  to  the  second  shore.  The  section  is  divided  into 
two  half-sections,  which  enter  the  first  two  pontons.  "When 
the  boat  is  anchored  up  stream,  it  is  hauled  up  to  trip  its 
anchor  by  its  cable.  Boats  are  taken  to  shore  below  bridge. 

2d  Section — Take  up  trestles  by  the  reverse  of  the  pro- 
cess used  in  placing  them. 

1st  Section — Take  up  the  abutments. 


28  MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

Construction  of  a  Bridge  by  Parts* 

Plate  8. 

The  parts  are  composed  of  two  or  three  pontons. 

If  the  velocity  of  the  stream  is  less  than  two  yards  per 
second,  they  are  constructed  above  the  abutment;  if  greater, 
below. 

The  abutment  and  each  bay  is  formed  as  in  the  case  of 
successive  pontons,  and  at  the  same  time.  The  parts  are 
formed  by  sections  of  one  C.  S.  and  twelve  men,  each  part 
as  follows : — a  ponton  is  moored  bow  and  stern  to  the  shore; 
a  second  ponton  (No.  2)  is  brought  alongside ;  chess  are 
laid  from  the  shore  to  No.  1,  for  the  pontoniers  to  walk  on ; 
seven  balks  are  brought ;  five  are  placed  as  for  an  ordinary 
bridge,  one  on  the  bow  and  stern;  No.  2  is  pushed  off;  a 
third  ponton  is  brought  alongside  of  No.  2,  and  is  treated  in 
the  same  manner. 

The  construction  is  indicated  in  the  plate. 

m  m,  crossed  spring-lines ;  //,  balks ;  d  c7,  chess  to  form 
the  junction  with  the  next  part. 

When  the  part  is  above  the  bridge,  it  is  conducted  to  the 
line  of  up-stream  anchors,  drops  its  anchor,  then  floats  down 
to  its  place  in  the  bridge ;  a  line  is  thrown  to  the  bridge;  it 
is  hauled  up  to  the  head  of  the  bridge  ;  the  balks  are  put  in 
place,  and  the  part  pushed  off,  the  chess  and  side-rails  lashed. 
If  the  construction  is  from  below,  the  part  is  towed  to  it$ 
place,  where  it  receives  one  or  two  cables  of  up-stream  an- 
chors, as  may  be  necessary,  from  another  boat. 

To  Dismantle  by  Parts. 

1st  Section — Take  up  the  abutment  from  the  shore  of  de- 
parture, and  the  balks,  chess,  <fcc.,  of  the  first  bay,  and  pile 
the  material  on  the  first  part.  The  2d  section  take  up  the 
balks,  chess,  <fcc.,  uniting  the  first  and  second  parts,  pile 
them  on  the  second  part,  and  the  same  for  the  other  section ; 


CONSTRUCTION  BY  KAFTS.  29 

as  soon  as  the  parts  are  disconnected,  the  down-stream  ca- 
bles are  attached  to  a  buoy  and  cast  adrift ;  each  part  is 
then  hauled  up  by  the  up-stream  cables,  the  upper  anchors 
weighed,  and  the  parts  rowed  or  poled  ashore  and  disman- 
tled. If  necessary,  the  up-stream  anchors  may  be  buoyed. 

Construction  by  Rafts. 

Plate  9. 

Abutment  is  constructed  as  in  the  previous  case,  each  part 
as  follows : 

No.  1  ponton  is  brought  up  and  moored  bow  and  stern  ; 
chess  are  laid  to  it  from  shore.  No.  2  ponton  brought  along- 
side ;  five  balks  are  laid  resting  on  both  gunwales  of  each 
ponton,  lashed  and  covered  with  chess;  ponton  No.  3  brought 
alongside  No.  2,  and  treated  in  the  same  manner;  side-rails  laid 
and  lashed ;  cross  spring-lines ;  two  spare  balks  are  carried 
on  each  part ;  the  parts  are  conducted  to  their  places  as  in 
previous  case.  The  parts  are  united  by  lashing  the  adjacent 
pontons  bow  and  stern,  and  laying  the  spare  balks  over  the 
joint  formed  by  two  adjacent  side-rails,  lashing  these  balks 
firmly,  either  with  rope  or  rack  collars.  The  extreme  chess 
in  each  part  should  be  nailed  to  the  balks. 

Dismantling. 

The  parts  are  disconnected  by  removing  the  lashings  and 
balks  that  unite  the  different  parts.  The  parts  are  then 
brought  ashore  and  dismantled  as  in  the  bridge  constructed 
by  parts. 

Bridge  by  Conversion. 

Plato  10. 

The  position  of  the  bridge  having  been  determined,  and 

the  width  of  the  stream  accurately  measured,  a  suitable 

*  place  at  some  distance  above  the  position  of  the  abutment 

is  selected  for  the  construction  of  the  bridge.     The  place  of 


30  MANUAL  FOR  ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

construction  may  be  at  a  considerable  distance  from  that 
which  the  bridge  is  to  occupy,  and  is  frequently  on  some 
tributary  of  the  stream  to  be  bridged,  out  of  sight  of  the 
enemy's  shore. 

The  bridge  is  constructed  parallel  to  the  shore,  side-rails 
are  lashed  on  all  except  the  extreme  bays.  The  balks,  chess, 
<fcc.,  for  the  abutment  bay,  are  embarked  on  the  next  to  the 
last  bay  of  the  bridge.;  a  ponton  is  lashed  to  the  last  pon- 
ton in  the  bridge ;  this  contains,  in  addition  to  the  arti- 
cles necessary  for  constructing  the  abutment,  two  strong 
pickets.  The  up-stream  anchors  are  deposited  in  the  bows 
of  the  boats  on  the  wheeling  flank;  ten  or  fifteen  yarde 
of  their  cables  coiled,  the  remainder  stretched  along  the 
bridge.  Two  strong  lines  are  extended  and  lashed,  the  one 
over  the  bows,  the  other  over  the  sterns  of  all  the  pon- 
tons; these  lines  should  be  considerably  longer  than  the 
bridge,  and  the  ends  coiled  on  the  platform.  The  bridge  is 
then  allowed  to  float  down  to  within  fifteen  yards  of  the 
first  abutment. 

The  material  for  the  first  abutment  and  bay  is  brought 
down  in  a  ponton,  two  strong  pickets  are  planted  at  A  and 
B  to  fasten  the  spring-lines,  and  one  to  fasten  the  line  which 
is  coiled  on  the  next  to  the  last  ponton. 

The  wheeling  flank  is  pushed  off,  men  are  stationed  in  the 
bow  and  stern  of  each  ponton  with  oars  and  boat-hooks  to 
increase  or  retard  the  progress  of  the  ponton,  as  may  be 
necessary.  A  detachment  is  stationed  at  the  first  abutment 
to  manoeuvre  the  spring-lines,  another  to  prevent  the  pivot 
flank  from  touching  shore ;  a  turn  of  the  shore  line  is  taken 
around  the  mooring-bar  of  the  ponton,  and  this  line  is  eased 
off,  as  the  case  may  require.  The  anchors  are  cast  as  the  pon- 
tons in  which  they  are  carried  come  in  the  proper  places, 
and  their  cables  are  brought  to  the  pontons  to  which 
they  are  attached.  The  progress  of  the  bridge  is  checked 
when  it  arrives  opposite  the  abutments,  which  should  be 


DISMANTLING   BY    CONVERSION.  31 

constructed  during  the  conversion  of  the  bridge,  if  the 
force  is  strong  enough.  The  down-stream  anchors  are 
cast  by  the  spare  pontons,  as  in  the  bridge  of  successive 
pontons. 

Dismantle   by  Conversion. 

This  manoeuvre  is  rarely  executed  except  by  an  army  in 
retreat,  closely  followed  by  the  enemy. 

The  abutment  bays  are  dismantled,  the  spring-lines  are  fas- 
tened to  A  and  B ;  buoys  are  attached  to  the  down-stream 
cables,  which  are  cut  off,  the  up-stream  cables  are  lengthened 
out  with  spare  cables.  A  strong  line  is  passed  from  the 
next  to  the  last  ponton  to  the  shore.  The  bridge  is  allowed 
to  swing  around,  the  up-stream  cables  are  eased  off,  alsojthe 
upper  spring-line.  When  about  half  the  wheel  has  been  com- 
pleted, the  pontons  form  such  an  angle  with  the  current  that 
the  tendency  of  the  bridge  is  no  longer  toward  the  required 
direction,  but  to  move  obliquely  toward  the  other  shore. 
The  strain  on  the  lower  spring-line  is  very  great,  and  the 
shore  line  must  be  used  to  haul  in. 

After  the  wheel  has  been  effected,  the  bridge  is  floated 
down  stream  behind  an  island,  or  to  some  other  place  shel- 
tered from  the  enemy's  fire,  and  then  dismantled. 

Advance-Guard  Bridge  Equipage, 

Plate  11, 

Consists  of— 

29  Ponton  Wagons.  Load  of  each — 7  claw-balks,  1  tres- 
tle complete,  1  canvas  ponton,  4  oars,  2  boat-hooks, 

]5  Chess  Wagons.  41  chess,  12'xl2"xiy,  1  anchor 
and  cable. 

1  Abutment — 4  abutment  sills,  7  balks,  2  anchors  and  cables. 

1  Wagon — 1  sheer-line,  6  anchors  and  cables,  spare  cordage. 

1  Wagon — 7  anchors  and  cables,  windlass,  blocks  and  falls. 

1  Wagon — Carpenter's  tools  and  picks,  shovels,  &c. 


32  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

The  pontons  are  of  the  Russian  pattern  (plate  11),  viz.: 
two  side-frames,  twenty-one  feet  long,  and  two  feet  four 
inches  deep.  These  are  connected  by  movable  transoms. 
The  whole  made  of  four-inch  pine  scantling. 

To  equip  the  ponton,  the  transoms  are  inserted  in  the  side 
frames,  and  then  firmly  united  by  rack-lashings.  A  canvas 
cover  is  then  stretched  over  the  frame  and  secured  by  lash- 
ings. 

When  employed  in  the  bridge,  the  balks  may  be  lashed 
to  both  gunwales,  as  in  the  French  bridger  or  the  trestle 
cap  may  be  placed  in  the  axis  of  the  boat,  with  its  upper 
surface  six  inches  above  the  gunwales.  It  is  supported  in 
this  position  by  two  transoms  let  into  the  stanchions  of  the 
side  frames,  about  five  feet  from  the  bow  and  stern.  The 
claw-balks  rest  on  this  cap,  as  in  the  Austrian  bridge. 

As  the  number  of  trestles  in  this  train  is  equal  to  the  num. 
ber  of  boats,  either  of  these  classes  of  supports  may  be  used 
to  the  exclusion  of  the  other ;  in  either  case  forming  a 
bridge  about  two  hundred  yards  in  length. 


Construction  of  the  Bridge  by  Successive  Pontons 
when  the    Balks  are  not  Lashed. 


2f.  a 

Officers.  Men. 

Ibt 

2 

3 

Abutment—  Construct  the  abutment,  drive  the  shore-line  pickets, 

attach  the  shore  linos,  embark  with  second  abutment 

2d. 

2 

8 

Raft.  —  Construct  a  raft  embark  trestles,  caps,  legs,  «kc. 

Construct  trestles. 

8d. 

2 

8 

Boat.  —  Up-stream    divided  into  half-sections,  which  alternate  In 

4th. 

S 

bringing  up-stream  boats  and  casting  anchors. 
Boat  —  Down-stream  —  two  half-sections  —  first  half-section   bringg 

down-stream  boats,  second  cast  down-stream  anchors. 

5th. 
6th. 
7th. 

1 

1 
1 

10 
22 
8 

Balk  Carriers.—  Bring  the.  five  balks  for  each  bay. 
Chess  Carriers.—  Twehtv  bring  chess,two  receive  and  place  the  chess. 
Side-Rails.—  Two  half-sections;   first  bring  side-rails—  second  lash 

side-rails. 

When  more  than  seventeen  boats  are  -employed,  the  3d 
and  4th  sections  should  be  doubled. 


BRIDGE    BY    PONTOXS.  33 

When  the  current  is  very  rapid,  the  3d  section  must  be 
increased. 

When  the  bridge  is  composed  of  twenty  bays  or  more, 
there  should  be  two  sections  of  balk  carriers,  alternating. 
The  same  for  the  chess. 
2* 


34:  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


CHAPTER  IH. 

FLYING  BRIDGES— BRIDGES  OF  RAFTS— TRESTLES 

AND  BOATS— PRESERVATION  OF  BRIDGES. 

• 

Flying  Bridge. 

Plate  12. 

THIS  term  is  applied  to  any  floating  support  anchored  to 
a  fixed  point  (usually  in  the  stream),  and  driven  from 
shore  to  shore  by  the  oblique  action  of  the  current  on  its 
sides. 

Although  these  bridges  do  not  afford  a  continuous  com- 
munication, yet  they  possess  some  decided  advantages,  viz. : 

They  are  readily  established  over  even  the  most  rapid 
streams. 

They,  require  but  little  material  for  their  construction. 

They  may  be  worked  by  very  few  men. 

They  permit  the  passage  of  troops  of  ah1  arms,  and  the 
heaviest  carriages. 

The  entrance  to  and  exit  from  them  is  easy. 

They  do  not  interrupt  navigation,  and  are  not  liable  to  be 
injured  by  floating  bodies  which,  either  by  accident  or  de- 
sign, are  carried  down  stream  by  the  current. 

The  current  should  not  be  less  than  one  yard  per  second. 

Construction. 

The  raft  is  formed  of  six  pontons  (plate  12).  Two  pon- 
tons a  a,  are  lashed  stern  to  stern,  and  to  these  a  third  by 
breaking  joints.  A  second  set  similar  to  the  above,  are 


FLYING   BRIDGE.  35 

placed  at  a  distance  from  the  first,  of  twenty-six  feet  from 
Bet  to  set.  The  two  sets  are  connected  by^ix  balks  c,  over 
which  four  courses  c?,  are  lashed.  Then  fifteen  balks  e,  in  a 
manner  suitable  for  receiving  the  chess.  The  extreme  chess 
are  nailed  down,  and  the  outer  courses  secured  by  side- 
rails. 

The  length  of  the  cable  should  be  at  least  one  and  a  half 
times  the  width  of  the  river.  One,  two  or  three  anchors  are 
used,  depending  on  the  strength  of  the  current. 

The  cable  is  supported  by  pontons. 

The  boat  nearest  the  anchor  is  the  largest ;  the  distance 
between  the  boats  should  be  such  that  the  cable  shall  not 
touch  the  water  between  the  first  boat  and  the  raft ;  each 
boat  is  fitted  with  a  staging,  composed  of  two  short  balks 
and  a  supporting  block,  on  which  the  cable  rests,  and  to 
which  it  is  lashed. 

The  cable  is  also  connected  with  the  bow  of  the  boat  by 
a  line  of  such  length  that  the  boat  is  allowed  to  turn  just 
enough  to  keep  parallel  with  the  raft. 

After  the  raft  is  attached  to  the  cable,  it  is  passed  from 
shore  to  shore  once  or  twice,  until  the  anchors  are  firmly 
imbedded,  and  the  cable  stretched ;  the  two  abutments  are 
then  constructed  ;  these  do  not  differ  from  the  first  bay  of 
the  ordinary  bridge. 

If  the  strongest  current  is  nearer  one  of  the  shores,  the 
anchor  must  not  be  cast  in  the  middle  of  the  stream,  but 
nearer  the  other  shore. 

The  proper  angle  of  the  axis  of  the  boat  with  the  current 
is  about  55°. 

This  angle  is  gradually  increased  on  nearing  the  shore, 
until  the  way  of  the  raft  is  diminished  sufficiently  to  prevent 
it  fVom  striking  the  abutment  with  a  shock. 

The  raft  should  be  provided  with  spare  cables  and  anchors 
ready  to  cast,  in  case  the  cable  by  which  it  is  moored  should 
part. 


MANUAL   FOR  ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

When  the  river  is  not  more  than  one  hundred  yards  wide, 
a  sheer-line  may  be  used  in  place  of  the  anchor  and  cable  ; 
the  sheer-line  must  be  taut  enough  to  keep  above  the 
water.  See  plate  16. 

If  the  banks  are  not  high  enough,  the  sheer-line  should  be 
elevated  at  each  shore  by  passing  it  over  a  frame  formed  of 
three  poles,  arranged  like  an  artillery  gin.  A  capstan,  or 
blocks,  will  be  required  to  tighten  the  line  from  time  to 
time  as  it  stretches.  Upon  this  line  a  pulley  is  fixed,  so  that 
it  can  run  freely  from  shore  to  shore ;  through  the  eye  of 
the  pulley  block  a  line  is  passed,  one  end  of  which  is  attached 
to  the  bow  of  the  first,  and  the  other  to  the  bow  of  the 
second  boat  forming  the  raft.  This  is  a  trail  bridge. 

"the  raft  is  manoeuvred  as  in  the  case  of  the  flying  bridge, 
or  two  pulleys  may  be  used  on  the  sheer  line  ;  a  line  from 
one  is  attached  to  the  bow  of  the  first  boat ;  a  line  from  the 
second  pulley  is  passed  through  a  pulley  block  fastened  to 
the  stern  of  the  same  boat. 

The  required  direction  may  be  given  to  the  raft  by  haul- 
ing in,  or  slacking  the  stern  line. 

Rhine  Flying  Bridge. 

Two  boats  are  required  ;  they  should  be  long,  narrow,  and 
deep,  that  they  may  expose  as  much  surface  as  possible  to 
the  action  of  the  current.  Those  in  use  on  the  Rhine  are 
usually  ninety  feet  long,  twelve  feet  wide,  and  five  feet  six 
inches  deep.  Each  boat  is  provided  with  a  trestle,  formed 
of  a  bottom  sill  resting  on  the  ribs  directly  over  the  keel. 
Stanchions  connect  this  with  a  cap  sill,  which  should  be  on 
the  same  level  as  the  gunwales. 

The  boats  are  connected  by  a  series  of  balks,  whose  num- 
ber and  size  depend  on  the  load  to  be  carried.  These  balks 
should  be  long  enough  to  give  such  an  interval  between  the 
boats,  that  both  may  be  freely  acted  upon  by  the  current. 


RHINE   FLYING   BRIDGE.  37 

The  beams  are  spiked  to  the  trestle  and  gunwales.  The 
flooring  planks  are  nailed  on. 

The  platform  extends  over  the  waists  of  the  boats,  and  a 
small  forward  after-deck  is  formed  between  the  boats  for  the 
accommodation  of  the  crew. 

Each  boat  is  provided  with  a  mast,  passing  through  the 
deck  and  firmly  stepped. 

The  masts  are  connected  by  two  horizontal  beams,  the 
lower  being  the  stronger,  between  which  a  block  pierced 
with  a  hole  slides  freely. 

The  whole  frame  is  stayed  by  guys.  This  frame  is  placed 
about  one-third  of  the  length  of  the  boats  from  the  bows, 
and  is  from  twenty  to  thirty  feet  high. 

A  bean}  is  fastened  across  the  bows  of  the  boats,  to  pre- 
vent the  cable  from  catching  under  them. 

Each  boat  is  provided  with  a  rudder,  the  tillers  of  which 
are  coupled  by  a  bar,  so  that  both  may  be  worked  by  one 
man. 

The  cable,  after  passing  through  the  cat,  is  made  fast  to  a 
windlass. 

The  cable  should  be,  in  length,  about  one  and  a  half  times 
the  width  of  the  river. 

The  cable  is  attached  to  one  or  more  anchors. 

With  boats  of  the  size  above  stated,  the  best  arrangement 
is  to  cast  a  large  anchor  about  five  hundred  pounds  weight, 
with  its  shank  in  the  direction  of  the  current ;  two  others 
of  about  half  this  weight  are  cast,  with  their  shanks  in  the 
direction  which  the  cable  takes  when  the  bridge  is  at  either 
shore. 

The  cables  of  the  three  anchors  are  united  near  the  first 
supporting  boat. 

The  cable  is  supported  by  small  boats. 

The  first,  which  should  be  the  largest,  must  be  at  a  dis- 
tance from  the  anchors,  at  least  three  times  the  depth  of  the 
Btream. 


38  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

The  remaining  boats  should  be  near  enough  to  prevent 
the  cable  from  dragging  in  the  water — their  number  in- 
creasing with  the  length  of  the  cable,  and  diminishing  with 
the  strength  of  the  current.  Near  the  bow  of  each  boat  is 
a  short  mast,  forked  at  the  top  to  receive  the  cable ;  a  short 
line  or  bridle  connecting  the  cable  with  the  bow,  prevents 
the  boat  from  turning  too  far.  The  length  of  the  bridle  is 
regulated  so  as  to  allow  the  boat  to  take  position  parallel  to 
that  of  the  boats  in  the  raft. 

Any  floating  body  may  be,  in  accordance  with  the  above 
principles,  used  as  a  flying  bridge ;  rafts  of  timber,  casks,  or 
wagon  bodies,  are  frequently  employed. 

When  plank  can  be  obtained,  a  scow  either  with  or  with- 
out ribs,  may  be  constructed  by  any  of  the  troops  who  are 
at  all  accustomed  to  the  use  of  carpenters'  tools.  When 
plank  cannot  be  found,  a  rough  frame  of  poles  covered  with 
stout  cotton  canvas  may  be  employed.  W'hen  a  single  boat 
or  raft  is  used  the  position  of  the  bridge  is  regulated  by  a 
stern  line  attached  to  the  cable,  instead  of  a  rudder. 

When  the  river  is  less  than  one  hundred  yards  wide,  a 
sheer  line  may  be  employed,  as  in  the  flying  bridges,  com- 
posed of  pontons. 

When  the  velocity  of  the  current  is  not  sufficient  to  work 
the  boat  or  raft  as  a  flying  bridge,  it  may  be  propelled  as 
follows : 

On  the  up-stream  side  near  the  bow  and  stern,  standards 
are  erected,  the  tops  of  which  are  forked  to  receive  a  sheer 
line  which  is  stretched  across  the  river,  and  the  boat  is 
caused  to  pass  from  shore  to  shore,  by  men  hauling  on  the 
cable. 

Bridges  Constructed  of  Boats  of  Commerce. 

The  same  principles  are  applicable  in  this  case  as  in  that 
of  ponton  bridges. 

The  following  precautions,  however,  must  be  observed. 


BRIDGES   OF   BOATS   OF   COMMERCE.  39 

As  the  boats  are  not  usually  of  a  uniform  size,  the  length 
of  the  balks  for  each  bay  should  be  so  arranged  with  refer- 
ence to  the  capacity  of  the  boat  that  sustains  them,  that  the 
bridge  will  not  be  endangered,  even  when  the  bay  is  cov- 
ered with  as  many  men  as  can  be  crowded  on  it. 

The  boat  next  to  each  abutment  to  be  strong  and  large. 

The  boats  selected  for  the  strongest  part  of  the  current, 
to  be  large,  so  that  they  may  be  as  much  separated  as  pos- 
sible. 

The  bridge  will  then  offer  less  obstruction  to  the  current ; 
and  will  also  be  in  less  danger  from  floating  bodies. 

The  intermediate  boats  should  increase  or  diminish  in  size, 
gradually,  to  avoid  a  sudden  change  in  the  level  of  the  road- 
way. 

The  gunwales  of  the  boats  should  be  brought  to  the  same 
level,  or  as  nearly  so  as  possible.  This  is  effected  by  cutting 
down  the  larger  boats,  or  loading  them  until  they  are  suffi- 
ciently deep  in  the  water. 

This  latter  expedient  increases  the  strain  on  the  cable, 
and  should  not  be  resorted  to  in  a  strong  current. 

In  the  smaller  boats  the  gunwales  must  be  raised, 

Or  a  trestle,  composed  of  a  bottom  and  cap  sill,  united  by 
stanchions  of  the  proper  length,  is  placed  in  the  axis  of  the 
boat,  and  kept  vertical  by  braces. 

The  balks,  when  timber  of  sufficient  dimensions  can  be 
procured,  should  be  lashed  over  both  gunwales  of  the  two 
boats  on  which  they  rest.  If  the  timber  is  not  sufficiently 
long  to  admit  of  this  arrangement,  the  following  course  is 
adopted.  The  balks  of  the  first  bay  rest  on  both  gunwales 
of  the  first  boat ;  in  the  second  bay  the  odd-numbered  balks 
rest  on  both  gunwales  of  the  first,  and  on  one  gunwale  of 
the  second;  the  even-numbered  balks  on  one  gunwale  of 
the  first,  and  on  both  of  the  second  boat ;  the  odd  numbers 
of  the  third  bay  on  both  gunwales  of  the  second,  and  one 
of  the  third  boat,  &c. 


4:0  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

If  the  bridge  is  subject  to  the  action  of  the  waves,  the 
oscillating  motion  produced  will  soon  loosen  the  balk-lash- 
ings and  destroy  the  bridge.  In  this  case,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary to  make  use  of  a  sill  and  short  balks,  as  in  the  ponton 
bridge.  When  anchors  of  sufficient  size  can  be  procured, 
the  anchoring  of  this  species  of  bridge  does  not  differ  from 
that  of  the  ponton  bridge. 

When  this  is  not  the  case,  some  of  the  following  expedi- 
ents may  be  resorted  to : 

First— Anchoring  paniers  (Plate  3).  These  are  conical 
gabions,  closed  at  both  ends,  a  pole  passing  through  the 
axis,  and  a  hole  in  the  side  of  the  cone.  Through  this  hole 
the  panier  is  filled  with  stones ;  the  hole  is  then  closed  with 
twigs,  a  cable  is  attached  to  the  end  of  the  pole .  furthest 
from  the  panier.  It  is  cast  in  the  same  way  as  an  ordinary 
anchor. 

A  strong  box  filled  with  stones  or  gravel  may  be  employ- 
ed. A  common  harrow  loaded  with  stones  forms  a  good 
anchor.  The  best  anchorage  is  formed  by  driving  a  row 
of  piles  above  the  bridge.  This  method  possesses  the  ad- 
vantage of  bringing  a  horizontal  instead  of  a  downward 
strain  on  the  cable,  and  protecting  the  bridge  from  injury  by 
floating  bodies. 

Timber  Rafts/ 

Plate  14. 

The  buoyancy  of  a  raft  depends  on  the  volume  and  specific 
gravity  of  the  timber  employed. 

The  volume  may  be  found  approximately,  by  the  follow- 
ing formula :  V  =  0.785  C8  L.  V= Volume.  C  =  circum- 
ference at  middle  of  log,  L  =  length.  To  find  the  specific 
gravity,  take  a  piece  of  the  timber  of  convenient  length 
and  of  uniform  even  section,  stand  it  vertically  in  the  water, 
retaining  it  in  this  position  by  three  stakes  so  driven  as  to 
allow  it  to  float  freely ;  mark  the  depth  to  which  it  sinks. 


TO    CONSTRUCT  A  RAFT.  4:1 

Let  I  =  the  length  of  the  part  above  the  surface  of  the 
water  ;  L  =  the  whole  length  of  the  stick  ;  then 

-j  —  x  62J  Ibs.—  weight  of  a  cubic  foot  of  the  timber,  and 

-j-62i  =  weight  which  a  cubic  foot  will  sustain  in  the  water, 
in  addition  to  its  own  weight,  or  the  buoyant  power  of  the 


In  the  calculation  due  allowance  must  be  made  for  the 
loss  of  buoyancy  which  the  logs  will  sustain  after  immersion, 
from  absorption.  This  loss  will  depend  on  the  kind  of  tim- 
ber used,  being  least  in  resinous  varieties,  such  as  pine, 
and  may  be  retained  by^mearing  the  ends  of  the  logs  with 
pitch. 

To  Construct  a  Raft. 

Plates  13  and  14. 

Select  the  longest  and  largest  timber  ;  «ach  stick  must  be 
at  least  thirty-five  feet  long.  The  timber  is  thrown  into  the 
water  and  moored  to  the  shore  at  a  suitable  place  for  build- 
ing the  raft,  and  where  the  current  is  not  rapid.  After  the 
position  which  the  stick  naturally  assumes  in  the  water  has 
been  ascertained,  the  end  which  is  to  be  up  stream  when  in 
the  raft  is  drawn  up  on  the  shore,  and  the  lower  side  bevelled 
in  a  whistle  shape,  so  as  to  present  less  obstruction  to  the 
action  of  the  current. 

The  timber  is  then  arranged  in  the  position  it  is  to  have 
in  the  raft  —  the  butts"  alternately  up  and  down  stream  —  the 
up-stream  ends  forming  a  right  angle,  salient  up  stream. 

Employ  the  largest  and  longest  timber,  giving  at  least 
thirty-five  feet  length  to  the  raft.  Shorter  than  this,  it  will 
not  have  sufficient  stability,  but  will  be  subject  to  dangerous 
oscillations,  especially  in  a  rapid  stream. 

Squaring  the  timber  will  be  worse  than  useless.     Any 


42  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

irregularities,  such  as  branches  and  knots,  should  be  trimmed 
off.  The  raft  must  be  built  in  the  water.  Select  a  place 
where  there  is  little  current,  and  where  the  bank  slopes 
gently  to  the  water. 

Take  the  case  of  a  raft,  to  be  composed  of  twenty  logs 
forty-seven  feet  long  and  averaging  twelve  inches  in  diam- 
eter. 

The  first  log  is  brought  alongside  the  shore,  and  the  end 
of  a  plank  or  small  trunk  of  a  tree  (a  a)  is  spiked  to  it 
about  3'  from  each  end ;  it  is  pushed  off  a  little,  and  a  second 
log  is  brought  up  under  the  transoms,  and  in  close  con- 
tact with  the  first. 

The  second  log  is  spiked  as  the  first,  and  so  for  each  of 
the  remaining  logs,  care  being  taken  to  alternate  the  butts, 
placing  the  whistle  ends  up  stream,  with  the  bevel  under- 
neath, and  to  spike  the  transoms  perpendicularly  to  the  logs. 
"When  the  current  of  the  river  in  which  the  raft  is  to  be  used 
is  very  gentle,  the  up-stream  ends  may  be  on  a  line  parallel 
to  the  transom ;  bat  if  rapid,  they  should  form  a  right  angle 
salient  up  stream,  the  vertex  being  in  the  middle  log. 

When  the  bank  is  too  steep  to  admit  of  this  construction, 
the  trees  may  be  floated  into  their  proper  positions,  lu^lu'd 
together,  and  the  transoms  spiked  on ;  if  the  logs  are  nearly 
of  the  same  size,  the  centre  of  gravity  will  be  near  the  cen- 
tre of  the  raft. 

Two  additional  traverses  are  spiked  at  equal  distances 
from  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  raft,  and  at  a  distance 
apart  equal  to  the  width  of  the  roadway  or  platform. 

The  traverse  should  be  about  8"  wide  by  6"  high.  If 
square  timber  cannot  be  had,  saplings  7"  or  8"  in  diameter 
may  be  used. 

They  should  have  a  bearing  on  all  the  logs  forming  the 
raft.  •  To  effect'this  the  larger  logs  should  be  cut  down  with 
an  adze,  and  those  too  small  be  blocked  up  to  the  traverse. 

The  four  traverses  may  be  fastened  to  the  logs  either  with 

\ 


TO    CONSTRUCT   A   BAFT.  43 

spikes  or  wooden  pins,  or  each  log  may  be -lashed  by  pass- 
ing a  rope  around  it  and  the  traverse  and  twisting  it  tight 
with  a  rack-stick. 

When  a  platform  is  to  be  constructed  on  the  raft,  inter- 
mediate transoms  are  laid,  and  at  a  distance  apart  depend- 
ing on  the  strength  of  the  planking. 

The  size  of  this  platform  must  be  regulated  by  the  buoy- 
ant power  of  the  raft.  A  single  course  of  logs  will  not  have 
sufficient  power  to  sustain  troops  enough  to  cover  its  whole 
surface. 

When  this  is  required,  several  courses  of  timber  are  em- 
ployed, each  perpendicular  to  that  below  it,  the  whole  firm- 
ly united  with  pins  as  lashing. 

When  the  raft  is  to  be  used  in  a  bridge,  the  two  interme- 
diate transoms  are  separated  by  a  distance  a  little  less  than 
-the  length  of  the  chess,  and  at  equal  distances  from  a  point 
somewhat  astern  of  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  raft,  in  order  ' 
to  correct  the  downward  action  of  the  cable  on  the  bow. 

On  these  traverses,  three  supports  d  d  d,  are  spiked  to 
receive  the  balks.  A  piece  of  plank/,  is  nailed  on  the  bow 
to  prevent  the  cable  from  getting  entangled  in  the  raft. 

When  the  logs  are  less*than  thirty-five  feet  in  length,  the 
following  construction  is  employed.  See  plate  14. 

The  small  ends  of  half  the  trees  are  bevelled ;  then  a  raft 
is  formed  with  the  butts  all  down  stream ;  in  other  respects 
similar  to  that  described  above. 

The  remaining  trees  are  then  brought  butt  to  butt  with 
those  in  the  raft,  and  fastened  to  them  with  iron  clamps 
or  dogs,  or  by  spiking  a  piece  of  plank  across  the  two.  A 
traverse  c  is  spiked  on  the  stern.  The  traverses  h  and  L 
as  in  the  preceding  example.  The  traverse  g  a  little  for- 
ward of  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  partial  raft  A,  and  the 
traverse  Jc  a  little  astern  of  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  par- 
tial raft  C.  Two  strong  timbers  d  d,  extend  over  the  four 
interior  traverses.  These  timbers  support  the  balks  and 


44  MANUAL  FOB  ENGINEER  TKOOPS. 

diffuse  the  load  ever  the  entire  raft,  without  tending  to  dis- 
unite the  partial  rafts. 

For  use  as  support  in  a  bridge,  a  raft  should  be  able  to  sus- 
tain at  least  fifteen  thousand  pounds.  The  same  expedients 
are  employed  for  the  anchorage  of  rafts  as  for  boats.  It  must, 
however,  be  borne  in  mind,  that  a  raft  offers  a  much  greater 
obstruction  to  the  current  than  a  boat,  and  that  the  strain 
on  the  cables  is  proportionally  greater. 

Rafts  are  sometimes  constructed  for  flying  bridges,  in  the 
form  of  a  lozenge,  the  acute  angle  being  about  55°,  so  that 
when  two  of  the  sides  are  parallel  to  the  direction  of  the 
current,  the  up-stream  side,  which  in  this  form  is  the  only 
one  acted  on  by  the  current,  is  in  the  most  favorable  posi- 
tion. 

A  raft  of  casks  may  be  constructed,  by  forming  a  frame 
of  timber  to  contain  the  casks.  See  plate  15. 

The  frame  consists  of  four  longitudinal  pieces,  halved  into 
four  transoms.  The  long  pieces  must  be  at  least  twenty 
feet  long ;  their  distance  apart  a  little  less  than  the  head  di- 
ameter of  the  casks.  The  under  edges  are  bevelled  so  as  to 
give  them  a  good  bearing  on  the  casks. 

In  default  of  square  timber,  poles  may  be  used  in  the  con- 
struction of  the  frame.  The  string  pieces  and  transoms  may 
be  spiked  or  lashed  at  their  intersection. 

The  four  exterior  casks  in  the  raft  should  be  lashed  to  the 
frame,  otherwise  they  maybe  carried  off  by  the  current  when 
the  raft  lurches. 

Trestles. 

Plate  15. 

A  trestle  is  composed  of  a  cap  about  15'  x  9"  x  9",  four  legs, 
two  lower  and  two  upper  traverses,  four  braces. 

The  cap  is  notched  1 8"  from  the  end,  to  receive  the  legs  ; 
the  notch  is  five  inches  wide  and  one  inch  deep. 

The  legs  should  be  from  five  to  six   inches  square ;   a 


TRESTLE   BRIDGE.  45 

shoulder  is  made  to  fit  the  notch  in  the  cap  ;  the  spread 
is  quarter  the  height.  The  inclination  in  the  other  direction 
about  one-sixteenth.  The  leg  is  spiked,  pinned  or  bolted 
to  the  cap.  The  lower  traverse  is  5'xl^*,  dovetailed 
into  the  legs  at  about  one-quarter  their  height  from  the 
ground. 

The  upper  traverse,  which  is  nailed  on  the  inside  of  the  legs 
and  against  the  cap,  is  six  inches  wide,  five  inches  thick. 

The  braces  are  four  inches  wide,  one  and  a  half  inches 
thick,  spiked  to  the  cap  and  legs. 

The  above  dimensions,  and  method  of  construction,  are 
not  absolute,  but  given  as  a  guide  to  be  followed  as  closely 
as  circumstances  will  permit. 

The  trestle  may  be  made  of  round  timber,  care  being 
taken  to  level  the  upper  surface  of  the  cap. 

When  the  trestles  are  to  be  placed  on  a  soft  bottom,  a  flat 
sill  may  be  spiked  under  the  legs  of  each  side. 

Trestle  Bridge. 

Plate  15. 

"When  the  water  is  less  than  four  feet  deep,  the  trestles 
may  be  carried  to  their  places,  by  men  wading  in  the  stream ; 
an  abutment  is  formed  as  for  an  ordinary  bridge  ;  the  tres- 
tles are  placed  with  their  caps  parallel  to  the  abutment 
sill,  and  about  I'd'  apart. 

But  when  the  water  is  too  deep  or  too  cold  to  allow  this 
method  to  be  pursued,  the  bridge  may  be  constructed  as 
follows : 

The  abutment  sill  being  placed,  the  first  trestle  can  usual- 
ly be  placed  by  hand  ;  the  balks  are  laid  and  covered  with 
chess  to  within  one  foot  of  the  trestle  ;  a  roller  is  laid  on  the 
bridge,  on  this  are  laid  two  beams  from  30'  to  40'  long, 
and  6*  or  7"  square.  The  trestle  is  placed  upright  with  its 
cap  resting  on  these  beams,  to  which  it  ifr  firmly  lashed. 
The  pontoniers  bear  down  on  the  other  ends  of  the  beams, 


46  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

at  the  same  time  pushing  until  the  trestle  is  rolled  out  to 
the  proper  distance,  they  then  suddenly  let  up  on  the  beams, 
dropping  the  trestle  into  its  place. 

If  the  trestle  does  not  stand  firmly,  or  if  the  caps  are  too 
much  inclined  in  consequence  of  the  unevenness  of  the  bot- 
tom of  the  stream,  a  man  must  walk  out  on  the  beams,  and 
sound  with  a  pole  the  depth  of  water  where  each  leg  is  to 
be  placed ;  having  thus  determined  the  required  length  of 
the  legs,  the  trestle  is  hauled  on  to  the  bridge,  the  legs  cut 
down  to  the  proper  length,  and  the  trestle  replaced.  The 
flooring  balks  are  slid  out  on  the  two  beams,  adjusted,  and 
covered  with  chess. 

When  a  boat  or  raft  can  be  procured,  the  trestles  are 
placed  with  much  less  labor. 

The  boat  is  brought  alongside  the  last  trestle  placed,  two 
balks  are  laid  from  the  bridge,  and  resting  on  the  outer  gun- 
wale of  the  boat,  the  trestle  is  laid  on  the  balks,  its  legs  ex- 
tending over  the  outer  gunwale  of  the  boat.  The  boat  is 
pushed  off  by  means  of  the  balks,  until  it  arrives  at  the 
proper  position  for  placing  the  trestle. 

The  trestle  is  righted.  If  it  has  not  a  good  bearing  on 
the  bottom,  it  is  hauled  into  the  boat,  and  the  legs  cut  to 
the  proper  length. 

The  bridge  may  be  entirely  built  of  round  timber. 

The  caps  should  be  from  10"  to  12"  inches  in  diameter, 
the  legs  at  least  6".  The  balks  7"  or  8"  inches,  and  faced 
on  the  lower  side,  where  they  rest  on  the  trestles,  so  as  to 
bring  their  upper  surfaces  on  the  same  plane. 

The  covering  may  be  of  strong  hurdles. 

Preservation  of  Bridges. 

When  the  current  is  rapid,  the  bridge  is  protected  from 
the  shock  of  %>ating  bodies  by  establishing  a  guard  of  ob- 
servation above  the  bridge,  to  arrest  these  bodies ;  by  placing 


PRESERVATION  OF   BRIDGES.  47 

a  stockade  obliquely  across  the  stream,  or  by  construct- 
ing the  bridge  by  rafts,  and  withdrawing  that  part  of  the 
bridge  which  is  menaced,  and  allowing  the  body  to  float 
past. 

The  guard  o£  observation  is  stationed  about  one  thousand 
yards  above  the  bridge.  It  is  provided  with  boats  contain- 
ing cables,  anchors,  grapnels,  hammers,  &c.  These  boats 
are  stationed  at  different  points  across  the  stream. 

As  soon  as  a  floating  body  is  observed  that  may  endanger 
the  bridge,  a  boat  hastens  toward  it,  fastens  the  end  of  a 
line  to  it,  and  endeavors  to  tow  it  ashore.  If  unable  to  do 
so,  the  line  is  made  fast  to  an  anchor,  which  should  be  so 
cast  that  the  first  strain  on  the  cable  will  be  in  an  oblique 
direction  with  the  current.  The  body  will  then  swing  around 
and  lose  part  of  its  momentum,  thus  relieving  the  cable  of 
apportion  of  the  strain. 

The  boats  should  also  be  provided  with  chains  and  grap- 
nels, to  tow  burning  bodies. 

The  floating  btockade  is  constructed  of  trees  united  by 
chains,  and  forming  a  continuous  barrier  to  floating  objects. 
Its  direction  should  form  an  angle  of  about  20°  with  the 
current,  which  will  require  its  length  to  be  24  the  width  of 
the  river. 

Each  piece  is  formed  of  one,  two,  or  three  trunks  lashed 
together. 

As  a  stockade  is  not  a  reliable  protection,  it  should  be 
established  some  distance  above  the  bridge. 

A  guard  should  be  at  the  bridge,  from  which  a  sentinel  is 
posted  at  each  extremity ;  and,  if  the  bridge  is  long,  at  inter- 
mediate points. 

These  sentinels  should  turn  out  the  guard  when  the  bridge 
is  in  danger  from  any  cause.  'They  will  see  that  tlie  troops 
march  at  the  route  step ;  that  the  cavalry  dismount ;  that  the 
troops  and  carriages  halt  when  %.e  bridge  commences  to 
oscillate  dangerously ;  that  two  heavily  loaded  carriages  do 


48  MANUAL   FOR  ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

not  enter  the  bridge  ;  that  not  more  than  five  or  six  head  of 
cattle  enter  at  the  same  time. 

The  officer  in  charge  of  the  bridge  will  frequently  inspect 
the  cables  to  see  that  they  are  not  chafing,  and  that  the 
anchors  do  not  drag.  He  will  cause  the  rack  lashings  to  be 
tightened  when  they  work  loose,  and  the  pontons  that  have 
leaked  or  shipped  water  to  be  bailed. 

There  should  be  formed  on  the  shore,  near  the  entrance 
to  the  bridge,  a  depot  of  spare  balks,  chess,  cordage,  &c., 
by  means  of  which  any  injury  the  bridge  may  sustain  can 
be  promptly  repaired. 


French  Ponton  &  Carriage 


Pl.l. 


Birag-o's  'I1  res  tie 


PI. 2. 


or  THE    Y 
UNIVERSITY 


Trestle    Hridi-ie    ovor    Water   course. 


PI.  3. 


Anchoring  pannier 


ttalk  Iftxhing 


Trestle  lirid<_>e  over 


OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 


Trestle    Hriilvjo    over    Water   course. 


PI.  5. 


Bridge  bv  -successive  Pontons. 


PI.  6. 


Trostlc   S-   I'oiitoius    combined  . 


Pi.  7 


Uridi$e  const  moled   by  parts 


r    r  r    r   r  r  r 


Britlyo  roust  rucU'd  by  Rafts. 


PI  9. 


JTH-IH,  , 


\  a  R  A 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 

/:RM\h- 


-BrirUo  by  Conversion 


PI  10. 


Continuation  of  Bridge  a.h. 


Canvas   l\mton.s. 


Pl.1t. 


I— 4— 4 


Flyiny   Bridge. 


PI.  12. 


imber  Hafts  X" 


Timber  Rafts ' 


I'l.l't  . 


Trestles -"Raft  of  Casks. 


PI.  IS 


*CT*R**> 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 


Pi.  16. 


RULES  FOR  CONDUCTING 


THE 


PRACTICAL  OPERATIONS  OF  A  SIEGE 


A  S  L  E  Y. 


PRACTICAL  OPERATIONS,  ETC. 


1.  Or  Preparing  Timber  and  Brushwood  for  Mili- 

tary Purposes. 

1.    OF   THE   LARGE   TIMBER   REQUIRED   IN   A   SIEGE    OR 
CAMPAIGN. 

IN  the  siege  of  a  fortress  situated  on  the  sea-coast,  plat- 
forms, timbers  for  powder-magazines,  mine-cases,  &c.,  may 
be  forwarded  by  sea ;  but  in  inland  operations,  it  is  often 
necessary  to  cut  materials  for  those  purposes  in  some  adja- 
cent wood,  if  they  cannot  otherwise  be  obtained.  In  a  cam- 
paign, abatis,  stockades,  palisades  and  chevaux-de-frise,  are 
often  required  to  strengthen  positions,  and  temporary  pow- 
der-magazines and  bridges  are  also  necessary  for  field-works. 
Bridges  of  trestles,  or  even  floating  bridges,  as  a  substitute 
for  pontons,  may  likewise  be  necessary  in  the  field.  All 
these  services  require  large  timber,  or  young  trees ;  the  for- 
mer to  be  cut  into  regular  scantling  and  planks,  the  latter 
either  to  be  well  squared,  roughly  squared,  split  down  the 
middle  or  left  round,  according  to  circumstances. 

2.  OF   THE   TOOLS,  ETC.,  REQUIRED  FOR   CUTTING   TIMBER  FOR 

MILITARY   PURPOSES. 

The  felling  axe  for  cutting  down  large  trees. 

The  cross-cut  saw  is  necessary  for  cutting  large  trees  trans- 
versely, after  being  felled ;  the  handsaw  is  more  convenient 
for  small  ones. 

The  pitsaw  is  of  indispensable  necessity  for  preparing 
large  trees  into  scantling  and  planks,  fit  for  platforms,  bridges, 


52  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

mine-cases,  sheeting,  &c.;  also  for  sawing  them  down  the 
middle,  if  considered  larger  than  necessary,  for  stockades  or 
palisading.  Dogs,  iron  implements  for  securing  the  trees 
while  being  sawed,  and  cant-hooks,  for  turning  over,  or  drag- 
ging them,  are  useful. 

The  carpenter's  broadaxe  is  the  most  useful  tool  for  rough 
squaring.  The  adze  may  answer  the  same  purpose,  but  it 
is  more  particularly  adapted  for  cutting  concave  curves,  when 
necessary. 

Wherever  saws  are  used,  setters  are  necessary;  one  to 
each  saw,  if  detached,  one  to  several  saws,  when  working 
together.  One  kind  of  setter  is  used  for  the  pit  and  cross- 
cut saw.  Another,  of  a  smaller  size,  for  the  handsaw  ;  and 
to  every  individual  saw  files  are  required,  in  a  proportion  not 
less  than  a  dozen  to  each,  even  for  the  shortest  service. 

Where  cutting  tools  are  used,  a  grindstone  is  necessary, 
to  which  a  proportion  of  rubstones  may  be  added.  The 
latter  may  serve  in  lieu  of  a  grindstone,  but  not  so  conve- 
niently. Ragstones  (or  whetstones)  are  also  necessary. 

Recapitulation  of  tools  for  cutting  and  preparing  large 
timber  into  scantling  and  planks. 

Felling  axes.  Cross-cut  saws. 

Topping  axes.  Files  for  ditto,  dozens  of. 

Pitsaws.  Setters  for  ditto. 

Files  for  ditto,  dozens  of.  Handsaws. 

Setters  for  ditto.  Files  for  ditto,  dozens  of. 

Chalk  lines  and  chalk.  Setters  for  ditto. 

Plumb  bobs.  Carpenters'  broadaxes. 

Squares,  iron,  2-feet  (divided).  Adzes. 

Compasses,  6-inch.  A  grindstone. 

Dogs.  Rubstones. 

Cant-hooks.  Ragstones,  or  whetstones. 

Pickaxes  and  shovels  are  necessary  for  forming  sawpits  in 
the  field.  Ropes  or  chains  would  also  be  required  for  mov- 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    OF   A    RIEGE.  53 

ing  the  trees.  Handspikes,  rollers  and  wedges,  may  be  cut 
in  the  wood.  If  you  should  wish  to  raise  your  timber  on 
trestles  in  sawing  it,  in  preference  to  making  a  pit,  £wo-inch 
socket  chisels  and  mallets,  with  half-inch  spike  bits,  and  spikes, 
will  be  required  for  making  the  trestles,  in  addition  to  the 
carpenter's  tools  before  mentioned. 

3.    OF   THE   SMALL   TIMBER,    OR    BRUSHWOOD,  REQUIRED   IN   A 
SIEGE   OR   CAMPAIGN. 

A  great  number  of  fascines,  gabions  and  pickets,  are  in- 
dispensable in  a  siege,  and  are  often  necessary  in  field-works. 

For  this  purpose,  brushwood,  not  exceeding  from  one  and 
a  half  to  two  inches  in  diameter  at  the  butt  end,  is  most 
suitable.  The  thicker  pieces  are  usually  called  poles.  The 
smaller  ones  are  called  rods. 

When  brushwood  is  not  to  be  had,  branches  of  trees  may 
be  used  for  the  same  purpose :  and  the  pickets  in  particular 
may  always  be  split  out  of  large  timber. 

4.   TOOLS,  ETC.,    REQUIRED   FOR   CUTTING   BRUSHWOOD. 

For  this  purpose  no  tool  is  so  efficient  as  the  hand-hatchet,* 
with  which  the  great  body  of  men  employed  on  this  duty 
ought  to  be  supplied.  A  very  small  proportion  (say  one  in 
ten)  of  topping  axes  may  be  used  for  the  larger  poles,  or 
young  trees,  when  such,  are  required. 

A  grindstone  or  rubstones,  and  ragstones  or  whetstones, 
are,  of  course,  absolutely  necessary. 

*  Formerly  a  two-edged  bill-hook  was  used  in  the  service,  calculated  to 
act  both  as  a  hand-hatchet  and  bill,  or  to  chop  as  well  as  cut.  Recently 
this  complex  and  loss  efficient  instrument  has  been  abolished,  and  a  bill- 
hook of  the  Kentish  pattern,  a  largo  curved  knife,  with  the  edge  on  the 
concave  side,  has  been  adopted  in  lieu  of  it.  In  making  hurdles,  wood- 
men sometimes  use  a  block-bill  for  capping  pickets,  which  has  a  straight 
edge,  with  a  small  hook  at  the  back:  but,  bj  a  little  management,  the 
common  bill  will  chop  as  well  as  cut,  and  it  is  not  worth  while  to  use  two 
tools  for  military  purposes. 


54:  MANUAL   FOK   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


RECAPITULATION    OF   TOOLS,    ETC.,   FOR   CUTTING   BRUSH- 
WOOD. 

Bill-hooks.        A  grindstone.     Ragstones  or  whetstones. 
Topping  axes.  Rubstones.         Gloves.  Hatchets. 

5.    DETAIL    OF   MEN   FOR   CUTTING   BRUSHWOOD. 

When  troops  are  ordered  for  this  duty,  it  will  be  most 
convenient  to  tell  them  off  in  divisions  of  twenty-five  men 
each.  These  must  be  subdivided  into  squads,  in  proportion 
to  the  number  of  non-commissioned  officers  present,  each  of 
whom  will  be  responsible  for  the  work  of  his  own  squ.-id, 
but  corporals,  as  rank  and  file,  are  not  exempted  from  their 
share  of  personal  labor,  unless  it  should  be  considered  that 
they  may  be  more  usefully  employed  in  superintending.  The 
men  must  be  drawn  up  in  single  rank,  and  in  extended  order, 
not  less  than  three  yards  apart ;  and  if  there  be  not  room  for 
the  whole  of  the  divisions  employed,  to  work  in  one  line, 
they  may  either  commence  in  several  parallel  lines,  at  inter- 
vals  of  about  thirty  yards  apart,  or  on  different  sides  of  the 
wood.  The  brushwood  must  be  made  up  into  bundles, 
loosely  bound  together  by  withes ;  the  size  and  weight  of 
each  to  be  such  as  a  man  can  conveniently  carry  to  the  rear. 
In  wood  that  has  attained  the  proper  age,  a  bundle  may  con- 
tain from  twenty  to  forty  rods.  The  average  weight  of 
those  made  by  military  working  parties  will  scarcely  exceed 
forty  pounds.  On  commencing  the  work,  all  the  men  should 
cut ;  afterward  a  few  should  be  told  off  to  bind  and  carry. 
After  the  first  day's  work,  the  whole  may  be  tasked  to  clear 
a  certain  extent  of  ground. 

If  the  men  have  to  march^ur  miles  to  the  wood,  a  task 
involving  five  hours'  labor  onTne  spot,  will  probably  be  suf- 
ficient for  each  relief  or  party  of  men.  If  the  wood  should 
be  nearer  to  the  camp,  their  task  may  be  increased. 


PRACTICAL  OPERATIONS  OF  A   SIEGE.  55 

II.    Rules  for  Making  Fascines. 

6.      FASCIXES   DESCRIBED. 

FASCINES  are  a  superior  kind  of  fagot,  which  being  built 
in  courses,  with  a  moderate  slope,  and  secured  by  pickets 
driven  into  an  earthen  parapet,  form  a  revetment  useful  in 
field-works. 

A  Fascine,  when  the  term  is  used  without  further  speci- 
fication, implies  one  about  eighteen  feet  long  and  nine  inches 
in  diameter,  such  as  is  used  in  reveting  batteries,  &c.,  and 
which  can  be  cut  to  any  shorter  length,  as  may  be  required, 
during  the  execution  of  the  field-work  in  which  it  is  used. 
To  make  fascines  thicker  than  the  above  dimension  would 
be  a  waste  of  materials. 

Trench  Fascines,  six  feet  long,  are  used  for  crowning  a  line 
of  gabions  in  a  sap.  These  are  formed  by  merely  sawing  the 
common  long  fascine,  or  Battery  Fascine,  into  three  parts. 

In  like  manner,  nine-feet  fascines,  which  are  useful  for  cover- 
ing blinded  galleries,  and  for  other  purposes,  are  formed  by 
sawing  the  common  long  fascine  into  two  equal  parts. 

7.      DETAIL   Or   MEN. 

The  men  employed  in  making  fascines  must  be  divided 
into  squads  of  five  men  each,  besides  which  there  must  be 
spare  men  in  the  proportion  of  one  to  every  three  or  four 
squads,  to  prepare  pickets.  One  private  in  each  squad  is 
appointed  to  direct,  but  not  without  taking  his  share  of  the 
labor.  One  non-commissioned  officer  has  the  charge  of  sev- 
eral squads. 

8.   TOOLS,  ETC.,  FOR  EACH  SQUAD. 

'  5  Pairs  of  stakes  for  trestles,  or  more  if  the  brushwood 

be  bad. 

5  Lashings,  or  withes,  for  ditto. 
1  Fascine  choker.  1  Fid  of  hard  wood, 


1  Bill-hook, 

each  man. 


56  MANUAL  FOR  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

1  Maul.  1  Six-feet  rod. 

1  Handsaw.  1  Gauge  for  the  bands. 

8  Bill-hooks,          )   at  the  rate  of  one  cutting  tool  per 

2  Gabion  knives,  )       man. 

For  the  spare  Men  making  Pickets. 

1  Chopping  block,    j" 

For  several  Squads. 

1  Grindstone,  or  several  rubstones. 

Ragstones,  or  whetstones. 

REMARKS. — The  size  of  the  common  handsaw  is  con- 
venient, but  its  teeth  are  rather  too  large  for  sawing  brush- 
wood expeditiously.  If  regular  six-feet  rods  cannot  be  is- 
sued to  every  squad,  let  a  rod  eight  feet  long,  cut  out  of  the 
brushwood,  be  used  as  a  measure  for  each  squad  that  is  de- 
ficient. Two  lengths  of  this  rod  will  mark  the  distance 
between  the  extreme  trestles.  The  fids  of  hard  wood  should 
be  about  nine  inches  long,  one  inch  in  diameter,  and  pointed 
at  one  end.  The  gauges  are  pieces  of  wood  about  fifteen 
and  a  half  inches  long,  also  cut  out  of  the  brushwood. 
Chopping  blocks  it  is  needless  to  describe  ;  but  if  large  tim- 
ber is  not  to  be  had,  stout  stakes  driven  into  the  ground, 
and  standing  about  two  feet  above  the  surface,  will  answer 
the  purpose.  If  a  lower  block  be  used,  the  man  must  work 
kneeling. 

9.      METHOD   OF  PREPARING  FASCINE  TRESTLES. 

Fascines  are  made  in  a  cra- 
dle composed  of  a  certain 
number  of  trestles,  placed  at 
intervals  not  exceeding  four 
feet  apart. 

Each  trestle  consists  of  a 
couple  of  stakes  about  six 
and  a  half  feet  long,  and  not 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    OF    A    SIEOE.  57 

less  than  from  two  and  a  half  to  three  inches  in  diam- 
eter, driven  obliquely  into  the  ground,  touching  each  other, 
and  crossing  at  right  angles,  or  nearly  so,  in  the  form  of 
a  St.  Andrew's  cross.  The  upper  part  of  the  cross  should 
stand  at  the  perpendicular  height  of  about  two  feet  six 
inches  above  the  ground,  with  the  ends  of  the  stakes  pro- 
jecting obliquely  about  two  feet  beyond  it,  as  in  the  forego- 
ing figure. 

At  the  centre  of  the  cross,  the  trestle  may  be  secured  by 
a  lashing  six  feet  long,  consisting  of  a  piece  of  spun-yarn 
or  tarred  line,  of  the  size  of  tracing  line,  or  a  very  little 
larger.  This  is  done  by  applying  the  middle  of  the  lashing 
to  the  two  stakes,  and  passing  the  ends 
horizontally  round  both  until  some  three  or 
four  turns  are  taken.  The  ends  are  then 
crossed  vertically  round  the  centre  of 
those  turns,  in  the  space  between  the 
two  stakes,  and  hauled  taut;  and  after 
taking  two  or  three  turns  in  this  new  di- 
rection, as  shown  in  the  annexed  figure, 
the  ends  are  tied  together  with  a  reef- 
knot.  The  turns  last  taken  are  techni- 
cally termed  flapping  turns,  and  by  straining  the  first  part 
of  the  lashing,  keep  every  thing  tight.  A  withe  or  twisted 
rod  may  answer  the  same  purpose  when  lashings  cannot  be 
procured. 

When  one  trestle  is  thus  fixed,  another  is  always  placed 
at  the  distance  of  sixteen  feet  from  it.  The  intermediate 
trestles,  which  may  be  three  in  number  when  the  brushwood 
is  good,  making  five  in  all,  are  then  placed  at  equal  intervals 
of  four  feet  apart,  between  these  two.  When  the  brush- 
wood is  bad,  that  interval  will  be  too  great,  and  therefore 
six  or  even  seven  trestles  may  be  used  instead  of  five.  The 
head  of  the  squad  directs  the  placing  of  the  trestles,  assisted 
by  two  men  of  his  party,  whilst  the  others  collect  brush- 
3* 


58  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

wood.  After  the  first  two  trestles  are  properly  fixed,  he 
aligns  the  others  by  the  eye,  looking  along  the  upper  side 
of  each  stake,  on  the  same  principle  as  in  profiling. 

'REMARK. — At  this  establishment  we  sometimes  use  stakes 
of  fir,  of  regular  scantling,  about  two  and  a  quarter  by  three 
inches  square,  shod  at  bottom  and  hooped  at  top  with  iron, 
like  small  piles,  and  connecting  each  pair  by  an  oak  pin  pass- 
ing through  holes  cut  for  the  purpose  in  the  centre  of  the 
cross.  Although  these  make  very  good  fascine  trestles,  one 
would  scarcely  recommend  using  them  on  service. 

10.       FASCINE    MAKING    DESCRIBED. 

When  the  trestles  are  fixed,  straight  rods  and  branches, 
not  exceeding  about  one  and  three-quarter  inches  in  diame- 
ter, are  laid  over  them,  with  their  ends  projecting  about  sev- 
enteen or  eighteen  inches  on  each  side,  beyond  the  extreme 
trestles.  The  leaves  must  be  stripped  off  entirely,  as  well  as 
the  refuse  ends  of  the  thin  branches.  When  the  branches 
grow  out  of  the  stem,  with  irregular  or  clumsy  bondings, 
they  should  be  first  separated  by  the  bill-hook,  as  all  very 
crooked  parts  injure  the  fascine ;  but  straight  and  flex- 
ible branches  may  be  laid  in  along  with  the  stem,  cutting 
them  half  through  or  not,  as  may  appear  necessary.  The 
men  piling  the  brushwood  should  endeavor  to  lay  the  stout- 
er rods  outside,  and  the  smaller  stuff  near  the  heart  of  the 
bundle.  When  the  cradle  is  nearly  full  of  brushwood,  it 
will  be  time  to  prove  the  diameter  of  the  proposed  fascine, 
in  several  places,  which  is  done  by  the  fascine  choker ;  and 
more  stuff  is  added  in  those  parts  which  require  it.  The 
fascine  is  then  finished  by  binding  it  with  withes  prepared 
for  the  purpose.  This  is  done  by  four  men,  two  of  whom 
choke,  or  compress  the  brushwood  near  the  spot  where  the 
other  two  bind.  The  first  band  is  applied  near  the  extreme 
end  of  the  fascine,  about  six  inches  from  the  first  trestle. 
The  second  is  applied  about  fifteen  and  one-half  inches  from 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   OF   A    SIEGE.  59 

the  first,  and  others  are  successively  added  at  the  same  cen- 
tral intervals,  until  the  whole  number  of  thirteen  bands  -are 
completed.  The  fascine  is  then  removed  from  the  trestle,  and 
the  rough  ends  sawed  off.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  these 
ends  should  be  laid  as  regular  as  possible  in  piling  the  brush- 
wood, and  no  more  should  be  cut  away  than  is  necessary,  al- 
though the  length  of  the  finished  fascine  should,  in  this  case, 
prove  to  exceed  the  standard  of  eighteen  feet.  In  regulating 
the  central  distance  from  band  to  band,  the  gauge-rod  is  used 
as  a  measure.  If  the  brushwood  be  very  bad,  or  withes  of  the 
desirable  length  cannot  be  obtained,  the  intervals  may  be 
diminished  to  twelve  inches,  which  will  increase  the  num- 
ber of  bands  to  seventeen,  and  in  this  case  a  twelve-inch 
gauge  must  of  course  be  used. 

Strictly  speaking,  four  men  are  sufficient  for  making  a  fas- 
cine, when  all  the  materials  are  at  hand,  but  the  fifth  may  be 
usefully  employed  in  preparing  withes,  which  is  the  most 
difficult  part  of  the  work. 

11.      METHOD     OF   PREPARING  AND    USING    THE   WITHES. 

For  Withes  (or  Gads  as  they  are  also  called)  to  bind  fas- 
cines, very  straight  rods  must  be  selected,  which  when  after- 
ward cut  to  the  proper  length  of  about  five  feet,  should  not 
be  less  than  about  three-eighths  of  an  inch  in  diam- 
eter, nor  greater,  if  possible,  than  about  three-fourths 
or  seven-eighths  of  an  inch  at  the  big  end.  In  choos- 
ing them,  therefore,  let  no  part  be  smaller  than  your 
little  finger,  or  much  thicker  than  your  thumb.  All 
the  small  branches  must  be  lopped  off,  not  close  to, 
or  cutting  in  upon  the  stem,  but  so  as  to  leave  a 
small  stump  projecting  about  one-eighth  of  an  inch 
above  it ;  otherwise  the  rod  will  be  liable  to  break 
at  each  knot. 

In  preparing  them  for  use,  you  must  put  the  thick 
end  under  your  left  foot,  and  twist  the  rod  with 


60  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

your  hands,  from  the  top  downward,  with  your  right  hand 
toward  the  end  of  the  rod,  which  you  will  move  in  the 
same  manner,  nearly,  as  if  working  at  a  winch,  so  as  to  turn 
the  rod  in  the  direction  technically  called  "  with  the  sun.'** 
Great  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  making  kinks  in  the 
wood,  which  unpractised  persons  are  apt  to  do,^as  these 
spoil  the  withe. 

After  the  rod  is  well  twisted  at  the  small  end,  and  mod- 
erately so  downward,  you  will  form  a  loop  about  nine  inches 
long,  near  the  small  end  of  it,  by  taking  a  half-hitch  with 
the  end  of  the  rod  round  the.  body,  or  standing  part  of  it, 
as  in  the  foregoing  figure. 

You  wih1  then  give  the  loop  a  couple  of  twists 
in  the  contrary  direction,  so  as  to  plait  the  double 
part  of  the  rod,  and  form  an  eye,  or  smaller  loop 
at  the  top  o/  it,  as  in  the  second  annexed  figure. 
At  the  part  where  this  eye  is  formed,  the  rod  should 
not  be  less  than  half  an  inch  in  diameter. 

Lastly,  the  end  of  the  rod  must  be  pointed,  after 
which  it  will  be  ready  for  the  use  of  the  fascine  ma- 
kers. In  this  state  it  should  be  at  least  four  feet 
long,  which,  after  preparing  one  or  two,  a  man  may 
easily  judge  of  by  the  eye. 
In  binding  the  fascine,  two  men  assist,  standing  on  oppo- 
site sides.  They  pass  the  withe  under  the  brushwood,  then 
bring  the  ends  together  above  it,  and  pass  the  big  end  of  the 
rod  through  the  eye.  One  man  sets  his  foot  upon  the  eye, 
and  forces  it  home,  it  being  at  this  time  some  inches  lower 
than  the  top  of  the  fascine.  At  the  same  time  he  hauls  upon 
the  end  of  the  rod,  turning  it  with  his  hands,  until  the  part 
within  the  eye  is  more  completely  twisted,  but,  of  course, 
in  the  same  direction  of  the  fibres  as  before.  He  then  hands 
*  ""With  the  sun,"  and  "against  the  sun,"  are  in  reference  to  the  appa- 
rent motion  of  the  sun,  as  observed  by  a  man  standing  in  the  northern 
hemisphere  and  looking  toward  the  south. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF    A    SIEGE.  61 

over  the  end  of  the  rod  thus  twisted  to  his  comrade,  who 
bends  it  back,  so  as  to  form  a,  new  loop  engaged  within  the 
former,  like  two  links  of  a  chain,  after  which  he  (the  second 
man)  passes  the  end  of  the  rod  from 
left  to  right,  under  the  standing  part  on 
his  own  side,  over  it  again,  and  then 
under  it  a  second  time ;  whilst  the  first 
man  assists  with  the  fid,  in  disengaging 
the  standing  part,  which  at  this  time 
is,  of  course,  jammed  close  to  the  body 
of  the  fascine.  After  the  second  turn, 
the  superfluous  part  of  the  rod  is  cut 
off;  and  then  the  two  ends  appear  exactly  alike,  excepting 
that  the  thicker  part  has  not  got  a  half-hitch  at  the  extremity 
of  it,  like  the  other  part.  The  band  when  finished  accord- 
ing to  this  process,  is  represented  in  the  foregoing  figure, 
in  which  the  fascine  supposed  to  be  embraced  by  it,  is 
omitted. 

12.       METHOD    OF   CHOKING   A   FASCINE.  <• 

The  instrument  called  a  fascine-choker,  consists  of  a  stout 
chain,  attached  to  a  couple  of  ashen  levers,  each  of  which  is 
four  feet  long,  and  cut  out  of  one  and  three-quarters  by  two- 
inch  scantling,  the  section  of  the  wood  being  an  oval.  The 
chain  is  four  feet  long,  between  the  levers,  which  it  embra- 
ces by  means  of  a  couple  of  iron  sockets.  It  is  fixed  at  the 
distance  of  eighteen  inches  from  one  end  of  each  lever,  from 
whence  they  taper  to  both  ends.  There  are  two  small  rings 
attached  to  the  chain,  one  on  each  side  of  the  centre,  at  the 
distance  of  twenty-eight  and  two-sevenths  inches  apart,  which 
corresponds  with  the  circumference  of  a  nine-inch  fascine. 
In  choking  the  bundle  of  brushwood,  which  is  done  by  two 
men  standing  on  contrary  sides  of  it,  the  centre  of  the  chain 
is  first  brought  under  the  brushwood,  and  then  the  ends  of 
it,  together  with  the  levers,  are  brought  over  and  crossed ; 


62  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

the  men  handing  over  the  opposite  levers  to  each  other,  with 
the  long  ends  uppermost. 


The  levers  and  chain  will  then  appear  as  in  the  annexed 
figure,  in  which  the  chain  is  supposed  to  have  made  rather 
more  than  one  complete  turn  round  the  fascine.  The  small 
rings  are  also  represented,  which  do  not  yet  meet,  as  the 
chain  is  supposed  to  be  slack.  The  short  ends  of  the  levers 
press  against  the  contrary  sides  of  the  fascine.  Commen- 
cing at  this  position,  the  two  men  press  down  the  long  ends 
of  their  m spectivc  levers,  and  thus  by  degrees  tighten  the 
chain,  until  the  brushwood  is  choked,  or  compressed  into  as 
small  a  space  as  possible,  when  it  assumes  the  form  of  a  per- 
fect circle,  or  nearly  so.  At  this  period  the  long  ends  of  the 
levers  should  be  depressed  below  the  horizontal  line,*  and 
the  two  rings,  which  at  first  were  several  inches  apart, 
ought  to  meet  at  the  top  of  the  fascine. 

*  Hence,  if  fascines  were  made  of  different  thicknesses,  the  length  of 
the  chain  of  the  fascine-choker  used,  should  vary  according  to  the  diame- 
ter of  the  proposed  fascine.  Five  and  a  half  times  the  diameter  is  a  good 
pi-oportion. 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    OF   A    SIEGE.  63 

As  soon  as  each  band  is  finished,  the  men  employed  in 
choking  disengage  their  levers  and  chain,  and  commence  at  a 
new  place.  If  any  part  of  the  fascine  has  been  pinched  in 
choking,  it  may  be  turned  over  when  finished,  and  the  bands 
or  fascine  beat  with  a  picket,  to  render  the  latter  quite  cylin- 
drical. 

13.  REMARKS* — In  making  fascines,  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  superintending,  must  be  very  strict, 
in  regard  to  dimensions  and  neatness ;  more  especially  in 
seeing  that  the  withes  are  properly  selected,  well  twisted, 
particularly  at  the  eyes,  and  in  every  respect  made  accord- 
ing to  rule,  for  upon  these,  the  strength  of  the  fascine  almost 
entirely  depends.  * 

When  good  withes  cannot  be  had,  spun-yarn  may  be  used 
in  lieu  of  them,  which  must  be  cut  into  lengths  of  six;  feet. 
In  binding  with  spun-yarn,  the  centre  of  the  piece  of  rope  is 
laid  upon  the  fascine,  and  the  ends  are  passed  under,  so  as 
to  make  one  complete  round^  turn  ;  they  are  then  hauled 
taut,  by  the  two  binders  pulling  against  each  other  ;  after 
which  they  are  brought  together  at  top,  and  crossed  so  as 
to  form  the  first  part  of  a  reef-knot.  The  two  men  again 
haul  taut,  by  pulling  in  contrary  directions,  after  which  one 
man  presses  down  the  joint  of  the  spun-yarn  with  his  finger, 
until  the  other  has  taken  the  necessary  turns,  for  completing 

*  \Vo  tried  experiments  with  green  willow  cut  a  month  before  it  was 
used,  to  ascertain  the  strength  of  fascine  bands  of  different  kinds,  by  apply- 
ing progressive  weights,  until  the  withes  broke.  Eyes  formed  according 
to  rule,  at  a  part  of  the  rod  not  exceeding  half  an  inch  in  diameter,  re- 
quired an  average  weight  of  more  than  four  cwt.  to  break  them  ;  but  in 
some  few  instances,  the  standing  part  broke  before  the  eye.  Under  the 
supposition  of  sucli  eyes  being  the  weakest  part,  another  method  of  forming 
a  fascine  band  was  suggested,  in  which  the  thick  end  of  the  rod  was  not 
!  through  the  eye,  but  round  it,  on  the  principle  of  what  is  called  the 
midshipman's  hitch  in  knotting  with  ropes;  but  on  trial  the  round  turn 
thus  taken  with  the  thick  end,  unexpectedly  proved  to  be  the  weakest 
part,  and  invariably  broke  under  an  average  weight  of  two  cwt.  only. 


64  MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

the  reef-knot.     Thus  the  band  passes  twice  round  the  fas- 
cine, before  the  knot  is  tied. 

If  proper  chokers  are  not  to  be  had,  a  couple  of  stout 
stakes,  and  a  rope  doubled  by  splicing,  or  rather  by  tying 
the  ends  together,  will  answer  the  same  purpose.  The 
length  of  the  rope  must  be  equal  to  that  of  the  chain  and 
sockets,  in  lieu  of  which  it  serves.  After  the  rope  is  passed 
round  the  fascine,  and  crossed,  the  ends  of  the  levers  are 
pushed  through  the  bights  of  the  rope,  and  the  operation  of 
choking  is  then  performed  in  the  usual  manner. 

14.      TIME  REQUIRED  FOE  MAKING  FASCINES,  WEIGHTS,  ETC. 

Every  squad  of  five  men  may  finish  fascines  at  the  rate  of 
one  in  an  hour,  after  a  few  days'  practice.*  The  average 
weight  of  an  eighteen-feet  fascine,  is  one  and  a  quarter  cwt, 
or  one  hundred  and  forty  pounds,  after  the  wood  has  been 
cut  some  weeks. 

15.       OF   FASCINE   PICKETS. 

The  men  employed  in  cutting  pickets  must  provide  them 
in  the  proportion  of  six  or  seven  to  each  fascine,  and  should 
make  them  up  in  bundles  of  twenty-five.  They  should  not 
be  less  than  three  feet  six  inches  long,  including  the 
points,  but  four  feet  is  better.  A  sharp  triangular 
point  is  considered  the  best  way  of  finishing  the 
picket,  and  this  form  penetrates  a  stout  fascine 
with  great  ease.  The  top  should  also  be  pointed, 
but  very  obtusely,  as  in  the  annexed  figure ;  for  if 
it  be  cut  perpendicularly  across,  so  as  to  form  a 
plane  surface,  the  picket  will  be  liable  to  split,  in  driving. 
All  the  branches  must  be  cut  off  quite  close  to  the  stem. 
Fascine  pickets  should  not  exceed  one  and  three-quarter 

*  Expert  men  may  make  fascines  much  quicker  when  tasked,  but  it 
would  not  be  prudent  to  calculate  on  making  greater  progress,  with  the 
common  military  working  parties  in  a  siege. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF   A   SIKGE.  65 

inches  in  diameter  at  the  thick  end,  but  from  one  and  a  quar- 
ter to  one  and  a  half  inch  is  a  better  proportion.  After  a 
little  practice,  a  man's  eye  is  the  best  guide  for  judging  of 
the  proper  thickness.  When  the  stuff  much  exceeds  two 
inches  in  diameter,  pickets  must  be  formed  by  splitting  it 
into  two  or  more  parts,  according  to  its  size. 

16.      TIME   REQUIRED   FOR   MAKING   FASCINE   PICKETS, 
WEIGHT,    ETC. 

After  a  few  days'  practice,  a  man  may  cut  and  make  up 
fascine  pickets  into  bundles,  at  the  rate  of.  one  bundle  (or 
twenty-five  pickets)  in  an  hour. 

A  couple  of  withes,  or  of  pieces  of  spun-yarn,  must  be  used 
for  binding  each  bundle. 

The  average  weight  of  a  bundle  of  well-sized  pickets, 
three  and  a  half  feet  long,  is  about  thirty  pounds,  after  the 
wood  has  been  some  weeks  cut. 

17.      OF  TRACING-FASCINES. 

The  tracing-fascines,  five  or  six  feet  long,  recommended 
in  all  the  elementary  writers  on  the  attack  of  fortresses, 
being  of  no  use  whatever,  except  to  measure  the  task  of  each 
workman,  in  opening  the  .trenches  in  a  siege  ;  and  it  beiog 
evident,  that  almost  every  other  mode  of  effecting  this  meas- 
urement, that  can  be  suggested,  would  be  simpler  than  the 
above,  the  use  of  tracing-fascines  has  been  abolished ;  they 
were  made  four  inches  in  diameter,  in  order  to  waste  as  little 
brushwood  as  possible. 

18.       OF   COVERING-FASCINES. 

Covering-fascines  are  those  made  of  stout  picket  stuff,  not 
less  than  one  inch  thick,  without  any  mixture  of  sin  nil  brush- 
wood. They  may  be  used  in  place  of  planks  for  the  super- 
structure of  wooden  bridges ;  and  may  also  be  used,  if  no 
stout  planks  or  spars  are  to  be  had,  for  the  roofs  of  field 


66  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

powder-magazines.  They  maybe  made  of  the  usual  diame- 
ter of  nine  inches.  Their  length  will  depend  upon  the  special 
purpose  for  which  they  are  intended.  The  withes  should  be 
particularly  good.* 

19.       OP   SAP  FAGOTS. 

A  sap  fagot  is  a  short  but  very  strong  fascine,  about 
three  feet  long,  and  nine  inches  in  diameter,  composed  also 
of  stout  picket  stuff;  which  may  be  used,  instead  of  sand- 
bags, for  filling  the  interstices  between  the  gabions,  at  the 
head  of  a  sap.  One  picket  usually  projects  five  or  six  inches 
from  the  end  of  the  sap  fagot,  and  is  driven  into  the  ground 
to  keep  it  steady,  when  set  upright,  in  which  position  it  is 
always  placed.  Sap  fagots  are  also  sometimes  used  for 
filling  the  gabions  themselves,  to  hasten  the  progress  of  a 
sap,  under  peculiar*  circumstances. 

20.      OF   TRACING- PICKETS. 

These  are  short  pickets  eighteen  inches  long,  and  about 
one  inch  in  diameter,  which  are  useful  in  marking  out  the 
details  of  field-works.  When  they  are  to  be  used  in  the 
dark,  the  bark  should  previously  be  stripped  of£ 

They  may  be  made  rather  more  expeditiously  than  fascine 
pickets,  and  should  be  tied  up  in  bundles  of  twenty-five  each. 
Every  bundle  weighs  about  eight  pounds  when  the  wood  is 
dry. 

*  A  covering-fascine,  made  of  willow,  twelve  feet  long  and  nine  inches 
diameter,  was  found  by  experiment  to  be  equal  to  the  calculated  strength 
of  a  piece  of  Riga  fir,  about  two  inches  and  nine-tenths  square.  Conse- 
quently covering-fascines,  although  strong  enough  to  bear  the  weight  of 
any  military  carriage  or  wagon,  if  supported  by  proper  beams,  not  more 
than  four  fe6t  apart,  are  not  quite  so  strong  as  common  three-inch  planks. 
The  strength  of  a  common  fascine  of  the  same  diameter,  was  about  five- 
eighths  of  that  of  the  covering-fascine. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  67 

III.  Rules  for  flaking  Gabions  and  Hurdles. 

21.    OF   GABIONS. 

Gabions  are  cylindrical  hampers,  open  at  top  and  bottom, 
which,  being  filled  with  earth,  form  a  revetment  useful  in 
field- works,  but  more  especially  in  a  siege,  in  the  construction 
of  batteries,  and  in  the  operations  called  the  regular  and 
flying  sap. 

Light  gabions  are  a  species  of  basket-work,. and  it  requires 
greater  skill  and  care  to  make  them  than  is  necessary  in 
making  heavier  ones,  which  may  be  compared  to  hurdle 
work. 

22.    DESCRIPTION   AND    DIMENSIONS   OF    GABIONS. 

For  many  years  past  we  have  made  all  our  gabions  of  the 
same  size,  namely,  two  feet  in  exterior  diameter,  and  two 
feet  nine  inches  high  in  the  web,  but  averaging  three  feet  in 
height  when  used  for  the  revetment  of  a  trench  or  field- 
work,  in  consequence  of  the  projecting  ends  of  the  pickets. 
Hence  when  the  term  GABION  is  used,  without  further  specifi- 
cation, it  implies  one  of  the  above  dimensions,  and  no  other. 

To  make  larger  gabions  than  the  above  would  be  useless, 
for  we  ascertained  by  repeated  experiments,  that  two-feet 
gabions  formed  as  strong  and  durable  a  revetment  as  those 
of  greater  diameter ;  which  result  was  the  more  conclusive, 
having  been  contrary  to  our  expectations ;  and  we  also  found 
that  there  was  no  advantage  in  using  smaller  ones.* 

The  batteries  being  of  greater  importance  than  most  of 
the  other  works  of  a  siege,  it  is  proper  to  finish  them  in  the 
most  substantial  manner,  and  therefore  we  use  the  strongest 
and  heaviest  gabions,  made  of  the  thickest  brushwood,  for 

*  At  one  time  we  used  not  only  two-feet  gabions,  as  above  described, 
but  also  twenty-one  inch  gabions.  The  latter,  being  employed  exclusively 
for  tho  regular  sap,  were  called  sap-gabions,  to  distinguish  them. 


68  MANUAL  FOR  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

this  purpose.  In  other  respects  there  is  no  difference  be- 
tween Battery- Gabions  and  Trench- Gabions. 

23.    BASKET-WORK   DESCRIBED. 

Before  we  describe  the  method  of  making  gabions,  a  few 
technical  terms  and  observations  on  basket-work  will  be  in- 
troduced. 

The  upright  parts  are  called  Stakes  or  Pickets.  The 
'Wailing,  or  Web,  is  composed  of  Hods,  the  thick  end  of 
which  is  the  Butt,  the  small  end  is  the  Tip.  It  is  a  rule 
that  the  rods  shall  always  be  a  little  smaller  than  the 
pickets. 

In  working  with  a  single  rod, 
which  is  called  randing,  an  odd 
number  of  pickets  must  always  be 
used.  The  rod  is  alternately  passed 
round  one  picket,  and  within  the 
next,  and  thus  commencing  at  the 
bottom,  it  goes  round  in  a  kind  of 
spiral,  until  the  body  of  the  basket 
or  gabion  is  finished,  as  in  the  annexed  figure,  which  repre- 
sents the  plan  of  the  commencement  of  the  work,  the  pick- 
ets being  denoted  by  small  circles. 

Sometimes  two  or  three  rods  are 
worked  round  together,  precisely  in  the 
manner  above  described,  and  still  using 
an  odd  number  of  pickets. 

This  is  called  slueing.  The  appear- 
ance of  the  work  so  finished  is  shown 
in  elevation,  in  the  annexed  figure. 

Neither  randing  nor  slueing  ought 

ever  to  be  allowed  in  making  gabions.  They  are  both  very 
weak,  especially  the  latter ;  so  that  the  strength  of  baskets 
made  in  this  manner,  depends  entirely  upon  the  top  and 
bottom,  which  are  always  finished  with  greater  care. 


PRACTICAL     OPERATIONS    OF   A   SIEGE. 


69 


"Working  with  two  rods  together,  when  braided  or  plaited, 
is  called  pairing. 

In  this  case,  the  two  rods  are  separated  by  one  picket. 
That  which  is  to  the  rear  is  passed  over  the  other  rod, 
round  one  picket,  and  within  the  next.  The  second  rod, 
which  is  now  to  the  rear,  is  passed  over  the  first  rod,  and 
also  round  one  picket,  and  within  the  next. 


Thus  the  two  rods  cross  each 
other  alternately,  over  and  under, 
as  in  the  annexed  figure.  In  this, 
and  in  all  the  succeeding  methods, 
it  is  of  no  consequence  whether  the 
number  of  pickets  be  odd  or  even.* 
Working  with  more  rods  than 
two  is  called  waling. 

In  waling  with  three  rods,  they  are  first  placed  with  the 
butts  inward,  and  tips  outward,  each  being  separated  by  one 
picket,  as  in  the  annexed  figure.  Then  the  first  rod,  which  is 
to  the  rear,  is  passed  over  the  other  two  rods,  round  two 
pickets  and  within  one.  The  second  rod,  which  will  then  be 
to  the  rear,  is  also  passed  over  the  other  two  rods,  round 
two  pickets,  and  within  one.  The  third  rod  is  next  treated 
in  the  same  manner.  Hence  each  rod  will  alternately  come 
to  the  front  in  its  turn,  and  they  will  always  be  separated 
*  This  is  the  method  usually  practised  in  our  service. 


70  MANUAL   FOR   ENG^EER   TROOPS. 

from  each  other  by  one  picket,  as  in  the  second  annexed 
figure ;  and  thus  in  winding  spirally  round  the  pickets,  the 
rods  will  be  braided  into  the  form  of  a  three-stranded  rope. 

Basket-makers  sometimes  wale  also  with  four  or  five  ro>l  , 
in  a  manner  which  I  forlrear  to  describe,  as  it  is  not  appli- 
cable to  military  purposes.* 

In  passing  a  rod  from  the  outside  round  the  inside  of  any 
picket,  and  out  again,  the  basket-maker  does  not  move  it 
all  round  by  the  top,  in  the  way  that  an  inexperienced  per- 
son would  naturally  do.  Holding  the  rod  in  his  left  hand, 
with  the  tip  pointing  upward,  he  passes  the  fore-finger  and 
thumb  of  his  right  hand  into  the  inside  of  the  gabion,  be- 
tween those  two  pickets,  through  which  the  end  is  to  come 
out,  after  making  the  required  turn,  and  with  these  bent 
backward,  he  grasps  the  middle  of  the  rod,  and  pulls  it  out 
with  a  jerk,  between  the  said  pickets. 

In  circular  waling,  the  rods  should  always  pass  round 
more  pickets  outside  than  inside.f  In  straight  work,  with 
the  same  number  of  rods,  this  is  not  necessary. 

When  the  rods  for  basket-work,  or  for  withes,  are  to  be 
used  any  length  of  time  after  they  have  been  cut,  they  must 
previously  be  steeped  in  water  to  restore  their  flexibility^ 

The  only  basket-maker's  tool  applicable  to  gabion  making, 
is  the  knife ;  which,  for  gabions,  ought  to  be  like  a  stout 
pruning-knife.  The  Iron,  used  by  basket-makers  for  beat- 
ing down  their  rods,  may  be  superseded  by  a  common  picket, 
and  the  Cleaver,  a  steel  instrument  for  cleaving  a  rod  into 

*  The  best  method  for  a  young  officer  to  learn  waling,  is  to  provide 
some  wires  as  pickets,  which  he  may  fix  on  a  large  pincushion,  using 
pieces  of  the  small  round  cord  called  bobbin,  as  a  substitute  for  the  rods. 
In  this  way  very  neat  models  of  gabions  may  be  made. 

f  Because  it  is  desirable  that  the  inside  of  a  gabion,  or  basket,  shall  be 
as  nearly  circular  as  possible.  But  if  several  pickets  be  passed  inside  by 
each  rod,  the  interior  outline  will  assume  the  form  of  a  small  polygon. 

J  It  has  also  been  recommended  to  heat  green  withes  over  a  fire,  before 
twisting  them. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF   A    SIEGE.  71 

three  parts,  may  be  dispensed  with  altogether ;  for,  in  the 
process  of  gabion  making,  if  any  of  the  rods  should  be  con- 
sidered too  large,  .it  will  be  sufficient  to  split  them  into  two 
parts,  instead  of  three,  which  may  be  done  by  the  bill-hook. 

24.    DETAIL    OF   MEN   FOR   GABION   MAKING. 

The  men  employed  in  making  gabions  may  be  divided 
into  squads  of  three  men  each,  of  whom  one  prepares  pick- 
ets, rods  and  withes,  whilst  the  others  level  the  ground,  and 
afterward  work  at  the  gabion.  In  some  cases  two  men  may 
suffice.  One  private  has  charge  of  each  squad,  under  tho 
non-commissioned  officers,  who  superintend  several. 

25.   TOOLS   FOR  EACH   SQUAD. 

1  Bill-hook. 

2  Gabion  knives. 

1  Four-feet  rod,  or  three  sticks  cut  as  gauges,  one  for 
the  height,  and  one  for  the  diameter  of  the  proposed 
gabion,  and  one  for  the  length  of  the  pickets. 
1  Chopping  block,  or  stake. 
1  Piece  of  line,  about  three  feet  long. 
The  following  tools  are  useful  when  heavy  gabions  are  to 
be  made,  otherwise  they  may  be  dispensed  with : 
1  Handsaw.*  1  Mallet. 

Implements  for  several  squads. 
1  Grindstone,  or  several  rubstones.      Whetstones. 
When  a  party  of  men  are  sent  to  make  gabions,  pickaxes 
and  shovels  should  be  taken  to  the  ground,  if  necessary. 

When  wooden  bottoms  are  used  in  gabion  making,  the 
proportion  is  one  per  squad. 

26.    METHOD    OF   MAKING   LIGHT   GABIONS. 

The  pickets  must  be  from  three  feet  four  to  three  feet  six 

*  Even  in  making  heavy  gabions,  the  handsarw  may  be  dispensed  with, 
if  the  men  are  expert  at  the  bill-hook. 


72  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

inches  long ;  and  their  proper  thickness  is  from  five-eighths 
to  seven-eighths  of  an  inch. 

The  rods  for  the  web  should  be  from  five-sixteenths  or 
three-eighths,  to  three-quarters  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 
Those  for  the  withes  should  be  a  little  thicker,  and  the  most 
perfect  that  can  be  selected. 

The  number  of  pickets  used  in  working  with  brushwood 
of  the  above  description  should  not  be  less  than  fourteen. 

Gabions  are  usually  made  by  driving  the  pickets  into  the 
ground,  and  therefore  in  hard  or  rocky  soil  small  pits  about 
two  and  a  half  feet  in  diameter,  and  nine  inches  deep,  must 
be  dug  at  proper  intervals,  and  filled  with  loose  earth,  ex- 
cluding stones  and  large  gravel. 

A  circle  of  the  proper  diameter  must  then  be  traced,  with 
a  piece  of  string  made  fast  to  two  short  pickets,  one  fixed 
into  the  ground  as  a  centre,  the  other  moving  round  to  mark 
the  circumference. 

The  diameter  of  the  circle  thus  traced  should  be  one  inch 
less  than  that  of  the  proposed  gabion.  Hence  the  proper 
radius  for  a  two-feet  gabion  is  eleven  and  a  half  inches. 

When  this  is  done,  the  circumference  must  be  divided  into 
as  many  equal  parts  as  there  are  pickets  to  be  used  in  the 
proposed  gabion.  When  twelve  pickets  are  to  be  used,  the 
best  way  is  to  divide  it  first  into  four  equal  parts,  and  af- 
terward to  subdivide  these  portions  into  three  each.  A 
small  piece  of  stick  may  be  used  as  a  measure. 

All  the  pickets  must  next  be  driven,  so 
as  to  touch  the  internal  circumference,  as 
shown  in  the  annexed  figure,  and  it  is 
proper  to  place  them  alternately  with 
the  large  and  small  ends  upward. 

The  rods  prepared  for  the  web  must  be 
entirely  stripped  of  leaves  and  twigs ;  no 
part  of  any  one  single  rod  being  used 
double,  although  in  joining  a  new  rod  to  the  tip  of  one  that 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  73 

is  coming  to  an  end,  these  two  may  be  laid  together  for  a 
few  inches. 

The  most  approved  method  of  forming  the  web  of  light 
gabions,  is  by  waling  with  three  rods,  as  described  in  the 
foregoing  observations;  but  it  will  be  best  not  to  place  all 
the  butts,  or  thick  ends,  the  same  way. 

If  the  stuff  be  larger  than  usual,  pairing  with  two  rods 
may  be  allowed,  but  this  method  must  be  confined  to  the 
body  of  the  gabion  only.  Five  or  six  inches  of  the  bottom, 
and  as  much  of  the  top,  must  always  be  waled  with  three 
rods. 

Very  thin  short  rods  should  not,  in  any  case,  be  used  at 
the  top  or  bottom  of  a  gabion  ;  for,  unless  these  portions  of 
the  work  are  finished  with  more  than  usual  care,  they  are 
liable  to  separate  from  the  remainder  of  the  web,  whilst  the 
gabions  are  carried  or  thrown  about.  These  portions  may 
be  formed  of  twisted  withes,  instead  of  common  rods.* 

In  making  the  gabion,  the  web  must  continually  be  pressed 
down  with  the  foot  or  hand,  or  beat  with  a  stout  picket ; 
and  the  greatest  care  must  be  taken  to  preserve  the  proper 
diameter,  for  which  purpose  a  couple  of  rods  may  be  cut  as 
gauges,  which  may  be  placed  transversely  across  the  finished 
part  and  inside  of  it,  pressing  against  two  opposite  pairs  of 
pickets. 

27.      METHOD    OF   FINISHING   GABIONS. 

When  the  web  is  completed  to  the  proper  height  of  two 

*  Twisted  withes,  braided  or  plaited,  are  used  in  preference  to  common 
rods,  for  all  very  open  wicker-work,  as  they  are  less  liable  to  separate  from, 
or  slip  up  and  down  the  pickets  with  which  they  are  connected.  In 
gabions  this  is  not  absolutely  necessary. 

Iron  wire  may  bo  substituted  for  withes  in  the  construction  of  fascines 
and  gabions.  This  material  is  superior  both  in  strength  and  durability 
to  the  withe.  When  used,  a  pair  of  pincers  must  be  added  to  the  list 
of  tools  for  each  party.  The  wire  should  be  annealed,  by  heating  it  rod- 
hot. 

4 


74:  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

feet  nine  inches,  it  must  be  bound  from  top  to  bottom,  with 
withes,  previously  well  twisted,  in  four  distinct  places,  and 
these  should  be  applied,  so  as  to  secure  the  ends  of  the  ex- 
treme rods,  in  preference  to  the  middle  of  them. 

The  centre  of  the  withe  being  laid  over  the  top  of  the  web, 
the  ends  are  passed  through  it,  in  contrary  directions,  a  few 
inches  from  the  top ;  near  to  each  other,  but  not  between 
the  same  two  rods.  Two  men  haul  upon  them,  till  they  are 
quite  taut.  They  then  pass  them  again  through  the  web,  a 
few  inches  lower  down,  in  contrary  directions,  and  haul  taut 
a  second  time ;  and  thus  they  proceed  by  double  stitches,  as 
they  may  be  called,  like  those  of  shoemakers,  until  the  ends 
of  the  withe  arrive  at  the  middle  of  the  web.  The  gabion, 
being  thus  secured  by  four  withes  from  the  top  downward, 
disposed  at  equal  distances  apart,  is  pulled  out  of  the  ground, 
and  turned  upside  down ;  and  an  equal  number  of  withes  are 
used,  to  bind  the  remaining  part  of  the  web,  in  the  same 
manner,  so  that  the  two  sets  of  withes  used  shall  meet,  or 
cross  each  other,  about  the  centre  of  the  gabion.  The  ends 
must  be  neatly  secured,  but  in  what  manner  is  of  little  con- 
sequence. The  stitches  of  these  bands  should  be  rather 
close,  but  not  so  as  to  embrace  fewer  than  two  spirals,  of 
the  original  waling  of  the  web. 

Before  the  gabion  is  pulled  out  of  the  ground,  the  tops 
of  all  the  pickets  must  be  cut  off  about  an  inch  above  the 
web.  This  is  usually  done  by  a  handsaw,  but  the  expert 
woodman  cuts  off  the  heads  of  pickets  by  his  bill-hook,  intro- 
ducing a  stout  stake  between  two  of  the  pickets,  which  he 
uses  as  a  movable  chopping  block,  in  striking  at  one  of 
the  two. 

After  the  gabion  is  turned  upside  down,  the  points  which 
originally  stood  in  the  ground  may  also  be  cut  off,  accord- 
ing to  the  same  rule,  if  judged  necessary ;  we  always  leave 
them,  which  appears  to  be  rather^  an  advantage  than  other- 
wise. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A    SIEGE. 

28.      METHOD    OF   MAKING    GABIONS    OF   VERY    SMALL 
BRUSHWOOD. 

Lighter  gabions  than  those  described  in  the  preceding 
article  are  not  to  be  recommended,  otherwise  than  as  a  mat- 
ter of  necessity  on  service  ;  or  of  economy,  where  very  small 
brushwood  is  often  used,  in  order  that  nothing  may  be 
wasted. 

For  example,  when  none  of  the  brushwood  runs  larger 
than  about  five-eighths  or  three-quarters  of  an  inch,  the  pick- 
ets will  not  of  course  exceed  from  one-half  to  three-quarters 
of  an  inch,  and  the  tods  may  vary  from  one-quarter  of  an 
inch,  or  even  less,  to  about  one-half,  or  at  the  utmost,  five- 
eighths  of  an  inch. 

In  this  case,  the  number  of  pickets  used  must  be  increased 
from  fourteen  to  sixteen,  or  even  twenty,  using  the  greatest 
number  to  the  smallest  brushwood ;  and  the  making  of 
gabions  with  such  very  light  materials,  requires  more  than 
usual  dexterity  and  attention.  In  other  respects  the  method 
is  the  same  as  in  making  the  common  gabion  before  de- 
scribed. 

In  gabions  made  of  very  small  brushwood,  the  ends  of  the 
pickets  should  always  be  cut  off,  after  drawing  them  out  of 
the  ground ;  otherwise  they  are  liable  to  break.  This  is 
done  by  the  gabion  knife,  not  by  the  saw  or  bill-hook. 

After  finishing  one  gabion,  and  drawing  it  out  of  the 
ground,  the  same  picket  holes  will  answer  for  commencing 
a  second  gabion,  without  describing  a  new  circle. 

29.       OF   WOODEN   CIRCLES   FOR   GABION   MAKING. 

In  making  gabions,  wooden  circles  are  sometimes  used, 
consisting  of  plank  leclged  together  so  as  to  form  a  circle 
like  the  head  of  a  cask.  Notches  are  cut  on  the  circumfer- 
ence to  receive  the  stakes.  The  circle  is  laid  on  the  ground, 
the  stakes  driven  around  it  and  in  the  notches,  the  circle 


76  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

raised  a  foot,  and  the  stakes  bound  firmly  into  the  notches  by 
means  of  a  rope  and  rack-stick.  The  gabion  is  then  wattled 
above  the  circle,  and  withed,  turned  over  the  circle  removed, 
and  the  remaining  portion  wattled.  I  am  informed  that  this 
facilitates  the  operation,  and  saves  time,  when  inexperienced 
men  are  employed ;  but  I  conceive  that  no  extra  implements 
of  this  description  that  can  possibly  be  dispensed  with,  ought 
to  be  used  on  service. 

30.      METHOD  OF  MAKING   GABIONS  OF  THICK  BRUSHWOOD. 

Sometimes  thicker  brushwood  than  usual  must  be  em- 
ployed for  making  gabions,  as  a  matter  of  necessity.  Some- 
times stronger  gabions  may  be  desired  for  some  special  pur- 
pose, such  as  reveting  the  embrasures  of  a  battery,  or  for 
the  interior  of  a  field  powder-magazine,  in  which  case  the 
thickest  parts  of  the  brushwood  are  selected. 

The  pickets  for  strong  two-feet  gabions,  need  not  exceed 
from  seven-eighths  to  one  inch,  or,  at  the  utmost,  one  and  a 
quarter  inch  in  extreme  thickness.  The  rods  for  the  web 
should  not  be  less  than  one-half  or  five-eighths  of  an  inch, 
and  need  not  exceed  one  inch  in  thickness,  the  best  being 
selected  for  the  withes. 

On  account  of  the  greater  strength  of  the  brushwood  used, 
the  pickets  may  be  reduced  to  eight  or  ten  for  gabions  of 
the  above  diameter  ;*  and  the  whole  of  the  web  may  be 
formed,  by  pairing  with  two  rods  only.  In  other  respects, 
the  same  method  is  followed,  as  in  working  with  smaller 
brushwood. 

METHOD    OF   MAKING   IRON   GABIONS. 

Describe  a  circle  two  feet  in  diameter  on  a  wooden  plat- 
form. Divide  the  circumference  into  six  or  eight  equal 

*  The  proper  number  of  pickets  for  gabions  made  of  strong  brushwood, 
is  in  the  proportion  of  one  picket  to  every  two  and  a  half  or  three  inches 
of  diameter. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF   A   SIEGE.  77 

parts  (half  the  number  of  stakes  to  be  used  in  the  gabion) ; 
at  each  of  these  points  insert  wooden  pins  about  five  inches 
long.  Wrap  the  hoop  iron  tightly'  around  the  pins,  thus 
forming  a  polygonal  hoop.  The  point  where  this  hoop  is 
to  be  riveted  must  be  marked  before  it  is  removed  from  the 
form,  so  that  all  the  hoops  may  be  of  the  same  size.  The 
hoop  is  then  punched  and  riveted.  As  the  iron  used  is 
usually  one  inch  wide,  thirty-three  of  these  hoops  will  be  re- 
quired for  a  gabion. 

The  stakes  are  usually  made  from  pine  plank  one  inch 
thick  ;  their  cross  section  being  a  triangle,  with  three  or  four 
inches  base  and  one  inch  altitude. 

This  is  the  best  form,  although  round  stakes  may  be  used. 

To  set  up  the  gabion,  place  a 
hoop  on  the  ground,  and  a 
second  directly  over  it,  the  first 
as  represented  by  the  dotted, 
the  second  by  the  full  lines  in 
the  figure.  Insert  a  stake  in 
each  of  the  triangular  spaces, 
then  place  the  remaining  hoops 
alternately  over  the  first  and 
second.  Drive  nails  in  four  of 
the  stakes  over  the  exterior 
hoops  to  keep  them  from  coming  off.  This  gabion  is  much 
stronger  and  more  durable  than  those  made  of  brushwood, 
and  is  peculiarly  adapted  to  the  construction  of  the  cheeks 
of  embrasures,  as  it  is  not  injured  by  the  blast  of  the  piece. 

CORRUGATED   IRON   GABIONS. 

For  this  purpose,  the  corrugated  sheet  should  be  six  feet 
long,  thirty-three  inches  wide,  and  of  iron  weighing  three- 
quarters  of  a  pound  to  the  square  foot. 

The  corrugations  running  transversely,  the  sheet  is  easily 
bent  into  a  cylindrical  form,  in  which  it  is  retained  by  two 


78  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

clamps,  the  holes  for  which  are  punched  near  the  corners  ot 
the  sheet. 

The  chief  advantage  claimed  for  the  corrugated  over  the 
hoop  gabion  is,  the  readiness  with  which  it  can  be  put  to- 
gether on  the  field.  It  is  also  rather  more  portable,  and 
stakes  are  dispensed  with  ;  but  it  is  inferior  to  the  latter  in 
stiffness. 

31.   TIME   REQUIRED,  WEIGHT,  ETC. 

The  time  required  for  making  gabions,  by  common  mili- 
tary working  parties,  after  some  days'  previous  practice,  may 
safely  be  estimated  as  follows,  observing  that  it  increases  in 
direct  proportion  to  the  number  of  pickets  and  sniallness  of 
the  rods  used. 

TIME. — Three  men  will  finish  a  gabion,  with  eight  or  ten. 
pickets,  and  of  large  brushwood,  in  two  hours:  they  will 
finish  a  common  gabion,  of  fourteen  pickets,  and  of  smaller 
brushwood,  in  three  hours ;  but  they  cannot  finish  properly 
a  very  light  gabion,  of  from  sixteen  to  twenty  pickets,  and 
of  the  smallest  brushwood  that  can  be  used,  in  less  than  from 
four  to  five  hours.* 

WEIGHT. — The  average  weight  of  gabions  may  be  esti- 
mated at  thirty-six  pounds,  and  they  scarcely  much  exceed 
forty  pounds,  even  when  made  of  large  brushwood. 

32.    OF    SAP-ROLLERS. 

Finding,  by  experiment,  that  a  stuffed  gabion,  six  feet 
long  and  four  feet  in  diameter,  if  filled  with  small  brush- 
wood, was  not  musket-proof;  but  that,  if  filled  with  pickets, 
it  was  perfectly  unmanageable ;  the  sap  roller  was  adopted 
by  us  in  preference. 

The  sap-roller  is  a  hollow  cylinder,  formed  by  making 
two  concentric  gabions,  each  six  feet  long,  one  of  four  feet 

*  In  1839,  the  men  of  tho  eighth  company,  who  had  learned  gabion 
making  the  year  before,  finished  their  gabions  in  three  and  a  half  hours. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF    A    SIEGE.  79 

in  diameter,  but  the  other  about  two  feet  six  inches  in  diam 
eter  only,  so  as  to  leave  a  clear  interval  of  nearly  eight  inches 
all  round  between  these  two,  which  is  afterward  stuffed  with 
strong  six-feet  fascines  of  a  diameter  suited  to  the  above  in- 
terval, and  with  rods  not  less  than  about  one  inch  in  thick- 
ness. The  larger  gabion  of  these  two  should  have  more 
than  the  usual  number  of  withe-bands,  in  proportion  to  its 
diameter. 

As  we  found  it  difficult  to  procure  pickets  of  brushwood 
long  enough,  and  at  the  same  time  perfectly  straight,  for  our 
sap-rollers,  we  have  often  used  pickets  split  out  of  deal,  and 
about  an  inch  by  an  inch  and  a  half  square.  For  the  larger 
gabion  of  the  sap-roller,  we  generally  used  twenty  such 
pickets,  and  for  the  smaller  gabion,  fourteen. 

Sap-rollers  serve  as  a  substitute  for  mantlets.  In  the 
single  sap  one  sap-roller  is  used.  In  the  serpentine  double 
sap,  two  sap-rollers  of  the  ordinary  size  are  used,  with  one 
of  a  smaller  size.  The  latter  may  be  only  three  and  a  half 
feet  long,  and  rather  less  than  four  feet  in  diameter.  In  the 
direct  double  sap,  three  ordinary  sap-rollers  and  two  short 
ones  are  required. 

To  prevent  the  sap-rollers  from  losing  their  shape,  at  one 
time  we  introduced  internal  wheels  made  of  plank ;  but  re- 
cently we  have  adopted  the  simpler  expedient  of  driving 
three  pairs  of  strong  pickets,  not  less  than  about  an  inch  and 
a  half  thick,  through  the  large  sap-roller,  and  two  pairs  of 
such  pickets  through  the  small  one,  arranging  every  two 
pickets  at  right  angles  to  each  other,  and  cutting  off  the 
ends  flush  with  the  external  surface  of  the  roller. 

33.   TIME,  "WEIGHT,  ETC. 

To  make  the  inner  gabion  of  a  large  sap-roller  requires 
about  six  hours,  and  to  make  the  outer  one,  nine  hours ;  to 
which  must  be  addad  about  two  hours  for  stuffing  and  com- 
bining them  into  a  finished  roller. 


80  MANUAL    FOR    ENGINEER    TROOPS. 

The  average  weight  of  the  large  sap-rollers  now  used  by 
us  at  this  establishment,  and  stuffed  with  fascines  and  pickets, 
is  six  and  a  quarter  cwt.  When  the  wood  was  green  they 
must  have  weighed  more:  and  it  must  be  evident  that  if 
they  were  of  any  other  form  than  round,  such  a  weight 
would  be  perfectly  unmanageable. 

The  small,  or  rather  the  short  sap-roller  before  described 
may  be  finished  in  about  two-thirds  of  the  above  time,  and 
weighs  nearly  two-thirds  of  the  former;  their  respective 
lengths  being  nearly  as  two  to  three,  and  all  other  particulars 
the  same. 

34.    OP    HURDLES. 

Hurdles  consist  of  strong  wicker-work,  of  a  rectangular 
form,  and  as  they  may  occasionally  be  useful  in  a  siege,  the 
mode  of  making  them  shall  be  described. 

The  best  size  for  military  purposes  is  six  feet  long,  and 
two  feet  nine  inches  high.  The  same  kind  of  pickets  will 
therefore  answer,  as  in  making  very  strong  gabions ;  and, 
generally  speaking,  the  rods  for  hurdles  should  not  be  much 
less  than  an  inch  in  diameter.  An  even  number  of  pickets 
must  always  be  used :  and  I  consider  ten  a  good  proportion 
for  a  six-feet  hurdle,  although  the  woodmen  in  this  neigh- 
borhood generally  employ  only  eight  for  a  hurdle  of  that 
length.* 

In  preparing  to  make  a  hurdle,  it  is  necessary  to  Describe 
an  arc  of  a  circle  on  the  ground,  with  a  radius  of  about 
eight  feet,  making  the  length  of  the  arc  six  feet.  This  space 
must  be  divided  into  nine  equal  parts.  A  picket  is  then 
driven  into  the  ground  at  each  end  of  it,  and  others  into 
every  intermediate  point  of  division,  making  ten  in  all. 
Then  the  watling  is  begun,  on  the  same  principle  nearly  as 

*  The  hurdles  made  by  the  Kentish  •woodmen  are  either  eight  feet  lonp, 
with  ten  pickets,  or  six  feet  long,  with  eight  pickfts,  and  are  usually  three 
feet  high. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF   A    SIEGE.  81 

in  gabion  making,  excepting  that  you  do  not  work  round  a 
circle,  but  in  a  continued  line ;  and  therefore  when  you  come 
to  one  of  the  extreme  pickets  at  either  end,  you  must  twist 
part  of  your  rod  like  a  withe,  and  bend  it  round  the  picket, 
after  which  you  must  work  in  the  contrary  direction. 
'  The  woodmen  assert  that  hurdles  intended  to  be  straight 
must  always  be  made  curved  in  the  first  instance,  as  above 
directed,  in  order  to  prevent  them  from  being  crooked  when 
pulled  out  of  the  ground,  which  they  say  that  those  made 
in  a  straight  line  invariably  become.  And  in  hurdle  making 
they  use  a  wooden  sleeper,  moderately  curved,  with  holes 
for  the  pickets  on  its  upper  surface,  which  they  lay  flush 
with  the  level  of  the  ground;  but  it  would  not  be  worth 
while  to  make  use  of  such  sleepers  in  the  field.  The  an- 
nexed figure  is  the  plan  of  a  hurdle  made  in  a  curve,  accord- 
ing to  the  above  rule. 


In  commencing  a  hurdle,  the  men  work  from  the  bottom 
upward,  as  in  gabion  making,  but  the  first  rod  is  not  pressed 
down  close  to  the  ground,  excepting  hi  the  centre.  Both 
its  ends  are  raised  about  nine  inches  above  the  ground,  and 
there  bent  round  the  extreme  pickets  by  twisting.  Thus 
the  first  rods  used  form  an  arc  of  a  circle,  concave  on  the 
upper  side.  The  second  and  third  rods  are  bent  round  the 
extreme  pickets,  as  close  to  the  ground  as  possible,  at  each 
end  of  the  hurdle,  but  in  the  centre  they  rise  higher  than 
the  first  rods  used ;  and  thus  the  first  three  or  four  rods,  or 
rather  courses  of  rods,  composing  the  web  of  the  hurdle, 
are  interlaced  in  such  a  manner,  by  crossing  each  other  tow- 
ard the  centre,  as  to  prevent  the  separation  of  that  part  of 
the  web  from  the,pickets. 

The  ends  of  the  rods  are  kept  in  their  places,  by  pressing 
4* 


82  MANUAL    FOR    ENGINEER    TROOPS. 

against  a  picket,  which  jams  them,  and  they  are  cut  off  about 
an  inch  in  rear  of  it.  It  is  not  good  workmnnship  to  com- 
mence or  finish  with  a  rod,  by  cutting  it  ojf.in  this  manner, 
close  to  either  of  the  extreme  pickets,  as  the  twisted  joint 
formed  by  bending  the  middle  of  a  rod  round  those  pickets, 
evidently  gives  greater  firmness  to  the  work. 

After  having  commenced  as  described,  the  remainder  of 
the  web  is  worked  up  in  parallel  horizontal  courses,  until  it 
reaches  the  top  of  the  pickets;  and  at  this  part  one  or  two 
of  the  uppermost  rods,  after  being  twisted  round  the  extreme 
pickets,  are  passed  diagonally  downward  in  an  oblique  di- 
rection, toward  the  centre  of  the  hurdle,  passing  through 
and  between  one  or  two  of  the  pickets.  This  arrangement, 
which  is  also  sometimes  adopted  about  half-way  up,  as  v, vll 
as  at  the  top,  prevents  the  upper  part  of  the  web  from  sep- 
arating from  the  pickets.  The  annexed  figure  represents  a 
hurdle  in  elevation,  just  finished. 


In  making  hurdles  for  civil  purposes,  it  is  usual  to  work 
by  randing,  or  with  single  rods  only,  for  the  thick  brush- 
wood generally  used  in  this  process  is  so  stiff,  that  it  requires 
an  effort  to  separate  it  from  the  pickets.  But  as  military 
hurdles  would  be  exposed  to  greater  strains  than  those  used 
in  husbandry,  it  is  better  to  pair  the  rods  in  making  them, 
which  may  either  be  done  throughout  the  whole  of  the  web, 


^  PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  83 

from  the  bottom  upward,  or  at  least  for  several  courses  at 
the  bottom,  middle,  and  top ;  for  this  undoubtedly  gives 
greater  firmness  to  the  work.  But  the  precautions  before 
described  for  interlacing  the  lowest,  and  finishing  the  upper- 
most courses  of  the  web,  render  it  unnecessary  to  use  verti- 
cal withes  for  binding  it,  as  in  gabion  making.* 

35.      NUMBER    OF   MEN,   TOOLS,    TIME    AND    WEIGHT. 

The  men  and  tools  to  be  nearly  the  same  as  for  gabion 
making,  but  with  more  bill-hooks  and  knives,  and  with  a 
line  ten  feet  long. 

The  probable  time  for  making  a  six-feet  hurdle  would  be 
about  three  hours ;  I  do  not  speak  with  certainty,  having 
made  very  few ;  and  it  weighs  about  fifty  pounds  when  the 
wood  is  dry. 

V. 

IV.    Rules  for  Tracing  and  Commencing  the  First 
Parallel,  and  the  Approaches  Connected  with  it. 

36.   METHOD  OP  TRACING  THE  WORK. 

In  opening  the  trenches  in  a  siege,  the  workmen  should 
be  drawn  up  in  single  rank,  and  each  ought  to  have  a  task 
assigned  him,  which  should  be  six  feet  in  length.  Hence  if 
the  Hue  marked  out  be  divided  into  portions  of  fifty  yards 
each,  a  working  party  of  twenty-five  men  may  be  allotted  to 
each  portion. 

The  trenches  in  a  siege  are  traced  by  pieces  of  white  tape, 
previously  rolled  up  into  balls,  the  above  color  being  chosen 

*  The  following  method  has  been  advantageously  employed  in  construct- 
ing hurdles,  viz. :  a  stick  about  seven  feet  long  and  five  inches  hi  diam- 
eter is  notched  at  intervals,  corresponding  with  the  spaces  between  the 
hurdle  stakes.  This  stick  is  laid  on  the  ground,  and  the  stakes  driven  op- 
posite each  notch ;  it  is  then  raised  horizontally  about  eighteen  inches, 
and  the  stakes  lashed  firmly  into  the  notches,  and  are  thus  retained  iu 
place,  whilst  the  upper  half  is  wattled.  The  hurdle  is  then  reversed,  the 
stick  removed  and  the  remaining  half  finished. 


84:  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

as  the  most  conspicuous  by  night.  Each  tape  is  one  hundred 
and  fifty  feet  in  length,  and  is  marked  at  intervals  of  six  feet 
by  pieces  of  the  same  sort  of  white  tape  sewed  to  it,*  which 
should  not  be  less  than  six  inches  long ;  besides  which  it  has 
a  short  piece  of  tracing  line  added  at  each  end,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  making  it  fast  to  the  pickets  or  otherwise. 

When  the  proposed  trenches  are  extensive,  they  may  be 
traced  in  several  portions,  and  by  several  engineer  officers. 

When  two  officers  are  employed  in  tracing  a  parallel,  they 
may  commence  from  the  same  central  point,  and  work  out- 
ward. The  mode  of  proceeding  is  as  follows  :  each  officer 
will  draw  up  the  sappers  who  are  to  assist  him,  in  single 
rank,  and  will  number  them  from  right  to  left.  Every  man 
is  to  be  prepared  with  a  ball  of  tape,  and  a  white  picket. 
One  or  two  supernumerary  men  may  act  as  orderlies  ;  a  ser- 
geant will  assist. 

In  tracing  part  of  a  parallel,  the  officer,  followed  by  his 
party  marching  in  file,  will  advance  upon  a  point  therein 
previously  fixed,  where  he  will  order  the  leading  man  to 
halt,  and  will  take  his  tape  from  him,  and  march  on  with  it, 
in  the  alignment  of  the  proposed  parallel,  previously  turn- 
ing to  the  right  or  left,  as  may  be  necessary.  The  other 
men  will  follow  the  officer.  As  soon  as  this  tape  is  expend- 
ed, the  second  tape-bearer  will  halt  at  the  end  of  it,  and 
deliver  over  the  end  of  his  own  tape  to  the  officer,  who  will 
march  on  with  it  as  before,  in  continuation  of  the  proposed 
parallel.  When  this  is  expended,  the  third  tape-bearer  will 
halt,  and  deliver  the  end  of  his  own  tape  to  the  officer,  who 
will  proceed  in  the  same  manner  until  all  the  tapes  are  ex- 
pended. 

The  annexed  figure  represents  this  movement,  in  which 
the  party  first  advance  upon  the  parallel,  in  the  direction 
A  B,  by  filing  in  single  rank.  On  arriving  at  the  point  B, 
in  the  proposed  parallel,  they  distribute  themselves  from 

*  This  improvement  was  suggested  by  Captain  Jebb,  when  adjutant. 


8765432 

1 

c°  

B 

thence  along  the  proper  alignment  B  C,  in  regular     •£ 
succession,  and  in  extended  order.    The  portion     •» 
of  parallel  represented  in  the  figure  is  supposed     *jj 
to  be  four  hundred  yards  in  length,  and  to  have     •* 
been  traced  by  eight  tapes.    In  this  operation  every     *A. 
tape-bearer,  after  halting  and  delivering  the  end  of 
his  tape  to  the  officer,  drops  the  ball  on  the  ground,  and  lets 
the  tape  slip  through  his  fingers.     Both  parties  must  keep 
the  tape  near  to  the  ground  in  windy  weather,  and  take  care 
that  it  be  not  pulled  entirely  away  from  the  tape-bearer, 
when  nearly  expended.     The  ends  of  adjoining  tapes  must 
be  tied  together.     Tffe  tape-bearers,  who  are  now  to  act  as 
markers,  will  place  themselves  on  that  side  of  the  white  line 
which  is  nearest  to  the  fortress,  and  will  face  toward  the 
point  from  which  the  tracing  commenced,  as  soon  as  they 
have  taken  post  opposite  to  their  respective  marks ;  and  if 
the  ground  be  soft  enough,  they  will  fix  their  pickets  into 
it  without  knocking,  and  make  fast  the  ends  of  the  small 
line  to  the  pickets.     They  are  not  to  move  on  any  account, 
before  the  working  parties  are  properly  distributed  along 
the  whole  line. 

37.       METHOD    OP    ARRANGING    THE    WORKING    PARTY,    AND 
COMMENCING   THE   PARALLEL. 

Whilst  one  engineer  officer  is  tracing,  another  must  direct 
the  working  party,  who  will  assemble  at  the  engineers'  de- 
pot, at  least  one  hour  and  a  half  before  sunset,  and  form  in 
close  column,  of  divisions  of  twenty-five  men,  drawn  up  in 
single  rank. 

If  the  extension  is  to  be  made  to  the  left  of  the  first  point 
marked  in  the  proposed  parallel,  the  column  must  be  drawn 


86  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

up  right  in  front ;  but  if  the  extension  is  to  take  place 
to  the  right  of  that  point,  the  column  must  be  drawn  up 
left  in  front.  Each  division  should  be  commanded  by  a 
captain  or  lieutenant,  assisted  by  a  due  proportion  of  offi- 
cers and  non-commissioned  officers ;  and  every  battalion 
furnishing  the  working  parties  should  also  send  superior 
officers  in  proportion,  one  to  command  the  whole,  others  to 
superintend  several  divisions. 

After  having  formed  in  single  rank,  a  non-commissioned 
officer  or  private  of  sappers,  with  a  six-feet  rod,  will  be 
placed  on  the  reverse  flank  of  every  division,  who  is  after- 
ward to  assist  in  extending  it ;  and  every  man  of  the  work- 
ing party  will  now  take  up  or  receive  a  shovel,  which  he  is 
to  carry  in  his  right  hand,  and  a  pickaxe,  which  he  must 
carry  in  his  left  hand. 

To  expedite  this  arrangement,  a  fatigue  party  should  pre- 
viously lay  out  the  tools  in  such  order  as  to  suit  the  column  ; 
the  several  sets  of  tools  being  placed  in  successive  lines  of 
twenty-five  pairs  each,  at  the  clear  distance  of  about  four 
feet  apart,  so  as  to  allow  room  for  the  men  of  each  division, 
when  in  single  rank,  to  form  in  rear  of  their  respective  tools 
for  the  purpose  of  taking  them  up. 

The  divisions  of  the  working  party,  formed  as  above  di- 
rected, must  be  regularly  numbered,  and  when  all  the  men 
are  provided  with  tools,  each  division  must  successively  be 
marched  off  by  files  from  its  own  right,  if  the  column  was 
formed  right  in  front,  or  from  its  own  left,  if  the  formation 
was  left  in  front. 

Whilst  this  movement  is  in  progress,  the  remaining  divis- 
ions are  to  wait  until  each  preceding  division  has  moved  on 
in  the  aforesaid  order.  As  every  division  is  successively 
faced  to  the  right  or  left,  and  put  in  motion,  the  sapper  on 
the  reverse  flank  of  it  will  lead.  The  engineer  officer  must 
be  at  the  head  of  the  first  division,  to  guide  the  working 
party  to  that  point  in  the  parallel  where  the  first  marker  is 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  87 

stationed,  and  from  which  the  proposed  extension  is  to  be- 
gin. On  reaching  this  point,  the  whole  of  the  working  party 
must  be  made  to  form  line  to  the* left  or  right,  in  extended 
order,  in  rear  of  the  white  tape,  each  man's  place  being  regu- 
lated by  the  non-commissioned  officer  or  private  of  sappers 
who  marched  with  the  division.  In  so  doing,  the  sapper 
will  be  in  front  of  the  white  tape,  that  is  to  say,  on  that  side 
of  it  which  is  nearest  to  the  fortress,  and  will  see  that  the 
first  man  of  the  working  party  grounds  his  shovel  parallel 
to  and  in  rear  of  the  tape,  placing  the  centre  of  the  shovel 
opposite  to  the  centre  of  the  first  six-feet  portion  marked 
upon  it.  He  will  then  see  that  the  second  man  does  the 
same,  opposite  to  the  second  six-feet  portion  of  the  tape,  and 
thus  he  will  proceed  until  he  shah1  have  arranged  all  the 
twenty-five  men  of  whom  his  division  was  composed ;  who 
will  form  up  into  their  proper  places  behind  the  white  tape, 
in  regular  succession,  each  man  marking  the  centre  of  his 
own  task  by  his  shovel,  when  it  comes  to  his  turn. 

The  engineer  officer  superintending  is  to  watch  over  the 
whole  of  this  measurement  and  extension  with  the  greatest 
care,  in  order  to  prevent  confusion.  He  must  not  allow  any 
man  of  the  working  party  to  take  post  behind  the  white 
tape,  until  the  sapper  is  ready  for  him ;  and  he  must  also  see 
that  the  latter  does  not  move  on  until  each  successive  work- 
111:111  is  properly  posted. 

As  soon  as  each  workman  has  grounded  his  shovel  in  the 
manner  before  directed,  he  must  lay  his  pickaxe  in  rear  of  it, 
and  opposite  to  the  centre  of  it,  with  the  iron  to  the  front, 
lie  will  then  sit  or  lie  down  behind  his  own  tools,  so  as  to 
be  in  readiness  for  work,  and  waiting  the  order  to  begin,  in 
perfect  silence. 

The  following  figure  shows  the  manner  in  which  the  tools 
are  arranged  in  rear  of  the  white  tape,  which  is  represented 
by  a  dotted  line.  The  large  dots  show  the  marks  upon  the 
tape  by  which  the  tasks  of  the  workmen  are  regulated. 


88  MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


T    T  'T    T    T 

As  soon  as  the  last  division  is  extended  on  the  reverse 
'flank  of  the  whole  line,  the  men  belonging  to  it  will  be  or- 
dered to  commence  work,  and  this  movement  must  imme- 
diately be  taken  up  by  the  other  divisions  with  all  possible 
dispatch ;  the  commander  of  each,  as  well  as  the  sappers 
attached  to  it,  being  on  the  alert,  to  watch  the  movements 
of  the  adjoining  ones ;  and  every  commander  ordering  his 
own  men  to  rise  as  soon  as  he  observes  the  men  of  the  next 
party  on  his  reverse  flank  in  motion. 

8765  48  21 

a •••-. B 

A 

""4 5"" 

The  annexed  figure  represents  the  opera- 
tion that  has  been  described.  The  working 
party  are  supposed  first  to  be  formed  in  close 
column  in  single  rank,  at  A,  right  in  front. 
From  thence  they  are  supposed  to  move  for- 
ward by  filing  from  the'  right  of  divisions  to 
the  point  B,  when  the  first  division  begins  to 
form  up  into  line  in  extended  order,  in  the  1— • 
direction  B  C,  marked  by  the  white  tape, 

the  other  divisions  successively  wheeling  to        *• 

the  left  as  they  reach  the  point  B,  until  it 
also  comes  to  their  turn  to  form  up  in  the  same        7- ... 
manner.     Every  division  commences  its  for- 
mation as  soon  as  the  head  of  it  reaches  its  own  marker. 
In  the  figure  the  first  two  divisions  are  supposed  to  be  prop- 
erly formed:  the  third  is  represented  in  the  act  of  forming. 
The  remaining  divisions  are  coming  up  by  files,  in  single 
rank. 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   OF   A    SIEGE.  89 

If  the  working  parties  understand  what  they  have  to  do, 
the  above  extension  may  be  executed  with  precision  and 
without  hurry,  at  the  rate  of  one  division  in  a  minute  and 
a  quarter,  or  of  one  hundred  men  in  five  minutes.  Thus  it 
will  not  require  more  than  twenty  minutes  to  extend  four 
hundred  men.  It  is  not  desirable  that  a  greater  number 
should  be  extended  from  the  same  point,  in  the  same  direc- 
tion; but  in  extending  from  a  central  point,  two  distinct 
working  parties  may  be  made  to  file  up  together,  under  two 
different  engineer  officers,  and  in  this  case  the  total  number 
employed  may  be  greater,  and  they  will  of  course  advance 
in  double  files  until  they  reach  the  point  from  whence  the 
extension  is  to  take  place. 

It  is  to  be  remarked  that  the  extension  of  the  working 
parties,  after  the  tape  is  once  laid  down,  is  comparatively 
easy,  but  that  the  proper  tracing  of  an  extensive  parallel  the 
first  night  that  the  ground  is  to  be  broken  before  a  fortress, 
may  be  attended  with  very  great  difficulty,  apd  therefore 
the  officers  who  are  ordered  for  tlu's  duty  cannot  take  too 
many  precautions  to  avoid  error. 

When  the  working  party  begins  to  break  ground,  each 
man  will  seize  his  pickaxe  and  cut  a  hole  in  rear  of  and  ex- 
actly opposite  to  the  centre  of  his  own  shovel,  which  he  will 
then  take  up,  and  throw  the  loosened  earth  over  the  white 
tape,  until  the  whole  shall  form  a  continued  trench  of  the 
dimensions  prescribed  for  the  first  night's  task  in  a  siege, 
which  is  usually  three  feet  deep,  and  in  that  case  should  be 
at  least  five  feet  wide,  measuring  from  front  to  rear.  The 
original  pickets,  driven  in  to  mark  the  task  of  every  division, 
should  be  carefully  preserved ;  and  the  officer  of  infantry 
commanding  it  should  be  held  responsible  for  finishing  his 
trench,  according  to  the  prescribed  dimensions,  throughout 
the  whole  extent  of  the  hundred  and  fifty  feet  thus  marked 
out.  The  field  officer  commanding  the  working  party  fur- 
nished by  each  battalion,  should  enforce  the  proper  execution 


90  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

of  the  work  laid  out  for  the  whole  of  the  divisions  under  his 
command,  he  himself  being  held  responsible  for  the  same  by 
the  general  officer  on  duty  in  the  trenches.  The  engineers 
superintending,  and  the  sappers  attached  to  divisions,  will 
only  be  responsible  for  tracing  and  directing  the  work,  and 
for  measuring  it  when  reported  to  be  finished  according  to 
order;  but  not  for  the  diligence  of  the  men,  which  must 
entirely  depend  upon  their  own  good-will  and  the  zeal  and 
attention  of  their  regimental  officers.  The  sappers  will  assist 
in  working  when  they  are  not  more  usefully  employed. 

38.    METHOD    OF   TRACING  THE   FIRST  APPROACHES,  OR   THOSE 
CONNECTED   WITH   THE   FIRST   PARALLEL. 

In  tracing  approaches,  the  same  principle  must  be  acted 
upon.  One  engineer  officer  must  be  employed  to  lay  down 
the  white  tape,  and  to  arrange  the  markers. 

When  any  of  the  angular  points  of  the  zigzags  does-  not 
coincide  with  the  end  of  a  tape,  a  spare  marker  must  be 
placed  there  with  three  pickets,  one  of  which  he  will  plant 
at  the  angle ;  and  in  order  to  prevent  the  tape  from  moving, 
it  must  be  passed  round  this  picket,  or  made  fast  to  it,  after 
which  he  will  cut  off  about  fifteen  feet  of  the  tape,  from  the 
head  of  the  branch  immediately  in  rear  of  the  angle,  and 
extend-it  in  continuation  of  the  adjoining  branch  in  front  of  t 
it  produced  toward  the  rear.  The  remaining  pickets  must 
serve  to  mark  the  extremities  of  the  ends  of  the  tape  after 
the  angular  part  has  thus  been  cut.* 

This  arrangement,  which  is  represented  in  the  annexed 
figure,  serves  to  mark  the  returns,  which  are  necessary  at 
all  the  angles  of  the  zigzags.  The  dotted  lines  show  the 
first  positions  of  the  small  portions  of  the  tape,  that  are 
afterward  cut  off  and  moved  in  the  manner  that  has  been 

*  In  our  practice  at  this  establishment,  the  tapes  are  not  to  be  cut,  as  on 
service. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF   A    SIEGE. 


91 


.described.  The  figures  1,1,  rep- 
resent the  positions  of  the  origi- 
nal pickets,  which  mark  the  an- 
gles. 2  and  3,  are  the  pickets 
afterward  driven  to  mark  the 
extremities  of  the  branches,  after 
the  returns,  18,  13,  shall  have 
been  tracetl. 

39.  METHOD  OF  ARRANGING  THE 
WORKING  PARTY,  AND  COMMEN- 
CING THE  FIRST  APPROACHES. 

Another  engineer  officer  will 
guide  the  men  of  the  working 
party,  who  will  advance  by  files 
in  single  rank,  as  before  direct- 
ed, until  the  head  of  the  leading 
division  reaches  the  tail  of  the 
proposed  approaches,  on  the  re- 
verse side  of  the  white  tape,  that  is,  on  the  side  farthest 
from  the  fortress.  The  men  will  then  be  made  to  form  up 
in  extended  order,  along  the  white  tape,  a  non-commis- 
sioned officer  or  private  of  sappers  placing  them  as  before 
directed. 

As  soon  as  they  reach  the  end  of  the  first  branch,  which 
is  marked  by  the  point  2  in  the  foregoing  figure,  the  engi- 
neer who  superintends  this  measurement  will  lead  the  next 
man  to  the  extremity  3,  of  the  return  of  the  branch  imme- 
diately in  front  of  it ;  and  will  cause  him  and  the  men  who 
follow,  to  extend  along  the  reverse  side  of  the  white  tape, 
which  marks  the  second  branch  of  the  approaches,  in  the 
same  manner  as  before  directed,  but  with  this  difference, 
that  if  in  extending  along  the  first  branch,  they  formed  up 
to  their  right,  they  must  now  necessarily  form  up  to  their 


92  MANUAL   FOR  ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

left,  and  vice  versa;  and  at  each  succeeding  angle  of  the 
zigzags  the  formation  must  be  reversed  in  the  same  man- 
ner. 

40.   GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  THE  ABOVE  OPERATIONS. 

It  appears  essential  toward  the  proper  tracing  of  a  first 
parallel,  that  the  front  of  attack  of  the  fortress  to  be  be- 
sieged shall  be  well  Veconnoitred  beforehand,  and  the  dis- 
tances of  certain  points,  from  the  most  advanced  works,  ac- 
curately ascertained,  by  day ;  from  which  fixed  points  the 
engineers  who  are  to  trace  a  parallel  should  measure  for- 
ward toward  the  place,  until  they  reach  the  exact  position 
of  the  intended  parallel,  by  means  of  a  chain  or  tape,  being 
the  most  accurate  method,  and  as  expeditious  as  any  other ; 
unless  they  have  confidence  in  their  own  accuracy  of  pacing. 
If  it  be  possible  to  obtain  a  correct  plan  of  the  place,  it 
will  of  course  be  of  the  greatest  service,  as  fortresses  are 
usually  surrounded  by  objects,  such  as  roads  intersecting 
each  other,  buildings,  &c.,  which  cannot  be  destroyed  in 
such  a  manner  but  that  traces  marking  their  original  posi- 
tion must  remain.*  Whatever  be  the  reputation  of  these 
plans,  they  should  however  ^be  verified  by  actual  observa- 
tion, instead  of  trusting  to  them  implicitly.  If  correct,  the 
fixed  objects  before  alluded  to  furnish  the  most  satisfac- 
tory data  for  determining,  on  the  ground,  the  proper  posi- 
tion of  the  first  parallel  and  of  the  approaches  connected 
with  it. 

It  appears  of  the  most  essential  importance,  that  the  trac- 
ing shall  be  executed  before  it  is  dark.  Therefore  unless 
the  night  chosen  for  opening  the  trenches  is  foreseen  to  be 
a  moonlight  night,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  commence 
early,  and  to  have  the  tracing  finished  before  the  end  of 
twilight.  If  there  should  be  no  moon,  and  a  foggy  or 

*  At  the  siege  of  Copenhagen,  we  obtained  a  Danish  plan  of  extreme 
accuracy. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  93 

cloudy  night,  this  operation  may  be  attended  with  the 
greatest  difficulty  and  confusion,  as  has  been  found  by  ex- 
perience. The  arrangement  of  the  men,  on  the  contrary,  as 
was  before  observed,  is  by  no  means  difficult,  after  once 
the  white  line  is  marked  on  the  ground ;  that  is  to  say,  pro- 
vided that  they  themselves  are  well  inclined,  and  attentive 
to  the  directions  of  the  engineers. 

As  soon  as  the  trench  and  parapet  are  well  defined,  which 
will  take  place  in  about  an  hour  after  the  work  has  been 
commenced,  the  sappers  should  carefully  roll  up  and  take 
care  of  the  several  tapes  used  in  the  tracing  ;  but  the  pick- 
ets for  marking  out  the  work  on  the  ground  should  not  be 
removed,  and  it  would  be  useful  for  those  sappers  to  pro- 
vide themselves  beforehand,  with  white  banderols,  or  with 
bundles  of  straw  or  other  light-colored  objects  to  be 
used  as  such,  which  should  be  planted  on  the  reverse  of 
the  trench,  opposite  to  the  original  boundary  pickets,  for 
the  purpose  of  preserving  the  task  of  each  party  perfectly 
distinct  in  the  dark  ;  and  such  marks  would  be  very  useful 
even  after  daybreak. 

41.      METHOD    OF   COMMENCING    THE    TRACING    OF   A    PARAL- 
LEL  BY  THE    COMPASS.      PRECAUTION   USEFUL   IN  A  FOG. 

As  the  bearing  by  qompass  of  an  intended  parallel  may 
always  be  ascertained  beforehand,  it  appeared  desirable  to 
use  this  instrument  for  the  purpose  of  tracing  in  ^a  dark 
night ;  but  we  had  found  by  previous  experience  that  the 
common  dark  lantern  could  not  be  employed  so  as  to  give 
light  in  this  operation  without  being  seen  from  the  fortress. 
Lieutenant  Frome*  therefore  suggested  a  reading  lantern,  on 
the  principle  of  those  used  in  observatories,  which  is  repre- 
sented in  elevation  and  in  section  in  the  two  figures  an- 

*  Then  superintendent  of  the  Course  of  Surveying  and  Practical  As- 
tronomy, at  the  Royal  Engineer  establishment. 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


nexed,  having  air-holes  at 
top  and  bottom,  screened 
so  as  not  to  be  seen  from 
the  outside,  and  having 
its  lens  inclosed  in  a  tube, 
which  being  first  horizon- 
tal and  then  bent  vertical- 
ly downward,  with  an  ob- 
lique reflector  at  the  an- 
gle, throws  a  strong  circle 
of  light  upon  any  object 
placed  below  it.  Thus  the 
officer  in  charge  of  the  tracing  is  enabled  to  read  the  bear- 
ing of  a  compass  fixed  in  the  middle  of  a  six  feet  or  ten  feet 
rod,  which  rod  being  thereby  laid  in  the  proper  direction 
of  the  proposed  parallel,  the  white  tape  is  applied  to  the 
side  of  it,  and  thus  the  tracing  is  commenced,  and  may  af- 
terward be  verified,  from  tune  to  time,  so  long  as  the  direc- 
tion is  to  remain  unaltered,  by  applying  the  rod  to  the  tape, 
and  again  using  the  lantern,  to  see  if  the  same  bearing  has 
been  preserved.  The  best  sperm  oil  must  be  used. 

It  has  also  been  found  useful  in  a  fog  for  the  officer  em- 
ployed to  place  three  men  upon  the  tape  facing  toward  him, 
and  at  a  short  distance  from  each  other,  after  he  has  com- 
menced his  tracing,  and  then  to  move  on  himself  as  long  as 
he  can  distinguish  them  clearly,  taking  care  that  he  guides 
his  own  movement  by  seeing  that  they  always  cover  each 
other.  When  this  is  no  longer  practicable  he  halts  with  his 
foot  on  the  tape,  and  causes  them  to  advance  toward  him, 
preserving  their  distance  from  each  other,  and  not  deviat- 
ing from  the  tape,  which  will  enable  him  to  proceed  again 
with  his  tracing  in  the  same  manner,  after  the  first  man 
shall  have  reached  him.  It  may  be  advantageous  to  have 
these  men  dressed  in  white. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF   A    SIEGE.  95 

42.  RULES  FOR  ARRANGING  THE  SECOND  AND  THIRD  RE- 
LIEFS OF  WORKMEN,  FOR  A  FIRST  PARALLEL,  AND  THE 
APPROACHES  CONNECTED  WITH  IT. 

The  engineer  will  give  directions,  that  after  every  party 
of  twenty-five  men  shall  have  finished  their  task,  each  indi- 
vidual shall  lay  down  his  own  shovel  and  pickaxe,  close  to- 
gether, in  rear  of  the  spot  where  he  worked,  on  the  reverse 
of  the  trench,  and  near  to  the  brink  of  it.  Thus  the  tools 
being  arranged  by  pairs,  at  intervals  of  six  feet  apart,  or 
nearly  so,  will  save  the  trouble  of  marking  out  the  tasks  of  in- 
dividuals a  second  time.  The  sappers  will  take  care  to  pre- 
serve the  original  pickets  at  the  end  of  every  one  hundred  and 
fifty  feet,  and  if  the  tools  should  not  be  arranged  quite  regu- 
larly, one  of  them,  who  is  to  remain  on  the  spot,  may  employ 
himself  in  laying  them  out  better,  whilst  the  other  goes  to 
meet  and  conduct  a  new  party  to  the  same  ground. 

The  second  relief  of  men  of  the  line  will  parade  at  the 
engineers'  depot,  at  such  hour  as  may  have  been  previously 
fixed.  There  a  part  of  the  engineer  oflicers  on  duty,  and' 
one  sapper  from  each  portion  of  the  trenches,  will  be  as- 
sembled to  receive  them.  The  engineer  will  tell  off  one 
sapper  to  each  division  of  twenty-five  men,  as  before  ;  and 
the  whole  will  be  marched  by  divisions,  the  sapper  of  each 
party  leading  it,  until  they  reach  the  ground  allotted  for 
the  task  of  that  party. 

Preparatory  to  this  arrangement,  the  several  parties  being 
drawn  up  at  the  engineers'  depot  in  column,  let  them  be 
numbered  from  rear  to  front,  so  that  the  rear  division 
shall  now  be  No.  1,  and  the  front  division,  if  there  be  six- 
teen in  all,  shall  be  No.  16. 

In  this  order  let  them  be  made  to  file  off,  not  in  a  body, 
but  by  divisions,  singly,  and  successively,  with  an  interval 
of  some  yards  between  the  rear  of  one  division  and  the 
head  of  another,  to  prevent  confusion ;  and  let  each  sap- 


96  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

per,  acting  as  guide,  lead  his  division  straight  up  to  that 
picket,  which  marks  the  extreme  boundary  of  the  task  al- 
lotted for  it.  The  stationary  sappers  will  remain  at  those 
same  pickets,  ready  to  assist  in  distributing  the  workmen, 
as  soon  as  they  shall  arrive,  and  as  the  head  of  each  division 
approaches  them,  they  will  each  call  out  their  respective  num- 
bers, that  the  officer  commanding  the  division,  as  well  as 
the  sapper  who  acts  as  guide  to  it,  may  know  whether  it  is 
to  be  halted  there  or  not;  which  halt  will  of  course  take 
place,  as  soon  as  the  number  of  the  division  shall  corre- 
spond with  that  announced  by  the  stationary  sapper. 

When  thus  halted  and  fronted,  which  orders  should  be 
given  at  the  same  time,  the  men  of  each  division  will  be 
made  to  extend  over  the  whole  space  of  fifty  yards,  allotted 
as  their  respective  task,  by  forming  them  in  single  rank,  if 
that  should  not  have  been  done  before,  and  by  causing  each 
man,  after  facing  the  whole  to  the  rear  if  necessary,  to  ex- 
tend until  every  pair  of  tools  laid  out  on  the  reverse  of 
the  trench  shall  be  covered  by  a  workman. 

In  this  second  formation,  each  party  of  twenty-five  men 
will  begin  to  work  independently,  as  soon  as  they  shall  be  ex- 
tended on  their  own  ground,  without  waiting  for  the  others. 

It  may  perhaps  appear  almost  superfluous  to  observe,  that 
if  there  should  be  more  reliefs  than  two  required,  to  com- 
plete the  parallel,  the  third  relief  must  be  formed  precisely 
in  the  same  manner  that  has  just  been  described. 

If,  under  peculiar  circumstances,  any  strong  reason  should 
exist  against  leaving  the  tools  in  the  trenches,  the  stationary 
sapper  will  have  time  enough  to  mark  out  each  man's  task 
with  tracing  pickets,  during  the  interval  that  must  elapse 
between  the  quitting  of  one  relief  and  the  arrival  of  the 
next ;  or,  if  such  pickets  are  not  at  hand,  the  new  working 
party  may  be  made  to  extend  themselves  between  the  ex- 
treme points  with  sufficient  accuracy,  without  subdividing 
the  space  into  six-feet  portions  at  all. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  97 

43.  TIME  OF  PARADING  THE  SECOND  AND  THIRD  RELIEFS  OP 
WORKMEN,  FOR  A  FIRST  PARALLEL,  AND  THE  APPROACHES 
CONNECTED  WITH  IT. 

In  opening  the  trenches  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  com- 
mence at  dusk,  as  the  men,  having  no  cover,  would  be  too 
much  exposed  to  the  enemy's  fire,  if  such  a  thing  were  at- 
tempted by  daylight.  No  such  necessity,  however,  exists  in 
respect  to  the  second  relief  of  workmen.  If  therefore  a 
siege  should  be  conducted,  in  any  country,  at  a  season  when 
the  nights  are  ten  hours  long  or  upward,  the  second  relief 
should  be  ordered  to  parade  at  the  engineers'  depot,  at 
such  time  as  will  admit  of  all  the  necessary  arrangements 
being  got  through,  just  before  daylight,  in  order  that  they 
may  commence  filing  into  the  trenches  with  the  dawn  ;  for, 
considering  the  number  of  men  usually  required  at  this  pe- 
riod, in  a  siege  of  any  importance,  and  the  great  extent  of 
ground  they  are  to  cover,  it  appears  next  to  impossible  to 
form  the  second  relief  of  workmen  properly  in  the  dark. 
Indeed  the  attempt  might  lead  to  inextricable  confusion,  and 
it  is  altogether  unnecessary;  for  after  cover  is  once  obtained, 
the  work  of  half  a  day,  even  in  the  short  winter  days  of 
temperate  climates,  is  better  than  that  of  a  whole  night. 
Let  it  therefore  be  laid  down  as  a  rule,  that  in  the  formation 
of  parallels  and  approaches,  the  second  relief  of  workmen 
shall  never  enter  the  trenches  until  at  or  after  daybreak : 
and  that  the  third  relief,  when  three  are  employed,  shall 
enter  them  at  noon. 

Hence,  in  the  long  summer  days  of  northern  climates,  the 
periods  of  relieving  the  working  parties  in  the  course  of 
every  twenty-four  hours,  may  always  be  at  equal  intervals  of 
eight  hours,  not  otherwise. 
5 


98  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TEOOrS. 

Y.  Rules  for  Tracing  and  Commencing  the  Second 
Parallel,  and  the  Approaclie§  connected  with 
it,  by  the  Flying  Sap. 

44.    OF   THE   TRACING. 

In  commencing  the  second  parallel,  one  engineer  officer 
must  be  employed  in  tracing  each  portion  of  it,  and  another 
in  arranging  the  workmen  on  the  principle  before  explained 
in  treating  of  the  first  parallel;  but  there  are  several  variations 
in  the  details  of  the  duty;  and  in  the  first  place  it  may  be 
remarked  that  the  tracing  of  the  second  parallel,  and  of  the 
approaches  connected  with  it,  is  a  much  easier  task  than  that 
of  the  first  parallel  and  its  approaches. 

For  example,  if  we  suppose  the  first  parallel  "finished,  and 
that  the  second  parallel  is  to  be  established  at  any  average 
given  distance  in  front  of  it,  such  as  three  hundred  yards,  it 
is  obvious  that  the  engineers  employed  in  tracing  may  mark 
a  certain  number  of  equidistant  points  in  the  first  parallel,  at 
any  intervals  apart  they  may  judge  most  convenient,  from 
each  of  which  they  may  sally  out  at  dusk  and  measure  three 
hundred  yards  straight  toward  the  fortress.  This  will  give 
them  an  equal  number  of  points  in  the  proposed  second 
parallel,  from  which  they  may  detach  tape-bearers  to  the 
right  and  left,  in  sufficient  number  to  overlap  each  other  a 
little  when  they  go  to  the  full  extent  of  their  tapes.  If  they 
do  not  meet,  let  the  officer  superintending  the  tracing  move 
backward  or  forward,  when  arrived  at  the  extremity  of  one 
party  thus  detached,  and  he  will  be  sure  to  find  the  end  of 
the  corresponding  tape,  which  was  intended  to  have  been 
connected  with  it.  Then  let  him  cause  one  of  the  parties  to 
move  their  own  tape  forward,  and  the  other  to  move  their 
tape  backward,  until  they  meet,  and  the  error  will  be  cor- 
rected; and  the  tapes  for  marking  the  second  parallel  may 
thus  be  laid  out  with  sufficient  accuracy  for  all  practical 
purposes. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  99 

If  the  second  parallel  should  not  be  intended  to  be  exactly 
parallel  to  the  first,  it  will  be  obvious  that  it  may  be  laid  out 
correctly  enough,  after  consulting  the  plan  of  attack  fixed 
upon,  by  measuring  unequal  distances  toward  the  fortress 
instead  of  equal  ones,  from  the  points,  of  departure  taken  up 
in  the  first  parallel. 

In  pushing  out  approaches  from  a  first  parallel,  the  point 
from  whence  any  branch  is  to  commence,  as  well  as  the 
proper  alignment  of  it,  may  be  marked  or  ascertained  in  the 
day  time,  and  such  approaches  may  be  traced  with  white 
tape  at  dusk,  whilst  it  is  too  dark  for  the  enemy  to  discover 
this  operation,  but  not  dark  enough  to  prevent  persons  out- 
side from  distinguishing  the  outline  of  the  extreme  works  of 
the  fortress,  from  which  the  proposed  approaches  are  to  be 
defiladed. 

When  the  approaches  are  pushed  forward  in  front  of  the 
first  parallel,  as  far  as  the  intended  position  of  the  second 
parallel,  previously  to  the  commencement  of  the  latter,  which 
arrangement  is  very  common  in  a  siege,  the  tracing  of  the 
second  parallel  is  of  course  much  facilitated.  For  in  this 
case  all  that  is  to  be  done  will  be  to  connect  the  heads  of 
the  approaches  with  each  other  by  a  line  of  white  tapes,  the 
proper  direction  of  which  may  be  ascertained  beforehand,  in 
the  day  time. 

45.  OF  ARRANGING  THE  WORKING 
PARTY,  AND  COMMENCING  A  SECOND 
PARALLEL  BY  THE  FLYING  SAP. 

When  a  parallel  is  said  to  be  com- 
menced by  sap,  it  merely  implies  that 
gabions  are  used.  The  peculiar  ar- 
rangements and  manner  of  working 
with  them  described  in  this  article 
constitute  what  is  called  the  FLYING 
SAP. 


100  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

The  workmen  ordered  for  the  duty  of  commencing,  or,  as 
it  is  also  termed,  of  opening  the  second  parallel,  will  parade 
at  the  engineers'  depot  to  receive  their  tools  and  gabions,  in 
divisions  of  twenty-five  men,  who  must  be  formed  in  column 
in  single  rank. 

Every  man  is  to  carry  a  couple  of  two-feet  gabions,  hold- 
ing them  under  his  arms,  by  means  of  a  picket  two  feet  nine 
inches  long,  driven  transversely  through  each  of  them,  about 
fifteen  inches  from  the  top,  which  pickets  he  grasps  in  his 
hands. 

In  one  of  these  gabions  he  also  carries  a  pickaxe,  and  in 
the  other  a  shovel,  as  shown  in  the  foregoing  figure.  The 
iron  part  of  the  shovel  and  likewise  of  the  pickaxe,  rest  on 
the  top  of  their  respective  gabions,  and  are  secured  from 
falling,  by  passing  them  beyond  the  picket  ends,  which  pro- 
ject above  the  web,  whilst  their  helves  hang  down  inside. 
In  carrying  these  tools  in  the  gabions,  they  should  be  as 
near  to  the  man's  sides  as  possible.  The  pickaxe  may  there- 
fore come  entirely  under  one  of  his  arms,  but  the  shovel 
iron  standing  too  high  to  be  carried  in  this  position,  must 
be  a  little  to  the  rear  of  his  other  arm.  The  transverse  pick- 
ets must  not  be  driven  through  the  centre  of  each  gabion, 
but  nearer  to  one  side  of  it,  namely,  that  which  will  touch 
the  man's  thighs  after  he  takes  it  up.  (See  the  more  correct 
figure,  afterward  given  in  Article  53.). 

The  implements  necessary  for  each  division,  consisting  of 
fifty  gabions,  with  their  transverse  pickets,  and  a  shovel  and 
pickaxe  fixed  in  each  alternate  gabion,  must  be  previously 
laid  out  at  the  engineers'  depot,  in  successive  parallel  lines, 
at  central  intervals  of  about  six  feet  apart,  so  as  to  suit  the 
formation  of  the  column.  The  sappers  employed  in  this  duty 
must  be  well  acquainted  with  the  proper  mode  of  arranging 
the  pickets  and  tools,  and  strictly  cautioned  to  do  so  with 
the  greatest  care,  for  which  purpose  they  should  be  on! 
to  lift  up  each  pair  of  gabions  in  succession,  by  way  of  trial, 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    OF   A   SIEGE.  101 

after  the  pickets  and  tools  shall  be  fixed,  shifting  them,  ii 
inconveniently  placed.  If  the  working  party  should  be  so 
numerous  as  to  occupy  an  inconveniently  great  extent  ol 
ground  in  this  order,  the  depth  of  the  column  may  be  dimin- 
ished, by  laying  out  one  hundred  gabions  in  each  parallel 
line,  in  two  portions  of  fifty  gabions  each,  with  an  interval 
of  about  ten  feet  in  the  centre,  between  each  adjacent  por- 
tion. This  arrangement  will  suit  a  working  party  drawn 
up  in  grand  divisions,  instead  of  single  divisions  as  before 
explained. 

After  receiving  their  tools  and  gabions,  the  whole  work- 
ing party  must  advance  by  files,  in  single  rank,  to  the  point 
from  whence  they  are  to  extend ;  on  reaching  which  they 
will  be  formed  along  the  line  of  white  tape,  previously  laid, 
as  before  directed  in  Article  37,  excepting  that  no  marks  on 
the  tape  'are  necessary  in  the  flying  sap  ;  for  the  two  gabions 
carried  by  each  workman  measure  his  task. 

As  they  come  up  into  their  proper  places  on  the  reverse 
side  of  the  white  tape,  the  men  will  successively  put  down 
their  gabions  close  together  in  front  of  the  line,  so  as  to  clear 
it  by  two  or  three  inches. 

The  sapper  who  assists  in  superintending  the  extension,  is 
to  correct  the  position  of  every  successive  pair  of  gabions, 
which  it  is  difficult  for  the  workman  himself  to  place  proper- 
ly on  setting  them  down.  The  engineer  officer  directing 
will  take  care  to  enforce  accuracy,  and  to  prevent  hurry  and 
confusion.  As  soon  as  each  workman  has  got  his  gabions 
placed  by  assistance  of  the  sapper,  he  will  disengage  his 
tools  and  pickets,  as  it  is  useless  to  waste  the  latter  by 
leaving  them  in  the  gabions.  They  may  be  laid  down  in 
r«-:ir  of,  and  close  to  the  gabions.  The  tools  must  be  laid 
down  behind  the  two  gabions,  which  mark  each  man's  task, 
in  the  manner  before  described  in  treating  of  the  first 
parallel. 

The  following  figure  represents  this  arrangement,  showing 


102  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


_|  "    V      I  u     V     1  — u   y      | u    ^_J 

T  T  T  T  T 


the  position  in  which  the  gabions  and  tools  of  five  workmen 
are  placed,  the  former  in  front,  the  latter  in  rear  of  the  white 
tape. 

Whilst  the  extension  of  the  whole  working  party  is  thus' 
going  on  progressively,  the  men  first  posted  will  sit  doun 
behind  their  own  gabions  and  tools,  as  soon  as  the  latter  are 
properly  laid  out,  and  will  wait  in  perfect  silence  for  the 
order  to  commence  work,  which  will  be  passed  on  from  the 
extreme  points  of  the  parallel,  as  soon  as  the  whole  opera- 
tion shall  be  completed. 

Every  man  will  then  commence  digging  in  rear  of  his 
own  two  gabions,  which  he  will  fill  with  all  expedition,  pat- 
ting the  earth  well  down  before  he  throws  any  part  of  it 
over. 

46.    OF   TRACING   AND    COMMENCING   APPROACHES   BY  THE 
FLYING   SAP. 

The  approaches  in  front  of  the  second  parallel,  and  some- 
times even  those  immediately  in  rear  of  it,  are  commenced 
by  the  flying  sap. 

The  method  of  tracing  them  is  precisely  the  same  as  if  no 
gabions  were  used,  and  has  already  been  explained  in  Article 
39.  The  method  of  extending  the  workmen,  and  of  commen- 
cing approaches  by  the  flying  sap,  is  the  same  as  in  commen- 
cing the  second  parallel. 

In  tracing  approaches,  which  are  to  be  executed  by  the 


PRACTICAL     OPERATIONS    OF   A    SIEGE. 


103 


flying  sap,  it  is  un- 
necessary to  cut  the 
tape  for  the  purpose 
of  forming  a  return. 
Instead  of  which,  let 
four  pairs  of  gabions 
be  moved  from  the 
head  of  each  branch 
adjoining  to  an  angle, 
and  placed  in  prolon- 
gation of  the  next 
branch  in  front  of  it. 
Thus,  for  example, 
in  the  foregoing  fig- 
ure, if  A  B  and  B  G 
be  the  original  form 
of  an  angle  of  the  zig- 
zags, as  traced  by 
the  white  tape,  the 
four  pairs  of  gabions 
originally  placed  at  the  head  of  the  branch  A  B,  are  removed 
from  the  position  d  B  to  B  e,  where  they  arc  placed  in  pro. 
longation  of  the  advanced  branch  B  C,  produced  toward  the 
rear,  and  thus  they  form  the  return,  at  the  angle  B. 

47.  OF  THE  PROPER  TIME  FOR  PARADING  THE  SEVERAL  RE- 
LIEFS OF  WORKMEN  FOR  THE  SECOND  PARALLEL,  AND 
THE  APPROACHES  CONNECTED  WITH  IT. 

The  proper  periods  for  the  relief  of  the  workmen  must  be 
regulated  precisely  on  the  same  principle  as  those  of  the  first 
parallel. 

I  before  named  at  least  an  hour  and  a  half  before  sunset 
as  tin-  parade  time  of  the  first  relief  at  the  engineers'  depot. 
Il  is  possible  that  the  necessary  arrangements  may  be  made 
in  rattier  less  than  this  time,  but  I  have  doubts  on  the  subject ; 


104  MANUAL    FOR    KXGTNEIOii    TROOPS. 

and  one  thing  is  certain,  that  it  would  be  better  for  the  work- 
ing parties  to  be  kept  waiting  an  hour  longer  than  the  time 
actually  required  in  those  preparations,  than  that  they  should 
be  ten  minutes  too  late;  for  if  the  dark  should  surprise  them 
before  the  necessary  arrangements  are  fully  completed,  the 
whole  night's  work  may  be  lost  in  a  scene  of  inextricable 
confusion.* 

It  is  of  the  most  essential  importance  that  every  thing 
shall  be  completely  prepared  beforehand  at  the  engineers' 
depot,  so  that  whatever  materials  and  tools  shall  be  as^i-m-d 
to  each  individual  of  the  working  party  to  carry,  shall  be 
put  together  and  laid  out  for  him,  in  good  order,  without 
giving  him  any  trouble  in  what  belongs  to  arrangement. 
Unless  this  system  be  adopted  for  facilitating  the  commence- 
ment of  the  work,  it  might  take  the  whole  afternoon  to  get 
through  the  preliminary  arrangements. 

For  the  reason  before  stated  (Article  43),  the  formation 
and  distribution  of  the  second  relief  of  the  working  parties 
of  men  employed  in  the  execution  of  a  second  parallel,  or 
of  the  approaches  connected  with  it,  should  not  be  attempted 
till  daylight,  when  it  will  be  comparatively  easy. 

Let  it  be  understood  that  the  same  necessity  does  not  ex- 
ist for  waiting  till  daylight  before  the  second  relief  are  set 
to  work  in  the  other  operations  of  the  siege,  in  which,  when 
the  nature  of  them  shall  come  to  be  explained,  it  will  be 
evident  that  there  is  much  less  risk  of  confusion,  for  the  men 
are  either  more  concentrated  on  particular  spots,  as  in  the 
construction  of  batteries,  or  more  subdivided,  at  the  same 
time  that  fewer  are  employed,  as  in  the  execution  of  the 
final  operations  of  a  siege,  most  of  which  are  commenced 
by  the  regular  sap,  or  by  mining. 

*  At  the  siege  of  Flushing,  when  I  was  the  executive  engineer  on  duty  of 
the  first  relief,  with  my  brigade,  a  night's  work  of  about  five  hundred  men 
was  entirely  thrown  away  from  this  cause,  to  my  extreme  mortification. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF    A    SIEGE.  105 

48.   REMARKS    ON   THE    ABOVE   ARRANGEMENTS    FOR   COM- 
MENCING  THE    SECOND    PARALLEL,    ETC. 

To  carry  two  gabions,  with  their  whole  weight,  as  well  as 
that  of  the  pickaxe  and  shovel,  resting  entirely  on  the  hands, 
may  be  acknowledged  to  be  rather  fatiguing,  but  there  is  no 
means  of  obviating  this  inconvenience,  except  by  having 
shoulder  boards  and  slings,  such  as  are  used  with  milk-pails. 
But  to  provide  such  articles  for  so  temporary  a  service  as 
the  commencement  of  the  second  parallel,  would  not  be 
worth  while;  and  therefore  it  is  best  that  the  working  par- 
ties employed  in  this  operation  should  submit  to  the  incon- 
venience for  a  short  time,  which  cannot  bear  hard  upon 
robust,  able-bodied  men  like  the  British  iniantry. 

49.  OBJECTIONS  TO  CROWDING  THE  WORKMEN  IN  COMMENCING 
A  SECOND  PARALLEL. 

If  to  consult  the  ease  of  the  workmen  in  marching  from 
the  depot  of  gabions  to  the  position  marked  out  for  the 
second  parallel,  each  man  should  be  required  to  carry  one 
gabion  only,  a  much  greater  evil  would  follows  As  every 
gabion  in  the  flying  sap  occupies  only  two  feet,  it  would  be 
absolutely  impossible  for  the  whole  number  of  men  who 
carried  the  gabions  to  work  together  properly.  Hence  one- 
half  of  them  must  either  be  sent  back  to  the  camp  after  having 
deposited  their  gabions,  or  must  get  out  of  the  way  and  re- 
main idle,  thus  uselessly  harassing  or  exposing  to  the  ene- 
my's fire  double  the  number  of  men  that  can  work  to v  ad- 
vantage; for  it  has  been  found  in  field-works,  whenever  a 
line  of  excavators  has  been  crowded  into  a  smaller  space 
than  four  feet  per  man,  which  we  consider  the  minimum 
pace  that  ought  to  be  allowed,  that  instead  of  expediting 
the  work,  it  has  retarded  it;  for,  being  in  each  other's  way, 
and  in  danger  of  being  wounded  by  each  other's  tools,  which 
has  occasionally  happened  even  in  working  by  daylight,  :i 
5* 


10G  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

part  of  the  men  have  necessarily  stood  still,  and  much  con- 
fusion has  ensued,  which  would  of  course  have  been  con- 
siderably aggravated  had  men  thus  crowded  been  employed 
in  the  dark,  and  before  an  enemy. 

50.  MODE    OF   CARRYING   ONE   GABION    ONLY,  WITH   TOOLS. 

Excepting,  however,  those  em- 
ployed in  the  commencement  of  a 
second  parallel,  or  of  the  approaches 
connected  with  it  by  the  flying  s:ij>, 
who  should  carry  two  gabions,  it 
may  not  always  be  necessary  to  re- 
quire the  workmen  in  a  siege  to 
carry  more  than  one  gabion  with 
their  tools.  In  this  case  the  gabion 
is  carried  on  the  left  shoulder,  with 
the  pickaxe  previously  attached  to 
it  in  the  manner  before  described; 
or,  for  greater  security,  with  the 
point  of  the  iron  passed  between  two 
parts  of  the  web,  near  the  top  of  the 

gabion,  which  must  always  be  to  the  Year;  for  this  being 
naturally  carried  a  little  higher  than  the  front,  prevents  the 
pickaxe  from  dropping  out.  The  shovel  is  carried  in  the 
right  hand,  at  the  trail,  with  the  iron  to  the  front,  as  shown 
in  the  foregoing  figure. 

VI.  Of  Arming  the  Working  Parties  in  si  Siege. 

51.  WHETHER   WORKING   PARTIES   IN   A   SIEGE    SHOULD   BE 

ARMED    OR   NOT. 

It  appears  to  me  that  the  working  parties  employed  in 
opening  the  trenches  on  the  first  night  of  a  siege,  ought  not 
to  carry  their  arms  with  them.  They  must  necessarily  bo 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  107 

protected  by  strong  covering  parties,  destined  for  the  special 
duty  of  repulsing  sorties.  To  call  upon  the  working  parties 
also  to  assist  in  this  service,  would  only  create  confusion 
without  adequate  benefit;  for  they  are  spread  over  so  great  an 
extent  of  ground,  that  they  could  scarcely  collect  their  arms, 
and  form  in  sufficient  time  to  be  of  much  use  ;  and  if  once 
formed  as  a  military  body,  no  more  work  could  be  expected 
from  them.  In  the  event  of  sorties,  therefore,  they  should 
remain  at  their  post,  if  sufficiently  protected  by  the  covering 
parties.  If  not,  let  them  be  ordered  to  take  up  their  tools, 
form  by  divisions,  and  in  that  order  file  independently  to  the 
rear,  each  division  being  always  collected  as  an  organized 
body,  under  its  own  officers,  ready  to  return  to  its  post  in 
the  trenches,  on  receiving  orders  to  that  cllirt. 

This  remark  applies  chiefly  to  the  first  parallel,  and  to  the 
approaches  in  rear  of  or  near  to  it.  But  when  the  operations 
are  more  advanced,  as  in  the  second  parallel,  and  in  other 
parts  usually  commenced  by  the  flying  sap,  the  working  par- 
ties being  now  much  nearer'to  the  fortress,  may  be  allowed 
to  take  their  arms  in  order  to  give  them  confidence ;  but 
they  should  carry  the  musket  and  bayonet  only,  without  ac- 
coutrements, because  it  is  impossible  for  men  to  work  with 
their  accoutrements  on ;  and  if  they  take  them  off,  they 
could  not  put  them  on  again  and  adjust  them  in  proper  time, 
in  the  event  of  a  sudden  sortie;  besides  which,  the  men  of 
the  working  parties,  if  provided  with  accoutrements,  could 
not  be  distinguished  from  the  guards  of  the  trenches  ;  and 
thris  lazy  or  ill-disposed  individuals  might  often  have  an  op- 
portunity of  skulking  from  their  work  for  a  great  part  of  the 
niu'lit,  without  detection.  The  working  parties  when  armed 
should  therefore  only  carry  a  few  ball  cartridges  in  their 
pockets  or  foraging  caps,  and  they  should  not  even  be  al- 
lowed to  take  their  bayonet  scabbards  with  them,  which 
might  be  liable  to  be  lost. 


108  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

52.  METHOD  OF  ARRANGING  WORKING  PARTIES  WITH  ARMS, 
WHEN  THEY  COMMENCE  A  PARALLEL  OR  APPROACH  WITH- 
OUT GABIONS. 

In  all  cases  when  working  parties  are  to  carry  their  arms, 
they  should  sling  them  behind  their  backs,  after  the  fashion 
of  the  old  British  grenadiers,  that  is,  with  the  sling  all  to 
the  front  of  the  body  over  the  right  shoulder,  and  under  the 
left  arm,  and  with  the  firelock  behind,  the  butt  downward* 
and  muzzle  upward ;  and  as  accoutrements  are  not  to  be 
carried,  the  bayonet  should  previously  be  fixed  in  reverse, 
or  pointing  downward.  In  this  order  they  will  march  to 
the  engineers'  depot  and  receive  their  tools,  which  they  will 
be  able  to  carry  with  ease,  as  both  their  hands  are  at  liberty. 
As  soon  as  the  extension  shall  r/e  made  behind  the  line  of 
white  tape,  which  must  be  done  precisely  in  the  same  man- 
ner, whether  arms  are  carried  or  not,  and  which  was  befo're 
described  in  Articles  37  and  38,  each  workman,  after  laying 
down  his  tools  in  their  proper  position  behind  the  white  tape, 
will  unsling  his  firelock,  and  fix  his  bayonet  properly,  and 
afterward,  when  the  ground  behind  him  shall  be  clear,  in 
consequence  of  the  remainder  of  the  working  party  having 
moved  on.  he  will  face  about  and  march  three  full  paces  to 
the  rear,  and  ground  his  arms,  in  the  manner  shown  in  the 
annexed  figure,  in  which  the  dotted  line  represents  so  much 
of  the  line  of  white  tape  as  is  sufficient  to  mark  the  ground 
occupied  by  five  workmen. 

O=D       O=o        O=o      O=^J       O=-fl 

T   T   T   T   T 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  100 

53.  METHOD  OF  ARRANGING  WORKING  PARTIES  WITH  ARMS, 
WHEN  THEY  ARE  TO  WORK  AT  A  PARALLEL  OR  APPROACH, 
COMMENCED  BY  THE  FLYING  SAP. 

Case  I.  When  the  men  are  to 
carry  two  gabions  each,  as  well  as 
tools. 

In  this  case  the  tools  and  gabions 
are  to  be  arranged  beforehand,  by 
pairs,  in  the  manner  before  de- 
scribed in  Article  45,  a  picket  being 
driven  through  each  gabion  to  carry 
it  by. 

The  men  of  the  working  party, 
having  their  arms  slung  behind 
their  backs,  with  bayonets  fixed  the 
reverse  way,  will  carry  their  gabions 
and  tools  as  shown  in  the  annexed 

figure,  and  they  will  place  the  former  and  lay  down  the  lat- 
ter, after  being  extended,  in  the  manner  explained  in  Article 
45  ;  and  when  this  is  done,  each  man  will  unsling  his  firelock 
and  fix  his  bayonet  properly,  and  afterward  ground  his  arms 
three  full  paces  in  rear  of  his  own  tools,  as  directed  in 
Article  52. 

Case  II.  When  the  men  are  to  carry  one  gabion  and 
their  tools,  which  applies  only  to  the  continuation  of  the 
work. 

The  firelock  will  be  slung  and  the  bayonet  fixed,  as  in 
the  two  preceding  articles,  whilst  the  gabion  and  pickaxe 
attached  to  it  will  be  carried  on  the  left  shoulder,  and  the 
shovel  trailed  in  the  right  hand,  as  explained  in  Article 
50. 

54.   FURTHER   REMARKS   ON  THE    ARMING    OF   WORKING 
PARTIES. 

It  was  before  stated,  that  the  working  parties  who  open 


110  MANUAL  FOE  ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

the  trenches  on  the  first  night  of  a  siege,  should  not  be 
allowed  to  take  their  arms,  considering  the  very  extended 
order  in  which  they  are  formed  for  work,  and  also  their  dis- 
tance from  the  fortress.  It  is  to  be  remarked,  however, 
that  the  chief  objection  to  taking  their  arms  is  the  former 
circumstance,  of  their  being  so  much  dispersed.  But  if  a 
greater  number  of  men  be  concentrated  on  one  spot,  as  in 
the  construction  of  large  batteries,  redoubts,  or  intrench- 
ments,  the  working  parties  may  be  allowed  to  take  their 
arms  ;  for  in  this  case  a  considerable  body  of  men  may  be 
speedily  formed  to  repulse  a  sudden  attack,  who  might  after- 
ward resume  their  work  without  much  confusion,  as  they 
would  probably  be  able  to  maintain  their  ground,  without 
retiring  to  the  rear. 

The  propriety  of  this  arrangement  will  be  obvious,  by 
considering  that  a  ten-gun  battery  alone  might  give  employ- 
ment to  nearly  two  hundred  men,  within  a  space  of  about 
eighty  yards,  whereas  in  a  first  parallel  the  same  number  of 
men  would  be  spread  over  an  extent  of  four  hundred  yards. 

Even  in  this  case,  accoutrements  and  bayonet  scabbards 
ought  not  to  be  taken,  for  the  reasons  before  assigned. 

VII.  Rulc§  for   Executing  tlie  First   Parallel,  and 
tiic  Approaches  Connected  with  it. 

The  methods  of  arranging  and  distributing  the  workmen, 
in  commencing  the  first  and  second  parallels,  and  the  ap- 
proaches connected  with  them,  in  a  siege,  having  now  been 
fully  discussed,  it  remains  to  explain  the  nature  and  execu- 
tion of  those  works  in  detail,  which  will  form  the  subject  of 
the  present  and  of  the  following  section. 

55.    OF   THE   PROFILE   PROPER  FOR  A  FIRST   PARALLEL.* 

The  profile  usually  adopted  by  us  of  late  consists  of  a 

*  This  profile  is  illustrated  by  the  figure  afterward  given  in  Article  59. 


PRACTICAL     OPERATIONS    OF    A    SIEGE.  Ill 

trench  eleven  and  a  half  feet  wide  at  bottom,  three  feet  deep 
ill  front,  and  three  and  a  half  feet  in  rear,  with  a  reverse 
slope  having  a  base  of  three  and  a  half  feet,  being  equal  to 
its  height,  and  with  a  step  of  made  earth,  one  and  a  half 
feet  wride  at  bottom  and  one  and  a  half  feet  high,  added  to 
the  front  of  the  original  trench  when  half  finished,  which 
therefore  reduces  the  net  width  of  the  sole  of  the  trench 
from  eleven  and  a  half  to  ten  feet. 

The  earth  of  the  trench,  being  thrown  forward  toward 
the  fortress  attacked,  forms  the  parapet  of  the  parallel, 
which  is  not  rammed. 

A  berm  of  one  and  half  feet  is  left  between  the  front  of 
the  trench  and  the  base  of  the  interior  slope  of  the  para- 
pet, which  serves  as  a  banquette,  to  fire  over  the  parapet, 
which  on  being  left  to  take  its  own  form  usually  proves  to 
be  about  five  feet  high,  after  the  trench  is  finished.  The 
inside  of  the  parapet  should  then  be  smoothed,  the  berm 
widened  if  necessary,  and  any  unseemly  irregularity  in  the 
height  of  the  parapet  should  be  removed,  but  it  is  not  worth 
while  to  cut  it  generally  lower  than  the  form  which  it  may 
naturally  assume;  and  if  therefore  its  height  should  be  too 
great  to  fire  over  conveniently,  let  a  small  narrow  step  be  cut 
on  the  interior  slope  a  little  higher  than  the  berm,  for  a  man 
to  stand  upon  whilst  firing. 

A  regular  banquette,  like  that  of  more  permanent  works, 
is  considered  unnecessary. 

56.  GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  THE  TASKING  OF  MILITARY 
WORKING  PARTIES,  IN  THE  FORMATION  OF  A  FIRST  PAR- 
ALLEL. 

By  repeated  experiments  at  Chatham,  tried  with  the  ut- 
most care,  it  was  found  that  a  portion  of  parallel  of  the  dimen- 
sions above  stated,  which  involves  two  hundred  and  sixty- 
one  cubic  feet,  or  nine  and  two-thirds  cubic  yards  of  exca- 
vation, may  be  completed  in  an  average  of  five  hours  per 


112  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEEK   TEOOPS. 

man,  in  soft  soil,  which  requires  little  or  no  picking,  and  an 
average  of  nine  and  a  quarter  hours  per  man,  in  hard  soil. 

The  most  difficult  soil  that  we  could  possibly  find  in  this 
neighborhood,  which  consisted  of  a  concretion  of  flint- 
gravel,  sand  and  clay,  required  an  average  often  and  a  half 
hours.  In  all  those  experiments,  the  task  of  each  man  was 
two  yards  in  length  ;  and  we  are  of  opinion,  that  a  shorter 
portion  of  trench  work  ought  in  no  case  to  be  allotted  to 
individual  workmen,  on  the  night  of  opening  the  trenches 
in  a  siege.  For,  as  was  before  observed,  if  men  be  crowded 
in  too  small  a  space,  they  are  liable  to  wound  each  other 
with  their  pickaxes,  and  finding  that  they  are  in  each  other's 
way,  a  part  of  them  will  be  tempted  to  stand  still ;  and 
thus  by  increasing  their  numbers  beyond  a  certain  propor- 
tion, the  casualties  from  the  enemy's  fire  will  of  course  be 
increased,  without  obtaining  a  proportional  increase  in  the 
quantity  of  work  performed. 

The  sappers  employed  in  those  experiments  were  gener- 
ally artificers,  not  previously  inured  to  labor,  with  the  pick- 
axe and  shovel,  until  they  joined  this  establishment,  and 
not  by  any  means  more  robust  men  than  the  British  infan- 
try usually  are.  It  is  evident,  that  many  intermediate  qual- 
ities of  soil  may  occur  on  service,  between  the  soft  soil,  which 
required  only  an  average  of  five  hours'  labor,  and  the  very 
hard  soil,  that  required  ten  and  a  half;  and  of  course,  in 
employing  workmen  of  the  same  physical  powers  and  dex- 
terity, the  time  for  completing  a  parallel  might  vary,  between 
the  minimum  average  of  five  hours  and  the  maximum  of 
ten  and  a  half  hours.  In  those  experiments,  the  men  were 
tasked  individually,  and  in  all  cases  some  got  through  their 
task  in  nearly  half  the  time  of  others  ;  but  in  the  very  worst 
soil,  the  time  of  the  slowest  workman  did  not  exceed  thir- 
teen and  one  quarter  hours. 

In  tasking  a  working  party  of  the  line  on  service,  the  task 
of  fifty  yards  for  each  party  of  twenty-five  men  ought  to  be 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF    A    5IKGE.  113 

general,  not  individual ;  for  although  a  good  workman  may 
do  twice  as  much  as  a  bad  one  in  the  same  time,  yet  if  both 
do  their  best,  it  will  be  no  greater  exertion  to  the  one  than 
to  the  other ;  and  when  a  whole  party  of  soldiers  are  jointly 
responsible,  they  will  scarcely  allow  any  one  man  to  evade 
his  due  share  of  worfc. 

57.    FIRST   TASK    IN    EXECUTING  A  FIKST    PARALLEL  BY 
THREE    RELIEFS. 

Considering  that  the  first  relief  of  workmen  are  more  har- 
assed by  preliminary  arrangements  than  the  others  who 
succeed  them,  whilst  they  cut  their  trench  to  the  standard 
length  of  six  feet,  let  them  make  it  three  feet  deep  in  front, 
three  feet  three  inches  deep  in  rear,  and  five  feet  wide  from 
front  to  rear,  as  shown  in  the  annexed  figure. 


The  above  will  amount. to  ninety-three  and  three-quarters 
cubic  feet,  which  is  nearly  but  not  quite  equal  to  three  and 
a  half  cubic  yards  of  excavation,  which  may  be  executed  by 
able-bodied  men,  with  moderate  exertion,  in  from  one  hour 
and  three-quarters  to  three  hours  and  a  half,  or  four  hours 
at  the  utmost.  It  really  would  be  trifling  with  the  service, 
to  allot  a  smaller  task  than  the  above  to  any  set  of  men  de- 
serving of  the  name. 

58.    SECOND  TASK  IN  EXECUTING  A  FIRST   PARALLEL  BY 
THREE  RELIEFS. 

In  this  task,  an  equal  number  of  men  being  employed  at 
the  standard  rate  of  six  feet  to  each  man,  as  before,  let  the 


MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

trench  f>e  widened  by  cutting  it  four  feet  six  inches  more  to 
the  rear,  which  would  make  it  nine  feet  six  inches  wide  in  all, 
but  for  a  step  of  eighteen  inches  in  width  in  front  of  the 
trench,  which  is  formed  by  this  set  of  men,  and  which  re- 
duces the  net  width  of  excavation  at  the  sole  of  the  trench, 
to  eight  feet,  as  represented  in  the  annexed  figure.  The 
depth  in  rear  must  be  increased  to  three  feet  five  inches. 


This  task  involves  ninety  cubic  feet,  or  three  and  a  half 
yards  of  excavation,  being  a  little  less  than  the  former,  but 
the  distance  to  throw  the  earth  is  greater,  and  on  the  whole 
it  is  somewhat  more  laborious  than  the  former  task,  and  is 
made  purposely  so  for  the  reason  before  implied,  namely, 
that  the  men  of  the  second  relief  are  exempted  from  those 
preliminary  arrangements  that  fall  to  the  lot  of  the  iirst 
working  party. 

59.   GENERAL   DESCRIPTION  OF  THE   THIRD   TASK   IN   EXECUT- 
ING  A   FIRST   PARALLEL   BY   THREE   RELIEFS. 

In  this  task,  an  equal  number  of  men  being  still  employed, 
at  the  standard  rate  of  six  feet  to  each  man,  as  before,  let 
the  trench  be  widened  by  cutting  two  feet  more  to  the  rear, 
which  will  complete  the  sole  of  the  trench,  making  it  three 
feet  six  inches  in  extreme  depth.  This  being  done,  let  the 
reverse  slope  of  the  trench  be  formed  at  an  angle  of  fort  y- 
five  degrees,  making  the  base  of  the  slope  throe  feet  six 
inches,  being  equal  to  its  depth. 


PKACTICAL   OPERATIONS    OF   A   SIEGE.  115 


3'.  6" 


The  quantity  of  excavation  in  this  task  amounts  to  about 
seventy-eight  and  a  quarter  cubic  feet,  which  is  equal  to 
two  and  eight-ninths  cubic  yards  only,  but  owing  to  the 
great  distance  that  the  earth  must  be  thrown  to  clear  the 
parapet,  which  cannot  be  done  at  one  heave,  as  in  the  first 
task  throughout,  and  in  part  of  the  second  task,  and  owing  also 
to  the  necessity  of  causing  this  party  to  make  a  complete 
finish  of  the  work,  by  putting  every  thing  in  order,  trim- 
ming the  parapet,  widening  the  berm,  forming  a  small  step 
as  a  banquette  on  a  higher  level  if  required,  besides  making 
ools  and  drains  to  secure  the  trench  against  rain,  as  will 
be  described  in  the  next  article ;  I  conceive  that  this  task 
will  probably  require  rather  more  time  than  either  of  the 
two  former  tasks  to  bring  it  to  a  conclusion,  but  it  is  not  a 
more  trying  operation,  as  the  men  have  the  advantage  of 
being  well  covered  when  they  begin.  The  foregoing  figure 
represents  the  profile  of  a  finished  parallel,  such  as  has  been 
described. 

CO.  REMARKS  ON  PRESERVING  THE  TRENCHES  DRY.  THAT 
THE  WORK  NECESSARY  FOR  EFFECTING  THIS  OBJECT  MAY 
SOMETIMES  REQUIRE  A  SPECIAL  WORKING  PARTY. 

A VI  i en  the  ground  is  marshy,  it  must  of  course  be  exceed- 
ingly difficult  to  preserve  the  trenches  dry  in  a  siege;  but 
when  the  evil  only  arises  from  heavy  and  continued  rains, 
the  following  measures  must  be  adopted,  in  order  to  effect 
that  object. 

Let  drains  be  cut  from  the  reverse  of  the  trenches  into  all 


116  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

valleys  or  hollows,  which,  by  being  on  a  lower  level,  can 
carry  off  the  water,  and  let  cesspools  of  about  two  feet 
square,  and  a  foot  or  two  lower  than  the  sole  of  the  trench, 
be  made  in  the  reverse  thereof,  at  intervals  of  about  fifty 
yards ;  not  however  making  such  cesspools  exactly  equi-dis_ 
tant,  but  in  all  low  points,  where  the  rain-water  shows  a  ten. 
dency  to  stagnate.  They  must  be  cut  entirely  in  rear  of  the 
trench,  so  as  not  to  diminish  its  regular  width,  and  the  sides 
sloped,  if  necessary,  to  prevent  the  earth  from  falling  in. 

Cesspools  of  this  description  will  keep  the  trenches  as  dry 
as  can  be  expected  ;  but  in  excessive  rains  it  may  be  neces- 
sary to  bale  out  the  water  occasionally,  for  which  purpose 
shovels  will  answer. 

In  short  the  rule  to  keep  a  trench  dry  in  rainy  weather 
is,  to  take  such  measures  as  to  prevent  it  from  becoming 
a  drain  to  the  neighboring  ground  which  wrould  from  time 
to  time  convert  it  into  the  channel  of  a  torrent. 

Nothing  therefore  but  the  rain  which  falls  vertically  down 
upon  the  trench  itself  should  be  admitted,  and  this  surface 
water,  which  cannot  be  excluded,  will  never  annoy  the  troops 
in  any  considerable  degree,  provided  that  the  above  men- 
tioned precautions,  of  cutting  cesspools  at  intervals  and  of 
occasional  baling,  be  resorted  to.  The  rear  of  the  sole  of 
the  trench  may  also  be  cut  in  the  form  of  a  small  drain, 
from  cesspool  to  cesspool. 

The  arrangements  described  in  this  article  must  generally 
be  made  a  part  of  the  task  of  the  third  or  last  relief  of 
men,  employed  in  finishing  any  portion  of  the  trenches,  ex- 
cepting when  necessity  requires  any  part  of  them  to  be 
can-lied  into  effect  at  an  earlier  period.  The  formation  of  a 
drain  leading  into  a  valley  may  sometimes  require  a  special 
working  party  destined  for  this  object  exclusively. 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   OF   A    SIEGE.  117 

61.  FURTHER  REMARKS  OX  THE  EXECUTION  OF  PARALLELS. 
THAT  EACH  RELIEF  OF  WORKMEN  SHOULD  BE.  ALLOWED 
TO  QUIT  THE  TRENCHES,  ON  FINISHING  THEIR  TASK  TO 
THE  SATISFACTION  OF  THE  ENGINEERS  ON  DUTY. 

As  a  matter  of  mere  labor,  it  would  evidently  be  better 
to  cut  the  front  step  of  the  trench  out  of  the  solid  ground, 
instead  of  forming  it  afterward,  with  loose  earth  from  the 
rear ;  but  as  the  first  working  parties  have  to  work  in  the 
dark,  often  exposed  and  always  expecting  to  be  exposed  to 
fire,  it  is  of  importance  to  simplify  their  task  as  much  as 
possible,  which  cannot  be  more  effectually  done  than  by 
the  arrangement  of  leaving  the  step  to  be  formed  afterward, 
by  the  second  relief,  who  at  this  period  will  have  the  advan- 
tage of  working  by  daylight. 

Sometimes  we  have  formed  our  parallels,  with  a  reverse 
step,  instead  of  a  slope  in  rear,  making  this  step  eighteen 
inches  in  width,  and  equal  in  height  to  one  foot  nine  inches, 
or  to  one  half  of  the  extreme  depth  of  the  trench,  as  shown 
in  the  annexed  figure. 


This  construction,  which  diminishes  the  labor  of  the  third 
task  by  twenty-one  cubic  feet,  or  seven-ninths  of  a  cubic 
yard,  is  quite  as  good  as  the  former,  excepting  for  the 
passage  of  carriages,  which  enter  into  or  issue  out  of  a 
trench,  more  conveniently  by  means  of  a  slope,  than  by 
steps. 

When  the  working  parties  have  a  given  task  allotted  to 
each  relief,  which  in  the  construction  of  parallels  ai.d  ap- 


118  MANUAL  FOE  ENGINEER  TKOOPS. 

preaches  is  the  best  arrangement,  or  rather  indispensably 
necessary  ;  each  party  of  twenty-five  men  should  be  allowed 
to  quit  the  trenches  as  soon  as  they  shall  have  finished  their 
task  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  engineer  on  duty,  who  must 
of  course  previously  ascertain  this  point  by  actual  measure- 
ment, in  which  he  will  be  assisted  by  the  sappers  of  the  di- 
vision ;  and  in  so  doing  he  should  be  very  strict,  rather 
measuring  over  than  under ;  for  as  all  the  tasks  are  easy,  it 
would  not  be  fair  to  throw  any  part  of  the  labor  of  the 
first  upon  the  second,  or  of  the  second  upon  the  third  relief 
of  workmen. 

In  case  of  any  gratuity  being  promised  to  the  working 
parties  by  the  general  commanding,  for  the  execution  of  a 
particular  work,  it  should  never  be  granted  without. a  cer- 
tificate in  writing  from  the  engineer  on  duty  in  the  trenches, 
that  they  finished  their  task  to  his  satisfaction.* 

62.     ON    THE    EXECUTION     OF   THE   APPROACHES    CONNECTED 
WITH  THE  FIEST   PARALLEL. 

The  rules  for  tracing  the  approaches  connected  with  the 
first  parallel,  and  for  commencing  the  work,  have  already 
been  explained.  It  now  only  remains  to  treat  of  the  exe- 
cution. 

The  profile  of  an  approach  so  nearly  resembles  that  of  a 
parallel,  and  the  quantity  of  labor  necessary  for  the  com- 
pletion of  both  differs  so  little,  that,  generally  speaking, 
the  same  rules  as  to  the  number  of  relief*,  and  the  pro- 
portioning of  the  task  of  each,  may  be  followed  in  both 
cases. 

The  only  difference  in  the  practice  of  this  establishment 
is,  that  we  have  made  our  approaches  generally  a  little 
deeper  than  our  parallels,  and  we  have  usually  made  tlio 

*  This  rule  has  generally  been  followed  in  our  sieges,  in  which  an  extra 
allowance  of  grog  or  wine  has  sometimes  been  ordered  to  each  man  of  the- 
military  working  parties  as  a  gratuity. 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   OF   A   6IEGE.  119 

front  steps  and  berm  narrower,  a  banquette  not  being  so 
essential  in  the  former  as  in  the  latter.  We  have  also 
usually  made  the  parapets  of  our  approaches  a  little  higher 
than  those  of  our  parallels. 

The  reason  is,  that  approaches,  being  laid  out  obliquely, 
require  more  relief  than  a  parallel,  in  order  to  enable  them 
to  afford  equal  protection  to  the  besiegers ;  for  in  the  for- 
mer, a  man  in  the  trench  is  covered  by  a  distant  point  of 
the  parapet,  in  an  oblique  direction,  whereas,  in  the  latter, 
he  is  covered  by  that  part  of  the  parapet  which  is  near  to 
and  perpendicularly  in  front  of  him. 

The  subjoined  figure  represents  the  profile  usually  adopted 
by  us,  in  which  the  trench  is  eleven  feet  wide  at  bottom, 
three  feet  six  inches  deep  in  front,  and  four  feet  deep  in 
rear.  The  berm  and  front  step  are  only  one  foot  wide. 
The  latter,  instead  of  being  formed  with  made  earth,  was 
cut  out  of  the  solid. 


In  the  above  figure  the  tasks  of  the  three  reliefs,  as  repre- 
sented by  the  Roman  numerals,  I,  II,  and  III,  are  as  follows : 

Each  task  being  six  feet  in  length,  the  first  relief  are  to 
cut  a  trench  (I)  five  feet  wide,  three  feet  six  inches  deep  in 
front,  and  three  feet  nine  inches  deep  in  rear,  which  involves 
one  hundred  and  eight  and  three-quarters  cubic  feet,  or  about 
f"iir  cubic  yards  of  excavation. 

The  second  relief  are  to  cut  the  trench  four  feet  six  inches 
wider,  and  two  inches  deeper  in  rear,  which  involves  a  task 


120  MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

(II)  of  ninety-nine  cubic  feet,  being  equal  to  three  and  two- 
thirds  cubic  yards  of  excavation. 

The  third  relief  are  to  cut  the  trench  one  foot  six  inches 
wider,  and  one  inch  deeper,  which  increases  the  total  width 
of  the  approach  to  eleven  feet.  They  will  then  cut  the  re- 
verse slope,  giving  to  it  a  base  of  four  feet,  which  is  equal 
to  the  extreme  depth  of  the  trench  in  rear.  This  being  done, 
they  will  cut  the  front  step,  making  it  one  foot  wide,  and  one 
foot  nine  inches  high,  or  one-half  of  the  depth  of  the  trench 
in  front.  These  three  portions  (each  marked  III,  III,  III,) 
amount  in  all  to  eighty -five  and  three-eighths  cubic  feet,  being 
nearly  three  and  one-sixth  cubic  yards  of  excavation. 

The  whole  of  these  tasks  added  together  involve  two  hun- 
dred and  ninety-three  and  one-eighth  cubic  feet,  or  very 
nearly  ten  and  five-sixths  cubic  yards  of  excavation. 

Sometimes  an  approach  is  made  with  slopes  only,  without 
having  any  steps  in  front,  as  shown  in  the  annexed  figure, 
which  arrangement,  however,  can  make  little  or  no  difference 
in  the  quantity  of  labor,  or  in  the  tasking  of  the  men. 


63.    THAT  ALL  TRENCHES  OR  DITCHES  SHOULD  BE   COMMENCED 
BY  VERTICAL  EXCAVATIONS,  FINISHING  THE  SLOPES  LAST. 

Whenever  an  approach  is  formed  with  slopes  in  front 
and  rear,  as  represented  in  the  foregoing  figure,  the  body 
of  the  trench  is  completed  first,  and  both  the  slopes  are 
cut  afterward.  And  let  it  be  understood  that  this  is  a 
rule  which  we  have  invariably  followed,  not  only  in  forming 
the  trenches  of  parallels  and  approaches,  but  in  respect  to 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  121 

the  ditches  of  elevated  batteries,  and  other  excavations  gen- 
erally, in  field  fortification.  We  always  commenced  with 
vertical  cuts  of  .a  rectangular  section,  until  the  great  mass  of 
excavation  was  finished,  doing  the  slopes  last  of  all.  In  ex- 
ecuting these,  the  crest  of  each  slope  should  first  be  marked 
out  on  the  ground,  after  which  small  sections  should  be  cut 
here  and  there,  according  to  the  proper  form  of  the  finished 
profile.  Finally  the  intermediate  earth  should  be  cut  away 
between  these  small  sections,  which  answer  the  same  pur- 
pose of  insuring  regularity  in  an  excavation  that  wooden 
profiles  erected  at  intervals  do  in  the'  formation  of  a  parapet. 
If,  on  the  contrary,  the  slopes  be  commenced  from  the  first 
without  these  precautions,  the  men  will  either  lose  time  in 
attempting  accuracy,  or  will  cut  them  at  random,  and  there- 
by either  disfigure  the  work  or  injure  its  stability. 

Till.  Of  the  Execution  of  the  Second  Parallel,  and 
the  Approachc§  connected  with  it. 

64.    RULES  FOR  EXECUTING  A  SECOND   PARALLEL  COMMENCED 
BY   THE   FLYING   SAP. 

The  method  of  arranging  the  workmen  with  their  tools 
behind  the  line  of  gabions,  so  that  the  space  covered  shall 
be  at  the  rate  of  two  gabions,  or  about  four  feet  per  man, 
has  already  been  explained.  In  this  order  the  men  are  rather 
more  crowded  than  one  could  desire,  but  the  use  of  gabions, 
the  size  of  which  is  necessarily  limited,  leaves  no  alternative. 

When  the  order  is  given  to  commence  work,  every  man 
will  begin  digging  in  the  rear  of  his  own  two  gabions,  which 
he  will  fill  with  all  expedition,  striking  the  sides  of  the  gabions 
from  time  to  time  with  his  shovel,  and  afterward  patting 
the  earth  at  the  top,  to  shake  it  down  and  make  it  compact, 
before  he  throws  any  of  it  over.  When  filled,  which  may 
be  done  by  good  workmen  in  from  seven  to  fifteen  minutes, 
the  line  of  gabions  will  be  musket-proof  everywhere,  except- 
6 


122  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROCXPS. 

ing  at  the  intervals  between  the  adjacent  ones.  The  engi- 
neer officers  superintending,  and  the  sappers  attached  to 
divisions,  will  take  care  to  instruct  the  men  to  force  their 
gabions  forward  at  top,  whilst  the  work  is  in  progress,  in 
order  to  give  them  a  slope  of  about  one-fourth  of  their  height, 
which  is  necessary  to  their  stability,  and  which  may  be  judged 
of,  with  sufficient  accuracy,  by  the  eye.  This  arrangement 
may  be  aided  by  introducing  sods  under  the  back  of  each 
gabion.  The  usual  berm  of  eighteen  inches  must  be  left  be- 
hind the  line  of  gabions. 

The  parapet  of  a  second  parallel  may  be  crowned  with  one 
or  more  rows  of  fascines  laid  over  the  gabions,  with  which 
it  is  reveted  interiorly.  In  other  respects  it  does  not  differ 
from  that  of  a  first  parallel,  and  the  trenches  of  both  are 
exactly  alike. 

When  fascines  are  used  to  crown  the  gabions  in  a  second 
parallel,  which  arrangement  however  can  scarcely  be  neces- 
sary under  ordinary  circumstances,  the  second  and  third  re- 
liefs of  men  ought  to  take  them  out  with  them,  each  man 
carrying  a  six-feet  fascine,  and  two  or  three  pickets.  If  more 
fascines  and  pickets  should  be  required  at  this  period,  and 
generally  speaking  on  any  other  occasion,  when  the  regular 
working  parties  cannot  carry  a  sufficient  quantity  of  mate- 
rials for  their  own  use,  the  guards  of  the  trenches  may  be 
ordered  to  call  at  the  engineers'  depot  for  the  purpose  of  re- 
ceiving materials,  which  they  will  deposit  on  the  reverse  of 
the  trenches,  in  such  situations  as  shall  be  deemed  most  con- 
venient. 

65.  PECULIAR  ARRANGEMENTS  FOR  CONTINUING  AND  FIN- 
ISHING A  SECOND  PARALLEL,  BY  THE  SECOND  AND  THIRD 
RELIEFS  OF  WORKMEN,  AT  SIX  RUNNING  FEET  OF  TRENCH- 
1TORK  PER  MAN. 

Though  the  workmen  who  commence  the  second  parallel 
by  tho  flying  sap,  are  extended  at  the  rate  of  only  four  feet 


PRACTICAL     OPERATIONS   OF   A    SIEGE.  123 

per  man,  the  same  necessity  does  not  exist  for  thus  crowd- 
ing the  workmen  of  the  second  and  third  reliefs,  employed 
in  continuing  and  finishing  the  same  parallel,  who  should 
each  be  required  to  execute  a  task  of  six  running  feet  per 
man.  IJence  the  number  of  workmen  demanded  for  the 
second  and  third  reliefs  should  only  be  two-thirds  of  the 
number  previously  employed  in  commencing  the  second 
parallel.  Owing  to  this  change  in  the  arrangements,  the 
workmen  in  the  first  relief,  after  finishing  their  task,  must 
carry  all  their  tools  back  with  them  to  the  engineers'  depot, 
instead  of  leaving  them  in  the  parallel,  as  suggested  in 
Article  42,  which  applied  to  different  circumstances.  The 
second  relief  must  therefore  bring  their  tools  out  with 
them. 

As  the  task  of  a  division  of  twenty-five  men  is  only  one 
hundred  feet  in  commencing  the  second  parallel,  but  is  to 
be  increased  to  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet  for  the  same 
number  of  men  of  the  second  relief,  it  will  be  necessary  pre- 
viously to  divide  the  whole  extent  of  the  parallel  into  spaces 
of  one  hundred  and  fifty  feet,  which  must  be  marked  by 
pickets  or  banderols,  at  their  extremities,  including  seventy- 
five  gabions  between  each  pair  of  such  pickets.  This  must 
be  done  by  sappers  tinder  the  direction  of  the  engineers, 
and  when  the  space  allotted  for  the  task  of  each  division  of 
the  second  relief  is  marked  out,  a  sapper  must  be  stationed 
at  each  picket  or  banderol,  on  reaching  whom  each  division 
of  the  working  party  must  be  halted  and  fronted,  in  the 
manner*  before  explained  in  Article  42.  When  this  is  done, 
the  men  composing  each  division  must  be  extended  over 
their  respective  spaces,  until  the  whole  of  the  gabions  are 
covered  by  a  line  of  men  posted  behind  every  third  gabion, 
placing  the  first  man  behind  the  second  gabion,  the  second 
man  behind  the  fifth,  the  third  behind  the  eighth,  and  so  on 
until  the  whole  extension  is  completed*  Every  man  will 
then  be  set  to  work,  each  preserving  his  proper  place,  and 


124:  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

continuing  the  excavation  of  the  trench  to  the  rear,  along 
the  whole  space  occupied  by  his  own  three  gabions. 

If  the  commanding  engineer  should  deem  it  convenient, 
the  men  of  the  second  relief,  before  they  quit  the  trenches, 
may  be  directed  to  leave  their  tools  behind  every  third  ga- 
bion, to  mark  the  proper  position  and  at  the  same  time  the 
extent  of  task  of  the  men  of  the  third  relief,  who  are  to 
work  in  equal  numbers  along  the  same  extent  of  ground, 
and  may  use  the  same  tools. 

The  annexed  figure  is  a  section  of  a  second  parallel,  fin- 
ished with  gabions  only,  not  crowned  by  fascines,  in  which 
the  tasks  of  the  three  reliefs  are  marked  by  the  Roman 
numerals,  I,  II,  III. 


The  task  of  the  first  relief  includes  also  the  excavation  of 
the  space  now  occupied  by  the  front  step,  which  is  sup- 
posed to  have  been  added  afterward  by  the  second  relief. 
The  clear  width  at  the  sole  of  the  trench  is  supposed  to  be 
ten  feet,  being  the  same  as  in  the  first  parallel,  with  which 
it  likewise  agrees  in  all  its  other  dimensions,  as  was  before 
stated. 

66.  STATEMENT,  BOTH  IN  CUBIC  FEET  AND  IN  CUBIC  YARDS, 
OF  THE  QUANTITY  OF  EXCAVATION  IN  A  FIRST  PARALLEL, 
FINISHED  IN  THREE  TASKS,  AT  SIX  RUNNING  FEET  OF 
TRENCH-WORK  PER  MAN,  AS  COMPARED  WITH  THAT  OF 
A  SECOND  PARALLEL  COMMENCED  BY  THE  FLYING  SAP,  AT 
FOUR  RUNNING  FEET  ONLY  PER  MAN,  IN  THE  FIRST  TASK, 
ALL  OTHER  PARTICULARS  BEING  THE  SAME  IX  BOTH. 

(Compare  the  foregoing  figure  with  that  in  Article  59). 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   OF   A    SIEGE. 


125 


COMPAKATTVE  EXCAVATION. 

let  Parallel. 

2d.  Pa 

Cubic 
Feet. 

ralleL 

Cubic 
Yds. 

Cubic 
Feet 

Cubic 
Yds. 

1st  Task  (1)  5  feet  wide,  3  feet  J 

deep  in  front,  3  feet  3  inches  deep  V 

93f 

H 

621 

n 

in  rear     J 

2d  Task  (II)  4  feet  6  inches  wider,  ) 

3  feet  3  inches  deep  in  front,  3  feet  > 

90 

3} 

90 

H 

5  inches  deep  in  rear     ) 

3d  Task  (IH)  2  feet  wider  at  botO 

torn,  which  completes}  the  sole  of 

the  Trench,  making  it  3  feet  6  inches 
deep   in  rear,  and  a  reverse  slope, 

781 

2f 

781 

2» 

having  a  base  of  3  feet  6  inches, 

equal  to  its  height  

Total  .  . 

262 

°t 

67.  RULES  FOR  EXECUTING  THE  APPROACHES  CONNECTED 
WITH  THE  SECOND  PARALLEL,  AND  COMMENCED  BY  THE 
FLYING  SAP. 

These  also  differ  from  the  first  approaches,  only  in  having 
their  parapets  reveted  with  gabions,  or  with  gabions  and  fas- 
cines. In  the  execution  no  further  difference  occurs  than 
what  must  necessarily  arise  from  the  use  of  gabions,  the  tasks 
of  the  several  reliefs  of  men  employed  being  alike  in  profile, 
:md  proportional  to  each  other,  in  the  ratio  of  two  to  three, 
in  the  first  reliefs  of  each,  in  consequence  of  the  men,  who 
commence  by  the  flying  sap,  being  drawn  up  at  intervals  of 
four  feet  apart,  instead  of  six  feet ;  but  in  the  second  and 
third  reliefs,  the  tasks  are  equal,  each  man  having  six  feet 
of  trench-work  to  execute. 

The  subjoined  figure  is  the  section  of  an  approach  of  this 
description,  having  its  gabions  crowned  by  three  courses  of 
1-isciiM's,  which  should  be  laid  at  the  same  slope  of  one-fourth 
which  was  before  prescribed  in  placing  the  gabions. 

These  fascines  must  be  secured  by  pickets  driven  through 


126 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


them  obliquely  downward  into  the  earth,  at  an  angle  of 
about  forty-five  degrees.  There  should  be  two  such  pickets 
to  a  six-feet  fascine. 


It  was  before  explained  in  Article  62,  that  approaches 
usually  require  more  relief  than  a  parallel ;  and  for  this  rea- 
son it  may  sometimes  be  expedient  to  crown  the  parapets 
of  approaches  commenced  by  the  flying  sap,  with  several 
courses  of  fascines,  as  shown  in  the  above  figure ;  whereas 
this  precaution  might  be  entirely  dispensed  with,  in  a  second 
parallel,  situated  at  the  same  distance  from  a  fortress  of 
equal  command. 

The  want  of  cover  in  the  trenches  of  approaches  is  more 
felt  at  the  angles  of  the  zigzags,  than  anywhere  else ;  and 
therefore  it  may  sometimes  be  expedient,  even  in  the  ap- 
proaches in  rear  of  the  first  parallel,  which  are  generally 
left  unreveted,  to  revet  their  parapets,  for  about  ten  or 
twelve  feet,  at  each  angle  "of  the  zigzags  only.  It  may  also 
be  proper  for  the  same  reason,  to  cover  out  those  angles  by 
raising  not  only  their  own  parapets,  but  also  certain  portions 
of  the  parapets  of  the  trenches  in  front  of  them,  and  at 
some  distance  from  them,  one  or  more  feet  higher  than  the 
general  level  of  the  adjoining  parapets. 

Portions  of  the  parapets  thus  raised,  although  for  a  differ- 
ent purpose,  partake  of  the  nature  of  trench  cavaliers,  so 
far  as  the  construction  alone  is  concerned :  and  therefore 
when  more  than  usual  height  is  required,  it  might  be  pref- 
erable to  use  a  couple  of  tiers  of  gabions,  with  one  inter 
mediate  row  of  fascines,  instead  of  gaining  the  whole  height 
necessary,  by  crowning  one  course  of  gabions  entirely  with 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF   A   SIEGE. 


127 


fascines,  in  the  manner  represented  in  the  foregoing  figure. 
But  as  well  reveted  parapets,  which  are  always  essential  in 
gun  batteries  and  trench  cavaliers,  are  only  required  occa- 
sionally in  approaches,  I  shall  not  enlarge  further  upon  the 
construction  of  such  revetments  at  present. 

When  small  portions  only  of  a  set  of  approaches  are  to  be 
reveted,  or  when  small  portions  only  of  the  parapets  of  the 
trenches  are  to  be  raised,  it  is  better  to  employ  extra  men 
for  the  purpose  of  executing  such  details,  than  to  make 
them  a  part  of  the  task  of  any  of  the  regular  working  parties. 

68.  STATEMENT,  BOTH  DC  CUBIC  FEET  ANI>  IN  CUBIC  YARDS, 
OP  THE  QUANTITY  OF  EXCAVATION  IN  THE  FIRST  APr 
PROACIIES,  FINISHED  IN  THREE  TASKS,  AT  SIX  RUNNING 
FEET  OF  TRENCH-WORK  PER  MAN,  AS  COMPARED  WITH  THE 
MORE  ADVANCED  APPROACHES  AFTERWARD  COMMENCED  BY 
THE  FLYING  SAP,  AT  FOUR  RUNNING  FEET  OF  TRENCH- 
WORK  PER  MAN,  IN  THE  FIRST  TASK,  BUT  AT  SIX  RUNNING 

FEET  PER  MAN,  IN  THE  OTHERS. — ( Compare  the  foregoing 
figure  with  the  first  figure  in  Article  62). 


1 

COMPARATIVE  EXCAVATION". 

First 
Approaches. 

Advanced 

Approaches. 

Cubiq 
Foot. 

C-nl)i« 
Yds. 

Cubic 
Feet. 

Cubic 
Yds. 

1st  Task,  5  feet  wide,  3  feet  6  inches  ) 

deep  in  front,  and  3  feet  9  inches  deep  V 

1033 

4 

721 

2f 

2d  Task,  4  feet  6  inches  wider,  3  ) 

feet  9  inches  deep  in  front,  and  3  feet  >• 

99 

3| 

99 

8| 

1  1  inches  deep  in  rear     ....       ) 

3d  Task,  1  foot  6  inches  wider  at  ^ 

bottom,  and  4  feet  extreme  depth,  be- 

M<1(!S  a  reverse  slope  of  4  feet  base,  > 

85| 

S£ 

8*f 

H 

and  a  front  step  of  1  foot  wide,  and  1 

Total      .    . 

2931 

10$ 

128 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


69.   THAT  TWO  RELIEFS  OF  WORKMEN  MAY  BE  SUFFICIENT  FOR 
FINISHING  PARALLELS  AND  APPROACHES  IN  EASY  SOIL. 

Having  kept  records  of  the  various  periods  of  time  em- 
ployed by  every  individual  of  successive  parties  under  in- 
struction, in  finishing  parallels  and  approaches  at  Chatham, 
in  all  varieties  of  soil,  from  the  easiest,  which  required  very 
little  picking,  to  the  most  difficult,  which  demanded  the  con- 
stant use  of  the  pickaxe,  I  shall  subjoin  an  abstract  of  two 
of  these  reports  of  parallels,  one  of  which  was  finished  in 
the  shortest  time  known  at  this  establishment,  and  the  other 
in  nine  and  a  half  hours,  in  as  difficult  soil  as  can  be  expected 
to  occur  anywhere,  without  coming  under  the  definition  of 
rock.  On  one  occasion,  as  noticed  in  article  56,  one  hour 
more  was  occupied  in  finishing  a  parallel  in  the  same  sort 
of  difficult  soil  by  another  party  of  men,  but  the  report  of 
this  latter  experiment  was  not  entered  in  the  record  book 
in  sufficient  detail  to  make  use  of  it. 

ABSTRACT  OF  TIME,  ETC.,  IN  MAKING  A  FIRST  PARALLEL. 


Date,  No.  of  men 
employed  and 

Soil. 

Tasks, 
No.  of. 

Cubic 
Feet 

Time  of  Individuals. 

Avernpe 
Time  of  all 
the  men. 

Shortest 

Longest. 

Hours,  Min. 

Hours.  Min. 

Hours.  Min. 

Mar.  llth  and 
12th,  1828. 
20  men. 
Very  difficult 
soil. 

First  .  .  . 
Second  .  . 
Third  .  .  . 

93? 
90 

781 

1       10 

2     25 
2     35 

3      10 
4       0 
4     30 

2     17 
3     23 
3     50 

The  whole 
Parallel. 

262 

6     12 

11      55 

9     30 

October  12th 
and  13th,  1828. 
30  men. 
Very  easy  soil. 

First  .  .  . 
Second  .  . 
Third  .  .  . 

93£ 
90 

78{ 

0     16 
1        5 
4       0 

1      30 

2     40 
4       0 

0     44 
1      36 
2     34 

The  whole 
Parallel. 

262 

2     41 

g       4 

4     54 

PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  129 

In  the  various  records,  it  was  observed  that  the  individual 
who  was  the  most  expeditious  in  performing  the  first  task, 
was  sometimes  slower  than  other  men,  in  executing  the 
second  and  third,  and  vice  versa  /  but  as  the  whole  of  the 
parallel  in  very  easy  soil  in  one  of  these  examples  was  fin- 
ished by  one  very  active  and  zealous  workman  in  two  hours 
and  forty-one  minutes,*  and  by  the  worst  workman  out  of 
thirty  men,  in  eight  hours  and  four  minutes,  and  as  it  was 
executed  by  the  average  labor  of  the  whole  party  in  four 
hours  fifty-four  minutes,  it  will  be  evident,  that  the  number 
of  tasks  proper  for  finishing  a  parallel  in  such  soil  may  be 
diminished  from  three  to  two  ;  but  the  details  of  executing 
a  parallel  by  two  reliefs  of  men  only  will  afterward  be  ex- 
plained. A  working  party  of  men  of  the  line  might  not 
perhaps  finish  quite  so  soon,  but  even  if  entirely  unaccus- 
tomed to  labor,  it  is  not  likely  that  in  completing  the  same 
task,  they  would  require  more  than  one-third  of  additional 
time,  over  and  above  the  periods  stated  in  the  above  table ; 
and  even  if  one-half  more,  making  an  average  of  seven 
hours  twenty-one  minutes  in  all,  should  be  required  for  fin- 
ishing the  parallel:  to  do  this  in  two  tasks  only  would  not 
involve  a  greater  personal  exertion,  than  able-bodied  men 
are  capable  of  undergoing  without  over-fatigue. 

70.  OF  FLANKING  BOYAUS,  OR  SUCH  PORTIONS  OF  THE  AP_ 
PROACHES,  IN  A  SIEGE,  AS  PARTAKE  ALSO  OF  THE  NATURE 
OF  PARALLELS. 

When  a  set  of  approaches  are  on  the  extreme  right,  or 
on  the  extreme  left  of  the  trenches,  in  a  siege,  those  branches 
of  them  which  have  their  parapets  facing  outward,  are 
termed  flanking  boyaus,  and  may  be  made  to  answer  the 

*  Private  Hugh  Lanyon,  since  promoted  to  the  rank  of  Serjeant,  after 
having  been  employed  for  several  successive  years  with  a  party  of  R. 
sappers  and  miners,  at  the  R.  M.  College,  Sandhurst,  in  making  field-worka 
for  tho  instruction  of  the  gentlemen  cadets. 
G* 


130  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

double  purpose  of  acting  also  as  places  of  arms,  or  parallels, 
for  containing  the  troops  destined  to  repulse  the  sorties 
made  by  the  besieged,  if  such  sorties  shoitld  be  attempted, 
as  is  most  frequently  the  case,  on  the  flanks  of  the  trenches. 

Thus,  for  example,  if  we  suppose  the  first  and  second 
parallels,  and  the  approaches  from  the  rear  to  the  second 
parallel  in  a  siege  to  be  finished,  and  that  an  enemy  makes 
a  sortie  at  this  period,  it  will  be  evident,  that  if  he  advances 
in  front,  the  troops  in  the  parallels  will  oppose  him  by  a 
direct  fire ;  but  if  he  should  attempt  to  penetrate  in  rear  of 
the  second  or  first  parallel  by  either  flank,  troops  placed  in 
flanking  boyaus,  will  be  more  conveniently  situated  than 
those  in  either  of  the  two  parallels  for  defeating  this  object. 

Flanking  boyaus,  therefore,  should  never  be  finished  with 
a  front  slope,  as  shown  in  figure  2,  Article  62,  nor  with  nar- 
row steps ;  but  with  broad  steps  and  a  banquette,  like  a 
parallel.  In  other  respects,  they  need  not  differ  from  com- 
mon approaches. 

IX.  Modifications  in  the  Construction  of  Paral- 
lels and  Approaches  that  may  Become  Nete§§ary, 
from  Circumstances. 

In  the  above  rules  and  examples,  we  have  supposed  the 
fortress  to  be  situated  on  a  plain,  and  to  have  only  that 
moderate  degree  of  command  over  the  country  to  which 
the  foregoing  profiles  are  suited,  and  we  have  also  supposed 
the  soil  to  be  favorable  for  the  works  of  the  besiegers.  If 
the  soil  were  unfavorable,  it  might  be  necessary  to  alter 
the  profiles  both  of  parallels  and  approaches  in  the  manner 
about  to  be  explained. 

71.   MODIFICATIONS    THAT    MIGHT    BE   REQUIRED    IN   MARSHY 
OR   ROCKY   SOIL. 

First,  supposing  water  to  be  found  a  few  feet  below  the 
surface,  as  in  Holland  and  other  marshy  countries,  it  would 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  131 

not  always  be  practicable  to  excavate  the  trenches,  in  which 
the  troops  are  to  be  posted,  to  the  extreme  depth  of  three 
or  four  feet  as  before  supposed,  without  inundating,  and 
thereby  rendering  them  unserviceable.  Hence  it  may  be 
necessary  to  make  shallower  and  wider  trenches,  and  even 
to  cut  a  ditch  in  rear  of  such  trenches  and  below  the  usual 
water  level,  in  order  to  supply  earth  for  the  parapet  which 
in  such  soil  must  be  raised  much  higher  above  the  ground, 
than  in  dry  soil.  The  subjoined  figure  represents  the  sort 
of  profile  now  alluded  to. 


Secondly,  supposing  rock  to  be  found  one  or  two  feet  be- 
low the  surface,  it  would  in  this  case  also  be  necessary  to 
make  a  shallower  trench,  and  a  parapet  much  higher  above 
the  natural  ground,  than  in  the  regular  profile  suited  to  deeper 
soil,  and  it  might  perhaps  also  be  necessary  to  carry  earth 
from  the  rear,  in  sand-bags  or  otherwise,  instead  of  throw- 
ing it  all  forward  by  shovels. 

Under  both  of  these  suppositions,  whether  of  water  or  of 
rock  below  and  near  to  the  surface,  it  may  be  expedient,  in 
working  by  night,  to  obtain  earth  not  only  from  the  rear,  but 
also  from  the  front;  and  more  gabions,  fascines,  and  other 
materials,  will  be  required  than  under  ordinary  circumstances. 

In  making  the  trenches  alluded  to,  in  proportion  as  the 
depth  is  diminished  the  width  necessary  for  the  task  of  the 
first  relief  of  men  should  be  increased ;  and  in  the  second 
and  third  reliefs  the  number  of  men  may  also  be  increased 
to  more  than  the  number  proper  for  more  favorable  soil:  but 
I  would  not  generally  recommend  employing  more  men  than 
usual  in  the  first  relief,  because  it  might  produce  confusion. 


132  MANUAL    FOR    ENGINEER    TROOPS. 

72.  CONSIDERATIONS  TO  BE  KEPT  IN  MIND  IN  RESPECT  TO 
PARALLELS  AND  APPROACHES  ON  IRREGULAR  GROUND. 
THAT  APPROACHES  SHOULD  NOT  BE  MADE  DOWN  HILL. 

First,  if  the  fortress  should  be  situated  on  a  very  com- 
manding eminence,  it  is  obvious  that  the  trenches  must  be 
cut  deeper  and  the  parapets  raised  higher  than  the  profiles 
before  described,  which  apply  to  ordinary  circumstances, 
that  is,  supposing  the  parallels  or  approaches  of  the  besiegers 
to  be  constructed  on  level  ground. 

But  if  we  suppose  the  ground  on  which  these  parallels 
and  approaches  must  be  made  to  slope  regularly  down  on 
all  sides,  from  the  commanding  eminence  crowned  by  the 
fortress,  this  ground  being  naturally  defiladed,  is  not  unfa- 
vorable, and  may  not  require  deeper  trenches  or  higher  para- 
pets than  usual. 

Secondly,  supposing  that  there  are  heights  opposite  to  the 
fortress,  and  divided  from  it  by  an  intervening  ravine,  at 
the  distance  of  from  five  or  six  hundred  yards  or  upward, 
these  heights  should  be  occupied  by  the  besiegers,  as  they 
will  be  favorable  for  the  construction  of  parallels  or  bat- 
teries; but  approaches  should  not  be  made  from  thence  down 
the  declivity,  because  they  will  be  seen  and  plunged  into  by 
the  guns  of  the  fortress. 

The  reason  is,  that  every  branch  of  an  approach  being 
always  very  oblique,  in  reference  to  some  part  of  the  works 
of  a  fortress  of  any  magnitude,  the  men  in  the  reverse  of  the 
trench  are  not  covered  by  that  part  of  the  parapet  of  the 
same  branch,  which  is  perpendicularly  in  front  of  them,  but 
by  some  distant  part  of  it,  which  may  be  thirty  or  forty,  or 
even  so  much  as  sixty  feet  lower  down  the  slope.  Hence, 
if  we  suppose  the  ground  to  dip  at  the  rate  of  one  foot  in  five, 
the  part  where  the  reverse  of  a  descending  approach  would 
require  to  be  excavated,  may  be  six  or  eight,  or  even  twelve 
feet  higher  than  the  other  part  of  the  same  ground,  where 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  133 

the  parapet  that  ought  to  cover  it  from  some  of  the  guns  of 
the  fortress  would  be  situated.  Hence,  instead  of  a  total  re- 
lief of  about  eight  feet,  which  is  sufficient  for  the  parapet  of  an 
approach  against  a  fortress  situated  on  a  plain,  which  agrees 
With  the  profiles  before  given  in  articles  62  and  67,  it  might 
require  the  parapet  to  have  a  relief  of  fourteen  or  sixteen,  or 
even  twenty  feet,  to  cover  every  part  of  the  trench  of  an 
approach  so  situated. 

IP 


These  particulars  are  exemplified  in  the  fbregoing  figure, 
in  which  the  parapet  of  the  parallel  P,  crowning  the  sum- 
mit of  a  height  opposite  to  the  fortress  F,  from  which  it  is 
divided  by  a  ravine,  affords  good  protection  against  the  shot, 

1,  fired  from  the  fortress;  but  the  parapet  of  the  approach 
A,  on  the  ground  below,  sloping  toward  the  fortress,  af- 
fords no  protection  to  the  men  behind  it,  against  the  shot, 

2,  of  the  fortress,  nor  could  it  possibly  afford  such  protec- 
tion unless  it  were  raised  to  the  very  inconvenient,  or  one 
may  say  impracticable  height,  shown  by  the  dotted  outline 
above  it. 

In  short,  approaches  should  never  be  carried  down  the 
slope  of  a  hill  occupied  by  the  besiegers,  but  should  be  car- 
ried round  from  the  rear  of  the  hill,  so  as  to  turn  the  flank 
of  it,  which  I  believe  may  always  be  done.* 

*  For  example,  m  the  attack  of  Burgos,  supposing  the  hornwork  to  be 
taken  by  the  besiegers,  the  high  ground  on  which  it  is  situated  ought  to  be 
occupied  by  a  portion  of  parallel  with  approaches  from  the  rear,  as  well  as 
by  gun  and  mortar  batteries;  but  instead  of  carrying  approaches  from 
thence  down  the  slope  of  the  hill,  I  would  recommend  the  turning  of  that 


134:  MANUAL   FOE  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

I  do  not  think  that  there  is  any  example  of  a  fortress 
being  situated  in  a  hollow  at  the  extreme  bottom  of  a  de- 
scending slope ;  and  therefore,  except  to  draw  attention  to 
a  principle,  it  may  be  deemed  scarcely  worth  while  to  ob- 
serve, that  it  would  be  less  objectionable  to  make  approaches 
down  hill  against  such  a  fortress.  In  fact,  whenever  the 
path  of  the  Shot  fired  point  blank  from  the  guns  of  a  for- 
tress, is  parallel  to  the  surface  of  the  ground  outside,  the  ap- 
proaches of  the  besiegers  will  not  be  subject  to  inconveni- 
ence, or  require  any  extraordinary  relief,  whether  the  ground, 
on  which  they  are.to  be  executed,  be  horizontal,  or  an  as- 
cending or  descending  plane. 

To  return  to  the  consideration  of  our  former  supposition 
of  heights  occupied  by  the  besiegers,  and  separated  from 
the  fortress  by  a  valley,  it  may  be  remarked,  that  parallels 
on  the  descending  slope  immediately  below  such  heights 
are  also  objectionable,  from  their  requiring  a  deeper  trench 
and  higher  parapet  than  would  suffice  on  level  ground,  but 
not  in  so  great  a  degree  as  approaches,  because^  as  was  be- 
fore stated  in  article  6  2,  the  men  in  the  reverse  of  the  trench 
of  a  parallel  are  protected  by  those  parts  of  the  parapet 
which  are  either  perpendicularly  opposite  to  them  or  nearly 
so,  not  exceeding  about  twenty  feet  at  the  utmost.  Even 
this,  however,  would  evidently  be  a  very  great  inconvenience, 
if  the  slope  were  steep. 

To  investigate  the  farther  modifications  in  the  outline  or 
profile  of  parallels  or  approaches,  that  might  be  required  by 
other  varieties  of  irregular  ground  not  yet  noticed,  would 
be  superfluous  in  a  treatise  of  this  kind,  because  the  expedi- 
ents necessary  for  overcoming  or  evading  the  difficulties 
thereby  occasioned,  will  readily  suggest  themselves  to  an 
intelligent  officer,  on  the  scene  of  action. 

height  by  going  round  it,  without  attempting  nny  direct  communication 
from  thence  to  whatever  works  might  afterward  be  executed  in  front  of  it, 
on  the  ascending  slope  opposite. 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    OF   A   SIEGE.  135 

X.    Of  the  Arrangements  and  Regulations  Proper 
for  Military  Working  Parties  in  a  Siege. 

73.  OF  THE  BEST  MODE  OF  SUPERINTENDING  THEM.  THAT 
THE  REGIMENTAL  OFFICERS  OF  THE  WORKING  PARTIES 
SHOULD  BE  HELD  STRICTLY  RESPONSIBLE,  FOR  THE  EXE- 
CUTION OF  THE  QUANTITY  OF  WORK  ORDERED  TO  BE 
DONE.  THAT  MIXED  WORKING  PARTIES,  COMPOSED  OF 
MKX  OF  DIFFERENT  CORPS,  OUGHT  NOT  TO  BE  EMPLOYED. 

The  subject  of  this  article  is  of  such  importance,  that  it  ap- 
pears proper  to  treat  of  it  in  some  detail,  although  the  general 
principle  about  to  be  developed,  might  have  been  inferred 
from  some  observations  to  the  same  effect,  previously  made. 

It  has  already  been  implied,  that  the  engineers  on  duty 
should  only  be  responsible  for  marking  out  the  several 
works,  for  supplying  materials  and  tools,  and  for  making 
such  arrangements  and  giving  such  directions,  as  will  enable 
the  working  parties  of  the  line  to  execute  their  tasks  to 
proper  advantage.  If  the  soldiers  of  the  working  parties 
do  not  exert  themselves  as  they  ought  to  do,  let  the  engi- 
neers make  their  representation  to  the  general  or  field  offi- 
cers on  duty  in  the  trenches. 

The  regimental  officers  of  the  corps  which  furnish  the 
working  parties,  should  be  held  solely  and  most  strictly  re- 
sponsible, for  the  diligence  and  exertions  of  the  men  under 
their  command.  The  captains,  subaltern  officers  and  ser- 
geants, attached  to  each  division  of  the  working  parties 
should  move  about  continually,  to  encourage  the  diligent, 
and  reprove  the  idle;  and  the  field  officers  in  charge  of 
several  divisions  should  in  like  manner  move  about  the 
whole  line  of  workmen  under  their  charge,  to  see  that  the 
men  are  diligent,  and  that  the  officers  and  sergeants*  are 

*  It  was  before  mentioned  that  corporals,  as  rauk  and  file,  take  their 
of  the  work  in  the  British  service. 


136  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

doing  their  duty.  These  field  officers  should  be  held  re- 
sponsible for  the  diligence  of  the  working  parties  under 
their  command,  by  the  general  officer  or  officers,  on  duty  in 
the  trenches ;  and  the  latter  should  be  responsible  for  the 
proper  execution  of  the  operations  of  each  period  of  twenty- 
four  hours,  to  the  general  officer  in  command  of  the  besieg- 
ing army. 

It  is  of  the  most  vital  importance  to  the  success  of  a 
siege,  that  this  system  of  responsibility,  from  the  regimental 
officers  of  working  parties  to  the  general  officers  on  duty 
in  the  trenches,  shall  be  established,  and  fully  understood, 
and  inflexibly  adhered  to  ;  for  which  reason  the  command- 
ing engineer  ought  to  apply  to  the  commander  of  the  forces, 
to  issue  a  general  order  to  this  effect,  previously  to  the 
opening  of  the  trenches  ;  for  if  this  precaution  be  neglected, 
it  is  but  too  likely  that  many  officers  of  the  working  parties 
will  remain  perfectly  inert,  and  leave  every  thing  to  the 
engineers,  who  cannot  be  expected  to  keep  the  workmen 
diligent,  when  the  latter  see  that  their  own  regimental  offi- 
cers, who  have  more  influence  over  them  than  any  others, 
are  either  asleep,  or  grouped  together  in  some  corner,  in 
conversation,  in  a  state  of  apparent  indifference  to  the 
progress  of  the  work.  Such  an  order  is  also  necessary,  to 
counteract  a  pernicious  and  unreasonable  prejudice,  which 
appeared  to  prevail  amongst  the  officers  of  some  regiments 
of  the  line,  at  the  commencement  of  the  late  interesting 
wars  with  France,  against  being  employed  on  working  par- 
ties at  all.  Too  much  pains  cannot  be  taken  to  prevent  the 
recurrence  of  a  feeling  so  radically  opposed  to  the  success 
of  all  siege  operations. 

To  carry  this  subject  further,  it  may  be  considered  of  great 
importance  in  the  execution  of  a  parallel,  and  the  same  re- 
mark may  generally  apply  to  other  works  of  a  siege,  that 
the  praise  of  diligence,  and  the  disgrace  of  failure  shall  not 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  137 

be  frittered  away  by  employing  mixed  working  parties ;  but 
that  one  particular  division  of  the  army  shall  have  the  whole 
of  the  operations  of  the  first  twenty-four  hours,  whether  the 
men  be  relieved  three  times  or  only  twice  within  that  period* 
and  that  each  brigade  and  battalion  of  this  division  shall 
have  its  own  distinct  portion  of  the  work,  which  no  men  of 
any  other  corps  shall  meddle  with.  Thus,  if  the  whole  of 
the  work  directed  to  be  done  in  the  twenty-four  hours  should 
be  well  executed,  the  whole  division  generally  will  have  the 
credit  of  it.  If  the  whole  should  be  badly  executed,  or  in- 
complete, the  disgrace  will  attach  to  the  division  as  a  body ; 
but  if  part  only  should  fail,  the  disgrace  will  attach  to  the 
particular  regiment,  which  either  neglected  or  proved  in- 
competent to  its  share  of  the  duty. 

In  the  construction  of  the  first  batteries,  which  are  usually 
commenced  the  second  night,  the  same  system  should  be 
followed  with  a  second  division  of  the  besieging  army,  each 
battalion  of  which  might  have  its  own  distinct  battery  al- 
lotted to  it ;  and  by  pursuing  this  system,  both  regimental 
officers  and  men  would  take  a  strong  interest  in  siege  opera- 
tions, and  would  feel  their  own  honor  and  reputation  involved 
in  them,  which  beneficial  feeling,  by  all  accounts,  has  hitherto 
scarcely  ever  prevailed  amongst  the  troops  in  general,  in  any 
of  the  sieges  carried  on  by  the  British  army.  Indeed  the 
operations  of  those  sieges,  as  recorded  by  Colonel  Jones,*  in 
his  able  and  useful  work,  speak  for  themselves.  When  we 
find  that  in  the  sieges  of  the  Peninsula  a  task  of  no  more 
than  four  feet  in  length,  three  feet  in  depth,  and  three  and  a 
half  feet  in  width,  being  only  forty-two  cubic  feet,  or  about 
one  and  half  cubic  yards,  of  excavation,  was  only  executed 
by  each  individual  of  the  military  working  parties  as  their 
first  night's  work,  which  task  we  know  by  experience  may 
be  finished  by  an  able-bodied  man,  with  very  moderate  ex- 

*  Now  Major-General  Sir  John  T.  Jones,  K.  C.  B. 


138  MANUAL  FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

ertion,  in  twenty  minutes,*  in  easy  soil,  that  requires  little  or 
no  picking ;  and  in  less  than  one  hour  in  the  hardest  and 
most  difficult  soil  that  does  not  exactly  come  under  the  defi- 
nition of  rock ;  one  cannot  but  feel  mortified  and  ashamed 
that  the  exertions  of  the  British  army,  on  such  occasions, 
should  have  fallen  so  miserably  short  of  their  brilliant  ex- 
ploits in  the  field.f  •  It  was  not  so  in  the  royal  navy,  where 
officers  and  men  equally  disdained  to  skulk  from  useful  labor 
as  to  shrink  from  danger ;  and  where  the  watering  of  Nel- 
son's fleet  on  the  coast  of  Barbary,  in  an  extraordinarily 
short  space  of  time,  just  before  he  proceeded  to  the  West 
Indies,  was  regarded  with  almost  as  much  pride  as  the  mem- 
orable victory  of  Trafalgar,  that  was  gained  not  many  months 
afterward. 

I  attach  so  much  importance  to  having  the  duty  of  work- 
ing parties  done  by  regular  divisions,  brigades,  battalions, 
and  companies,  that  I  am  confident  that  any  number  of  work- 
men furnished  according  to  this  system,  will  do  as  much  as 
twice  their  number  of  mixed  working  parties,  each  com- 
posed of  officers  and  soldiers  of  different  regiments,  fur- 
nished according  to  the  roster:  a  system  which,  in  our  ser- 
vice, has  been  too  often  carried  from  the  garrison  guard- 
mounting!  mto  tne  camp  of  the  besieging  army,  and  which, 

*  Sergeant  Lanyon  finished  his  first  task  of  a  parallel,  nearly  one  hun- 
dred and  nine  cubic  feet,  in  sixteen  minutes,  iu  easy  soil  (see  the  note  to 
article  69).  At  this  rate,  an  active  workman  might  have  finished  his  first 
night's  task  in  the  British  sieges  in  Spain,  in  seven  minutes. 

f  Always,  however,  making  an  honorable  exception  in  favor  of  the  work- 
ing parties  furnished  by  his  majesty's  foot-guards,  who  did  as  much  as 
officers  and  men  could  do,  so  that  I  really  do  not  think  that  their  exertions 
in  making  batteries,  &c.,  on  service,  have  been  exceeded  in  our  practice  at 
this  establishment.  I  speak  to  this  fact  not  only  from  my  own  observation, 
but  from  that  of-  Colonel  (now  Major-General)  Sir  John  F.  Burgoyue,  K.C.B., 
and  other  brother  officers  of  much  greater  experience  than  myself. 

\  In  garrisons  in  which  the  duty  is  regulated  by  roster  each  corps  fur- 
nishing a  daily  detail  in  proportion  to  its  number,  nothing  is  more  com- 


PRACTICAL.  OPERATIONS   OF   A    SIEGE.  139 

in  all  cases,  more  or  less  injures  that  organization  upon 
which  discipline  depends,  and  to  a  certain  degree  converts 
an  army  into  a  mob. 

74.  OF  T5IE  NUMBER  OP  TIMES  THAT  THE  WORKING  PARTIES, 
GUARDS  OP  THE  TRENCHES,  ETC.,  OUGHT  TO  BE  RELIEVED 
IN  THE  TWENTY-FOUR  HOURS. 

It  must  be  evident,  on  a  little  reflection,  that  the  marching 
ing  backward  and  forward  between  the  trenches  and  their 
camp  or  cantonments  may  occasion  considerable  fatigue  to 
the  troops  of  a  besieging  army,  besides  occupying  a  good 
deal  of 'time.  Hence,  if  the  total  number  of  reliefs  or  changes 
of  men  be  limited,  which  is  always  the  case,  it  follows  that 
the  oftener  they  are  relieved  in  the  twenty-four  hours,  the 
more  harassing  it  must  be  to-  those  men,  who  might,  even 
by  increasing  the  number  of  times  they  were  sent  on  duty 
within  that  period,  be  kept  in  almost  constant  movement,  or 
preparation  for  movement,  without  due  time  for  rest. 

For  this  reason  the  guards  of  the  trenches,  who,  unless 
the  enemy  makes  a  sortie,  are  usually  in  a  state  of  rest,  with 
the  exception  of  pickets  or  sentinels,  or  men  employed  as 
sharpshooters,  are  not  relieved  oftener  than  once  in  twenty- 
four  hours ;  and  the  same  system  is  followed  in  relieving  the 
artillery,  whose  exertions  are  not  generally  of  a  very  labori- 

mon  than  to  see  a  guard  composed  of  an  officer  of  one  regiment,  non-com, 
missioned  officers  of  another,  and  privates  of  two  or  three  others.  Hence 
no  one  regiment  or  corps  can  drill  to  advantage,  for  no  regiment  is  ever 
off  guard  in  a  body.  Thus  the  discipline  of  all  suffers,  and  if  the  duties 
of  such  mixed  guards  involved  any  serious  exertions  or  responsibility,  it 
is  my  opinion  that  the  service  would  be  much  more  likely  to  suffer  through 
neglect  than  under  the  more  salutary  system  of  causing  each  guard  to  be 
furnished  by  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  and  privates  of  one  and 
the  same  corps.  At  the  same  time  I  admit  that  the  roster  system  in  gar- 
risons, if  only  used  occasionally,  does  good,  by  destroying  a  prejudice,  which 
young  soldiers  are  apt  to  entertain,  that  they  ought  only  to  be  commanded 
by  their  own  regimental  officers. 


140  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

ous  nature,  because  the  ordnance  in  a  siege  is  not  fired  fre- 
quently and  incessantly,  as  in  battle. 

The  working  parties,  on  the  contrary,  must  necessarily  be 
relieved  oftener*  "for  a  man  cannot  work  for  more  than  eight 
hours,  without  being  exhausted ;  and  if  he  be  stimulated  by 
taskwork  four,  five,  or  six  hours,  at  the  utmost,  of  actual  ex- 
ertion will  be  quite  sufficient. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  may  be  observed,  that  to  bring  a 
body  of  men  into  the  trenches,  to  execute  any  task  involv- 
ing much  less  than  four  or  five  hours'  labor,  would  really 
be  trifling  with  the  duties  of  a  siege.  Now  if  the  soil  be 
of  any  easy  description,  requiring  little  or  no  picking,  and 
if  the  whole  parallel  be  divided  into  three  tasks  or  portions, 
such  as  were  before  described,  each  party  might  finish  their 
respective  tasks  in  less  than  two  hours.  ^ 

In  case  therefore  of  very  hard  soil,  it  is  proper  to  divide 
the  execution  of  a  parallel  or  parallels  into  three  tasks,  to 
be  executed  by  three  reliefs  of  men,  the  first  relief  to  com- 
mence their  work  at  dusk,  as  explained  in  Article  37,  the 
second  at  daylight  next  morning,  and  the  third  at  noon. 
But  in  very  soft  soil,  as  was  before  implied  in  Article  69,  it 
will  be  better  and  less  harassing  to  the  troops,  to  divide  the 
work  into  two  tasks  only,  and  consequently  to  have  no  more 
than  two  reliefs  of  workmen  in  twenty-four  hours.  We 
shall  now  consider  the  details  of  this  arrangement  as  ap- 
plied to  a  first  parallel. 

75.   FIRST  TASK,   IN   EXECUTING   A   FIRST   PARALLEL   BY   TWO 
RELIEFS,  IN  EASY  SOIL. 

Being  drawn  up  at  the  usual  rate  of  one  man  to  every 
six  feet  of  trench-work  as  before,  each  man  must  cut  his 
portion  of  trench  to  the  width  of  seven  feet  six  inches  from 
front  to  rear,  making  it  three  feet  deep  in  front,  and  three 
feet  four  inches  in  rear,  which  amounts  to  about  one  hundred 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF  A   SIEGE. 

and  forty-two  cubic  feet,  or  rather  more  than  five  and  a 
quarter  cubic  yards  of  excavation. 


76.    SECOND  TASK,  IN   EXECUTING  A  FIRST   PARALLEL  BY   TTTO 
RELIEFS,  IN  EASY   SOIL. 

The  second  relief  of  men  should  be  marched  into  the 
trenches  at  daylight,  and  should  make  the  front  step,  and 
add  four  feet  to  the  width  of  the  original  trench,  which  will 
increase  it  to  the  width  of  ten  clear  feet  at  bottom,  over 
and  above  the  base  of  the  said  step,  and  to  the  extreme 
depth  of  three  feet  six  inches  in  rear ;  after  which  they 
must  finish  the  trench^  either  with  a  reverse  slope,  having 
its  base  equal  to  its  height,  according  to  the  profile  before 
represented  in  the  figure  in  Article  59  ;  or  with  steps  in  rear, 
according  to  the  figure  given  in  Article  61. 

When  the  parallel  is  finished  with  a  reverse  slope,  the 
task  of  the  second  relief  amounts  to  about  one  hundred  and 
twenty  cubic  feet,  or  to  four  and  a  half  cubic  yards  nearly ; 
but  when  it  is  finished  with  reverse  steps,  the  task  of  the 
second  relief  amounts  only  to  about  ninty-nine  cubic  feet, 
or  to  three  and  two-thirds  cubic  yards. 

In  either  case,  after  completing  the  excavation  according 
to  the  profile  prescribed,  the  second  relief  of  workmen  must 
make  a  perfect  finish  of  the  parapet,  and  cut  cesspools,  <fcc., 
to  secure  the  trench  against  the  effects  of  rain,  as  before  di- 
rected, which  will  not  be  a  difficult  task,  as  the  men  have 
the  whole  day  before  them  to  execute,  what  would  scarcely 


14:2  MANUAL  FOR  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

require  more  than  from  two  and  a  half  to  three  hours  of 
active  exertion  at  the  utmost. 

The  same  principle  may  be  applied  to  the  execution  of 
the  first  approaches,  as  well  as  of 'the  second  parallel  and  of 
the  advanced  approaches  connected  with  it,  by  two  reliefs 
of  men  only,  in  very  easy  soil. 

Whether  three  or  only  two  reliefs  of  men  be  employed 
in  finishing  a  parallel  or  an  approach,  according  to  the  tasks 
above  specified,  the  first  party  may  always  complete  their 
excavation  sooner  than  the  others,  after  they  shall  have 
been  fairly  set  to  work  ;  but  the  loss  of  time  in  preliminary 
arrangements  and  the  unfavorable  circumstance  of  com- 
mencing by  night,  will  counterbalance  this  advantage,  and 
tend  to  equalize  the  trouble  of  all. 

77.  OF  THE  TOTAL  NUMBER  OF  TROOPS  NECESSARY  IN  A 
SIEGE,  TO  FURNISH  MEN  FOR  EVERY  OPERATION,  IN  REFER- 
ENCE TO  THE  NUMBER  OF  RELIEFS  EMPLOYED  IN  EACH,  IN 
THE  TWENTY-FOUR  HOURS. 

When  soldiers  are  employed  in  military  duties,  hi  the 
trenches  or  batteries,  in  a  siege,  and  are  relieved  only  once 
in  the  twenty-four  hours,  three  changes  of  men  may  suffice, 
and  even  when  they  are  relieved  twice  in  the  twenty-four 
hours  the  same  proportion  'may  regulate  the  total  number 
of  men  necessary. 

Thus,  for  example,  six  thousand  infantry,  and  one  thousand 
and  two  hundred  artillery,  might  supply  daily  two  thousand 
men  for  guards  of  the  trenches,  and  four  hundred  gunners 
to  man  the  batteries  in  a  siege ;  as  troops  employed  in  the 
former  duty  are  only  relieved  once  in  the  twenty-four  hours, 
and  the  artillery  are  seldom  relieved  oftener. 

In  respect  to  the  working  parties,  as  these  would  generally 
be  relieved  three  times  in  the  twenty-four  hours,  it  is  desi- 
rable that  there  should  be  four  changes  of  men  in  all,  by  which 
means  each  relief  would  only  be  on  duty  once  in  thirty-two 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS   OF   A   SIEGE.  143 

hours,  which  would  allow  ample  time  for  rest,  whilst  this 
arrangement  would  prevent  the  same  men  from  always  com- 
ing on  duty  at  night,  which  must  necessarily  be  the  case  if 
there  were  only  three  changes  of  men  to  supply  all  the 
three  reliefs.  If  therefore  the  average  number  of  work- 
men wanted  for  constant  duty  day  and  night,  at  the  com- 
mencement of  a  siege,  should  be  estimated  at  one  thousand 
and  two  hundred,  it  would  require  four  thousand  and  eight 
hundred  infantry  to  supply  this  number  in  four  reliefs,  three 
of  which  only  should  be  employed  within  the  space  of 
twenty-four  hours.  This  number,  added  to  the  two  thou- 
sand before  mentioned,  would  require  six  thousand  and  eight 
hundred  men,  for  all  the  infantry  duties  of  the  siege.  * 

In  estimating  the  number  of  officers  and  soldiers  of  the 
engineer  department  necessary  for  a  siege,  the  same  rule 
should  be  observed  which  applies  to  working  parties  of  the 
line.  Hence  the  number  of  reliefs  would  be  the  same  for 
both,  but  it  has  been  considered  best  to  relieve  the  engineers 
at  intermediate  periods  between  the  hours  of  relieving  the 
workmen,  in  order  that  the  former  may  get  perfectly  ac- 
quainted with  every  thing  necessary  before  the  arrangement 
of  the  new  working  parties,  which  always  occasions  some 
difficulty,  shall  be  thrown  upon  them.  This  was  the  system 
usually  followed  in  the  sieges  in  the  Spanish  Peninsula.  In 
respect  to  the  proportion  which  engineers  ought  to  bear  to 
the  working  parties  of  the  line,  one  to  twelve  appears  to  me 
to  be  desirable,  in  order  to  insure  proper  superintendence 
and  efficiency. 

It  is  evident  that  over  and  above  the  'number  of  soldiers 
wanted  for  the  daily  operations  of  siege,  a  certain  proportion 
would  also  be  required  on  account  of  casualties,  to  replace 
men  killed  or  wounded  by  the  enemy,  or  disabled  by  sick- 
ness, and  also  to  furnish  men  for  the  necessary  duties  of 
drawing  rations,  cooking,  and  for  various  other  little  details, 
which  always  engross  a  much  greater  number  of  men  than 

or 


144:  MANUAL   FOR  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

one  would  suppose  on  a  hasty  view  of  the  subject.  But  it 
is  not  my  intention  to  enlarge  further  at  present,  on  the 
mode  of  calculating  the  proper  strength  of  a  besieging 
army.  I  shall  therefore  conclude  this  article  by  observing 
that  such  estimates  should  always  be  made  in  reference  to 
the  number  of  effective  rank  and  file  that  can  be  spared  daily 
for  duty,  exclusive  of  soldiers  necessarily  employed  in  the 
various  details  before  alluded  to. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SAP. 


PART    III. 

THE    FULL    SAP. 


THE  approaches  may  be  carried  on  by  the  flying  sap  until 
they  arrive  within  close  range  of  small  arms  from  {he  cov- 
ered way,  after  which  the  full  sap  must  be  employed. 

This  is  a  path  executed  by  sappers,  who  advance  foot  by 
foot,  covering  themselves  from  the  fire  of  the  place  by  ga- 
bions, which  are  placed  and  filled  in  succession,  and  by  a 
Bap-roller  placed  at  the  head  of  the  sap.  The  sap  is  called 
simple  when,  the  fire  coming  from  one  direction  only,  but 
one  gabionade  or  parapet  is  required.  It  is  double  when  the 
fire,  coming  in  two  different  directions,  requires  a  gabionade 
on  each  side  of  the  trench,  which  is  effected  by  conducting 
two  simple  saps  side  by  side,  whose  parapets  mutually  pro- 
tect each  other. 

The  simple  full  sap  is  executed  by  a  brigade  of  eight  sap- 
pers, four  of  whom  are  especially  designated  sappers,  and 
are  numbered  1st,  2d,  3d  and  4th  sappers,  and  four  termed 
'  assistants,  who  are  also  numbered  from  one  to  four.  The 
duty  of  the  former  is  to  excavate  the  trench,  that  of  the 
latter  to  perfect  the  work  and  prepare  material.  During  the 
operation  the  men  composing  the  brigade  frequently  change 
places,  so  that  every  man  shall  in  succession  occupy  every 
position. 


148  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

Sapper  No.  1  is  placed  at  the  head  of  the  sap.  He 
works  kneeling,  making  an  excavation  20"  deep  and  20"  wide 
at  the  top*  and  leaves  a  berme  of  12",  giving  the  side  of  the 
excavation  toward  the  gabionade  a  slope  of  |  in  ordinary 
earth.  The  opposite  side  should  be  vertical,  so  that  the  width 
at  bottom  may  be  15*.  The  earth  thus  obtained  is  sufficient 
to  fill  the  gabions.  In  ordinary  earth  this  sapper  should  fill 
two  gabions  before  being  relieved.  The  second  sapper  fol- 
lows, two  gabions  and  a  half  in  rear  of  the  first ;  he  also 
works  kneeling.  He  increases  the  depth  and  width  of  the 
sap  by  seven  inches,  taking  the  earth  from  the  reverse,  and 
continuing  the  slope  on  the  other  side ;  this  will  leave  his 
form  27*  wide  at  top,  20*  at  bottom,  and  27*  deep.  The  quan- 
tity of  earth  excavated  by  No.  2  is  nearly  the  same  as  that 
by  No.  1.  The  third  sapper  is  also  two  gabions  and  a  half 
in  rear  of  the  second  (  5'  6*).  He  works  on  his  feet,  but 
stooping.  He  widens  and  deepens  the  sap  7*,  leaving  it  34* 
deep,  34*  wide  at  top  and  25*  at  bottom.  The  fourth  sap* 
per,  the  same  distance  in  rear  of  the  third,  widens  and  deep- 
ens the  sap  6*;  it  is  then  40*  deep,  40"  wide  at  top  and  30" 
at  bottom.  The  excavation  in  this  state,  at  which  it  does 
not  arrive  until  eight  gabions  are  placed,  is  completed,  as  a 
sap.  Its  parapet,  even  when  formed  of  earth,  which  increases 
considerably  in  bulk  from  its  movement,  is  only  about  7'  8* 
thick  at  base,  including  the  gabion,  and  2'  8*  high.  It  is 
then  turned  over  to  the  ordinary  workmen  to  be  enlarged, 
and  disposed  for  the  reception  of  the  guards  of  the  trenches 
or  for  a  communication. 

TOOLS.  « 

Each  of  the  eight  sappers  should  be  furnished  with  a 
pick  and  shovel,  and  each  head  of  sap  with  two  hooks,  two 
forks  and  one  or  two  drags. 

The  sap-hook  has  two  prongs  at  right  angles  to  each  other, 
each  4"  long;  the  entire  length  of  the  fork  is  1',  of  which  4' 


THE   FULL   SAP.  149 


is  for  the  point,  3|*  for  the  body  and  4J"  for  the  socket ;  the 
handle  is  ll/  8"  long,  and  is  fastened  in  the  socket  with  a 
rivet ;  to  the  other  end  is  attached  a  ring  1|"  or  1^"  in  diam- 
eter. The  weight  of  the  entire  fork  is  about  13  Ibs. 


The  sap-fork  has  three  points,  the  two  extreme,  parallel 
and  4"  apart,  the  middle  at  right  angles  to  the  plane  of  the 
other  two,  the  length  of  the  iron  part  is  10",  of  the  handle 
5',  the  weight  11  Ibs. 

The  drag  is  8"  high,  8"  wide  at  the  edge  and  2"  at  the 
eye ;  the  handle  is  3'  4"  or  6'  8"  long. 


Each  head  of  sap  should  be  provided  with  1  sap-roller, 
about  30  sap-fagots,  and  as  many  crowning  fascines,  ordi- 
nary gabions  and  fascines,  levers  10'  or  12'  long,  4"  x  4"  crow- 
bars, sand-bags,  wool-sacks  20"  or  26"  in  diameter  and  30" 
or  40"  high. 

EXECUTION   OF  THE   FULL   SAP. 

The  following  figure  represents  a  sap  in  the  course  of  con- 
struction. 

The  four  sappers,  having  the  positions  indicated,  work  at 


150 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


their  respective  forms.  All  the  gabions  opposite  these  forms, 
except  the  last-placed  (which  the  first  sapper  is  engaged  in 
filling),  are  crowned  with  temporary  crowning  fascines. 
The  joints  of  the  gabion  are  closed  with  sap-fagots,  as  well 
as  that  of  the  last  gabion  and  sap-roller.  The  latter  is 
placed  at  the  head,  and  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the 
sap,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  cover  at  least  one  foot  of  the 
first  gabion.  The  picks  and  shovels  which  are  not  in  use 
are  placed  on  the  berme,  close  to  the  gabions.  One  of  the 
hooks  is  also  on  the  berme,  the  other,  on  the  reverse,  is  fixed 
in  the  roller,  about  two-thirds  of  the  height  of  the  roller, 
above  the  ground,  and  1'  from  the  end ;  it  is  held  in  position 


THE   FULL   SAP.  151 

by  a  picket  driven  through  its  ring  into  the  ground ;  a  sap- 
fcrk  lies  on  the  reverse  near  the  first  sapper,  also  two 
crowning  fascines.  The  assistants  are  occnpied  with  re- 
placing the  temporary  crowning  fascines  with  ordinary  fas- 
cines, and  supplying  the  head  of  the  sap  with  all  the  neces- 
sary material.  They  are  furnished  with  two  sap-forks,  which 
are  placed  on  the  berme,  as  well  as  their  picks  and  shovels, 
which,  in  case  of  need,  may  supply  the  place  of  those  broken 
at  the  head  of  the  sap. 

The  sappers  and  their  assistants  have  neither  swords  nor 
cartridge-boxes,  their  muskets  are  placed  on  the  reverse, 
perpendicular  to  the  trench,  locks  up,  opposite  their  re- 
spective forms.  The  chief  of  sap,  stationed  a  little  in  rear 
of  the  fourth  sapper,  directs  the  operation ;  the  non-commis- ' 
sioned  officer  has  charge  of  the  assistants. 

TO   PLACE   A   NEW   GABION. 

When  the  last  gabion  placed  is  filled  and  crowned  with 
two  small  fascines,  and  the  first  sapper's  form  has  arrived 
opposite  the  middle  of  the  gabion,  he  warns  the  chief  by 
crying  "Halt"  The  latter  examines  the  work,  and  if  he  is 
satisfied  with  it,  gives  successively  the  following  commands  : 

1.  "Attention." 

2.  "  Gabion." 

3.  "Hooks." 

4.  "Forward." 

5.  "Enough." 
G.  "Fagot." 

7.  "  Commence  working." 

At  the  first  command  the  four  sappers  cease  working, 
place  the  tools  on  the  berme,  and  hold  themselves  in  readi- 
ness to  execute  the  manoeuvres  which  the  chief  is  about  to 
command.  At  the  second,  sapper  No.  1  removes  the  fagot 
from  the  joint  of  the  last  gabion  and  sap-roller,  and  places 
it  a  little  in  rear  on  the  berme.  The  second  sapper  moves, 


152  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

if  necessary,  the  handle  of  the  hook  on  the  reverse,  to  allow 
the  passage  of  the  new  gabion.  The  fourth  sapper  receives 
a  gabion  from  the  assistants,  rolls  it  along  the  reverse,  hold- 
ing it  by  the  points  of  its  stakes ;  it  is  passed  successively  to 
Nos.  3,  2  and  1.  The  latter  places  it  on  its  base  in  the  joint 
of  the  last  gabion  and  sap-roller. 

At  the  command  "Hooks"  sapper  No.  2  takes  the  berme- 
hook  and  fixes  it  in  the  roller  at  about  half  the  height 
of  the  top  of  the  latter  from  the  ground,  and  as  near 
the  parapet  as  possible.  No.  3  seizes  the  other  hook,  and 
replaces  it  about  the  same  height  from  the  ground  as  the 
first.  No.  4  aids  No.  2,  and  the  first  assistant  No.  3,  and 
all  prepare  to  push  forward  the  roller.  In  this  state  of  things 
the  first  and  second  sappers  should  be  kneeling,  and  leaning 
against  the  berme.  Nos.  3  and  1  assist  on  the  side  of  the 
reverse,  and  stooping  as  much  as  possible. 

At  the  command  "Forward"  the  four  sappers  armed  with 
the  hooks  push  the  roller  forcibly  but  steadily  forward,  with- 
out abandoning  it  or  deranging  its  perpendicular  direction 
with  respect  to  the  sap.  As  the  roller  advances,  No.  1 
pushes  the  new  gabion  in  the  interval  left  between  it  and 
the  last  gabion,  moving  it  by  means  of  the  fork.  He  indi- 
cates by  the  words  "more"  "too  much"  and  "enough"  what 
the  sappers  at  the  hooks  must  do  to  bring  the  roller  into  the 
proper  position.  In  the  mean  while  the  chief  of  sap  indi- 
cates to  No.  1  whether  the  gabion  is  to  be  pushed  nearer  the 
place  attacked  or  driven  back,  by  the  words  "  out"  or  "  in" 

At  the  command  "Enough"  the  sap-roller  is  drawn  back 
forcibly  against  the  newly-placed  gabion.  No.  2  disengages 
his  hook,  and  places  it  on  the  berme;  No.  3  leaves  his  engag- 
ed, fastening  it  in  its  position  by  driving  a  picket  through 
the  ring  with  his  pick.  No.  1  takes  the  sap-fagot  which  he 
placed  on  the  berme,  and  replaces  it  in  the  joint  between  the 
first  and  second,  gabions,  striking  the  head  of  the  central 
picket  with  the  flat  of  the  blade  of  his  pick. 


THE   FULL   SAP.  153 

At  the  command  "Fagot"  which  follows  the  last  imme- 
diately, the  assistants  pass  a  fagot  to  No.  4,  who  passes  it 
through  Nos.  3  and  2  to  No.  1 ;  the  latter  places  it  in  the  joint 
of  the  first  gabion  and  roller  by  means  of  his  fork.  The 
assistants  also  pass  to  No.  2  two  crowning  fascines,  which 
he  lays  on  the  reverse  near  the  roller. 

At  the  command  "  Commence  working"  all  the  sappers  re- 
sume the  excavation,  No.  1  keeping  close  to  the  berme,  throw- 
ing back  the  opposite  shoulder,  throwing  the  earth  carefully 
into  the  new  gabion.  When  it  is  filled  he  crowns  it  with  the 
two  small  fascines  by  means  of  the  fork.  The  other  sap- 
pers throw  the  earth  in  rear  of  the  gabions,  and  as  near  to 
them  as  possible — the  second  being  careful  to  throw  it  op- 
posite the  joints  of  the  gabions  of  his  own  form. 

CROWNING   THE    GABIONADE   WITH   FASCINES. 

The  object  of  crowning  the  gabions  with  the  small  fas- 
cines, is  to  increase  the  cover  of  the  sappers  engaged  in  the 
excavation,  but  as  they  only  give  the  parapet  a  height  of 
44",  and  do  not  bind  the  gabions  together,  they  are  replaced 
by  ordinary  fascines,  which  accomplish  the  latter  object  and 
procure  a  height  of  52"  to  the  parapet.  To  effect  this,  as 
soon  as  there  are  in  rear  of  the  fourth  sapper  three  gabions 
not  crowned,  the  chief  of  sap  commands,  "  Fascines"  The 
first  and  second  assistants,  each  provided  with  a  fork,  draw 
the  temporary  crowning  fascines  from  these  gabions  down 
upon  the  berme  ;  the  third  deposits  them  on  the  re  verse  ;  the 
fburth  brings  forward  three  ordinary  fascines ;  the  first  and 
second  take  one  and  place  it  on  the  berme,  raise  it  with  their 
forks,'  and  place  it  on  the  rear  of  the  top  of  the  gabions,  join- 
ing it  as  closely  as  possible  with  the  preceding,  and  strike  it 
several  blows,  to  engage  it  in  the  points  of  the  gabion  stakes. 
A  second  is  placed  in  advance  of  this,  and  a  third  on  top, 
and  in  the  joint  of  the  first  and  second. 
7* 


154:  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS.       - 

TO   CHANGE  THE   POSTS    OP   THE   SAPPERS. 

When  the  first  sapper  has  terminated  his  task,  which  is, 
ordinarily,  filling  two  gabions,  the  chief  of 'sap  commands, 
" Attention"  then  "  Change."  Each  sapper  falls  back  one 
form  ;  the  first  assistant  takes  his  musket  and  passes  to  the 
head  of  the  sap,  going  between  the  sappers  and  the  reverse. 
This  assistant  becomes  the  first  sapper ;  the  first  becomes  the 
second,  the  second  the  third,  and  the  third  becomes  the  fourth, 
the  fourth  passes  to  the  rear  of  the  brigade,  and  is  fourth 
assistant.  Each  of  the  other  assistants  advances  one  number. 

A  wounded  sapper  is  replaced  by  the  first  assistant ;  if  he 
is  badly  wounded  or  killed,  the  sappers  in  rear  deliver  him 
to  the  assistants,  who  carry  him  off,  and  the  work  is  imme- 
diately resumed. 

Each  brigade  should  have  a  reserve,  to  replace  those 
removed  by  accidents.  A  sapper  taken  from  this  reserve 
becomes  fourth  assistant. 

TIME   REQUIRED   FOR   EXECUTING  THE  FULL   SAP. 

In  the  schools  of  practice,  when  the  full  sap  is  executed 
in  ordinary  earth,  about  15  m.  are  required  to  place  and  fill 
one  gabion,  consequently  in  one  hour  of  uninterrupted  labor 
the  sap  advances  8'  10".  A  brigade  should  be  relieved  after 
eight  hours'  labor ;  when  this  time  is  exceeded  the  men  be- 
come too  much  fatigued  to  push  the  sap  forward  with  the 
necessary  rapidity.  Experience  has  proved  that  although 
the  excavations  of  the  four  sappers  differ  in  volume  they 
can  be  accomplished  in  the  same  time,  which  may  be  ac- 
counted for  by  comparing  their  tasks  with  the  more  or  less 
cramped  positions  in  which  they  work.  But  if  from  any 
cause  one  of  the  three  last  sappers  is  retarded,  the  chief  of 
sap  should  push  him  on,  and  cause  him  to  keep  within  two  and 
a  half  gabions  of  the  preceding,  as  the  velocity  of  the  sap 
should  be  regulated  by  the  first  sapper,  and  should  expe- 
rience a  retardation  from  him  only. 


THE   FULL   BAP. 


155 


OBSERVATIONS   RELATIVE   TO   INCLINED   SOIL. 

When  the  ground  over  which  the  sap  passes  is  inclined  in 
any  sense  whatever,  it  often  happens  that  gabions  placed  on 
their  bases  simply,  have  not  sufficient  stability.  The  first 
sapper  must  endeavor  to  place  them  in  the  most  favorable 
positions.  The  slope  may  be  so  great  as  to  require  the  ga- 
bion to  be  propped  with  a  fagot,  sand-bag  or  sods. 

When  the  ground  is 
inclined  toward  the  in- 
terior of  the  sap,  the 
roller  frequently  de- 
scends by  degrees  in 
the  same  direction — 
finally  no  longer  cov- 
ering the  gabionade, 
and  leaving  a  danger- 
ous opening.  To  bring  the  roller  into  its  true  position,  the 
chief  of  sap  gives  the  following  commands : 

1.  "Levers.    Fagots." 

2.  "Hooks." 

3.  "  Replace  the  sap-roller." 

At  the  first  command  the  assistants  pass  from  hand  to 
hand  to  the  first  sapper,  a  well-bound  sap-fagot,  which  he 
places  on  the  ground  parallel  to  the  roller,  opposite  its  mid- 
dle and  near  its  line  of  contact  with  the  ground.  Nos.  1 
and  2  receive  each  a  lever,  which  they  engage  under  the 
roller,  about  1'  each  side  of  its  middle,  resting  on  the  fagot 
as  a  fulcrum,  and  inclining  toward  the  berme. 

At  the  second  command  No.  3  takes  the  reverse  and  No. 
4  the  berme-hook,  the  former  being  fixed  in  the  roller. 
The  first  assistant  aids  No.  3  and  the  second  No.  4. 

At  the  third  command  Nos.  1  and  2  weigh  down  on  the 
levers,  bearing  them  toward  the  reverse,  thus  moving  the 
roller  in  the  opposite  direction.  They  should  act  by  succes- 


15C 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


sive  and  sudden  impulses,  the  sappers  at  the  forks  pulling 
strongly  to  prevent  the  roller  from  moving  in  advance. 

This  manoeuvre  may  be  facilitated  by  first  running  the 
roller  a  little  forward  by  means  of  the  hooks,  then  engaging 
the  levers  and  drawing  the  roller  back  upon  them.  As  it 
does  not  then  rest  upon  the  ground,  it  can  more  easily  be 
moved  in  the  direction  required. 

If  there  is  reason  to  fear  that  the  sappers  will  not  be 
sufficiently  covered  during  this  operation  by  the  crowning 
fascines,  sand-bags  may  be  placed  on  the  fascines. 

HALF-FULL   SAP. 

When  the  sappers  have  only  a  flank  fire  (coming  in  a  di- 
rection nearly  perpendicular  to  that  of  the  sap)  to  fear,  the 
sap-roller  may  be  dispensed  with.  The  first  sapper  then 
rovers  himself  by  the  last-filled  gabion  whilst  placing  and 
filling  the  new  one.  This  species  of  sap,  to  which  applica- 
tion is  sometimes  found,  is  called  the  half-full  sap. 


THE   FULL   SAP.  157 


DOUBLE    SAP. 

The  details  of  the  double  sap  are  similar  to  those  of  the 
simple.  The  gabionades  which  form  the  two  parapets,  are 
13'  4"  apart  in  the  clear,  taking  from  this  2'  for  the  two 
beams,  6'  8"  for  the  width  of  the  saps  at  top,  there  remains 
a  bank  of  earth  4'  8"  thick  in  the  middle,  which  is  to  be 
removed  by  the  ordinary  workmen.  When  this  is  accom- 
plished, the  double  sap  is  9'  6"  wide  at  the  bottom.  The 
depth  is  usually  40",  but  when  the  nature  of  the  ground  will 
permit,  it  may  be  greater,  in  order  to  facilitate  the  defile- 
ment. 

The  head  of  tho  double  sap  is  covered  by  two  rollers, 
placed  end  to  end,  each  covering  one  of  the  lateral  gabion- 
ades ;  it  is  well  to  engage  the  fascine  with  which  one  is  filled, 
with  those  of  the  other ;  when  this  is  not  the  case,  their  joint 
is  masked  with  a  wool-sack,  which  the  two  leading  sappers 
push  forward  with  their  forks,  after  having  placed  their  sap- 
fagots  in  the  gabionade,  keeping  the  joint  always  closed.  The 
two  brigades  execute  at  the  same  time  the  commands  of  the 
chief  of  sap,  who  stations  himself  in  that  one  in  which  he 
judges  his  presence  most  necessary. 

The  two  heads  of  sap  should  always  be  in  the  same  state 
of  advancement.  The  chief  of  sap  should  not  give  the  com- 
mand "Attention"  until  the  sappers  at  the  head  of  each  have 
cried  "  Halt"  The  sapper  who  first  fills  his  gabion  contin- 
ues to  enlarge  his  form  until  the  other  is  ready. 

This  necessity  of  awaiting  for  the  slowest  sapper  causes 
the  double  sap  to  advance  with  less  rapidity  than  the  simple. 
About  one-fifth  more  time  is  required  for  the  former,  that  is, 
eighteen  minutes  to  a  gabion. 

When  the  double  sap  is  pushed  directly  on  the  place,  trav- 
erses must  be  formed  from  distance  to  distance  to  guard 
against  enfilade  fire. 

These  traverses  are  said  to  be  u  en  cremailleres"  when 


158 


MANUAL   FOE    ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


placed  alternately  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  sap,  "  tour- 
n  antes"  (winding)  when  left  in  the  middle  of  the  sap,  which 
surrounds  them  entirely. 

The  position  of  the  traverses  and  returns  should  be  so  sit- 
uated that  a  man  standing  in  any  part  of  the  sap  cannot  be 
seen  from  the  place,  and  that  projectiles  cannot  ricochet  on 
the  bottom. 

It  therefore  varies 
with  the  command  of 
the  place  over  the 
ground  on  which  the 
|  sap  is  constructed,  and 
as  the  ground  is  more 
or  less  favorable  to  ri- 
cochet. The  construc- 
tion of  these  traverses 
involves  that  of  de- 
bouches, which  will  be 
treated  of  hereafter. 

The  inconveniences 
of  the  double  sap  are, 
1st,  length  of  time  re- 
quired in  its  construc- 
tion. 2d,  the  para- 
pets have  not  suffi- 
cient thickness.  3d, 
the  guard  and  workmen  are  too  much  crowded.  4th,  it  af- 
fords less  facilities  than  the  simple  sap,  to  be  pushed  for- 
ward by  the  flying  sap,  when  a  favorable  opportunity  offers. 
5th,  its  direction  exposed  to  plunging,  enfilade  and  reverse 
fire.  6th,  the  head  of  the  sap  has  no  lateral  protection 
against  sorties. 


THE  FULL  SAP.  159 

HALF  DOUBLE  SAP. 

Frequently  the  double  sap  is 
traced  over  ground  so  much  in- 
clined, that  one  sap  is  exposed 
to  fire  passing  over  the  parapet 
of  the  other ;  this  frequently  oc- 
curs in  the  crowning  of  the  cov- 
ered way.  In  this  case,  when 
cover  cannot  be  obtained  by 
increasing  the  depth  by  a  few 
inches,  the  half  double  sap  is 
resorted  to.  This  sap  is  execu- 
ted by  a  single  brigade  of  sap- 
pers; it  has  on  the  side  of  the 
berme  the  ordinary  parapet,  and 
on  the  reverse  a  provisional  par- 
apet, formed  of  gabions  filled 
with  sand-bags.  The  two  para- 
pets, which  are  5'  8"  apart,  are 
formed  at  the  same  time  by  the 
first  sapper.  At  the  command 
"Gabion"  the  assistants  pass  for- 
ward two  gabions,  to  No.  1, 
who  places  the  first  on  the  re- 
verse against  the  rollers,  and  the 
second  on  the  berme  in  the  or- 
dinary way.  ^  At  the  command 
" Forward"  he  first  places  the 
gabion  on  the  berme,  as  in  the 
simple  sap,  then  that  on  the  re- 
verse in  such  a  manner  that  one 
half  of  it  shall  be  covered  by  the 
roller.  After  the  command 
"Enough"  the  chief  of  sap,  in- 
stead of  simply  giving  the  com- 


160 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


mand  "  Fagot"  commands,  "  J5a$rs  and  fagots"  Two  fagots 
are  passed  to  No.  1,  who  places  them  in  the  angles  of  the 
gabionades  and  roller.  He  then  receives  on  his  shovel  from 
No.  2  a  sand-bag,  which  he  throws  into  the  gabion  on  the 
reverse  ;  he  proceeds  in  this  manner  until  the  gabion  is  filled 
and  the  joint  with  the  preceding  well  closed ;  this  usually 
requires  ten  sand-bags.  To  avoid  having  too  great  a  variety 
of  material  at  the  head  of  the  sap,  it  is  better  to  use  sand- 
bags for  crowning  the  true  parapet  in  the  place  of  small 
fascines ;  four  sand-bags  are  required  to  crown  one  gabion. 
The  assistants  will  therefore  pass  forward  fourteen,  which 
are  arranged  on  the  reverse  opposite  the  first  sapper  form. 


The  time  required  to  advance  this  sap  one  gabion,  is  about 
twenty  minutes  in  the  place  of  fifteen  employed  in  the  sim- 
ple and  eighte'en  in  the  double  sap.  As  soon  as  the  sap  has 
advanced  so  far  that  twelve  provisionally  gabions  are  found 
in  rear  of  No.  1,  the  chief  of  sap  causes  a  small  trench  to 
be  commenced,  perpendicular  to  the  sap,  whose  parapet 
shall  form  a  traverse,  high  enough  to  cover  the  sap  in  rear. 

This  trench  is  but  40"  wide,  and  is  executed  in  the  half- 
full  sap  by  the  reserve ;  this  allows  the  provisionally  gabion- 
ade in  rear  to  be  removed,  leaving  the  head  of  the  sap  only 
encased  by  two  gabionades ;  the  part  in  rear  can  then  re- 


THE   FULL   BAP. 


161 


ceive  the  proper  enlargement.  Finally,  the  small  traverses 
are  themselves  destroyed,  after  the  construction  of  the  large 
ones,  destined  to  guard  against  enfilade  and  reverse  fire,  both 
of  artillery  and  musketry. 

CHANGE   OP  DIRECTION   OP  THE  FULL  SAP. 

All  the  changes  of  direction  of  the  full  sap,  both  simple 
and  double,  are  comprised  in  the  following  list : 

1.  Obliquing  to  the  right  or  left. 

2.  Debouching  by  the  simple  or  double  sap  from  the  end 
of  simple  sap  whilst  in  course  of  construction. 

3.  Debouching  by  the  simple  sap,  from  one  or  both  sides 
of  the  double  sap,  in  course  of  construction. 

4.  Uniting  in  one  double  sap  two  simple  saps  meeting 
each  other. 

5.  Debouching  by  the  simple  or  double  sap  from  a  sap 

not  enlarged. 

6.  Debouching  by  the  simple  or 
double  sap  from  a  trench  of  the  ordi- 
nary dimensions. 

Before  describing  these  different  de- 
bouches, it  is  well  to  observe  that  the 
sap  should  be  well  supplied  with  sand- 
bags and  wool-sacks,  and  that  the  chief 
of  sap  should  conduct  the  operation 
with  the  greatest  order  and  celerity. 

TO   CHANGE   DIRECTION  TO  THE  RIGHT 
OR   LEFT. 

This  change  of  direction  reduces 
itself  to  turning  the  sap-roller  until 
it  becomes  perpendicular  to  the  new 
direction  to  be  given  the  sap.  We 
will  suppose  the  direction  is  to  be 
changed  to  the  left,  the  chief  of  sap 


162  MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

first  warns  the  brigade  by  the  command,  "Prepare  to  change 
direction"    Then 

1.  "Levers.     Fagots." 

2.  "Hooks." 

3.  "  Change  direction." 

At  the  first^command  the  assistants  pass  to  the  first  sapper 
two  sap-fagots  and  a  wool-sack.  No.  1  places  one  fagot 
perpendicular  to  the  roller  and  near  its  interior  extremity, 
the  other  on  the  first,  near  and  parallel  to  the  roller,  in- 
clining toward  the  sap.  He  then  replaces  the  fagot  in  the 
joint  of  the  gabionade  and  roller  by  the  wool-sack,  which 
he  fixes  in  its  position  by  means  of  the  sap-fork.  No.  2 
receives  a  lever  12'  long,  one  end  of  which  he  introduces 
between  the  roller  and  fagot  just  placed. 

At  the  second  command  No.  3  takes  the  reverse-hook  and 
fixes  it  in  the  roller,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  able  to  push 
the  roller.  No.  4  fixes  the  berme-hook  in  such  a  way  as  to 
be  able  to  pull  it.  The  first  and  second  assistants  aid  re- 
spectively sappers  No.  3  and  4. 

At  the  third  command  No.  4  holds  the  roller  against  the 
last-placed  gabion,  whilst  No.  3  pushes  the  opposite  extrem- 
ity, No.  2  favoring  the  motion  of  the  roller  by  weighing 
down  on  the  lever  as  the  roller  advances. ^  No.  1  pushes  up 
the  fagot  (which  is  used  as  a  fulcrum  for  the  lever)  in  order 
to  give  No.  2  a  better  purchase. 

In  this  way,  the  direction  of  the  roller  may  be  changed 
50°  or  60°  in  about  fifteen  minutes,  even  on  ground  ascend- 
ing toward  the  place. 

TO  DEBOUCH  BY  THE  SIMPLE  OR  DOUBLE  SAP  FROM  THE  EX- 
TREMITY OF  THE  SIMPLE  SAP  IN  COURSE  OF  CONSTRUC- 
TION. 

FIRST   CASTS. BY   THE   SIMPLE    SAP. 

When  but  five  gabions  remain  to  be  placed  before  arriv- 
ing at  the  point  at  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be 


THE   FULL   SAP. 


163 


made,  the  chief  of 
sap  causes  an  off- 
set to  be  made  in 
the  gabionade  and 
berrne,  so  that  the 
last  five  gabions 
I  shall  form  a  line 
parallel  to  that  of 
the  others,  and  13" 
within  it.  The 
object  of  this  ar- 
rangement will  be  seen  hereafter. 

When  the  fifth  gabion  is  placed,  the  chief  of  sap  warns  No. 
1  to  arrest  his  form  within  20"  of  the  roller,  instead  of  ad- 
vancing to  the  middle  of  the  last  gabion.  When  this  is 
filled,  the  following  commands  are  given. 

1.  "  Prepare  the  debouch." 

2.  "  Prepare  to  debouch." 

3.  "Debouch." 

At  the  first  command  'No.  I  commences  a  form  parallel  to 
the  roller  on  the  reverse  ;  this  form  is  also  20"  wide  and 
deep,  but  a  berate  of  20"  is  left  between  it  and  the  roller. 
When  he  arrives  nearly  opposite  the  extremity  of  the  sap- 
roller  he  places  in  its  prolongation,  by  the  half-full  sap,  three 
gabions,  in  order  to  prolong  the  epau-lement  necessary  to 
cover  the  manoeuvre  of  debouching.  He  arrests  his  form 
opposite  the  middle  of  the  third  gabion.  The  other  sappers 
follow,  enlarging  their  forms  as  usual. 

No.  2  throws  his  earth  in  rear  of  the  roller  and  the  first 
gabion  in  its  prolongation,  the  others  throw  the  earth  be- 
hind the  gabions  in  rear  of  the  crochet. 

The  sap  being  now  in  the  situation  indicated  in  the  above 
figure,  Nos.  1  and  2  commence  excavating  the  retreat,  v,  oj, 
y,  z ;  making  it  40"  wide  and  40"  deep  at  cc,  y,  and  24"  at 
o,  z,  they  throw  their  earth  in  rear  of  the  three  last-placed 


164 


MANUAL  FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


gabions.  Nos.  3  and  4  also  enlarge  the  extremity  of  the  sap, 
s,  £,  u,  y,  until  it  is  40*  wide  and  deep,  throwing  the  earth 
in  rear  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  gabions. 

At  the  same  time  the  assistants  bring  forward  a  sap-roller, 
and  the  fascines  necessary  to  stuff  it,  also  a  piece  of  scant- 
ling or  plank  7'  long. 

When  Nos.  3  and  4  have  finished  their  excavation,  they 
lay  the  plank  across  the  sap  opposite  the  joint  of  the  third 
and  fourth  gabions,  one  end  on  the  berme,  the  other  on  the 
reverse.  Then,  aided  by  the  assistants,  they  place  the  roller 
upon  it,  and  against  the  parapet  of  the  sap,  its  extremity 
6"  from  the  first  roller;  they  then  stuff  it  with  the  fascines, 
which  operation  should  be  completed  about  the  same  time 
that  Nos.  1  and  2  finish  their  excavation  (#,  y,  v,  z). 

At  the  second  com- 
mand, Nos.  2,  3  and  4 
place  themselves  in  the 
retreat,  x,  y,  v,  z  ;  fur- 
nished with  two  forks 
and  two  hooks,  they 
draw  the  new  roller  to- 
ward them,  away  from 
the  gabionade ;  they 
place  a  wool-sack  under 
it  to  protect  their  legs 
from  the  shot  which 
might  pass  under  the  roller  after  the  gabions  are  removed. 
No.  1  having  a  sap-hook,  places  himself  a  little  in  rear  of 
the  fifth  gabion,  in  the  re-entrant  formed  in  the  berme  at  this 
point,  and  holds  himself  in  readiness  to  overturn  the  gabions, 
the  first  assistant  aiding  him. 

At  the  third  command  No.  1  overturns  into  the  sap  the 
first  four  gabions,  the  fascines  or  sand-bags  with  which  they 
are  crowned  and  the  sap-fagots  closing  their  joints ;  he  drags 
them  to  the  rear  with  his  hook,  or  ranges  them  on  the  bot- 


THE    FULL    SAP. 


1C5 


torn  of  the  sap  in  such  a  manner  as  not  to  interfere  with  the 
advance  of  the  new  roller,  and  without  displacing  the  plank 
over  which  it  is  to  pass. 

This  being  accomplished,  Nos.  2,  3  and  4  push  forward 
the  roller,  causing  it  to  pass  through  the  opening  thus  form- 
ed, notwithstanding  the  mounds  of  earth  left  on  the  berme 
by  the  overturned  gabions.  They  effect  this  first  by  using 
the  forks,  afterward  the  hooks. 

No.  1  then  re- 
pairs to  the  angle 
formed  by  the  two 
rollers,  where  he 
places  a  gabion  in 
the  position  of  the 
first  one,  which  was 
overturned  ;  if  the 
earth  left  by  the 
latter  on  the  berme 
impedes  the  opera- 
tion, it  can  be  removed  with  the  drag  ;  after  this  the  sap  is 
executed  in  the  ordinary  manner.  In  ordinary  ground  this 
debouche  can  be  executed  in  an  hour  and  a  quarter,  from  the 
command  '"''Prepare  to  debouch"  to  the  placing  of  the  first 
gabion  of  the  new  sap.  The  time  required  for  the  different 
operations  is  as  follows,  viz.  : 

Executing  th.Q  form  of  No.  1  along  the  first  roller, 

and  filling  the  three  gabions  of  the  epaulement,  30  min. 

Completing  the  sap,  placing  and  filling  the  roller,  34     " 

Overturning  the  four  gabions,  8     " 

Advancing  the  roller,                  *  1     " 

Replacing  the  first  gabion,    -  2     " 


1  h.  15  min. 

To    debouch  obliquely  from  the  sap  of  departure,  it  is 
necessary  to  give  the  first  roller  a  parallel  direction  to  that 


1G6 


MANUAL   FOB    ENGINEER    TROOPS. 


which  the  new  sap  is  to  have,  the  retreat  is  then  made  par- 
allel to  this,  and  the  new  roller  placed  perpendicular  to  the 
new  direction.  The  number  of  gabions  to  be  overturned 
will  depend  on  the  angle  made  by  the  two  saps.  These  ga- 
bions are  not  all  overturned  at  the  same  time,  but  in  propor- 
tion as  the  roller  advances,  filling  the  opening  left  by  those 
first  pulled  down.  Any  opening  that  may  occur  between  the 
roller  and  gabions  is  closed  by  a  wool-bag. 


An  oblique  debouche  may  also  be  effected  by  first  execu- 
ting the  perpendicular  from  the  sap  of  departure,  then,  by 
successive  changes  of  direction  of  the  roller,  obtaining  the 
required  direction.  This  is  perhaps  the  most  expeditious 
method  ;  but  it  may  happen,  that  the  portion  of  the  new  sap 
which  is  perpendicular  to  the  sap  of  departure,  is  exposed 


THE    FULL    SAP. 


107 


to  reverse  fire,  in  which  case  it  will  be  necessary  to  make 
use  of  the  half  double  sap  for  this  portion. 

SECOND    CASE. DEBOUCHING   BY   THE   DOUBLE    SAP. 


ii 

I>J  1  — 

•1  I! 

=£p 

I                     ftt 

u 

x 

t*T\ti~ 
xl-^ 

\x 

Having  arrived  at  the  position  from  which  the  debouche 
is  to  be  made,  the  chief  of  sap  cautions  the  sappers  to  throw 
no  earth  in  rear  of  the  last  eight  gabions,  which  are  to 
be  overturned,  in  order  to  allow  a  passage  for  the  new  roll- 
In  most  cases  these  last  gabions  can  be  placed  in  the 


ers. 


same  line  with  those  of  the  gabionade  preceding  them,  dis- 
pensing with  the  crochet  used  in  the  former  example. 
The  head  of  the  sap  having  arrived  at  the  last  gabion,  the 


168  MANUAL    FOR   ENGINEER    TROOPS. 

chief  of  sap  commands,  "  Prepare  to  debouch  by  the  double 
sap."  The  sappers  then  execute  all  that  has  been  indicated 
at  the  analogous  command  in  the  simple  sap,  and  in  addi- 
tion, the  first  and  second  assistants  of  the  brigade,  or  two 
sappers  of  the  new  brigade  (necessary  to  execute  the  double 
full  sap,  excavate  a  second  retreat  in  the  reverse  similar  to 
the  first,  and  opposite  the  Cth  *nd  half  of  the  7th  gabion. 

Two  sap-rollers  are  then  placed  on  the  planks  that  have 
previously  been  laid  across  the  sap.  The  rollers  should  be  so 
situated  that  their  outer  extremities  should  be  opposite  the 
first  and  eighth  gabions  to  be  overturned.  The  sap-rollers 
are  moved  back  on  to  the  reverse. 

The  chief  of  the  double  sap  then  causes  the  first  brigade 
to  debouch,  replace  the  first  gabion  and  fill  it,  then  retire. 

The  second  brigade  then  advance,  debouch  with  their  sap 
in  similar  manner,  and  replace  and  refill  the  eighth  gabion. 
The  double  sap  is  then  conducted  by  the  ordinary  commands. 
It  may  happen  that  after  the  debouche,  the  two  rollers  are 
not  in  contact ;  in  this  case  the  opening  must  be  masked  with 
a  wool-sack,  and  the  rollers  brought  together  with  the  levers. 

It  requires  about  one  hour  and  a  half  to  execute  the  de- 
bouche, from  the  command  "  Prepare  to  debouch"  until  the 
first  gabion  of  the  double  sap  is  replaced. 

The  following  method  for  debouching  from  a  sap  in  course 
of  construction,  appears  to  be  both  of  simple  and  easy  exe- 
cution. A  frame  is  provided,  having  been  previously  pre- 
pared to  receive  the  new  roller,  also  three  rollers  4"  in  diam- 
eter and  40"  long,  and  a  plank  7'  long. 

The  sap  having  received  its  full  depth,  and  the  berme  being 
cleared  off,  the  chief  of  sap  commands,  "  Prepare  to  de- 
bouch" No.  1  places  a  roller  across  the  trench.  No.  2  places 
the  plank  also  across  the  trench  and  opposite  the  third 
gabion.  These  two  sappers  then  pass  to  the  rear  and 
receive  from  the  other  sappers  the  frame,  which  they  lay 
with  one  end  on  the  small  roller,  the  handles  on  the  plank. 


THE    FULL    SAP. 


169 


2d.  «  Sap-roller." 

At  this  command  an  empty  roller  is  passed  to  the  head 
of  the  sap  by  the  assistants,  placed  by  the  sappers  on  the 
frame  and  against  the  first  roller,  then  stuffed. 

3d.  "  Prepare  to  advance" 

Nos.  1  and  2  leave  the  sap ;  crawl  on  their  bellies  along  the 
sap-roller ;  No.  1  is  charged  with  pushing  the  first  sap-roller,  • 
renewing  the  rollers  under  the  frame,  and  giving  warning 
by  the  words  "more"  or  "  too  much"  of  the  progress  of  the 
new  roller  which  No.  2  holds  upon  the  frame.  .  Nos.  9  and 
4,  with  a  sap-hook  passing  between  the  gabionade  and  new 
roller,  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  push  the  first  sap-roller 
forward.  The  first  assistant  places  himself  under  the  new 


170  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER    TROOPS. 

sap-roller,  the  second  between  the  handles  of  the  frame,  and 
the  3d  and  4th  at  the  extremities  of  these  handles. 

The  chief  of  sap  then  glides  behind  the  new  roller  and 
commands,  "  Forward" 

All  push  (in  silence,  that  they  may  hear  the  commands  of 
No.  1). 

When  the  chief  sees  that  the  new  roller  is  unmasked  ho 
commands,  "Halt" 

No.  3  disengages  the  sap-hook,  and  places  a  wool-sack  in 
the  joint  of  the  new  roller  and  gabionade. 

The  second  assistant  yields  his  place  to  the  first  as  soon  as 
the  roller  has  arrived  at  the  end  of  the  trench,  and  goes  to 
the  assistance  of  sappers  1  and  2. 

"Forward." 

At  this  command,  Nos.  1,  2,  and  second  assistant  push  the 
new  roller  of  the  frame  into  the  required  position.  To  ef- 
fect this  they  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground,  and  push  with 
their  shoulders,  until  the  command  is  given,  "  Enough." 

The  second  assistant  then  passes  the  wool-sack  to  sapper 
No  1,  who  places  it  in  the  joint  of  the  two  rollers.  The  op- 
eration is  terminated  by  the  command,  "  To  your  posts" 
Each  sapper  retakes  his  place,  the  frame  and  small  rollers  are 
carried  to  the  rear  by  the  assistant.  This  method  requires 
not  more  than  five  or  six  minutes,  not  including  excavating 
the  sap  to  the  full  depth  and  stuffing  the  new  roller.  It 
would  therefore  appear  that  the  process,  with  some  slight 
modification,  would  be  equally  safe  and  much  more  expedi- 
tious than  that  now  in  use. 

TO   DEBOUCH   BY  THE   SIMPLE   SAP   FROM   ONE   OR   BOTH  SIDES 
OF    THE   DOUBLE  SAP. 

When  the  debouche  is  to  be  made  on  both  sides  of  the 
double  sap,  the  chief  of  sap  will  cause  the  last  five  gabions 
of  each  parapet,  to  be  placed  1'  within  the  lines,  and  the  form 
of  each  of  the  first  sappers  to  stop  within  20"  of  tliu  rollers, 


THE  FULL    SAT. 


171 


when  in  their  per- 
manent position. 
He  will  then  com- 
mand, "  PrejHire 
to    debouch     by 
tJie  simple  sap" 
Each     No.     1 
will  then  fix  his 
sap    roller    with 
^    pickets.      Then 
\  turning    their 
J  forms  at  right  an- 
P-  gles,  they  will 
-:  move  toward 
each  other,  mak- 
ing their  excava- 
tions   40"    wide 
and  deep,  the  pre- 
ceding   portions 
of   the    sap   are 
also  enlarged  to 
the  same  dimen- 
sions.   They  will 
I  all    avoid  throw- 
|  ing  the    earth 
H  against    any     of 
^  the  gabions  that 
f  are  to  be   over- 
2:  turned. 

The  brigade  that  first  completes  this  task  (that  on  the 
right  for  example)  will  bring  forward  an  empty  roller,  place 
and  stuff  it,  as  in  the  preceding  cases.  The  chief  will 
then  command  : 

2.  u  L<'ft  In'iffit.th  retire.  Riyht  brigade  prepare  to  debouch." 
3. 


172  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

At  the  second  command  the  left  brigade  will  retire  to  the 
rear  of  the  sap,  and  the  right  will  execute  the  debouche  on 
the  right  side  of  the  sap.  When  they  have  replaced  and  re- 
filled their  first  gabion,  the  chief  commands  : 

4.  "Right  brigade  retire.  Left  brigade  prepare  to  debouch" 

5.  "Debouch." 

The  right  then  retire  and  the  left  brigade  execute  the  de- 
bouche from  the  left  side  of  the  sap,  in  a  similar  manner ;  when 
they  have  refilled  their  first  gabion,  the  chief  will  command : 

6.  "Might  brigade,  to  your  posts." 

The  two  saps  will  then  proceed  in  the  ordinary  manner. 
About  one  hour  is  required  to  execute  the  double  d'ebourho, 
which  is  composed  of  two  successive  debouches.  If  the  de- 
bouche is  to  be  executed  on  one  side  only,  but  forty  minutes 
will  be  required. 

The  processes  described  in  the  three  preceding  articles 
consume  one  or  two  sap-rollers,  which  remain  in  their  places. 
As  these  rollers  are  of  difficult  construction,  it  may  be  desir- 
able to  withdraw  them  from  these  positions  to  use  elsewhere. 
To  eflect  this,  earth  is  thrown  in  rear  of  the  roller  to  be 
removed,  until  a  parapet  is  formed  40"  high ;  two  beams  are 
then  laid  in  front  of  the  roller,  upon  which  it  is  rolled  down 
into  the  trench,  the  position  which  it  occupied  is  then  imme- 
diately supplied  by  three  or  four  ordinary  gabions,  which  are 
filled  and  crowned. 

TO    UNITE   TWO   SIMPLE   SAPS    INTO   ONE   DOUBLE   SAP. 


THE    FULL    SAP. 


173 


When  the  gabionade?  of  the  two  saps  to  be  united  have 
approached  to  within  13'  6"  of  each  other,  the  chief  of  the 
double  sap  causes  their  junction  by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  "Prepare  to  unite  in  the  double  sap." 

2.  "Lever.     Fagots." 

3.  "Hooks." 

4.  "  Change  direction." 

5.  "Halt." 

6.  "  Commence  working." 

7.  "Forward." 

At  the  first  command  each  brigade  prepares  to  execute 
simultaneously  the  manoeuvres  which  will  here  b$  described 
for  one  of  them.  Nos.  1,  2  and  3  enlarge  their  forms,  making 
them  7"  wider  and  40"  deep.  No.  1  must  not  pass  beyond 
the  middle  of  the  first  gabion,  or  throw  earth  behind  this 
gabion. 

The  second,  third  and  fourth  commands  are  executed  in 


174  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

the  same  manner  as  the  same  commands  in  the  simple  change 
of  direction  of  the  sap,  with  this  exception,  Nos.  1  and  4 
dr:i\v  toward  the  interior  of  the  sap,  the  end  of  the  roller 
on  the  bcrme ;  by  these  means  the  direction  of  the  roller  is 
changed  70°  or  80° ;  it  should  then  be  entirely  within  the 
line  of  gabions. 

The  fifth  command  is  given  when  the  direction  is  so  much 
changed  that  No.  2  can  no  longer  act  with  his  lever ;  the 
lever,  fagots  and  forks  are  then  passed  to  the  rear. 

At  the  sixth  command  No.  1  commences  a  form  20"  wide 
and  deep  in  rear  of  the  roller,  and  as  near  it  as  possible ;  he 
works  kneeling,  and  is  followed  closely  by  No.  2,  who 
deepens  it  12".  The  earth  is  thrown  on  the  reverse. 

When  No.  1  has  excavated  to  within  12"  or  16"  of  the 
further  end  of  the  roller,  he  retires,  and  when  the  form  lias 
been  sufficiently  enlarged,  Nos.  2,  3,  4,  and  first  assistant 
enter  it,  provided  with  two  forks  and  two  hooks,  taking  care 
to  keep  themselves  perfectly  covered  by  stooping. 

At  the  seventh  command  these  sappers  push  forward  the 
rollers  with  their  hooks  and  forks,  causing  them  to  enter  the 
interval  left  between  the  gabionades.  The  two  brigades 
will  so  concert  their  movements  that  the  two  rollers  shall 
be  exactly  joined,  forming  thus  one  roller  whose  direction 
is  parallel  to  the  sap. 

In  the  mean  while  No.  1,  stationed  at  the  head  of  the  sap, 
directs  the  motion  of  the  roller  by  warning  the  sappers  who 
are  pushing,  and  if  he  perceives  that  the  motion  of  the 
roller  is  hindered  by  the  last  gabion  of  the  gabionade  (as  is 
almost  always  the  case),  he,  aided  by  the  second  assistant, 
overturns  it  in  the  trench  with  a  sap-hook,  and  supplies  its 
place  with  a  wool-sack,  using  a  fork  to  place  it. 

Finally,  when  the  two  rollers  have  entered  the  opening, 
the  c.hief  commands,  "Gabions;"  the  two  gabions  that  were 
overturned  are  replaced,  and  the  double  sap  is  continued  by 
the  ordinary  commands. 


THE    FULL    SAP.  175 

In  ordinary  ground  the  time  occupied  in  this  mano3uvre 
is  as  follows : 

Enlarging  the  two  saps  about  to  be  united,      25  minutes. 
Changing  direction  of  sap-rollers  70°  or  80°,    15       " 
Excavating  forms  in  rear  of  sap-rollers,  25       " 

Advancing  the  rollers,  overturning  the  ex- 
treme gabions  of  the  two  saps,  and  re- 
placing them,  15  " 

Total  -  1  hr.  20  minutes. 

It  must,  however,  be  remarked  that  No.  1  has  to  turn  his 
form  around  the  replaced  gabion,  in  order  to  take  the  new 
direction  of  the  double  sap,  which  employs  about  ten  minutes, 
making  the  total  length  of  time  consumed  one  hour  and 
thirty  minutes. 

If  the  two  simple  saps  are  merely  to  be  united  the  two 
rollers  which  are  to  form  the  parapet  are  united  as  above, 
and,  if  necessary,  may  be  withdrawn  by  the  process  before 
described.  In  this  case  the  first  command  is  changed  into 
"Prepare  to  unite  the  saps"  The  overturned  gabions  are 
not  replaced,  but  the  openings  left  by  them  closed  with 
fagots  or  sand-bags. 

TO  DEBOUCH  BY  THE  DOUBLE  OR  SIMPLE  SAP,  FROM  A  SAP 
NOT  ENLARGED. 

FIRST  CASE. — TO  DEBOUCH  BY  THE  SIMPLE  SAP. 

Let  A  be  the  gabion  selected  as  the  first  of  the  new  gabion- 
ade. The  chief  of  sap  commands  :  1.  "Prepare  to  debouch" 
2.  "  Commence  working"  At  the  first  command,  No.  1, 
directed  by  the  chief,  traces  on  the  berme  and  slope  of  the 
sap  a  form  12"  to  the  left  of  gabion  A,  40"  wide  and  deep. 
He  is  provided  with  a  pick  and  shovel.  No.  2  places  across 
the  sap  on  each  side  of  this  form  a  plank,  one  end  resting 
on  the  benne,  the  other  on  the  reverse,  lie  is  furnished  with 


176 


MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


two  drags,  one  having  a  handle  3'  and  thQ  other  6' 
The  3d  and  4th  sappers  pull  down  the  crowning  fascines 
from  gabions  A,  B,  C,  and  D,  with  their  forks. 


The  assistants  bring  forward  an  empty  roller,  place  it  on 
the  planks  against  the  four  gabions  to  be  removed,  one  end 
opposite  the  middle  of  A,  and  prepare  to  stuff  it.  At  the 
2(1  command  No.  1,  kneeling  under  the  roller,  commences 


THE   FULL   SAP. 


177 


to  excavate  his  form.  No.  2  draws  the  earth  thus  obtained 
along  the  bottom  of  the  sap  (and  to  the  right),  with  his  drag. 
Nos.  3  and  4  throw  it  over  the  parapet.  During  this  time 
the  assistants  stuff  the  roller  and  adjust  the  crowning  of  the 
gabions  adjacent  to  the  debouche,  if  they  have  been  dis- 
arranged. 


As  soon  as  No.  1  has  advanced  16"  or  20",  No.  3  also 
•s  under  the  roller,  on  the  side  opposite  No.  2,  and  drags 
away  a  portion  of  the  earth  excavated  by  No.  1.     The  first 
assistant  throws  this  over  the  parapet. 

No.  1  pushes  his  form  until  he  has  passed  the  line  of  gabions 
passing  under  C  and  B ;  he  then  drags  the  earth  out  of  these 
gabions  into  his  form,  pulls  the  gabions  themselves  through 
8* 


ITS  MANUAL   FOR   EXGIXKFR   TKOOPS. 

1lio  opening  into  the  trench,  overturns  gabions  A  and  D,  and 
<  I  nigs  them  also  into  the  sap,  clears  away  tlie  earth  whirh 
might  impede  the  progress  of  the  roller  with  his  drag. 
During  this  operation  he  is  covered  from  the  fire  of  the 
place  by  the  mask  of  earth  (about  '32"  high),  which  remains 
in  advance  of  the  roller. 

Nos.  2  and  3  move  forward  the  roller  until  it  rests  against 
this  mask,  closing  the  openings  that  may  be  dangerous  l>r- 
twi'i-u  the  roller  and  gabionade  witli  sand-bags,  wool-sacks, 
fagots,  &c.  No.  1,  under  the  roller,  which  is  gradually 
moved  forward,  continues  his  form  (40"  wide  and  dee})), 
passing  the  earth  to  the  rear.  Nos.  2  and  3,  who  work 
standing,  pass  this  earth  to  No.  4  and  the  first  assistant. 
The  gabion  A  should  be  replaced  as  soon  as  there  is  suffi- 
cient space  for  it. 

When  the  form  of  No.  1  has  attained  a  length  of  about 
5'  4",  a  second  gabion  is  placed,  and  the  work  is  continued 
as  in  the  ordinary  sap.  It  must,  however,  be  remarked  that 
the  places  of  the  2d,  3d  and  4th  gabions  must  be  prepared 
with  the  drag  previous  to  setting  them,  and  that  the  roller 
has  to  be  forced  over  a  small  mound  of  earth,  the  remains 
of  the  parapet  which  has  been  cut  through. 

The  time  necessary  for  this  debouche,  including  the  crown- 
ing of  the  third  gabion,  is  about  two  hours  and  a  half,  viz. : 
From  the  commencement  until  the  overturn- 
ing of  gabions,  30  minutes. 
Overturning  gabions,  17       " 
To  advance  the  roller  to  the  outer  surface 

of  gabionade,  6       " 

The  roller  entirely  engaged  in  the  gabionade,     32       " 
First  gabion  filled,  35       " 

Second     "        «  10       « 

Third       "        "     crowned,  and  No.  1  form 

reaches  the  middle,     -  20       " 

Total,  -  -  2  lirs.  30  minutes. 


THE   FULL   SAP. 


179 


In  the  case  of  an  oblique  debouche  the  roller  is  placed  per- 
pendicular to  the  new  direction,  and  No.  1  excavates  in  this 
direction.  The  operation  is  similar  to  that  just  described, 
but  longer.  It  is  therefore  generally  preferable  to  debouch 
perpendicularly  first,  and  then  change  the  direction,  if 
necessary. 


SECOND    CASE. TO    DEBOUCH    BY    THE    DOUBLE    SAP. 

Two  gabions  of  the  gabionade  13'  4"  apart,  are  chosen  as 
the  first  of  the  double  sap.  The  chief  commands,  I.  '•'•Pre- 
pare to  debouch  by  the  double  sap"  2.  "  Commence  working." 

Each  brigade  executes  all  that  has  been  prescribed  above 
for  these  commands.  The  assistants,  in  stuffing  the  rollers, 
should  bind  them  together,  causing  the  fascines  of  one  to 
project  into  the  other.  The  earth,  in»this  case,  can  only  be 
drawn  away  on  one  side  of  the  sap,  instead  of  both,  as  in 
the  preceding  case,  which  renders  the  execution  somewhat 
longer. 


180 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS.  ' 


TO   DEBOUCH    BY   THE    SIMPLE   OR   DOUBLE   SAP,    FROM   A 
OF   THE    ORDIN.WIY    AVIDTH. 


FIRST   CASE.  —  TO   DEBOUCH  BY    SIMPLE    SAP. 


Let  A  be  the  gabion  chosen  as  the  first  of  the  new  gabion- 
ade (on  the  right  of  the  new  sap).  The  chief  commands, 
1.  "Prepare  to  ikbouch."  2.  "Ready."  3.  "Debouch." 
4.  "Halt''1  At  the  first  command,  the  assistants  brine:  for- 
ward a  sap-roller,  place  it  against  the  reverse,  in  the  trench, 
and  opposite  the  gabions  A,  B,  C,  and  D,  and  if  not  already 
filled,  fill  it.  Nos.  1,  2,  3  and  4  are  provided  with  two  sap- 
hooks,  two  forks,  two  beams,  10'  6"  long,  and  notched  011  one 


THE    FULL   SAP. 


181 


side,  two  ropes  30'  or  40'  long,  having  a  hook  at  one  ex- 
tremity of  each,  a  long  and  a  short  handle  drag. 


At  the  second  command,  Nos.  1  and  4,  each  taking  a  fork, 
place  themselves  opposite  A,  B,  C,  D  (the  first  on  the  right), 
and  first  take  down  the  crowning  fascine,  then  overturn  the 
into  the  trench.  The  same  sappers  place  the  beam, 
one  end  under  the  roller,  and  about  12"  from  its 
extremity,  the  other  on  the  parapet,  which  has  been  previ- 
ously formed  into  a  ramp,  by  dragging  the  earth  inward 
with  a  hoe.  Nos.  2  and  3  lay  two  hooks  on  the  reverse,  op- 
posite and  perpendicular  to  the  roller,  fasten  the  hooks  of  the 
in  roller,  and  plant  two  strong  stakes  on  each  side  of  it. 


182 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER    TROOrS. 


The  assistants  are  placed  two  on  each  side  the  1  and  2, 
provided  with  forks.  At  the  third  command  the  roller  is 
pushed  up  to  the  top  of  the  parapet,  first  by  hand,  then  with 
forks ;  the  sappers  having  the  following  positions — Nos.  2 
and  3  assistants  near  the  right  beam,  acting  with  the  same 
hook ;  Nos.  3  and  4  assistants  do  the  same  on  the  opposite 
end ;  the  first  and  second  assistants  opposite  the  middle  of 
the  roller,  pushing  with  the  forks,  and  prevent  it  from  rolling 
back  when  the  hooks  are  disengaged  to  take  a  new  hold ; 
Nos.  1  and  4  at  each  end  of  the  roller,  and  outside  the 
beams,  also  pushing,  and  in  case  of  need  assisting  at  the  hooks. 


THE   FULL    SAP. 


183 


When  the  roller  arrives  at  tlie  crest  of  the  parapet,  it  is  still 
pushed  with  the  hooks,  but  the  first  and  second  assistants 
taking  the  ropes,  give  them  a  turn  around  the  pickets  (in 
the  bottom  of  the  trench),  allow  the  roller  to  roll  gradually 
down  the  exterior  slope  of  the  parapet,  keeping  it  parallel 
to  its  first  position.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  the 
chief  gives  when  he  judges  the  roller  N  has  nearly  reached 
the  foot  of  the  parapet,  the  ropes  are  made  fast  to  the  pick- 
ets, and  the  beams,  hooks,  &c.,  taken  away  and  laid  on  the 
reverse  and  berme.  The  sap  is  then  commenced  with  the 
usual  command,  "Gabion"  &c. 


184  MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

It  should  be  remarked,  first,  That  the  new  gabionade 
should  be  so  directed  that,  arriving  at  the  sap-roller,  the  last- 
placed  gabion  shall  be  at  least  half  covered  by  it. 

Second,  That  No.  1,  being  perfectly  covered  by  the  par- 
apet, having  cleared  away  the  earth  of  the  parapet,  places 
the  first  two  gabions  on  the  natural  ground,  and  then  com- 
mences his  form  in  the  usual  manner,  throwing  the  earth  to 
the  rear ;  the  sappers  in  the  rear  fill  these  two  gabions ;  No. 
1  fills  the  following  one,  throwing  the  excess  of  earth  to 
the  rear. 

Third.  Any  accidental  openings  are  closed  immediately 
with  wool-sacks.  The  time  required  to  execute  this  debouche, 
from  the  command  "Prepare  to  debouch"  until  seven  ga- 
bions are  placed,  is  about  four  hours. 

SECOND   CASE. TO    DEBOUCH    BY   THE   DOUBLE   SAP. 

This  case  is  executed  in  the  same  manner  as  the  preced- 
ing. The  assistants,  in  placing  the  two  rollers,  take  care  to 
bind  them  well  together,  that  they  may  not  separate  in  the 
man<ruvre.  That  portion  of  the  earth  of  the  parapet  be- 
tween the  two  saps  which  does  not  crumble  into  the  forms, 
is  allowed  to  remain  until  the  trench  is  turned  over  to  the 
ordinary  workmen.  ^ 

TRENCH   CAVALIER. 

The  trench  cavalier  is  a  mass  of  earth  surmounted  by  a 
parapet  erected  just  beyond  the  range  of  the  hand  grenade* 
of  the  besieged,  for  the  purpose  of  obtaining  a  plunging  fire 
over  the  salient  places  of  arms  of  the  covered  way. 

This  construction  is  ordinarily  traced  by  the  full  sap.  It 
is  included  between  the  prolongation  of  the  branches  of 
these  salients,  and  as  nearly  perpendicular  to  them  as  the 
sally  of  the  collateral  works  Will  permit.  To  its  extremities 
are  added  small  ilanks  to  cover  it  from  enfilade. 

The  mass  of  earth  is  sustained  by  several  courses  of  ga- 


THE   FULL    SAP. 


185 


bions,  against  the  interior  of  which  steps  arc  arranged  to 
ascend  to  the  upper  course,  which  serves  as  ««i  paifipet.  The 
number  of  these  courses  is  determined  by  the  condition  that 
tin.;  cavalier  shall  command  the  crest  of  the  covered  way  at 
least  4'  4",  so  that  as  each  course  of  gabions  crowned  with 
two  fascines  gives  a  height  of  40";  there  will  be  as  many 
courses  plus  one  required  as  the  difference  between  the  level 
of  this  crest  and  the  site  of  the  cavalier  contains  this  num- 
bering. 

The  following  is  the  process  for  constructing  a  cavalier 
three  courses  high,  in  an  easy  soil : 


After  having  traced  the  cavalier  and  its  return  by  the  full 
pup,  :ind  crowned  the  gabionade  with  two  fascines,  the  width 
of  I  lie  sap  is  increased  by  6'  8",  in  order  to  increase  the 
thickness  of  the  parapet  and  form  a  step  at  the  foot  of  the 
beniHj  20"  high,  and  extending  6'  within  the  gabionade,  for 
the  cavalier,  and  4'  for  the  flanks.  The  sappers  mount  this 


186  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

step,  and  with  crooked  handle-drags  equalize  the  earth  of 
the  parapet,  thus  forming  a  horizontal  platform  to  receive 
the  second  course  of  gabionsr  The  width  of  this  platform 
(including  the  gabionade)  should  be  6'  for  the  cavalier,  4'  4" 
for  the  flanks.  The  sappers  then,  standing  on  the  step  or 
kneeling  on  the  berrne,  and  stooping  to  keep  themselves  well 
covered,  place  the  second  course  of  gabions  44"  from  tho 
first  for  tho  cavalier,  and  24"  for  the  flanks.  They  are 
placed  in  position  with  sap-forks,  and  filled  with  earth,  which 
has  previously  been  thrown  in  the  bottom  of  the  trench  at 
the  foot  of  the  step.  A  second  step  is  then  made,  leaving  20" 
tread  to  the  first.  The  latter  step  has  also  a  rise  and  tread 
of  20";  its  upper  surface  is  consequently  on  a  level  with  the 
berme.  The  second  course  of  gabions  is  then  crowned  with 
two  fascines,  and  earth  thrown  in  rear  until  the  parapet  has 
sufficient  thickness  to  receive  the  third  gabionade.  The 
necessary  earth  is  obtained  by  widening  the  trench.  A  relay 
of  shovellers  is  stationed  on  the  second  step.  A  third  step, 
also  with  20"  rise  and  tread,  is  formed  on  the  berme.  Aided 
by  this  step,  and  kneeling  on  the  crowning  of  the  first  gabion- 
ade, the  sappers  prepare  a  platform  for  a  third,  4'  4"  wide, 
both  for  the  cavalier  and  flanks.  The  last  course  is  placed 
24"  beyond  the  second,  by  sappers  kneeling  on  the  crowning 
of  the  first,  and  provided  with  forks.  These  gabions  are 
then  filled  and  crowned  with  three  rows  of  fascines ;  earth 
is  thrown  in  rear  of  them  to  increase  the  thickness  of  the 
parapet.  For  this  purpose  men  are  stationed  in  relays,  the 
first  on  the  first  course  of  gabions,  the  second  at  the  foot  of 
the  steps,  the  others  12'  apart,  to  the  reverse,  where  the 
necessary  earth  is  excavated.  When  the  parapet  has  at- 
tained the  required  thickness,  which  must  be  at  least  40"  at 
the  summit,  it  is  crowned  with  sand-bags,  so  arranged  as  to 
form  loop-holes,  and  a  step  is  formed  between  the  first  and 
second  courses  of  gabions,  to  allow  the  troops  to  mount  the 
latter. 


THE   FULL   SAP. 


187 


The  preceding  method  has  the  advantage  of  consuming 
the  least  possible  number  of  gabions.  It  may  be  employed 
when  the  earth  of  the  glacis  is  easily  worked,  and  when  the 
fire  of  the  place  is  not  too  hot  to  prevent  the  sappers  un- 
covering themselves  sufficiently  to  place  each  course  of  ga- 
bions 40"  in  advance  of  the  preceding.  But  in  case  the  fire 
is  very  active,  or  the  ground  difficult,  the  following  method 
must  be  resorted  to,  which,  although  much  slower  than  the 
preceding,  gives  a  more  solid  construction. 


1st.  The  cavalier  is  traced  by  the  ordinary  full  sap,  the 
gabionade  crowned  with  two  fastines,  and  the  trench  en- 
larged in  width  by  40",  to  thicken  the  parapet. 

2d.  A  course  of  gabions  is  placed  in  the  bottom  of  the 
trench,  at  the  foot  of  the  slope  of  the  berme,  which  are 
crowned  with  two  fascines,  and  earth  added  if  necessary, 


188  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

until  the  top  has  attained  the  level  of  the  berme.  Earth  is 
also  thrown  against  this  gabionade,  in  order  that  the  earth 
which  acquires  considerable  consistency  by  the  tread  of  the 
workmen,  may  afford  it  some  support. 

3d.  A  third  course  of  gabions  is  placed  on  the  berme,  in 
contact  with  the  first.  These  are  filled  and  crowned  in  such 
a  manner  that  the  crowning  of  the  two  shall  be  in  the  same 
horizontal  plane. 

4th.  A  fourth  course  is  placed  over  the  joints  of  the  first 
and  third.  This  is  effected  by  sappers  kneeling  on  the 
second  course,  and  manoeuvring  the  gabions  with  their 
forks.  They  are  filled  and  crowned  like  the  preceding,  and 
a  parapet  formed  in  rear  of  them,  with  earth  obtained  by 
enlarging  the  trench. 

5th.  When  the  parapet  is  elevated  to  the  height  of  the 
last-placed  gabions,  a  fifth  course  is  placed  against  the  course 
on  the  berme,  and  consequently  on  top  of  those  placed  in  the 
trench.  This  course  is  also  filled  and  crowned.  In  order 
to  support  the  first  and  second  course  of  gabions,  a  fresh 
mass  of  earth  is  formed  against  the  interior  side  of  these 
gabionades,  as  high  as  the  middle  of  the  first  course. 

6th.  A  sixth  row  is  placed  in  the  second  stage,  and  over 
the  joints  of  the  two  interior  rows  of  the  first  stage.  These 
are  likewise  filled  and  crowned. 

7th.  A  seventh  row  is  placed  over  the  joints  of  the  two 
of  the  second  stage,  by  means  of  the  fork,  as  before.  These 
are  filled  and  crowned  with  three  fascines,  and  the  parapet 
is  increased  until  it  reaches  the  level  of  this  crowning  and 
has  acquired  a  sufficient  thickness. 

Finally,  loop-holes  arc  formed  by  placing  sand-bags  on 
this  parapet,  and  the  interior  is  arranged  with  steps,  that 
the  troops  may  conveniently  mount  to  the  upper  stage. 

A  cavalier  composed  of  three  stages,  each  stage  twelve 
gnbions  or  20'  in  length,  with  flanks  15'  or  20',  can  be  con- 
structed in  twenty-four  hours,  not  including  the  time  re- 


THE   FULL    SAP. 


189 


quired  to  trace  it  with  the 
full  sap.  The  number 
of  workmen  required,  in 
ground  where  one  pick  is 
required  for  each  shovel, 
is  from  25  to  30  for  the 
first  twelve  hours,  and  30 
to  36  for  the  following 
twelve. 

The  shovellers  are  ar- 
ranged in  files  opposite 
every  third  gabion,  and 
composed  of  as  many  men 
as  there  are  relays  from 
the  reverse  of  the  trench 
to  the  summit  of  the  par- 
apet. Each  row  of  ga- 
bions can  be  placed  in  one 
minute,  and  filled  in  twen- 
ty, allowing  one  man  to 
two  gabions. 

At  the  commencement 
of  the  work,  and  while  the 
steps  are  being  construct- 
ed, a  part  of  the  work' 
men  are  employed  in  pre- 
paring material. 

THE   DESCENT   INTO   THE 
DITCH. 

The  descent  into  the 
ditch  is  effected  by  a  sub- 
terranean gallery,  when 
the  counterscarp  has  suf- 
ficient height  to  allow  a 
mass  of  oar tli  at  least  40" 


190 


MANUAL   FOR  ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


deep  to  be  left  between  the  terreplein  of  the  covered  way 
and  the  roof  of  the  gallery. 

This  thickness  is  considered  requisite  by  miners,  in  earth 
of  ordinary  consistency,  in  order  that  the  work  may  not  be 
of  too  difficult  construction.  It  is  also  useful  as  a  protection 
against  vertical  projectiles. 

The  height  of  the  descent  is  from  G'  to  6'  8"  in  the  clear. 
Its  width  varies  with  the  difficulty  of  the  soil.  In  earth  of 
ordinary  consistency  the  width  should  be  about  6'  8";  in 
light  sandy  soil  it  is  prudent  to  limit  it  to  4'  4".  The  fol- 
lowing figures  indicate  the  form  and  dimensions  of  the 
frames  used  in  the  two  cases  (oak  timber  being  used.) 


hr 


It  will  be  perceived  from  these  dimensions  that  the  height 
of  the  excavation  must  be  about  7'  G",  giving  10'  10"  as  the 
minimum  distance  between  the  surface  of  the  ground  and 
the  floor  of  the  gallery. 


The  point  of  arrival  of  the  descent  is  ordinarily  fixed  at 
40"  below  the  bottom  of  the  ditch,  in  the  case  of  a  dry  dit  rh, 
and  16"  above  the  surface  of  the  water  in  the  contrary  case. 

The  direction  should  be  as  nearly  straight  as  possible, 


THE   FULL   SAP.  191 

since  a  change  is  of  difficult  execution,  and  renders  the  com- 
munication incommodious.  The  slope  should  not  be  greater 
than  |",  but  it  is  not  indispensable  that  it  should  be  uniform 
through  the  whole  extent  of  the  gallery.  For  instance, 
when  the  counterscarp  is  low,  that  portion  which  is  beneath 
the  terreplein  can  have  a  very  slight  slope,  while  the  pre- 
ceding part  has  \". 

The  point  of  departure  is  fixed  in  a  trench  executed  in 
the  glacis,  to  fulfil  the  preceding  conditions.  But  it  should 
be  remarked  that  the  condition  of  having  throughout  a 
mass  40"  thick  over  the  roof  of  the  gallery,  would  oblige 
the  entrance  to  be  placed  10'  10"  below  the  surface  if  the 
gallery  were  commenced  at  this  point.  Considerable  time 
and  labor  would  be  required  to  excavate  the  trench  to  this 
depth,  particularly  as  earth  rarely  has  sufficient  consistency 
to  sustain  itself  when  excavated  to  such  a  depth,  with  the 
elope  required  in  the  present  case.  Moreover,  the  vertical 
projectiles  of  the  besieged  would,  by  falling  into  such  an  ex- 
cavation, render  the  approach  to  the  gallery  extremely  dan- 
gerous. It  is  therefore  advantageous  to  commence  with  a 
blinded  descent,  whose  point  of  departure  is  20"  only  below 
the  surface,  and  not  to  commence  the  subterranean  gallery 
until  the  excavation  has  attained  the  depth  of  10'  10". 

When  the  ditch  has  little  depth,  advantage  may  be  taken 
of  the  traverses  in  the  covered  way,  under  which  to  execute 
the  gallery.  This  is  effected  by  debouching  into  the  defile 
of  the  traverse  (by  the  blinded  gallery)  40"  below  the  terre- 
plein, and  entering  the  profile  of  the  traverse  with  the  sub- 
terranean gallery.  In  this  case  the  sap-roller  employed  to 
cover  the  head  of  the  work,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter,  be- 
comes superfluous  from  the  depth  of  the  excavation. 

It  may  also  be  observed  that  the  debouchc  is  only 
covered  by  the  profile  of  the  traverse  from  direct  fire,  and 
may  be  subject  to  a  flank  fire.  It  is  therefore  advisable, 
when  near  the  debouche,  to  first  enter  the  defilu  by  a  small 


192 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


opening  similar  to  a  branch  gallery,  and  to  place  a  mask  of 
gabions  crowned  with  fascines  in  the  defile,  which  may 
cover  the  passage  into  the  gallery  under  the  traverse. 


It  may  also  be  remarked  that  the  above  process  gives  the 
means  of  "  descending  into  the  covered  way,"  since  having 
once  descended  into  the  defile  of  the  traverse,  a  debouche  by 
the  sap  can  be  effected  into  the  terreplein  of  this  work,  in 
order  to  establish  lodgements. 

Ono  hour  is  required  to  execute  40"  of  a  subterranean 
descent,  6'  x  6'  8"  in  ordinary  soil.  The  miners  employed 
should  be  relieved  every  six  hours. 


THE  FULL  SAP.  193 


BLINDED  DESCENT 

Consists  of  a  deep  sap,  which  is  covered  as  it  advances 
with  fascines  supported  by  blinds.  The  dimensions  of  the 
latter  are  so  regulated  that  the  width  and  height  in  the 
clear  of  the  descent  shall  be  6'  8",  which  requires  the  width 
of  the  sap  at  the  bottom  to  be  7'  6",  in  order  that  the  lateral 
blinds  may  be  easily  placed. 

The  point  of  departure  is  usually  in  the  crowning  of  the 
covered  way,  5'  below  the  surface  of  the  glacis,  a  depth 
which  allows  the  requisite  mass  of  fascines  and  earth  to  be 
heaped  on  the  blinds  without  projecting  above  the  parapet 
of  the  adjacent  trenches.  The  point  of  arrival  is  fixed  as 
for  the  subterranean  descent,  at  40"  below  the  bottom  of 
the  ditch  when  dry,  and  16"  above  the  level  of  the  water 
when  wet.  The  direction  of  the  descent  between  these 
two  points  should  be  a  right  line,  and  the  inclination  should 
not  exceed  £.  In  case  the  maximum  inclination  would  be 
insufficient  to  cause  the  descent  to  debouch  at  the  proper 
level,  the  point  of  departure  must  be  lowered.  But  this  is 
seldom  necessary,  since  blinded  descents  are  only  employed 
when  the  depth  of  the  ditch  is  less  than  10'  10".  This  depth 
permitting,  as  has  already  been  stated,  the  construction  of 
a  subterranean  gallery. 

The  construction  is  as  follows :  a  debouche  by  the  double 
sap  is  executed  from  the  crowning  of  the  covered  way,  ac- 
cording to  the  method  previously  described,  with  the  ex- 
ception that  bermes  2'  in  width  are  left,  in  order  to  reduce 
the  width  of  the  trench  (when  completed)  at  bottom  to  7'  8". 
This  course  is  pursued  until  the  sap-rollers  have  nearly  clear- 
ed the  parapet  of  the  trench  from  which  the  debouche  has 
been  effected,  which  will  require  the  placing  of  four  gabions, 
if  care  has  been  taken  to  enlarge  the  sap  forming  the  crown- 
ing, and  to  throw  no  earth  in  rear  of  the  gabions  to  be  over- 
turned in  debouching.  The  required  depth  for  the  descent 
9 


MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


is  then  attained ;  the  slope  given  to  the  sides  should  be  as 
Bteep  as  the  nature  of  the  ground  will  permit  (1  or  |  for  ex- 
ample). At  the  same  time  a  landing  is  formed  in  the  crown- 
ing sap  at  the  point 
of  departure  of  the 
descent,  having  the 
same  depth  as  the 
latter.  This  landing 
is  united  with  the 
bottom  of  the  trench 
by  slopes.  A  ver- 
tical blind  is  then 
placed  on  each  side, 
and  connected  by  a 
strong  batten  pass- 
ing across  the  trench. 
A  horizontal  blind  ia 
then  placed,  one  side 
^  resting  on  the  two 
vertical  blinds,  the 
other  on  two  false 
stanchions  placed  in 
advance.  Two  or 
three  of  the  vertical 
blinds  are  placed 
when  the  excavation 
has  sufficiently  ad- 
vanced. The  whole 
is  then  covered  with 
fascines  and  the  hides 
of  newly-killed  cat- 
tle. 

Shortly  after  the  commencement  of  the  descent  a  very 
delicate  operation  has  to  be  executed,  viz. :  causing  the  sap- 
rollers  to  descend  the  interior  slope  of  the  covered  way. 


195 


In  order  that  this  operation  may  be  successful,  it  is  essential 
that  previous  to  debouching  the  two  rollers  should  be  se- 
curely fastened  together.  Then,  if  there  are  no  palisades 
in  the  covered  way,  or  if  the  palisading,  torn  by  the  cannon 
of  the  besiegers,  has  little  sally  above  the  crest  of  the  glacis^ 
the  rollers  may  be  pushed  forward  with  the  sap-hooks  and 
allowed  to  fall  on  the  banquette,  a  rope  or  chain  being  fast- 


196  MANUAL  FOR  ENGINEER   TROOTS. 

ened  to  each  end  and  the  middle,  by  which  the  rollers  are 
prevented  from  rolling  off  the  banquette  to  the  terreplein. 
If,  however,  the  palisades  have  preserved  their  points  and 
then  sally  above  the  crest,  these  points  engaging  in  the 
watling  may  impede  the*  progress  of  the  rollers.  In  this 
case  the  rollers  may  be  slightly  raised  with  levers,  and  three 
or  four  planks  slid  under  their  middle  and  extremities,  and 
placed,  one  end  resting  on  the  glacis,  the  other  on  the  pali- 
sading, thus  forming  a  ramp  over  which  they  may  be  rolled 
untill  they  fall  on  the  banquette.  The  same  end  may  be  ac- 
complished by  throwing  sand-bags  into  the  interval  between 
the  palisades  and  interior  slope,  heaping  them  above  the 
points  of  the  palisades.  In  every  case  great  attention  must 
be  paid  to  the  ropes  by  which  the  rollers  are  retained.  The 
same  precaution  is  necessary  in  descending  the  banquette 
elope,  lest  the  roller  move  too  far  in  advance  to  cover  the 
head  of  the  descent.  If,  however,  it  is  sometimes  found 
too  far  in  advance,  it  will  suffice  to  suspend  across  the  descent, 
against  the  upper  part  of  the  last-placed  blinds,  a  thick  plank, 
which  serves  to  mask  the  interior.  As  to  the  head  of  the 
work,  the  roller  always  covers  it  sufficiently. 

The  execution  of  the  descent  comprises  two  operations, 

EXCAVATING   AND   BLINDING. 

The  excavation  is  accomplished  by  the  double  sap,  as  be- 
fore mentioned.  It  is  executed  by  two  sappers,  who  exca- 
vate to  the  full  width  and  depth  of  the  descent,  throwing 
the  earth  in  rear  of  the  lateral  gabions.  If,  however,  the 
depth  is  to  be  greater  than  80",  the  leading  sappers  only  dig 
to  this  depth,  and  are  followed  by  two  others,  who  complete 
the  excavation,  leaving  for  the  first  a  banquette  40"  wide,  and 
throwing  the  earth  into  wheelbarrows,  in  which  it  is  trans- 
ported to  the  rear  and  thrown  on  the  parapet  of  the  crown- 
ing by  the  remaining  sappers.  In  case  the  soil  is  too  loose 
to  allow  the  excavation  to  be  carried  to  the  depth  of  80", 


THE   FULL   SAP.  197 

leaving  a  slope  of  ^ ;  the  leading  sappers  dig  as  deep  as  the 
nature  of  the  soil  will  permit,  giving  the  sides  a  slope  of 
*orf 

When  the  head  of  the  descent  has  attained  a  depth  of  80", 
the  leading  sappers  are  sufficiently  covered  to  dispense  with 
the  lateral  gabionades.  They  still  continue,  however,  to 
form  parapets,  by  throwing  the  earth  to  the  right  and  left, 
taking  care  to  move  the  rollers  forward  gradually,  so  that 
at  each  partial  advance  a  portioa  of  the  parapet  thus  formed 
shall  fall  forward  against  them,  affording  a  cover  to  the  sap- 
pers. On  such  occasions  a  quantity  of  loose  earth  should  be 
kept  in  readiness  to  fill  up  the  gaps  formed  by  the  advance 
of  the  rollers,  as  soon  as  they  are  made.  Finally,  as  soon  as 
the  lateral  parapets  have  acquired  sufficient  thickness  to  pro- 
tect the  head  of  the  work,  earth  is  thrown  to  the  rear,  on 
the  fascines  forming  the  roof  of  the  blindage,  to  protect  it 
from  the  fireworks  of  the  besieged. 

As  the  excavation  advances,  pickets  are  driven  at  inter- 
vals of  40",  to  aid  in  determining  the  direction  and  inclination. 

BLINDAGE. 

When  the  excavation  has  advanced  24"  or  28"  beyond 
the  last  vertical  blind,  a  horizontal  blind  is  placed  on  the 
latter,  and  sustained  in  front  by  two  "false  stanchions" 
These  are  placed  on  each  side,  and  about  30"  from  the  axis 
of  the  descent ;  the  foot  of  each  is  buried  a  few  inches  in 
the  ground,  and  their  height  is  such  as  to  raise  the  anterior 
of  the  horizontal  blind  from  4"  to  6"  above  its  true  position. 

A  new  lateral  blind  is  introduced  when  the  excavation 
has  advanced  5'  from  the  last-placed  vertical  blind;  for  this 
purpose  two  holes  are  made  on  each  side,  in  the  alignment 
of  the  lateral  blinds,  to  receive  the  feet  of  the  new  ones,  the 
one  14"  deep  and  20"  from  the  nearest  stanchion  of  the  last 
blind,  the  other  4"  deep  and  40"  from  the  first  (in  the  case 
where  the  inclination  is  \).  The  lateral  blinds  are  then 


198 


MANUAL    FOB  ENGINEER   TROOrS. 


placed,  their  tops  engaged  under  the  horizontal  blind,  and 
the  false  stanchion  removed. 

It  may  be  remarked  that  the  lateral  blinds  should  be  placed 
as  nearly  vertical  and  in  the  same  alignment  as  possible,  but 
an  attempt  to  place  them  with  great  accuracy  would  delay 
the  work  unnecessarily  ;  it  is  sufficient  to  place  the  two  first 
on  each  side  carefully  to  guide  the  position  of  the  folio  wing. 

When  the  blinds  are  in  position  they  are  covered  with 
blinding  fascines,  which  are  9'  long,  and  9"  in  diameter. 
The  two  sappers  at  the  head  of  the  work  are  charged 
with  this  operation.  They  seize  the  fascines  (one  at  each 
end),  cast  them  up  on  the  blinds,  and  arrange  them  with 


THE    FULL   SAP.  199 

their  forks ;  three  or  four  courses  are  thus  placed  and  covered 
with  raw  hides. 

The  spaces  between  the  lateral  blinds  and  slopes  of  the 
excavation  are  then  filled  with  fascines,  for  this  purpose  a 
great  number  of  fascines  from  3'  to  5'  long  and  9"  in  diame- 
ter will  be  acquired. 

TIME. 

In  ordinary  soil,  and  with  a  counterscarp  11'  high,  about 
13"  of  the  descent  may  be  executed  in  one  hour.  Ten 
sappers  are  employed ;  the  two  at  the  head  of  the  work  should 
be  frequently  relieved ;  they  are  provided  with  all  the  tools 
necessary  for  the  double  sap,  as  well  as  those  required  in 
executing  an  ordinary  attack  by  the  mine. 

UNCOVERED   DESCENT. 

The  sap  by  means  of  which  the  descent  into  a  ditch  of 
little  depth  is  efiected,  without  employing  a  blindage,  is 
termed  an  uncovered  descent.  From  the  difficulty  of  defiling 
them,  they  usually  require  to  be  very  narrow,  and  much 
deeper  than  the  ordinary  sap ;  otherwise  there  is  nothing 
peculiar  in  their  construction,  except  the  difficulty  in  firmly 
placing  the  gabions  on  the  slope  of  the  descent. 

DESCENT   INTO   THE   COVERED   WAY. 

This  is  nothing  more  than  a  blinded  descent  executed  by 
the  process  already  described — usually  placed  opposite  a 
traverse,  as  previously  remarked,  and  indicated  in  the  figure. 
When  not  exposed  to  a  plunging  fire,  the  "  uncovered  de- 
scent" may  be  employed  for  this  purpose. 

PASSAGE   OF  THE  DITCH. 

When  the  ditch  is  dry,  the  passage  merely  consists  of  a 
sap  connecting  the  debouche  of  the  descent  with  the  foot  of 
the  breach.  But  in  the  wet  ditch,  a  bridge  must  be  con- 
structed, which,  under  musketry  and  artillery  fire  of  the 


200  MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

place,  is  ordinarily  a  very  difficult  operation.  The  greater 
part  of  the  experiments  in  this  operation  in  the  schools  of 
practice  have  led  to  no  satisfactory  results.  The  following 
is  the  process  given  by  Vauban  in  his  "  Traite  de  Tattaque 
des  places" 

PASSAGE    OF   THE   MAIN   DITCH. 

When  the  ditch  is  wet,  from  100  to  120  men  (according 
to  circumstances)  are  stationed  in  line,  two  paces  apart,  with 
their  backs  to  the  parapet ;  they  pass  fascines  from  hand  to 
hand  to  the  head  of  the  bridge ;  they  are  there  received  by 
a  sapper,  who  forms  an  epaulement  with  them,  by  piling  them 
on  his  right  or  left,  as  the  case  may  require ;  he  then  advances 
a  few  paces  and  commences  the  construction  of  the  bridge, 
by  casting  the  fascines  obliquely  downward  and  beneath  the 
water.  This  operation  is  continued  until  the  mass  arrives  at 
the  surface  ;  he  then  lays  a  course  of  fascines  crosswise,  and 
covers  them  with  sufficient  earth  to  sink  them.  The  same 
operation  is  repeated  until  a  firm  passage  is  formed,  whoso 
top  is  a  few  feet  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  from 
12'  to  14'  wide.  During  this  manoeuvre  the  epaulement  is 
carried  on  by  placing  fascines  a  little  in  advance,  with  a  fork, 
and  arranging  by  the  most  convenient  means.  The  epaule- 
ment should  receive  a  considerable  height,  as  the  fascines 
always  settle  a  goocl  deal. 

When  it  is  perceived  that  the  fascines  touch  the  bottom 
of  the  ditch,  and  the  epaulement  has  sufficient  solidity,  it  is 
revetted  with  fascines  bound  together  and  picketed. 

NOTE. — When  the  debouche  is  exposed  to  a  plunging  fire 
from  the  bastion,  the  passage  must  be  commenced  by  form- 
ing a  "  mountain"  of  fascines,  from  8'  to  10'  high,  the  sap- 
pers keeping  close  to  this  work  at  the  epaulemeut  and  gallery, 
continually  pushing  forward  the  mountain  until  out  of  range 
of  the  plunging  fire.  The  fascines  of  which  it  is  constructed 
are  then  withdrawn  by  degrees  and  used  for  the  bridge  and 


THE   FULL    SAP.  201 

epaulement,  continuing  to  push  forward  the  passage  until  it 
arrives  at  the  foot  of  the  breach,  which  I  suppose  by  this 
time  to  be  far  advanced. 

To  guard  against  this  plunging  fire,  the  mountain  of  fas- 
cines alone  will  not  be  sufficient ;  a  good  strong  gallery  must 
also  be  employed,  which  is  constructed  under  shelter  of  the 
mountain,  as  above  stated,  and  continued  until  beyond  the 
range  of  this  fire. 

When  the  water  in  the  ditch  is  deep  and  has  a  rapid  cur- 
rent, or  can  be  given  one,  it  must  be  acknowledged  that 
the  passage  is  by  far  the  most  difficult  operation  of  the 
siege,  especially  when  the  current  can  be  neither  turned  nor 
weakened  from  without.  The  utmost  care  and  address  will 
hardly  secure  success,  unless  the  fire  of  the  place  is  totally 
extinguished ;  even  after  that  of  the  faces,  flanks,  curtain  and 
tenailles  is  silenced,  the  work  will  be  very  much  annoyed 
by  mortars  and  stone-mortars. 

When  all  these  dangers  can  be  avoided,  the  operations 
are  carried  on  in  the  ditch  as  elsewhere.  But  it  is  ex- 
tremely difficult  to  avoid  even  a  part  of  them,  and  the  dan- 
ger of  the  execution  is  still  very  great ;  the  workmen  are 
very  badly  covered.  From  the  constant  danger  of  being  seen 
a  great  loss  of  time  and  life  ensues. 

Let  us  suppose  a  place  surrounded  by  a  ditch,  through 
which  the  water  passes  with  considerable  velocity,  and  is 
supplied  either  by  a  river  or  by  a  reservoir,  from  which  the 
water  is  distributed  from  time  to  time  through  the  ditches 
by  means  of  sluices,  giving  whatever  velocity  may  be  re- 
quired, as  is  the  case  in  many  of  our  places.  In  either  case, 
as  there  will  be  either  a  continuous  current,  strong  or 
feeble,  or  one  repeated  from  time  to  time,  the  only  method 
of  effecting  the  passage  will  be  by  means  of  a  heavy  dike 
across  the  ditch,  having  sufficient  strength  to  withstand  the 
current,  and  a  height  at  least  two  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  water  when  at  its  greatest  height. 
9* 


202  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

For  this  purpose  a  mass  of  fascines  well  loaded  with 
stones,  sods,  and  earth,  must  be  formed,  that  they  may  sink 
immediately  to  the  bottom.  Great  width  must  be  given  to  it, 
the  earth  rammed,  and  stakes  driven  through  into  the  bot- 
tom of  the  ditch. 

In  a  word,  every  means  must  be  taken  to  render  it  solid, 
until  it  arrives  within  20'  or  24'  of  the  foot  of  the  revet- 
ment. The  current  then  becomes  rery  troublesome,  and  it 
will  be  necessary  to  make  use  of  various  expedients  to  com- 
plete the  passage,  such  as  rolling  in  large  gabions  and  barrels 
filled  with  stones,  which  filling  up  the  interval  will  still  leave 
a  passage  for  the  water ;  trestles  loaded  with  stones,  earth 
and  fascines,  sinking  boats  (if  any  are  to  be  obtained).  All 
this  should  be  accomplished  before  opening  the  breaching 
batteries.  After  by  all  these  expedients  the  dike  has  arrived 
within  12'  or  18'  of  the  scarp,  its  head  well  secured,  and  its 
upper  surface  above  that  of  the  highest  water,  the  guns  of 
the  breaching  batteries  should  commence  a  lively  fire  against 
the  foot  of  the  scarp,  which  being  overturned  into  the  ditch, 
will  probably  fill  up  the  interval. 

If  this  is  not  completely  effected,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
attach  a  miner  to  the  portion  of  the  scarp  still  standing  to 
drive  the  mine  well  in  advance  and  opposite  the  head  of  the 
dike,  if  this  does  not  succeed,  workmen  must  be  detached  to 
form  a  lodgement  at  the  foot  of  the  breach,  and  working 
from  that  side  of  the  ditch  contribute  to  the  completion 
of  the  dike. 

There  is  another  method  which  is  excellent,  but  only  ap- 
plicable in  narrow  ditches  with  high  revetments,  which  is,  to 
attach  two  miners,  the  one  to  the  scarp  the  other  to  the 
counterscarp,  directly  opposite  each  other. 

If  the  mines  are  sufficiently  deep  and  heavily  charged, 
the  ditch  may  be  choked  at  one  blow,  particularly  if  the 
water  has  not  more  than  5'  or  6'  head. 

It  is  thus  we  contemplated  passing  the  ditch  at  the  "porte 


THE    FULL    SAP.  203 

d'Auzin"  at  Valenciennes,  if  the  place  had  resisted  long 
enough  to  compel  us  to  go  thus  far. 

SAPS   CONSTRUCTED    WITH    SAND-BAGS. 

These  saps  are  principally  employed  when  the  ground 
passed  over  cannot  be  excavated,  either  in  consequence  of 
the  presence  of  rock  or  water. 

The  bags  are  filled  at  some  convenient  place  near  the 
position  where  they  arc  to  be  used,  and  out  of  view  of  the 
place  attacked. 

The  working  parties  for  this  purpose  are  divided  into 
squads,  composed  of  two  shovellers,  one  holder,  two  tiers, 
and  as  many  men  provided  with  picks  as  the  nature  of  the 
soil  may  require.  Each  squad  should  fill  150  bags  per  hour. 

The  flying  sap  is  constructed  as  follows  : 

A  path  from  the  depot  of  sand-bags  to  the  trench  should 
be  selected,  and  distinctly  marked,  advantage  being  taken 
of  the  inequalities  of  the  ground  to  obtain  as  much  cover  as 
possible.  The  carriers  march  along  this  path  in  single  file, 
each  carrying  a  filled  bag  on  his  shoulder ;  on  arriving  at  the 
head  of  the  sap  he  delivers  the  sand-bag  to  the  sapper  and 
returns  for  another. 

Two  sappers  receive  the  bags  from  the  carriers  and  form 
with  them  the  1st  course  of  the  parapet.  The  bags  are  all 
laid  (».  e.,  headers)  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the 
trench  and  with  their  mouths  alternately  out  and  in. 

When  twelve  bags  have  been  laid,  a  second  course  is 
commenced,  by  a  second  couple  of  sappers,  supplied  by  a 
second  set  of  carriers.  This  course  is  laid  directly  over  and 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  first. 

The  succeeding  courses  are  added  in  the  same  manner 
until  the  parapet  has  attained  the  required  height.  When 
a  trench  of  the  usual  depth  can  be  dug  in  the  rear  of  this 
parapet,  six  or  seven  courses  of  bags  will  be  sufficient.  If 
the  trench  is  but  half  the  ordinary  depth,  nine  or  ten  courses 


204 


MANUAL    FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


will  be  required ;  and  if  no  excavation  can  be  made,  the 
parapet  must  be  6'  8"  or  fourteen  bags  higher. 

This  parapet  is  executed  as  follows:  the  1st  sapper, kneel- 
ing, places  the  first  four  courses  (1), 
the  second,  also  kneeling  or  stoop- 
ing, lays  the  four  courses  No.  2. 

Sappers  Nos.  3,  4,  and  5,  lay  the 
courses  marked  3,  4,  and  5  ;  No.  6 
lays  the  portion  marked  6,  No.  7  standing  on  the  banquette 
and  passing  the  bags  up  to  him. 

„    By  a  combination  of  gabions  and  sand-bags,  the  parapet 
may  be  constructed  with  greater  rapidity  and  a  less  number 

of  bags. 
The  gabions  are  placed  as  in  the  ordinary  flying  sap,  and 

filled  with  sand-bags  by  a  party  of 

carriers.  The  bags  for  this  purpose 

should  not  be  quite  full,  in  order 

th.it   they    may  lie   closer    in  the 

gabion.    The  sand-bags  for  increas- 
ing the  height  and  thickness  of  the  parapet  are  laid  in  a 

manner  similar  to  the  preceding  case. 

To  give  greater  stability  to  the  parapet,  two  rows  of 

gabions  may  be  employed,  ^^ — ^ 

and  the  thickness  afterward 

increased  by  either  throw- 
ing earth  over,  joining  the 

mound  represented  by  the 

dotted  lines,  or  increasing  from  the  interior  by  courses  of 

sand-bags. 


MILITARY  MINING. 


PART   IV. 


PRACTICAL  OPERATIONS  IN  MINING. 


THE  essential  difference  between  civil  and  military  mining 
is,  that  in  the  former  the  works  are,  for  the  most  part,  car- 
ried on  at  greater  depths  below  the  surface  of  the  earth, 
and  in  solid  rock;  whereas,  military  mining  is  what  may 
be  termed  superficial,  and  consequently  the  miner  works 
through  the  more  recent  formations  of  earths  and  sands, 
which,  from  their  little  tenacity,  he  has  to  support,  as  he 
advances,  with  wooden  linings.  It  is  in  the  adjustment  and 
fittings  of  these  linings  that  the  chief  art  of  the  military 
miner  consists. 

The  excavations  made  by  military  miners  are,  when  verti- 
cal, called  shafts ;  when  horizontal,  or  when  slightly  inclined, 
and  exceeding  in  dimensions  three  feet  by  four  feet,  galler- 
ies ;  when  under  these  dimensions,  branches.  When  galler- 
ies or  branches  are  inclined,  they  are  called  ascending  or 
descending,  according  to  the  direction  of  their  inclination. 

The  galleries  or  branches  of  a  system  of  mines,  forming 
part  of  the  defences  of  a  fortress,  are  usually  reveted  with 
masonry.  Their  construction  and  detail  will  not  be  included 
in  this  part  of  the  subject. 

The  following  table  gives  the  names  and  dimensions  of 
galleries  and  branches  employed  in  mining  operations : 


208 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


Name. 
Description  of  Gallery  or 
Branch. 

Dimrnsions  in 
the  clear. 

Scantling  of  Frames. 

Ground-sill. 

Stanchions. 

Cap-silL 

1.  Groat  Gallery, 
2.  Principal  Gallery, 
3.  Common  Gallery, 
4.  Great  Branch, 
5.  Small  Branch, 

Height  "Width. 
Ft  Ins.    Ft.  Ins. 

6    6  X'7  0 
66x36 
46x30 
36x29 
26x20 

Inches. 
6x3 
54  x  3 

14 

4x3 
3x2 

Inches. 

6x6 
5*  x  54 
5x5 
4x4 
3x3 

Inches. 

6     x  84 
54  x  8 
5     x  64 
4x5 
3x4 

1.  Those  galleries  used  for  descent  into  ditches  and  the 
passage  of  cannon. 

2.  Those  used  for  descent  into  ditches  and  the  passage  of 
troops,  two  deep. 

3.  Sufficiently  large  for  all  the  general  purposes  of  attack ; 
and  as  it  allows  the  miner  a  free  change  of  posture,  either  to 
work  kneeling  on  both  knees  or  on  one  knee,  with  the  right 
or  left  foot  advanced,  he  works  without  feeling  cramped, 
and  executes  this  size  more  rapidly  than  any  other. 

4  and  5.  Too  small  to  work  in  for  a  greater  distance  than 
ten  or  twelve  feet. 


TOOLS   REQUIRED   FOR   MINING   OPERATIONS. 


Pickaxe  (common), 
do.        (short-handled), 

Shovel  (common), 
do.     (short-handled), 

Push-pick, 

Rake, 

Canvas  bucket, 

Windlass  and  rope, 

Rope-ladder, 

"Wooden  wedges  and  pins, 
do.       pickets, 

Miners'  wagon, 

Wheelbarrow, 


Handsaw, 

Mallet, 

Hammer  (claw), 

Rough  plane  (j-inch), 

Chisel, 

Gimlet, 

Two-foot  rule, 

Plumb-bob, 

Boring-rods, 

Five-foot  rod, 

Bellows  (miners), 

Ventilating  tube, 

Flexible  joints, 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   IN   MINING.  209 

Iron  candlestick,  Needles,  threads,  and  scissors, 

Lamp  (miners),  Calico  for  hose, 

Lantern,  Hatchet, 

Oil-can,  Tin  funnel  (for  fitting  hose), 

Measuring-tape,  Rammers  (short-handled), 

Compass,  Helves  (spare), 

Universal  level,  Sand-bags. 

WOODEN    LININGS. 

It  has  already  been  stated  that  the  military  miner,  from 
the  loose  or  made  soil  in  which  he  generally  works,  has,  as 
he  advances,  to  support  with  wooden  linings  the  top  and 
sides  of  his  excavation.  In  some  soils,  the  earth  is  of  suf- 
ficient tenacity  to  require  only,  that  in  driving  galleries  in 
it,  their  top  should  be  supported.  But  in  sinking  shafts,  it 
is  always  advisable,  unless  their  depth  should  be  very  little, 
to  line  them  with  boarding  throughout,  or,  at  least,  par- 
tially. 

In  describing  the  process  of  driving  a  gallery,  the  soil  is 
supposed  to  be  of  that  nature  which  renders  close  casing 
desirable. 

There  are  two  methods  adopted  for  lining  shafts  and  gal- 
leries. The  first  is  with  mine-frames,  which,  in  appearance, 
are  similar  to  door-frames,  being  cut  out  of  scantling,  and 
placed  upright  or  horizontally  at  certain  intervals  in  the 
gallery  or  shaft,  as  the  case  may  be,  and  which  serve  as  sup- 
ports to  planks,  called  sheeting-planks,  or  sheds,  which  are 
placed  all  around  between  the  frames  and  sides  of  the  exca- 
vation. The  second  is  with  cases,  which,  instead  of  being 
made  from  scantling,  are  formed  out  of  plank,  about  two 
inches  thick  and  one  foot  wide ;  these  are  placed  close  to- 
gether, and  serve  at  once  for  frames  or  sheeting.  The 
advantage  of  this  latter  method  in  saving  excavation,  and 
consequently  expediting  the  work,  is  at  once  obvious.  Be- 
sides which,  the  facility  of  fixing  them  up  is  much  greater. 


210 


MANUAL   FOR    ENGINEER    TROOP8. 


o 

'*•  -    I J 


u 


Fio.  1. 

Shaft  frames  are  composed  of 
four  pieces  halved  together.  The 
top  frame  has  the  same  dimen- 
sions in  the  clear  as  the  other, 
but  the  ends  project  about  one 
foot  in  each  direction. 

The  sheeting  for  shafts  should 
be  of  plank,  from  1"  to  1£"  thick. 
The  planks  are  usually  chamfered 
at  one  end,  to  admit  of  their  be- 
Their length  will  depend 


FIG.  2. 

ing  more  easily  pushed  forward, 
on  the  distances  at  which  the  frames  are  placed,  which,  on 
an  average,  may  be  assumed  to  be  four  feet ;  the  planks 
may  therefore  be  cut  in  lengths  of  five  feet,  which  will  allow 
the  necessary  overlap. 

MEN  AND  TOOLS   REQUIRED   TOR  SINKING  A  SHAFT. 

It  has  been  found  that  one  man  can  work  in  a  shaft  not 
less  than  four  feet  in  depth,  and  throw  out  earth  until  it  is 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   IN   MINING. 


211 


eight  or  nine  feet  deep  ;  after  which  the  earth  is  drawn  up 
in  a  canvas  bag,  or  bucket,  by  two  men  at  the  top,  by  means 
of  ropes  attached  to  each  of  its  handles.  Should  the  depth 
become  great,  a  windlass  and  bucket  must  be  substituted. 


MEN 

.    TOOLS. 

Picks. 

Shovels. 

t» 

gfl 

rr' 

n 

A 

S 

, 

cfl 

8 

**Vi 

m 

OJ 

2 

O 

bn 

SB 

l'j. 

u^ 

•^ 

JU 

d 

^H 

B 

d 
zi 

Privates 

I 

X 

f! 

i 

0 

c 

"3 

Measurii 

Mallet. 

Canvas  1 

c. 
o 

£ 

Windlas 

Miners' 

Ventilat 

i 

9 

1 

1 

2 

2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 

The  disposition  of  the  workmen  is  as  follows : 

One  man  excavates  and  fills  the  bag. 

Two  men  haul  up,  or  work  the  windlass. 

One  man  fills  the  wheelbarrow. 

One  man  wheels. 

One  man  spreads,  to  prevent  an  accumulation,  which 
might  attract  observation.  Two  gauges  or  rods  for  the  ex- 
treme dimension  of  the  rectangle  of  excavation  are  to  be 
provided.  These  two  rods  must  exceed  respectively  the 
true  exterior  dimensions  of  the  shaft-frame  in  length  by 
about  six  inches  (three  inches  on  each  side),  in  order  to 
admit  of  two  thicknesses  of  sheeting  planks  being  intro- 
duced all  around,  between  the  frame  and  sides  of  the  ex- 
cavation. 

The  top  shaft-frame  having,  when  placed,  only  one  thick- 
ness of  sheeting  planks  around  it,  the  rectangle  of  excavation 
must  be  marked  on  the  ground  rather  less  than  the  dimen- 
sions of  the  gauges.  When  the  shaft  is  intended  to  be  sunk 
with  a  view  to  the  commencement  of  a  gallery,  care  must 


212  MANUAL  FOR  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

be  taken  that  the  scores  on  the  sides  of  this  rectangle  shall 
agree  with  the  direction  of  the  proposed  gallery. 

The  distance  at  which  the  floor  of  the  gallery  is  to  be 
placed  below  the  surface  of  the  ground  being  given,  the 
first  thing  to  be  done  is  to  determine  the  distance  to  be  left 
between  the  frames.  To  find  this,  let  us  suppose  that  a 
common  gallery,  four  feet  six  inches  high  in  the  clear,  is  to 
be  driven  from  the  bottom  of  a  shaft  twenty-five  feet  deep. 

Then  the  height  of  the  gallery,  from  the  floor  to  the  top 
of  the  cap-sill  being  .  .  .  5  ft.  1  in. 

Thickness  of  top  sheeting,  .  .  0  "  2    " 

Free  space  for  introduction  of  sheeting,   .  0  "  2    " 

Thickness  of  shaft  frame  next  above  the  gallery,  0  "  4£  " 

Total,  .  .  .  .  5  ft.  9i  in. 

The  top,  therefore,  of  the  frame  above  the  gallery  must 
then  be  five  feet  nine  and  one-half  inches  from  the  bottom 
of  the  shaft.  'Subtract  this  from  the  total  depth  of  twenty- 
five  feet,  there  remain  nineteen  feet  two  and  one-half  inches. 
There  would  then  be  required  four  intervals  of  four  feet 
each,  and  one  of  three  feet  two  and  one-half  inches  for  the 
last  interval.  To  find  the  length  of  the  last  set  of  sheeting 
planks,  the  thickness  of  one  frame  and  one  overlap  of  two 
inches  must  be  added  to  5'  9£",  making  6'  4". 

An  excavation  of  the  size  of  the  rectangle  previously 
marked  must  then  be  cut  vertically  down -to  the  depth  of 
two  or  three  feet ;  after  which,  one  of  the  top-shaft  frames, 
before  described,  is  placed  directly  over  the  excavation,  the 
projecting  pieces  preventing  it  from  falling  down.  This 
frame  is  generally  placed  flush  with  the  surface  of  the 
ground.  The  excavation  is  then  continued  to  the  depth 
of  four  feet,  when  a  common  frame  is  put  together,  and 
laid  horizontally  at  the  bottom  of  the  shaft,  with  its  cor- 
responding sides  vertically  under  those  of  the  upper  frame. 
The  excavation  at  this  level  must  be  fully  equal  to  ilie 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    IN   MINING.  213 

dimensions  indicated  by  the  gauge-rods.  A  plumb-bob  is 
necessary  to  preserve  the  verticality  of  the  excavation,  as 
well  as  for  the  adjustment  of  the  successive  shaft-frames  by 
means  of  the  notches  before  noticed.  As  soon  as  the  second 
frame  is  placed,  the  first  set  of  planks  are  pushed  vertically 
downward,  with  their  pointed  ends  foremost,  between  the 
earth  on  each  side  and  the  top  frame. 

At  top,  each  of  these  planks  is  pressecj.  home  close  to  the 
top  frame,  but  at  the  bottom  it  is  kept  out  from  the  lower 
frame  by  wedges  rather  thicker  than  the  plank  itself.  The 
two  frames  are  then  connected  by  four  ties  of  wood,  which 
are  thin  laths,  about  two  inches  wide,  extending  vertically 
from  one  frame  to  the  other,  being  nailed  to  each.  Some- 
times rope  is  used,  in  which  case  it  is  made  to  pass  through 
holes  bored  in  the  frames ;  and  a  knot  in  the  rope,  or  a  picket 
between  the  strands,  immediately  under  the  lower  frame, 
prevents  it  from  falling. 

After  the  first  two  shaft  frames  and  one  set  of  sheeting 
planks  are  thus  placed,  and  the  frames  connected,  the  exca- 
vation is  continued  about  four  feet  deeper,  when  another 
frame  is  placed  with  the  same  care.  A  second  set  of  planks 
is  then  introduced  between  the  first  set  and  the  second  frame, 
after  removing  the  wedges  which  were  before  inserted,  in 
order  to  preserve  room  for  them.  These  new  planks  are 
pushed  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  shaft,  and  are  there  sep- 
arated from  the  lower  shaft  frame  by  wedges,  as  before 
described.  Thus  the  work  goes  on  until  the  miner  arrives 
near  the  level  of  the  top  of  the  proposed  gallery,  when  the 
last  shaft  frame  must  be  placed  at  the  calculated  interval. 
This  being  attended  to,  the  excavation  is  continued  down 
to  the  bottom  of  the  intended  gallery,  when  another  shaft- 
frame  is  placed  so  as  to  have  its  upper  surface  on  a  level 
with  the  floor  of  the  gallery.  Three  sides  only  of  this  part 
of  the  shaft  must  now  be  sheeted,  and  without  wedging  out 
the  planks  which  are  to  rest  against  the  bottom  frames.  The 


214: 


MANUAL   FOE   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


FIG.  8. 


fourth  side  of  the  shaft  being  le/t  clear  for  the  entrance  of 
the  gallery  on  this  side,  the  outline  of  the  gallery  is  traced. 

DRIVING   GALLERIES   WITH   MINE   FRAMES. 

Fig.  3  represents  a  gallery-frame. 
The  uprights  are  called  stanchions; 
the  top  piece,  cap-sill;  the  bottom 
piece  is  the  ground-sill.  The  two^ lat- 
ter pieces  are  scored  at  the  middle 
point. 

The  scantling  for  the  stanchions  of 
a  branch  may  be  4";  for  a  gallery 
three  or  four  feet  wide,  5£"  or  G". 
The  cap-sill  is  usually  made  of  the 
same  width  as  the  stanchions,  but 
somewhat  deeper,  for  the  sake  of 
strength,  the  chief  pressure  being 
vertical.  In  branches  and  small  galleries  an  excess  of  about 
one-fourth  will  be  sufficient ;  in  the  wider  galleries,  the  ex- 
cess may  amount  to  one-third,  or  even  one-half.  The  side 
sheeting  of  galleries  may  be  of  l"  or  l±"  plank ;  for  the  top 
sheeting  it  should  be  from  2"  to  2i".  Great  gallery  frames 
have  their  stanchions  of  scantling  5±"  or  6"  square,  and 
their  cap-sills  8"  by  5£",  or  8"  by  6". 

We  shall  now  proceed  to  describe  the  method  of  driving 
the  gallery  from  the  bottom  of  a  shaft ;  and  we  shall  con- 
eider  the  ground  to  be  such  as  to  render  it  necessary  to 
sheet  the  skies  as  well  as  the  top.  The  first  thing  necessary 
is,  to  prepare  two  rods  as  gauges  for  regulating  the  height 
and  width  of  the  excavation.  The  gauge  for  the  height 
must  allow,  beyond  the  extreme  dimensions,  for  two  thick- 
nesses of  plank,  and  that  for  the  breadth  for  four  thick- 
nesses of  plank — two  on  each  side  of  the  frame ;  and  the 
latter,  i.  e.,  the  gauge,  must  be  notched,  or  otherwise  con- 
spicuously marked,  in  the  centre.  It  was  stated  before, 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    IN    MINING. 


215 


that  in  sinking  a  shaft  the  scores  on 
the  frames  must  correspond  with  the 
direction  of  the  gallery  intended  to 
be  driven  from  the  bottom.     If  this 
has  been  carefully  attended  to,  the 
direction  of  tie  gallery  will  be  at  once 
obtained   by  dropping    plumb-lines 
along  the  scores,  and  marking  these 
points  at  the  bottom  of  the  shaft  with 
pickets ;  or,  the  notches  on  the  bot- 
tom frames,  if  accurately  laid,  will  be 
i ;  sufficient.      In  commencing  the  gal- 
•  lery,  the  excavation  may  be  carried 
FIG.  4.  forward  about  one  or  two  feet  before 

the  first  frame  is  placed.  The  entrance  made  in  the  first 
instance  should  be  less,  both  in  width  and  height,  by  the 
thickness  of  one  set  of  planks — that  is,  by  1£"  on  each 
side  and  2"  on  the  top.  The  exact  position  of  the  first 
frame  being  determined,  the  ground-sill  is  imbedded  in  the 
ground,  outside  and  against  the  lower  shaft  frame.  The 
stanchions  are  inserted,  and  the  cap-sill  set,  and  the  whole 
frame  squared  by  means  of  a  plumb-bob,  and  temporarily 
secured  in  place  by  battens.  This  being  completed,  the 
excavation  is  continued  for  a  distance  of  four  feet,  when  an- 
other frame  is  set  up.  The  ground-sill  is  first  placed  exactly 
perpendicular  to,  and  its  score  in,  the  axis  of  the  gallery. 
If  the  gallery  is  to  be  horizontal,  the  position  of  this  sill  will 
be  verified  by  a  spirit-level  and  straight-edge.  If  inclined, 
a  slope-block  is  used  in  connection  with  the  above  imple- 
ments. This  is  a  block  whose  thickness  is  equal  to  the  rise 
or  fall  of  the  floor  of  the  gallery,  in  a  distance  equal  to  one 
interval. 

The  stanchions  are  then  set  up,  their  lower  ends  inserted 
in  the  notches  in  the  ground-sill.  The  cap-sill  is  placed,  and  its 
position  verified  by  plumbings  from  its  score  to  that  in  the 


216 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TKOOPS. 


Fio.  5. 


ground-sill.  The  top- 
sheeting  planks  having 
been  introduced  over  the 
first  frame,  with  their 
pointed  ends  foremost, 
are  now  pushed  forward 
until  they  rest  upon  the 
cap-sill  of  the  second 
frame.  Wedges  ar e  th  en 
introduced,  as  in  sinking 
a  shaft,  and  the  side 
sheeting  is  pushed  on  in 
an  exactly  similar  manner. 


MEN  AND  TOOLS    REQUIRED  FOR   DRIVING  A    GALLERY    FROM 
THE   BOTTOM   OF  A  SHAFT. 


MEN. 


TOOLS. 


Picks. 


Shovels. 


•3 


The  disposition  of  the  workmen  is  as  follows : 

1  man  picks.    • 

1     «    fills  the  truck. 

1     "     wheels. 

1  "  fills  the  bucket  at  the  bottom  of  the  shaft,  or  at- 
taches the  truck  to  the  windlass. 

Five  men  are  employed  at  the  top  of  the  shaft,  as  stated 
before. 

For  every  fifty  feet  driven,  an  additional  man  and  truck 
become  necessary,  recesses  being  cut  at  the  sides  to  receive 
the  empty  truck  while  the  loaded  one  passes.  One  ad- 


PRACTICAL    OPERATIONS    IN"   MINING.  217 

ditional  man  will  also  be  required  at  top,  to  work  the  venti- 
lating apparatus.  Instead  of  using  a  bucket  for  hoisting 
up  the  earth,  it  is  found  to  be  a  more  expeditious  plan  to 
attach  the  full  truck  to  the  windlass.  Where  the  gallery  is 
unconnected  with  a  shaft,  the  two  men  working  the  wind- 
lass might  be  struck  off.  In  great  galleries  the  earth  may 
be  removed  in  wheelbarrows. 

Whenever  there  appears  to  be  any  risk  of  the  soil  falling 
in,  it  is  proper,  after  placing  each  successive  frame  and  ex- 
cavating one  or  two  feet  beyond  it,  to  remove  the  wedges, 
and  to  introduce  the  next  set  of  top-sheeting  planks,  as  far 
as  they  will  go,  without  waiting  for  another  frame,  and  to 
push  them  forward  as  the  excavating  proceeds.  Thus  the 
man  excavating  will  always  work  under  cover  of  these 
planks. 

INCLINED    GALLERIES. 

When  the  depth  required  to  be  reached  is  not  great,  it  will 
generally  be  found  more  convenient  to  obtain  this  object  by 
making  a  descending  gallery  in  preference  to  striking  out 
from  the  bottom  of  a  shaft.  A  gallery  is  never  made  to  de- 
scend more  than  1  foot  in  2.  A  descending  gallery  may  bo 
commenced  from  behind  some  bank  or  natural  cover,  or 
from  behind  a  parapet ;  as  for  example,  from  one  of  the  most 
advanced  parallels  or  lodgements  in  a  siege.  It  may  not  al- 
ways be  convenient  to  commence  a  gallery,  when  required 
in  a  siege,  from  one  of  the  regular  parallels  or  lodgements ; 
in  such  cases  a  small  parallel  may  be  made  for  the  purpose, 
and  connected  with  the  nearest  trenches  by  a  boyau.  When 
a  descending  gallery  is  commenced  from  a  parallel,  the 
trench  of  the  parallel  must  be  deepened  at  the  spot  chosen 
for  the  entrance  of  the  gallery  as  much  as  maybe  necessary 
to  allow  the  top  of  the  excavation  of  the  gallery  to  be  two 
and  a  half  or  three  feet  below  the  original  surface  of  the 
ground.  The  execution  of  the  gallery  is  to  all  intents  tho 
same  as  that  of  a  horizontal  one,  except  that  tho  frames  are 
JO 


218 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


set  up  perpendicular 
to  the  slope,  and  the 
distance  between 
any  two  must  be 
measured  along  it. 
This  being  attended 
to,  the  same  sheeting 
will  answer  whether 
the  gallery  is  in- 
clined or  horizontal. 
The  first  frame  of 
an  inclined  gallery 
ought,  as  nearly  as 
possible,  to  be  under 
the  terrcplein  of  the 
banquette.  It  is  to 
be  observed  that  the 
pressure  of  loose 
earth  acting  upon" 
the  roof  of  a  gallery 
will  always  tend  to 
overset  the  mine- 
frames,  unless  the 
latter  are  placed  in 

FIG.  e.  a   direction  perpen- 

dicular to  the  floor  of  the  gallery,  or  nearly  so. 

In  changing  from  a  descending  direction  to  a  horizontal 
one,  it  is  necessary  to  change  also  from  oblique  frames  to 
vertical  ones,  and  it  becomes  also  necessary  to  support  the 
first  vertical  frame  by  struts  placed  parallel  to  the  stanch- 
ions of  the  oblique  frames  in  rear  of  it.  Thus  the  cap-sill  of 
the  first  vertical  frame  is  as  it  were  supported  by  two  pairs 
of  stanchions,  one  pair  vertical  and  the  other  oblique,  in 
order  to  resist  the  double  action  of  the  loose  earth  imme- 
diately above  it,  which  presses  vertically  upon  the  top  sheet- 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    IN    MINING.  210 

ing  of  the  first  horizontal  bay,  but  obliquely  upon  the  top 
sheeting  of  the  last  inclined  bay  of  the  gallery. 

^  SINKING   A   SHAFT  IN  BAD   SOIL. 

Iii  soil  which  has  little  tenacity,  it  may*be  necessary  to 
provide  an  intermediate  support  for  the  sheeting,  during  the 
operation  of  sinking  the  interval. 

For  this  purpose  a  false  frame  is  employed ;  this  differs 
from  the  ordinary  shaft  frame,  in  being  a  little  larger  from 
out  to  out,  and  being  made  of  rather  smaller  scantling. 

It  is  used  as  follows,  after  the  excavation  has  been  car- 
ried about  two  feet  below  the  frame  last  placed  :  the  sheet- 
ing having  been  driven  down  as  fast  as  the  excavation  ad- 
vanced, the  false  frame  is  placed  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  ordinary  frame  ;  with  the  exception  that  no  wedges  are 
driven  between  it  and  the  sheeting,  it  is  connected  by  bat- 
tens with  the  frame  above.  The  excavation  is  then  con- 
tinued until  the  full  depth  of  the  interval  is  attained,  when 
an  ordinary  frame  is  placed,  the  wedges  driven,  and  the 
false  frame  removed. 

When  a  common,  or  branch  gallery  is  to  be  driven  from 
the  bottom  of  the  shaft,  the  only  precaution  to  be  taken  in 
making  the  last  interval,  will  be  to  use  somewhat  thicker 
sheeting.  But  when  the  gallery  is  to  be  grand,  or  principal, 
the  sheeting  must  be  driven  on  all  four  sides,  instead  of 
three,  and  an  additional  frame  placed  three  feet  above  the 
bottom. 

To  commence  the  gallery,  set  up  the  first  frame  and  secure 
it  in  place  by  battens,  then  drive  down  the  sheeting  that  is 
opposite  the  cap-sill  until  sufficient  space  is  gained  to  enter 
the  top  sheeting  of  the  gallery.  As  soon  as  this  sheeting  is 
entered,  in  order  to  prevent  the  pressure  of  the  earth  from 
forcing  down  the  forward  ends,  a  piece  of  plank  is  laid  over 
t lie  rear  ends  and  engaged  under  the  shaft-frame  directly 
above.  (See  fig.  4.) 


220 


MANUAL    FOR    ENGINEER    TROOPS. 


Then  force  down  the  shaft  sheeting  above  mentioned,  one 
foot  further,  drive  the  top  sheeting  as  far  as  it  will  go,  and 
enter  the  upper  course  of  side  sheeting.  It  may  be  necessary 
to  brace  the  opposite  plank  of  this  sheeting  apart,  at  their 
inner  ends,  to  counteract  the  pressure  of  the  earth  at  their 
other  extremities.  Continue  to  introduce  the  side  sheeting 
by  pairs,  forcing  down  for  this  purpose  the  shaft  sheeting 
one  foot  at  a  time  on  reaching  the  intermediate  shaft  frame, 
knock  out  the  side  which  is  against  the  gallery,  and  remove 
the  sheeting  resting  against  it,  insert  all  the  side  sheeting, 
and  push  the  excavation  forward,  always  driving  the  sheet- 
ing in  advance  of  the  excavation.  Two  feet  in  advance 

of  the  first  frame,  the  false 
frame  (fig.  7)  is  set  up.  This 
consists  of  a  ground-sill,  two 
stanchions,  and  a  cap-sill, 
united  by  mortice  and  tenons, 
the  cap  is  rounded  on  top,  the 
height  is  the  same  as  the  gal- 
lery frame,  the  width  two 
inches  greater.  It  is  placed  in 
the  axis  of  the  gallery,  and  in 
such  a  manner  that  the  cap-sill  shall  be  2"  higher  than  those 
of  the  ordinary  frames.  In  driving  the  sheeting  around  it 
no  wedges  are  used.  The  excavation  is  then  pushed  on, 
until  the  place  for  the  second  gallery-frame  is  reached ;  this 
is  set  up  and  the  wedges  driven  in  the  usual  manner,  and 
the  false  frame  is  removed. 

When  the  soil  is  very  bad,  a  mask  is  employed  to  pre- 
vent the  earth,  above  and  in  front  from  caving  into  the 
gallery.  The  process  is  as  follows :  as  soon  as  the  top 
sheeting  is  entered  and  the  shaft  sheeting  forced  down  1' 
as  above  described,  a  piece  of  plank,  equal  in  length  to  the 
width  of  the  gallery,  is  placed  directly  under  the  top 
sheeting  and  against  the  earth  to  be  excavated ;  this  plank 


FIG.  7. 


PKACTICAL   OPERATIONS    IN   MINING. 


221 


FIG.  8. 


is  held  in  place  by  braces  on  each 
side  to  the  frame  in  rear.  In  the 
same  way  the  remaining  planks  of 
the  shield  are  added  in  succession, 
and  as  soon  as  the  shaft  sheeting 
is  lowered  enough  to  receive 
them,  until  the  entire  front  is 
covered,  then  the  top  plank  of 
the  shield  is  removed,  and  the 
earth  excavated  until  it  can  be  re- 
placed 8"  or  10"  in  advance,  after 
which  each  plank  is  removed  in  succession,  the  earth  excav- 
ated, and  the  plank  replaced ;  as  each  partial  excavation  ad- 
vances, the  sheeting  is  driven  forward. 

BRANCHES. 

In  a  system  of  military  mines  the  branches  are  merely 
smaller  galleries  than  usual,  branching  out  from  the  com- 
mon galleries,  hence  their  name.  As  the  construction  of 
both  is  so  much  alike,  it  is  only  necessary  to  notice  the  cir- 
cumstances under  which  a  branch  proceeding  from  a  gallery 
may  be  commenced. 

1.  A  branch  may  be  excavated  in  the  same  direction  and 
in  continuation  of  the  gallery  itself. 
In  this  case  the  first  branch  frame 
must  be  placed  immediately  beyond 
the  last  gallery  frame  and  close  to 
it ;  or,  if  there  be  room,  it  may  be 
placed  exactly  within  it,  the  centre 
of  both  coinciding  as  in  the  annexed 
figure. 

2.  A  branch  may  be  cut  at  right 
angles  to  the  gallery  from  whence 
it  proceeds>  In  this  case  the  mode 
of  commencing  is  the  same  as  ex- 

Fm.  9. 


222 


MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


cavating  a  gallery  from  the  lower  part  of  one  side  of  a  shaft, 
it  being  understood  that  the  floor  of  the  branch  always  com- 
mences from  the  bottom  of  the  gallery.  The  entrance  of 
the  branch  is  of  course  cut  half  way  between  two  adjacent 
gallery  frames. 

3.  A  branch  may  be  commenced  obliquely  from  the  side 
of  a  gallery. 

In  this  case,  if  the  soil  be  good  and  not  wanting  much 

support,  the  first 
branch  frame  is 
placed  as  near  to 
the  side  (see  fig. 
10)  of  the  gallery 
as  possible,  but 
at  right  angles  to 
the  direction  of 
the  intended  new 
branch.  Hence, 
one  stanchion 
only  of  the  first  branch  frame  can  agree  with  the  side  of 
the  gallery;  the  other  side  will  be  more  or  less  distant  from 
it  in  proportion  to  the  degree  of  obliquity.  If,  on  the  con- 
trary, the  ground 
cannot  be  trusted 
the  first  branch 
frame  must  be 
placed  so  as  to 
line  with  the  side 
of  the  gallery  it- 
self (see  fig.  11), 
and  consequent- 
ly a  longer  cap- 
sill  than  the  or- 
dinary ones  will 
be  necessary. 


FIG.  10. 


FIG.  11. 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   IN   MINING. 


223 


MINING  WITH   CASES. 

Having  described  the  method  of  mining  with  frames  and 
sheeting,  it  remains  now  to  point  out  the  difference  when 
mine-cases  alone  are  used.  These  descriptions  of  cases 
have  long  been  known  under  the  name  of  Dutch  cases ; 

these  consist  of  four  pieces — two 
stanchions,  a  cap-sill,  and  ground- 
sill. For  ordinary  work  they  are 
made  out  of  two-inch  deal,  and 
have  a  three-eighths  of  an  inch 
round  iron  bolt  driven  transverse- 
ly through  the  middle  thickness 
of  the  wood  of  each  piece,  about 
four  and  a  half  inches  from  each 
end,  to  prevent  them  from  split- 
The  stanchions  have  tenons 


Tic,.  12. 


ting. 


2"  long  by  3"  wide  at  each  end,  and  mortices  of  correspond- 
ing dimensions  are  cut  in  the  ends  of  the  cap-sill  and  ground- 
sill to  receive  the  tenons;  the  most  convenient  width  for 
the  piece  would  be  twelve  inches,  but  this  is  not  a  matter 
of  consequence,  and  they  may  be  made  of  whatever  sized 
planks,  not  less  than  two  inches  thick,  that  can  most  readily 
be  procured.  In  great  galleries  which  require  stronger  ma- 
terials, the  stanchions  may  be  four  inches  thick,  the  ground- 
sill three  inches  and  the  cap-sill  five  inches ;  notches,  as 
shown  in  the  figure,  are  cut  in  the  stanchions  for  the  pur- 
pose of  rendering  them  more  manageable,  both  in  putting 
them  up  and  taking  them  down  ;  they  also  serve  for  places 
in  which  to  drive  pickets  to  support  the  case  in  a  descend- 
ing gallery.  The  size  in  the  clear  of  cases,  both  for  shafts 
and  galleries,  is  the  same  as  that  of  frames,  and  the  same 
precautions  and  arrangements  in  their  adjustments  are 
necessary. 

In  sinking  shafts  when  the  excavation  has  advanced  about 


224 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


one  foot  in  depth,  it  becomes  necessary  to  fix  the  first  case, 
which  is  done  in  the  following  manner :  One  of  the  short 
pieces  is  first  placed  in  its  proper  position  into  the  excavation; 
the  tenons  of  the  two  long  pieces  are  then  fitted  into  the  mor- 
tises of  this,  and  then  the  mortise  at  one  end  of  the  fourth 
side  is  fitted  on  its  tenon ;  but  to  adjust  the  corresponding 
mortise  and  tenon,  it  will  be  necessary  to  push  back  either 
this  short  piece  or  the  long  one  full  two  inches,  in  order  to 
bring  the  mortise  and  tenon  together ;  and  whichever  plan 
is  adopted,  as  little  earth  as  possible  should  be  cut  away. 
The  first  case  being  placed  the  excavation  is  proceeded  with, 
and  the  second  case  is  placed  close  under  the  first,  and  in  a 
similar  manner,  and  so  on  to  the  bottom  of  the  shaft.  This 
is  the  mode  of  proceeding  when  the  soil  is  so  bad  as  to  re- 
quire close  casing ;  under  ordinary  circumstances,  how- 
ever, it  will  be  sufficient  to  introduce  a  case  at  every  three 
or  four  feet ;  and  when  this  is  done,  it  is  usual  to  cut  out 
the  earth  to  the  thickness  of  the  plank,  so  as  to  admit  of 
the  case  being  placed  flush  with  the  sides  of  the  excava- 
tion. 

When  it  is  intended  to  push  a  gallery  from  the  bottom 

r 4-°.- .->  of  a  close-cased  shaft, 

it  is  evident,  before 
proceeding,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  remove 
one  side  of  the  cas- 
ing ;  and  to  do  this 
without  causing  the 
adjacent  sides  to  col- 
lapse, and  the  casing 
to  tumble  in,  a  frame 
somewhat  similar  to 
a  door  frame  must 
be  introduced  —  its 
ground-sill  being  ad- 


Fio.  18. 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    IN   MINING.  225 

justed  so  that  its  upper  side  may  be  on  a  level  with  the 
floor  of  the  intended  gallery ;  the  exterior  dimensions  of  the 
frame  must  exactly  correspond  with  the  width  of  the  shaft, 
and  the  interior  dimensions  may  be  exactly  those  of  the 
gallery,  or  exceed  them  by  an  inch  or  two.  When  this 
frame  is  first  put  up  it  should  be  made  to  stand  about  one 
foot  from  the  side  of  the  casing  which  is  to  be  removed ; 
and  when  this  is  effected,  it  must  be  forced  up  against  that 
side.  These  details  having  been  attended  to,  the  casing  on 
the  side  from  which  jthe  gallery  is  to  start  may  be  removed, 
commencing  with  the  side  of  the  lowest  case  ;  to  remove 
which  Avill  be  a  work  of  some  difficulty,  as  the  earth  must 
be  picked  away  from  behind  it  in  order  to  admit  of  its 
being  pushed  back  to  clear  it  of  its  tenon.  It  will  be  neces- 
sary, in  the  first  instance,  to  excavate  the  ground  underneath 
it  in  order  to  admit  of  the  introduction  of  the  pick  and 
push-pick,  but  the  removal  of  each  successive  side  will  be 
easier.  In  driving  the  gallery,  the  mode  of  using  the  cases 
is  as  nearly  similar  as  possible  to  that  described  for  shafts, 
making  allowance  for  the  difference  of  direction;  the  ground- 
sill is  first  placed  next  the  stanchions,  and  to  fix  the  cap-sill 
the  same  mode  of  proceeding  is  to  be  adopted  as  has  already 
been  described  for  fixing  the  fourth  side  of  the  shaft  case  ; 
the  space  which  is  necessarily  left  between  the  earth  and 
the  top  of  the  cap-sill  should  be  filled  in  before  proceeding 
to  place  the  next  case.  Close  casing  will  seldom  be  required 
in  a  gallery,  but  the  roofing  should  in  most  cases  be  sup- 
ported ;  this  can  easily  be  effected  by  using  pieces  of  the 
cases  as  top  sheeting,  extending  from  the  top  sides  of  the 
cases  which  it  may  be  found  necessary  to  use. 

Great  gallery  cases  are  somewhat  different  from  other 
cases.  In  order  to  give  greater  strength,  the  stanchions  are 
marie  without  tenons  at  their  lower  ends,  which  are  kept  in 
their  places  by  cleats  two  inches  thick  nailed  on  to  the  sill  ; 
the  mortises  in  the  cap-sills  need  not  be  more  than  two 
10* 


226 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


inches  deep.  In  driving  great  galleries  in  loose  soil,  after 
setting  up  the  first  frame  it  becomes  necessary  to  support 
the  top-sill,  whilst  the  miner  excavates  the  ground  for  the 
ground-sill  and  stanchions.  For  this  purpose  two  upright 


FIG.  14. , 


pieces  of  timber,  carrying  each  a  cross-piece,  as  represented 
in  the  annexed  figure,  are  made  use  of.  The  upright  part 
rests  on  the  sill  of  the  frame  already  placed,  and  is  steadied 

by  being  wedged 
up.  The  cross- 
piece  is  two  feet 
long,  and  the  part 
that  projects  in  ad- 
vance, as  will  be 
seen  from  the  fig- 
ure, is  made  an 
inch  higher  than 
the  rear  part,  to 
support  the  top-sill 
somewhat  higher 
than  its  final  level. 

FIG.  15 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    IN   MINING. 


227 


The  rear  part  of  the  cross-piece 
is  braced  by  a  piece  of  iron  to 
the  upright.  These  are  called 
crutches,  and  the  materials  of 
which  they  are  made  should  be 
as  light  as  a  due  regard  to 
strength  will  admit. 

In  working  with  cases,  the 
direction  of  a  gallery  may  be 
easily  and  gradually  changed,  as 
shown  in  fig.  16. 

If  the  soil  is  good,  the  inter- 
vals which  occur  between  the 
cases  may  be  left  open  ;  if  bad, 
they  may  be  filled  up  with  small 
pieces  of  wood.  When  it  is 
necessary  to  break  out  from  the 
side  of  a  gallery  in  a  direction 
perpendicular  or  oblique  to  it, 
the  requisite  number  of  cases 
must  be  removed,  and  the  roof  of  the  interval  lined  with 
pieces  of  board  extending  across  and  supported  on  the  ex- 
treme cases,  as  in  fig.  17. 

If  the  soil  is  very  bad,.  the  stanchions  only  from  the  side 

whence  the  new  gallery  is  to 
proceed  need  be  removed,  and 
the    intervening    cap-sills   can 
be    supported    as    in  fig.   18. 
But  this  method  has   the  in- 
convenience  of  lowering  the 
headway,  a  serious  objection. 
When  a  gallery  branches  from  another  in  an  oblique  di- 
rection, it  will  be  better  to  obtain  the  obliquity  gradually, 
than  by  introducing  an  oblique   case,  like  the  frame  indi- 
cated in  fig.  IG. 


FIG.  IG. 


s 


FIG.  IT. 


228 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


Flo.  18. 


When  cases 
are  used,  the 
w  o  r  k  will  ad- 
vance at  nearly 
double  the  rate 
it  would  with 
frames  and  sheet- 
ing, viz. :  great 
galleries  and  shafts  about  one  foot  an  hour ;  common  gal- 
leries one  foot  and  a  half  per  hour. 

CHARGING    OP    MINES. 

The  receptacle  for  the  powder  is  called  the  chamber,  and 
is  usually  at  the  extremity  of  a  branch,  either  in  its  pro- 
longation or  on  the  flank. 

When  the  charge  does  not  exceed  one  hundred  pounds, 
the  ordinary  powder-barrel  may  be  used  to  contain  it. 
When  it  is  greater  a  cubical  box  is  constructed  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  be  readily  put  together  in  the  excavation  for 
the  chamber.  When  the  charge  is  very  large,  the  lining 
of  the  chamber  is  formed  with  the  ordinary  mining- frames 
and  sheeting  or  with  mining-cases.  When  the  weight  of 
the  charge  is  given,  the  size  of  the  box  may  be  determined 
by  allowing  thirty  cubic  inches  to  -the  pound. 


TAMPING   MINES. 

The  tamping  of  mines  consists  in  filling  up  the  gallery 
with  solid  material  for  a  certain  distance  from  the  chamber, 
with  the  view  of  preventing  the  force  of  the  explosion  from 
expending  itself  in  the  gallery,  rather  than  in  the  direction 
in  which  the  mine  is  required  to  act. 

The  tamping  should  extend  from  the  charge  for  a  distance 
equal  at  least  to  1£  times  the  line  of  least  resistance  ;  and  if 
the  material  used  for  forming  the  tamping  be  not  heavy,  i- 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    IN    MINING.  229 

otherwise  but  loosely  packed,  this  distance  should  be  double 
that  line. 

The  materials  usually  employed  in  tamping  consist  of 
earth  which  has  been  excavated  in  the  formation  of  the  gal- 
lery, sods,  sand-bags,  or  indeed,  of  any  heavy  substance 
which  may  be  at  hand.  If  the  soil  be  argillaceous,  it  may  be 
roughly  moulded  into  bricks,  which  form  an  excellent  mate- 
rial, and  one  with  which  the  operation  proceeds  quickly. 
The  most  expeditious  mode  of  tamping  is,  however,  gen- 
erally considered  to  be  with  sand-bags. 

Split  or  cleft  timber,  in  lengths  of  four  or  five  feet,  and  of 
about  9  inches  girt,  jammed  together  in  the  gallery,  is  also 
very  applicable,  and  when  mixed  with  common  earth  at 
intervals  of  10  or  12  feet,  forms  a  good  tamping.  Indeed, 
in  the  demolition  of  revetments,  by  an  arrangement  of  mines 
in  an  escarp  gallery,  it  would  be  found  sufficient  if  both 
extremities  of  the  gallery  were  tamped  with  cleft  timber. 
In  tamping  wholly  with  common  earth,  it  is  desirable  to 
strengthen  the  mass  by  pieces  of  scantling  crossing  each 
other,  and  placed  diagonally  in  the  gallery.  These  pieces  of 
scantling  must  be  secured  in  their  position  by  letting  their 
ends  into  the  sides  of  the  gallery,  or  by  simply  jamming 
them. 

In  a  permanent  system  of  countermines,  it  is  usual  to 
leave  grooves  in  the  walls  of  the  galleries,  for  the  purpose 
of  receiving  the  ends  of  the  scantling  above  alluded  to. 

In  a  common  gallery  (4|  by  3  feet),  the  tamping,  when 
executed  with,  common  earth  and  well  rammed,  will  not  be 
completed  at  a  greater  rate  than  from  2  to  3  feet  per  hour. 

In  proportion  as  the  charge  is  increased,  the  value  of  the 
tamping  diminishes.  Experiments  were  made  by  Mouze 
for  the  purpose  of  determining  in  what  ratio  the  charge 
must  >be  increased  to  produce  the  same  effect  with  a  dimin- 
ished tamping ;  and  he  concluded  that  when  the  tamping  is 
diminished  by  I,  the  charge  should  be  increased];  when 


230  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

the  tamping  is  diminished  by  |,  the  charge  should  be  in- 
creased | ;  and  when  the  mine  is  not  tamped,  the  charge 
should  be  doubled. 

FIRING   MINES. 

Mines  are  usually  fired,  or,  as  it  is  technically  termed, 
sprung,  by  a  powder-hose,  or  by  Bickford's  fuze. 

The  powder-hose  consists  of  a  tube  of  strong  linen,  reach- 
ing from  the  chamber  to  the  outside  of  the  tamping.  To 
protect  the  hose,  it  is  enclosed  in  a  hollow  wooden  case 


represented  in  profile  as  follows :  Pp., 
sions  of  the  case  being  3  inches,  P~^ 


the  exterior  dimen- 
and  the  interior  1£ 
inch.  The  case  is  fastened  to  the  side  of  the  shaft  or  gal- 
lery by  wooden  pegs ;  and  in  galleries  and  branches,  after  it 
has  been  secured,  it  is  usually  covered  with  earth,  to  pre- 
vent accidents  during  the  operation  of  tamping.  The  mine 
is  fired  by  a  piece  of  port-fire  inserted  into  the  end  of  the 
powder-hose,  of  such  length  as  will  give  time  to  the  man 
who  fires  it  to  escape  before  the  explosion  takes  place.  The 
port-fire  is  then  covered  all  round  with  moist  clay,  well 
kneaded  with  the  hands ;  and  earth  is  applied  around  all, 
so  as  to  render  it  impossible  for  any  fire  to  communicate 
with  the  powder-hose  till  the  port-fire  shall  have  burnt  out. 
When  if  is  desired  that  several  mines  should  explode  simul- 
taneously, being  fired  from  one  point,  it  is  necessary  that 
equal  lengths  of  powder-hose  should  extend  from  the  focus 
or  point  of  ignition  to  all  the  mines. 

To  effect  this  object,  the  hose  of  the  mines  nearer  to  the 
focus  must  be  bent  more  frequently  than  those  leading  to 
the  more  distant  ones,  as  in  the  annexed  diagram  (fig.  19). 
•  •• a  •  Thebendingsofthe 


_  _ 

II  —.    hose  retard  the  pro- 

FMkit  -  r~  sress  of  ignition» 

but  only  in  a  small 


degree,  so  small  as  to  be  safely  neglected. 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   IX   MINING.  231 

Bickford's  fuze  consists  of  a  train  of  gunpowder  enveloped 
in  the  strands  of  a  rope  which  has  been  steeped  in  a  pecul- 
iar composition,  and  the  rope  protected  by  a  coat  of  pitch  ; 
it  is  not  injured  by  damp,  and  will  burn  under  water ;  it 
burns  at  the  rate  of  12  feet  in  five  minutes. 

The  Voltaic  battery  is  a  means  which  may  be  resorted  to 
for  igniting  mines ;  but  the  care  and  attention  required  to 
isolate  the  wires,  and  the  difficulty  of  arranging  securely  so 
great  a  length  of  them,  render  this  application  of  the  bat- 
tery, however  desirable,  hardly  available  for  military  pur- 
poses. 

The  rocket  is  also  employed  to  fire  the  charge.  Like  the 
powder-hose,  it  requires  a  case  or  hose-trough.  Wherever 
a  change  of  direction  takes  place  in  the  case,  care  must  be 
taken  that  it  is  not  made  too  quickly.  At  each  angle  it  is 
usual  to  place  a  fresh  rocket,  with  its  quick-match  secured 
round  a  nail ;  the  first  rocket,  arriving  at  the  point  where 
the  second  is  placed,  fires  it.  In  order  better  to  secure  the 
first  rocket  firing  the  second,  a  quantity  of  powder  should 
be  strewed  about  the  match  of  the  latter,  protected  by  a 
triangular  slip  of  deal,  nailed  to  the  bottom  of  the  trough  ; 
the  first  rocket  then  ignites  the  powder,  and  so  fires  the 
second,  which  its  rapid  motion  might  otherwise  fail  to  do. 

AVhen  by  the  explosion  of  a  charge  of  powder  in  a  mine, 
a  conical  excavation  or  crater  is  formed  in  the  ground.  The 
radius  at  the  surface  is  called  the  radius  of  the  crater.  The 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  charge  to  the  surface  is  the 
line  of  least  resistance.  The  slant  height  of  the  cone  is  the 
radius  of  explosion.  When  the  crater  radius  is  equal  to  the 
line  of  least  resistance,  it  is  called  a  one-lined  crater,  when 
double  a  two-lined  crater,  &c. 

When  the  crater  is  two-lined,  the  mine  is  called  a  common 
mine,  when  less  an  undercharged,  and  when  greater  an  over- 
charged mine,  or  globe  of  compression. 
The  charge  of  powder  necessary  to  produce  these  craters 


232  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

will  of  course  depend  on  the  nature  of  the  soil  as  well   as 
the  depth  of  the  charge  below  the  surface. 

In  ordinary  soil,  the  charge  to  produce  a  common  mine 
may  be  found  by  cubing  the  line  of  least  resistance  taken  in 
feet ;  this  number  divided  by  ten  will  give  the  charge  in 
pounds.  For  the  other  classes  of  mines  the  charge  has  not 
as  yet  been  well  determined. 

The  following  table  has  been  derived  from  the  most  relia- 
ble experiments. 

L  L  R3  X  aV  gave  1 -lined  crater. 


".2      " 
LLR3Xi      "     3      "         " 

LLR  X4*     "      6      " 

The  following  general  rules  will  give  approximate  results 

Subtract  the  given  line  of  least  resistance  from  the  radi 
us  of  crater;  multiply  this  difference  by  ,85.  Add  this  prod 
uct  to  the  given  line  of  least  resistance  ;  the  result  will  givt 
the  L  L  R  of  a  common  mine,  requiring  the  same  charge  as 
the  globe  of  compression,  which  may  be  determined  as  be- 
fore stated  by  cubing  the  line  of  least  resistance,  and  divid- 
ing by  ten. 

The  effect  of  the  explosion  of  the  charge  in  a  mine,  is  not 
confined  to  the  formation  of  a  crater.  The  earth  in  every 
direction  within  certain  limits,  called  the  radii  of  rupture, 
is  pulverized  and  compressed  to  such  a  degree  as  to  destroy 
any  gallery  that  may  be  within  the  sphere  of  action.  As 
one  of  the  principal  objects  of  offensive  mines  is  the  de- 
struction of  the  enemy's  galleries,  it  is  important  to  ascertain 
the  lengths  of  the  radii  for  different  charges. 

When  the  charge  placed  at  A  is  insufficient  to  form  a  crater, 
the  effect  is,  to  produce  a  spherical  compression  M  N  O, 
whose  radius  will  depend  on  the  charge  and  nature  of  the 
soil.  This  sphere  is  termed  a  camouflet. 


PRACTICAL  OPERATIONS   IN   MINING.  233 

c  O 


FIG.  20. 

When  the  charge  is  sufficient  to  produce  a  crater,  the  solid 
of  rupture  becomes  an  elipsoid,  a  b  c. 

When  A  B  =  B  C,  or  the  mine  is  a  "  common"  one,  a  A 
will  be  =  1.7  A  B,  and  A  b  =  1.3  A  B. 

In  the  globe  of  compression,  although  the  crater  radius 
cannot  be  increased  much  beyond  three  times  the  line  of 
least  resistance  A  B,  yet  the  radius  of  rupture  may  be,  al- 
most indefinitely,  by  increasing  the  charge. 

In  the  case  of  a  six-lined  crater,  the  transverse  axis  A  a'= 
4|  A  B,  and  the  vertical  axis  A  6'=1£  A  B.  It  will  be  ob- 
served that  the  radius  of  rupture  increases  much  more  rap- 
idly in  the  horizontal  than  in  the  vertical  direction,  with  the 
increase  of  charge. 

VENTILATION. 

Great  attention  must  be  paid  to  ventilation  in  driving  ex- 
tensive galleries,  as  the  gases  generated  by  the  explosion  of 
gunpowder  or  contained  in  the  soil,  have  sometimes  suffocated 
the  miner  before  the  extinction  of  his  light  have  warned  him 
of  its  presence,  and  even  under  ordinary  circumstances,  the 
air  becomes  so  much  vitiated  by  the  presence  of  the  work- 
men alone,  that  branches  cannot  be  safely  driven  more 
than  about  60  feet ;  beyond  this  distance  apertures  should 
therefore  be  bored,  if  possible,  up  to  the  surface  of  the 
ground  at  intervals,  taking  care  to  conceal  their  position 
from  the  enemy.  Communications  may  also  be  made  with 
adjacent  galleries  to  create  a  draught. 

Mechanical  means  are  sometimes  employed  to  produce  a 


234:  MANUAL   FOB   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

circulation,  so  as  to  substitute  fresh  air  for  that  which  is  im- 
pure; for  this  purpose  tubes  are  laid  along  the  galleries 
through  which  fresh  air  may  be  forced  in,  or  bad  air  extract- 
ed. As  there  may  be  a  large  quantity  of  noxious  gas  in  the 
soil,  ready  to  supply  the  place  of  that  extracted,  the  system 
of  forcing  air  in  is  to  be  preferred.  The  tubes  used  for 
ventilation  have  ordinarily  been  made  of  wood  or  tin,  but 
vulcanized  india-rubber  would  probably  answer  the  purpose 
better. 

For  forcing  the  air  through  the  tubes,  the  fan-blower,  such 
as  is  used  in  reverberatory  furnaces  and  forges  has  been 
employed  advantageously.  The  ordinary  blacksmith's  bel- 
lows may  be  used  where  the  length  of  the  tube  is  not 
great. 

ATTACK  AND  DEFENCE  OF  A  SYSTEM  OF  COUNTERMINES. 

When  the  besieger  arrives  in  the  vicinity  of  the  glacis  of 
a  countermined  fortress,  he  is  obliged  to  move  slowly,  and 
dares  not  advance  on  the  surface  of  the  ground  further  than 
what  he  may  be  master  of  below.  He  then  commences  to 
excavate  the  earth,  in  order  to  try  to  discover  the  galleries 
of  the  besieged,  and  to  seize  them,  or  else  he  endeavors  to 
blow  them  in  by  firing  mines.  To  accomplish  this,  in  the 
middle  of  his  third  parallel  he  sinks  shafts  from  sixteen  to 
twenty-one  feet  deep,  he  then  pushes  forward  a  gallery,  tak- 
ing care  to  stop  working  at  intervals,  to  listen  if  the  enemy 
is  coming  to  meet  him. 

Often  the  besieged,  especially  when  his  galleries  extend 
to  a  great  distance,  drives  a  branch  almost  under  the  third 
parallel,  and  fires  one  or  more  mines.  The  besieger,  under 
this  supposition,  ought  to  make  a  lodgement  on  the  edge  of 
the  crater,  and  sink  a  shaft,  in  his  own  lodgement,  This 
shaft  is  not  sunk  from  the  bottom  of  the  crater,  because  it 
would  be  the  reservoir  of  all  projectiles  thrown  from  the 
place.  Care  must  be  taken,  however,  at  the  same  time,  to 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS   IN   MINING.  235 

clear  away  the  excavation  caused  by  the  globe  of  compres- 
sion, in  order  to  discover  the  direction  of  the  branch  which 
joins  it,  and  which  necessarily  communicates  with  a  main 
gallery. 

While  the  besieger  is  sinking  the  shaft,  he  ought  fre- 
quently to  listen,  for  there  is  not  a  doubt  that  he  is  now  in 
the  vicinity  of  the  mines  of  the  besieged ;  and  when  he  ar- 
rives at  the  depth  of  eighteen  or  twenty  feet,  he  commences 
a  branch,  breaking  out  on  that  side  where  he  imagines  the 
enemy's  gallery  to  be  situated. 

When  the  besieger  finds  himself  sufficiently  near  to  the 
gallery  of  the  place,  a*nd  is  in  danger  of  being  forestalled,  he 
hastens  to  dig  a  chamber  at  the  extremity  of  his  branch,  in 
which  he  places  a  certain  quantity  of  powder.  He  then 
tamps  as  fast  as  possible,  and  endeavors  to  fire  his  mine  be- 
fore the  besieged  can  find  time  to  establish  one  to  destroy 
his  works. 

The  besieged,  on  their  side,  directly  they  cease  to  hear 
the  sound  of  the  pickaxe,  work  with  the  greatest  possible 
diligence,  because  they  suppose  from  that  instant  their  ene- 
my, is  engaged  in  tamping  their  mine.  If  they  have  the 
good  fortune  to  fall  in  with  the  mine,  they  endeavor  to  seize 
the  powder,  or  else  to  saturate  it  by  an  inundation  of  water. 
If,  on  the  contrary,  they  discover  a  part  of  the  branch  al- 
ready excavated,  they  ought,  without  delay,  to  inundate  it, 
in  order  to  destroy  the  hose,  and  so  prevent  the  powder 
from  exploding.  These  artifices  are  made  use  of  in  like 
manner  by  the  besieger. 

It  sometimes  happens  that  two  miners,  who  are  working 
to  meet  each  other,  are  only  separated  by  a  slight  parti- 
tion of  earth.  This  is  an  occasion  seized  upon  to  give  the 
"camouflot,"  which  is  performed  in  this  manner  :  The  most 
active  of  the  two  pierces  a  hole  on  the  side  of  his  enemy, 
with  borers  of  different  diameter,  in  order  to  enlarge  it 
gradually,  and  to  give  it  a  diameter  of  six  inches.  He  digs 


236  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

this  hole  as  deep  as  he  can — from  six  to  eight  feet,  for  in- 
stance. He  then  introduces  a  large  cartridge  of  the  same 
size,  containing  from  twelve  to  twenty  pounds  of  powder. 
He  drives  in  this  species  of  mine  with  a  plug  of  wood,  which 
he  fixes  and  props  up  strongly  with  a  piece  of  wood  across 
the  branch.  Finally,  he  fires  this  little  mine,  by  means  of  a 
fuze  which  goes  through  the  middle  of  the  plug. 

If  the  gallery  of  the  enemy  is  but  four  or  five  feet  from 
the  head  of  this  cartridge,  he  may  be  sure  that  it  will  be 
driven  in  by  the  explosion. 

To  produce  the  same  effect,  two  or  three  shells,  fixed  to- 
gether, are  sometimes  employed.  But  this  method  requires 
a  great  deal  of  care  and  attention,  in  order  that  one's  own 
labor  be  not  exposed  to  destruction. 

In  subterranean  warfare,  when  two  miners  are  working 
to  meet  each  other,  they  take  care  to  try  the  ground  fre- 
quently with  a  borer,  to  find  out  exactly  what  distance  they 
are  off.  In  such  a  case,  he  who  sees  the  end  of  his  enemy's 
borer  appearing,  keeps  a  strict  watch  on  the  moment  it  is 
drawn  back.  He  then  introduces  quickly  into  the  hole  it 
loaves  a  pistol  loaded  with  ball,  and  fires  it  the  moment  he 
imagines  the  hole  is  clear.  This  ought  to  be  followed  by 
three  or  four  more  ;  after  which  a  probe  is  pushed  into  the 
opening,  to  clear  it,  and  prevent  the  enemy  coming  through 
on  that  side. 

Vauban  recommends  the  following  articles  to  be  provided, 
in  attacks  of  this  description : 

1st.  A  frame  of  wood,  like  a  shield,  3"  or  4"  thick,with 
a  bolt  in  the  middle  to  manage  it  with,  and  to  place  it  against 
the  hole  perforated  by  the  probe. 

2d.  Smoke  balls.     They  are  pushed  in  through  the  same 
hole,  when  lighted,  and  care  is  taken  to  stop  the  hole  on 
one's  own  side,  so  that  all  the  smoke  goes  into  the  enemy's 
gallery,  by  which  means  their  miner  is  driven  away  for 
time.     During  his  absence  the  mine  is  charged  and  fired, 


PRACTICAL   OPERATIONS    IN    MIXING.  237 

which,  by  blowing  in  the  gallery,  prevents  the  return  of  the 
enemy.  If  the  opening  is  wide  enough,  a  shell  or  port-fires, 
to  suffocate,  or  grenades,  may  be  introduced.  The  shell  is 
to  be  preferred,  when  it  can  be  used,  because  it  destroys  the 
part  of  the  gallery  where  it  falls.  *When  a  thin  partition  of 
earth  divides  the  combatants,  a  petard  is  used  to  blow 
it  in. 

Such  are  a  great  part  of  the  artifices  made  use  of  by 
miners.  To  avoid  them  the  besieger  should,  as  soon  as  ho 
can,  fire  a  mine  to  blow  in  the  branches,  and  even  the  gal- 
leries, of  the  besieged,  if  within  reach.  He  is  sure,  by  this 
means,  of  driving  him  #way  for  some  days.  It  is  well  known 
that  the  firing  of  a  mine  shakes  the  ground  to  a  considerable 
distance,  so  that  if  a  gallery  be  within  this  limit,  the  gases 
of  the  powder  penetrate  and  poison  the  air  with  such  effect 
that  no  one  can  breathe  it.  This  is  not  so  much  felt  by  the 
besieger,  as  he  has  more  air,  not  being  obliged  to  use  such 
long  galleries. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  BATTERIES. 


PART  V. 

CONSTRUCTION  OF  BATTERIES. 


IN  the  follow- 
ing pages  the 
t  e  r  m  battery 
is  applied  to 
those  positions 
prepared  for 
the  reception  of 
artillery  in  such 
a  manner  as  to 
cover  the  pieces 
and  cannoniers 
from  the  ene- 
my's fire. 

Fig.  1  repre- 
sents the  plan 
of  a  battery  for 
six  pieces.  The 
covering  mass 
in  front  is  the 
parapet.  That 
at  the  side  is 
the  epaulement. 

The  earth  for 
the  construc- 
tion of  these 
embankments 
is  generally  fur- 
nished from  an 


11 


FIG.  1. 


242 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


exterior  excavation  or  ditch.  In  batteries  the  different  slopes 
of  the  parapet,  ditch,  <fcc.,  are  designated  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  corresponding  surfaces  in  field  fortifications. 

Embrasures  are  openings  in  the  parapet  through  which 
the  pieces  are  fired. 

The  lower  surface  is  termed  the  sole,  the  sides  the 
cheeks,  and  the  interior  openings  the  throat  of  the  em- 
bf  UK  ure. 

In  the  interior  of  the  battery  the  floor,  or  surface  of  the 
ground,  is  called  the  terreplein. 

The  splinter-proof  traverses  are  mounds 
of  earth  sustained  by  revetments.  They  are 
usually  placed  alternately  between  the  pieces, 
and  are  intended  to  limit  the  destructive  ef- 
fect of  a  shell  exploding  in  the  battery. 

The  first  batteries  in  a  siege  are  usually 
situated  about  thirty  yards  in  advance  of 
the  parallels. 

The  nature  of  the  ground,  or  danger  from 
sorties,  may  render  it  necessary  to  place 
them  behind  or  in  the  parallel. 

Whatever  their  position  may  be,  it  is  es- 
sential that  they  should  be  connected  with 
the  parallel  by  well  covered  and  commodi- 
ous communications,  and  when  in  the  paral- 
lel, a  trench  should  be  cut  in  their  rear, 
so  that  the  working  parties  and  guards  of 
the  trenches  may  pass  around  and  not  make 
a  thoroughfare  of  them. 

Batteries  are  termed  elevated  when  their 
terrepleins  are  formed  by  the  natural  sur- 
face of  the  ground. 

They  are  half-sunken  when  the  terreplein 
is  lowered  2',  and  full-sunken  when   it.  is 
FIG.  2.  lowered  three  feet. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   BATTEKIES. 


243 


FIG.  8.      • 

c  9  tp  Sole  of  embrasure, 
tgp  —  Cheefcf 

&t  —  i  t*  D. 
orizontal  dlstatoCffT  0  -=-f  rertical  distance  f*tf. 


In  the  first  form  the  fire  of  the  guns  is  less  liable  to  be  ob- 
structed by  accidents  of  the  ground  in  front,  and  the  terre- 
plein  is  more  easily  drained.  In  the  latter  classes  the  para- 
pet has  more  stability,  and  their  construction  is  more  rapid, 
as  a  greater  number  of  workmen  can  be  employed  at  the 
same  time. 

THE    TRACING    OF    BATTEEIES. 

The  ground  on  which  a  battery  is  to  be  constructed, 
should  be  carefully  examined,  and  if  possible  the  direction 
of  the  parapet  traced  before  dark.  Whenever  it  is  practi- 
cable, the  parapets  of  direct  batteries  should  be  parallel, 
and  of  enfilade  batteries  perpendicular,  to  the  faces  they 
are  to  attack. 


MANUAL  FOR  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 

Before  proceeding  to  trace  the  battery  on  the  ground,  an 
accurate  drawing  must  be  made,  showing  the  direction  of 
the  parapet,  epaulement  and  communications,  also  the  posi- 
tion of  the  traverses  and  magazine. 

The  tracing  on  the  ground  must  be  made  after  dark. 

"We  will  suppose  that  an  elevated  six-gun  battery  is  to  be 
constructed,  with  traverses  between  the  guns. 


!J*J .?    .  ?    * 


s 

*    * 


t> 
* 


2*- 


+      FIG.  4. 

Let  a  b  represent  the  foot  of  the  interior  slope  of  the 
parapet,  a  c  that  of  the  epaulement.  Lay  off  a,  1  =  9',  1, 
2=18'.  1  and  2  will  give  the  positions  of  the  first  and  second 
errfbrasures.  The  next  interval  is  24'  as  a  traverse  which 
will  occupy  six  feet,  will  come  between  the  second  and  third 
gun.  The  other  intervals  are  laid  off  in  a  similar  manner, 
15'  being  allowed  for  the  extreme  merlon  on  the  side  where 
there  is  no  epaulement.  The  object  of  the  epaulement  being 
to  screen  the  interior  of  the  battery  from  oblique  fire,  the 
length  and  direction  of  the  line  a  c  will  be  dependent  on 
the  direction  of  this  fire.  The  angle  cab  having  been 
previously  determined,  may  be  laid  off  either  with  a  field 
level,  or  by  constructing  the  triangle  a  e  d. 

By  inspecting  figure  1,  the  thickness  of  the  parapet  at 
its  base  will  be  found  28'  and  that  of  the  epaulement  20  feet. 
These  distances  must  be  laid  off  on  the  perpendiculars,  b  m, 
a  nt  and  a  0,  cp.  Stout  pickets  are  driven  at  c,  a,  b,  wi,  ?it  s9 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  BATTERIES.  245 

s,  0,  and  />,  and  tracing-tape  or  white  cord  stretched  around 
them,  thus  enclosing  the  ground  to  be  covered  by  the  para- 
pet. € 

The  ditch  is  marked  out  in  a  similar  manner,  giving  it  a 
width  of -24'  in  front  of  the  parapet  and  20'  for  the  epaule- 
ments,  and  leaving  a  space  of  three  or  four  feet  from  the 
foot  of  the  exterior  slope  for  the  berme. 

DISTRIBUTION   OF    THE    WORKING    PARTY. 

The  working  party,  provided  with  tools  and  reveting  ma- 
terial, are  conducted  to  the  site  of  the  proposed  battery, 
as  soon  as  it  is  dark  enough  to  avoid  being  seen  by  the  be- 
sieged. 

The  line  representing  the  foot  of  the  exterior  slope  is 
divided  into  intervals  of  six  feet ;  for  each  interval  two  ex- 
cavators are  placed  in  the  ditch,  one  shoveller  on  the  berme, 
one  on  the  parapet,  to  level  and  ram  the  earth  thrown  in, 
and  one  sapper  to  level  the  terreplein  and  prepare  the 
ground  fbr  receiving  the  platform. 

When  earth  has  been  thrown  into  the  parapet  to  the 
depth  of  two  feet,  the  revetment  of  the  interior  slope  is 
commenced ;  for  this  purpose  five  sappers  for  each  one-gun 
portion  of  the  battery  are  required. 


FIG.  5.— FIRST  NIGHT'S  WORK. 

During  the  first  night  the  terreplein  should  be  pre;  arecl, 
the  parapet  and  revetment  carried  to  the  height  of  the  sole 
of  the  embrasures,  the  traverses  commenced,  and  the  com- 
munications finished;  the  latter  are  constructed  by  the  flying 


FIG.  6.— WORK  AT  END  OF  FIRST  DAY. 


24:6  MANUAL    FOR  ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

sap.  As  the  excavation  of  the  ditch  is  the  most  fatiguing 
part  of  the  work,  the  men  thus  engaged  change  places  with 
thosqjpn  the  benne  and  parapet  every  two  hours. 

The  working  party  for  the  day  arrive,  just  before  dawn, 
bringing  with  them  gabions,  fascines,  <fcc.  The  working 
party  for  the  ditch  is  the  same  as  before,  the  excavation 
being  deep  enough  to  cover  them  from  the  fire  of  the  place. 

They  continue  the  excavation,  throwing  the  earth  on  the 
berme,  until  no  more  can  be  piled  there,  then  dig  back  toward 
the  counterscarp,  throwing  the  earth  against  the  scarp  ready 
to  be  passed  up  as  soon  as  the  berme  is  cleared  on  the  follow- 
ing night.  The  shovellers  and  rammers  will  be  prevented 
from  working  on  the  parapet  by  the  fire  of  the  besieged. 
They  will  be  employed  in  finishing  the  communications,  and 
the  excavations  for  the  magazine  commenced  on  the  previous 
night,  and  bringing  up  the  timber  for  the  platforms.  The 
sappers  will  continue  the  revetment  if  the  fire  is  not  too 
heavy,  and  work  at  the  magazine. 

The  working  party  for  the  second  night  arrive  at  dusk ; 
they  are  distributed  as  on  the  first  night — the  shovellers 
thro  whig  in  the  earth  accumulated  during  the  day  on  the 
berme.  The  sappers  finish  the  revetment,  the  platforms  are 
laid,  if  they  have  not  been  during  the  day,  and  the  battery 
armed. 

CONSTRUCTION. 

The  excavation  is  commenced  3'  from  the  line  marking 
the  crest  of  the  scarp,  and  is  carried  down  to  the  depth  of 
3',  then  toward  the  counterscarp;  as  the  ditch  is  intended 
merely  to  furnish  earth  for  the  scarp,  and  not  as  a  defensive 
work,  its  form  is  immaterial.  That  indicated  in  fig.  5  is 
generally  found  most  convenient,  the  step  furnishing  a  plat- 
form  on  which  the  earth  from  the  outer  part  of  the  ditch 
is  thrown,  and  from  thence  into  the  parapet  by  a  relay  of 
shovellers.  The  steps  are  removed  when  the  parapet  is 
nearly  finished. 


CONSTRUCTION    OF   BATTERIES. 


247 


REVETMENT  WITH   FASCINES. 


The  line  of  the  foot  of  the  interior  slope  is  levelled  and  a 
trench  five  inches  deep  is  excavated  to  receive  the  first 
course  of  fascines  for  the  revetment  of  the  parapet.    (The 
epaulement  is  not  reveted.)     The  fascines  are  then  laid, 
n  aligned,  and    fastened    down 

with  three  pickets,  one  driven 
through  the  middle  and  one 
18"  from  each  end  of  every 
fascine.  The  earth  of  the  para- 
pet is  levelled  up  to  the  top  of 
this  course  and  rammed.  The 
second  course  is  laid,  breaking 
joints  with  the  first  and  pick- 
eted,  the  stakes  passing  through 
both  courses.  The  other  courses  are  laid  in  the  same  way, 
the  earth  always  being  brought  up  to  the  level  of  the  top 
of  each  course  before  another  is  laid.  In  order  to  give  uni- 
formity to  the  slope  of  the  revetment,  it  will  be  convenient 
to  drive  guide-stakes  having  the  proper  inclination  in  front 
of  the  first  course  (as  soon  as  they  are  laid).  The  withes  of 
the  fascines  should  have  their  knots  toward  the  parapet. 

The  fifth  course  brings  the  revetment  to  the  height  of  the 
Bole  of  the  embrasure ;  these  fascines  must  be  anchored. 
This  is  effected  by  making  one  end  of  a  piece  of  wire,  rope, 
or  withe  fast  to  the  fascine,  and  with  the  other  taking  two 
or  three  turns  around  a  stake  driven  vertically  into  the  para- 


Fia.  8. 


24:8 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER  TROOPS. 


pet,  and  three  feet  from  the  revetment ;  each  fascine  of  this 
course  should  have  at  least  two  anchoring  pickets. 

EMBRASURES   REVETED   WITH   FASCINES. 


FIG.  10. 

The  sole  of  the  embrasure  is  an  inclined  plane,  falling 
about  one  foot  toward  the  exterior.  To  trace  the  sole,  mark 
the  directrix  by  a  cord,  u  v  (fig.  9),  lay  off  u  o,  and  u  s  =  1 ', 
v  t  =  vp  =  6',  op  s  £,  is  the  sole.  Along  the  lines  o  t  and  s p 
excavate  a  trench  about  5"  deep  to  receive  the  first  course  of 
fascines  for  the  revetment  of  the  cheeks  ;  three  pickets  are 
driven  through  each  of  these  fascines.  The  three  remaining 
courses,  which  are  required  to  finish  this  revetment,  are  laid 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   BATTERIES. 


249 


so  that  the  cheeks  shall  be  vertical  at  the  throat,  and  have 
a  slope  of  one-third  on  the  exterior.  Each  fascine  should 
be  anchored  twice,  the  anchoring  pickets  being  driven  3' 
within  the  merlon  ;  the  fascines  forming  the  interior  slope 
overlap  those  of  the  embrasures.  The  revetment  is  usually 
terminated  18"  below  the  superior  slope,  and  is  connected 
with  it  by  a  slope  of  45°.  The  fascines  for  the  embrasures 
should  be  bound  with  wire  instead  of  withes,  and  the  ends 
toward  the  throat  strengthened  by  additional  bands. 


These 


FIG. 


SPLINTER-PROOF   TRAVERSES. 

are  rectangular,  they  are  16'  x  6'  at  the  base,  and 

14'  x  4'  at  top,  a 
passage  2'  wide  is 
left  next  to  the  para- 
pet. The  first  course 
of  fascines  is  half 
imbedded  in  the 
ground  and  secured 

Fro' ai<  by  pickets,  the  earth 

filled  in  and  rammed.  The  other  courses 
are  laid  in  a  similar  manner.  In  every 
second  or  third  course  the  opposite  fascines 
of  the  long  sides  are  tied  together  with  wire 
or  rope,  those  of  the  short  sides  are  an- 
chored. * 

The  method  of  arranging  the  courses  is 
shown  in  the  figure. 

REVETMENT  WITH    GABIONS. 


11* 


Fio.  13. 


250  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

The  interior  slope  is  commenced  by  imbedding  a  course 

of  fascines  and  securing  it 
by  pickets,  as  in  the  pre- 
vious case.  The  first 
course  of  gabions  is  placed 
with  the  points  of  the 
stakes  up,  and  the  inner 
edge  of  the  bases  resting 
on  the  fascines  just  laid, 
14t  ,  the  ground  having  been 

previously  prepared  so  as  to  give  the  gabions  the  proper 
slope.  Earth  is  thrown  into  and  in  front  of  the  gabions, 
and  well  rammed.  When  nearly  full  every  second  gabion 
should  be  anchored  to  a  stake,  driven  3'  in  front  of  it  in  the 
parapet. 

When  the  gabions  are  full,  a  second  course  of  fascines  (b) 
is  laid  on  their  inner  edges,  and  driven  down  with  a  maul 
until  it  is  firmly  engaged  on  the  points  of  the  stakes. 
«  The  second  course  of  gabions  is  placed  so  that  the  axis  of 
each  gabion  coincides  with  that  of  one  of  the  lower  course. 
The  points  of  the  stakes  are  down,  and  driven  into  the  fas- 
cines of  the  course  (b).  The  gabions  are  anchored  as  in  the 
first  course. 

The  throats  of  the  embrasures  are  formed  by  omitting  a 
gabion  and  sawing  out  the  corresponding  portion  of  the  up- 
per course  of  fascines. 

TK  A  VERSES. 

A  course  of  fascines  is  em- 
ployed to  form  the  base  of 
the  revetment,  as  in  the  pre- 
vious case. 

Flo>  15-  The  arrangement  of  the  ; 

first  course  of  gabions  is  shown  in  the  figure.     When  nearly  / 
filled,  the  opposite  rows  should  be  tied  together  and  across 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  BATTERIES. 


251 


FHJ.  17. 

the  corners,  with  wire  or  rope ;  when  filled  they  are  crowned 
with  fascines.  In  the  second  course  there  is  one  less  gabion 
on  each  side  than  in  the  first.  The  two  rows  meet  at 
top,  where  they  are  tied  together.  The  earth  is  rounded 
over  the  top  to  the  depth  of  IS". 

EMBBASUEES   REVETBD   WITH   GABIONS. 


Fio.  19. 


f252  MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 

The  sole  is  prepared  and  one  course  of  fascines  laid,  as  in 
the  fascine  embrasure. 

The  revetment  of  each  cheek  is  formed  as  follows :  com- 
mencing at  the  throat,  six  gabions  are  placed  in  a  line,  and 
resting  on  the  fascine  abave  mentioned.  The  first  gabion 
is  vertical,  the  last  has  an  inclination  given  it  of  £,  from 
the  directrix.  In  these  positions  they  are  filled  and  secured, 
and  the  intermediate  gabions  aligned  on  them  at  top  and 
bottom. 

All  the  gabions  are  securely  anchored  to  pickets  driven 
3'  within  the  merlon. 

The  strongest  gabions  should  be  selected  for  this  part  of 
the  revetment.  Those  of  hoop  iron,  make  the  most  substan- 
tial embrasure.  Although  it  is  essential  that  the  embrasure 
gabion  should  be  well  anchored3  they  should  never  be 
tied  to  each  other.  The  independence  of  the  parts  in  this 
revetment,  renders  the  gabion  superior  to  any  other  mate- 
rial, for  the  upper  portion  of  the  battery ;  as  one  portion 
may  be  torn  away  by  a  shot  without  endangering  the  adja- 
cent parts. 

The  merlon  is  carried  about  18"  higher  than  the  revet- 
ment, and  its  superior  slope  united  to  it  by  a  slope  of  45°. 

SAND-BAG   BATTERIES. 

When  the  presence 
of  rock,  water,  or 
other  obstacle  ren- 
ders excavation  on 
the  site  of  the  battery 

impossible,  the  work  is  executed  by  means  of  earth  brought 

forward  in  sand-bags,  some  of  which  are  built  into,  and 

others  emptied  on  the  parapet. 

The  bags  are  filled  before  dark  and  are  brought  as  near 

the  proposed  battery  as  possible  without  attracting  the  ob- 

eervation  of  the  besieged. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   BATTERIES.  253 

The  battery  is  traced  after  dark,  the%urface  to  be  covered 
by  the  parapet  is  marked  by  tracing-tape, 

The  working  party  is  divided  as  follows : 

For  each  one-gun  portion — twenty-five  men  to  fill  and 
tie,  and  forty  to  carry  bags  ;  eight  sappers  to  lay  the  bags, 
and  two  to  level  and  ram  the  earth. 

The  carriers  pass  from  the  depot  to  the  battery  in  single 
file,  each  carrying  a  filled  bag  on  his  shoulder.  These  are 
received  by  the  sappers,  who  immediately  commence  form- 
ing a  mask  or  wall  of  bags  (a  b)  extending  the  whole  length 
of  the  battery.  The  lower  part  of  the  mask  is  40"  thick, 
the  remainder  20".  The  bags  are  laid  alternately,  headers 
and  stretchers.  The  usual  height  is  G'  6",  but  this  may  be 
increased,  if  it  does  not  afford  sufficient  protection.  It  may 
also  be  found  necessary  to  carry  the  mask  round  into  the 
epauleinent. 

The  revetment  of  the  interior  slope,  which  is  carried  on  at 
the  same  time,  is  formed  of  sand-bags  laid  in  alternate 
courses  of  headers  and  stretchers.  The  tie  of  the  bag  is 
kept  in  the  parapet.  From  time  to  time  bags  should  be  an- 
chored by  passing  a  rope  around  them  and  making  it  fast  to 
a  stake  driven  within  the  parapet. 

Whilst  the 'revetment  is  going  on,  a  second  party  of  car- 
riers bring  up  untied  bags  of  sand,  which  they  empty  be- 
tween the  mask  and  revetment  to  form  the  parapet  and 
outside  the  mask  to  form  the  exterior  slope. 

The  embrasures  should  be  reveted  with  gabions  or  fascines, 
if  possible.  When  sand-bags  are  employed  they  must  be 
covered  with  raw  hides,  or  hurdles,  otherwise  they  are  soon 
destroyed  by  the  blast  of  the  piece. 

About  twelve  hundred  sand-bags  are  required  per  gun, 
for  the  revetment  and  mask,  and  four  thousand  bags  of  sand 
to  form  the  parapet. 

This  battery  may  be  constructed  in  a  single  night. 

In  consequence  of  the  celerity  and  safety  with  which  the 


254- 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


work  is  executed,  •lis  method  may  often  be  employed 
with  advantage,  even  when  the  soil  will  permit  the  use  of 
the  ordinary  form. 

HALF-SUNKEN   BATTERIES. 

Tina  term  is  applied  to  those  batteries  in 
which  the  earth  to  form  the  parapet  is  derived 
partly  from  a  ditch  in  front,  and  partly  from  the 
excavation  of  the  terreplein. 

To  trace  the  battery,  first  mark  out  the  base 
of  the  parapet  and  epaulemcnt.  Then  a  line  20' 
in  rear  of  and  parallel  to  the  parapet,  which 
will  give  the  position  of  the  foot  of  the  reverse 
elope  of  the  terreplein. 

The  construction  is  as  follows :  taking  the 
case  where  the  terreplein  is  to  be  lowered  2'. 

For  each  one-gun  portion,  six  excavators  are 
placed  in  the  ditch,  and  six  sappers  commence 
the  interior  revetment  by  half  imbedding  a 
fascine  at  the  foot  of  the  interior  slope.  Paral- 
lel to  this  they  commence  excavating  a  trench 
2'  deep  and  3'  wide,  leaving  a  berme  of  18"  on 
the  side  next  the  parapet.  At,  the  same  time, 
six  men  are  employed  excavating  along  the  rear 
line  of  the  terreplein,  throwing  the  earth  toward 
the  revetters,  who  pass  it  into  the  parapet,  where 
it  is  levelled  and  rammed  by  two  sappers,  assisted 
by  two  workmen. 

The  terrepleiu  has  an  inclination  to  the  rear, 
where  it  is  finished  with  a  trench  to  carry  off 
the  rain-water.     If  there  is  no  low  ground  in 
the  vicinity  to  which  this  trench  can  be  con- 
b10' 2 '      ducted,  it  should  terminate  in  a  cesspool. 
The  revetment  of  the  interior  slope  is  carried  up  to  the 
level  of  the  sole  of  the  embrasure  with  fascines.     It  may  be 
finished  either  with  fascines  or  gabions. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   BATTERIES. 


255 


The  method  above  described  is  only  applicable  when  the 
soil  is  sufficiently  firm  to  stand  without  revetment  in  the 
excavated  portion  of  the  interior  slope.  When  this  is  not 
the  case,  a  trench  is  dug  at  the  foot  of  the  interior  slope, 
and  to  the  full  depth  of  the  terreplein.  At  the  bottom  of 
this  trench  the  revetment  is  commenced  and  carried  up,  as 
in  the  elevated  battery. 

Under  ordinary  circumstances,  this  battery  may  be  con- 
structed in  eleven  hours. 


PIG.  22. 


FULL-SUNKEN   BATTERIES. 

In  full-sunken  batteries  the  terreplein  is  low- 
ered 3'.  Sufficient  earth  is  thus  furnished  for 
the  parapet,  and  no  ditch  is  required. 

There  are  two  methods  employed  in  their 
construction:  The  first  is  the  same  as  for  half- 
sunken  batteries,  the  whole  of  the  interior  slope 
usually  being  reveted,  and  the  ditch  omitted. 

The  second  consists  in  first  constructing  a 
trench  by  the  flying  sap,  10'  in  advance  and 
parallel  to  the  interior  crest  of  the  proposed 
battery.  The  terreplein  is  traced  20'  wide, 
taking  the  foot  of  the  interior  slope  10'  from 
the  gabionade  (c). 

The  working  party  is  distributed  along  the 
trench,  and  commences  excavating  from  the  re- 
verse (a  £>),  throwing  the  earth  against  e  d. 
When  the  trench  has  been  carried  back  3'  or 
4',  the  revetment  (i  k)  is  commenced.  This  is 
executed  as  in  the  elevated  battery.  The  em- 
brasures are  laid  out,  and  the  revetment  of  the 
cheeks  carried  as  far  as  the  gabionade  (c),  which 
is  allowed  to  remain  until  the  parapet  has  at- 
tained its  full  height,  when  it  is  overturned,  and 
the  embrasure  finished.  These  batteries  may 


256 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


be  constructed  in  a  parallel,  instead  of  making  a  trench 
especially  for  the  purpose. 

In  this  case,  a  trench  must  be  cut  around,  and  thirty  yards 
in  rear  of,  the  battery,  to  replace  the  portion  of  the  parallel 
thus  occupied. 

There  is  still  another  method  of  changing  a  trench  into  a 
sunken  battery,  which  will  be  described  under  the  head  of 
"  Breaching  Batteries." 

MORTAR   BATTERIES. 

As  mortars  are  fired  at  an  angle  of  elevation  of  at  least 
30°,  greater  latitude  is  allowed  in  the  selection  of  the  posi- 
tion of  their  batteries,  than  for  those  of  guns  and  howitzers. 
The  least  exposed  position  is  on  the  capitals  of  the  works 
attacked.  Frequently  the  labor  in  their  construction  may 
be  very  much  abridged,  by  taking  advantage  of  the  irregu- 
larities of  the  ground.  Thus  the  greater  part  of  the  parapet 
may  often  be  formed  by  a  natural  ridge. 

Under  ordinary  circumstances  they  are  placed  in  rear  of 
the  second  parallel. 

Unless  the  nature  of  the  soil  is  unfavorable,  these  batteries 
are  always  sunken.  They  are  without  embrasures,  and  un- 
less the  soil  is  very  light,  are  not  reveted. 

•TO  CONSTRUCT  A  BATTERY   FOR  FOUR  MORTARS. 


FIG.  28. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   BATTERIES.  257 


FIG.  24r— SECTION  ON  p  q. 

The  intervals  between  the  axes  of  the  mortars  should  be 
15'.  Six  feet  is  added  to  the  interval  in  which  the  traverse 
occurs.  A  space  of  10'  is  allowed  between  the  axes  of  the 
extreme  mortars  and  the  epaulement.  The  width  of  the 
terreplein  is  20'  at  bottom ;  its  depth,  iu  front,  3'  6",  and 
in  rear,  4'. 

TRACE. 

Mark  on  the  ground  the  line  representing  the  foot  of  the 
interior  slope,  and  lay  off  on  this  line  71'  (the  sum  of  the 
intervals).  From  each  extremity  lay  off  the  epaulements ; 
their  direction  will  depend  on  that  of  the  enemy's  fire.  Par- 
allel to  the  first  line,  and  20'  from  it,  lay  off  the  foot  of  the 
reverse  slope.  Then  mark,  with  tracing-tape,  the  lines,  A,  e, 
g,  ft  30';  outside  the  lines  first  laid  out.  These  lines  will  be 
the  intersection  of  the  interior  slopes  o*f  the  parapet  and 
epaulements  with  the  natural  surface  of  the  ground. 

The  excavation  is  commenced  on  the  line  (a  £),  by  sinking 
a  trench  40"  deep  and  4'  wide.'  The  earth  is  thrown  into 
the  parapet,  and  passed  forward  by  a  relay  of  shovellers,  to 
form  the  exterior  slope.  When  the  trench  is  finished,  the 
excavation  is  carried  back  toward  the  reverse. 

As  soon  as  the  parapet  has  attained  its  full  height  on  the 
exterior,  the  sappers  commence  building  j,he  interior  slope 
(e,  m),  which  will  be  one  of  f  in  ordinary  soil.  The  earth 
required  for  this  purpose  is  thrown  on  the  bcnric.  When 
the  excavation  of  the  terreplein  has  been  carried  back  to 
the  line  (r  q),  the  step  (a  m  p)  is  cut  away,  and  the  earth 
thrown  on  the  parapet.  The  earth  obtained  from  the«ex- 
cavution  of  the  terreplein  is  about  sufficient  for  the  con- 


258  MANUAL    FOR    ENGINEER    TROOPS. 

struction  of  the  parapet.  That  for  the  epaulements  will  be 
furnished  by  the  ditches  (x  y)  on  the  exterior. 

The  splinter-proof  traverse  is  of  the  usual  form  and  con- 
struction. 

When  the  soil  is  of  such  a  character  as  to  require  the  in- 
terior slope  to  be  sustained,  the  usual  revetments  of  gabions, 
fascines,  or  sand-bags,  may  be  employed.  The  working 
party  is  distributed  as  follows : 

For  each  one-mortar  portion,  4  picks,  4  shovels,  2  rammers. 

For  each  epaulement,  9  picks,  7  shovels,  4  rammers. 

For  each  traverse,  two  picks,  two  shovels,  two  revetters. 

Or,  for  the  four-mortar  battery,  ninety  men,  four  being 
added  for  the  increased  interval  opposite  the  traverse. 


Fia.  25. 

Portions  of  a  trench  or  parallel  are  frequently  converted 
into  mortar  batteries.  To  effect  this  it  is  only  necessary  to 
increase  the  width  of  the  trench  to  20'.  The  earth  thus  fur- 
nished is  thrown  in  front  of  the  parapet,  thus  giving  it  the 
requisite  thickness. 

BREACHING  AND  COUNTER  BATTERIES. 

The  crowning  of  the  covered  way  is  a  trench  constructed 
by  the  full  sap,  the  crest  of  the  parapet  being  parallel  to 
and  14'  from  that  of  the  covered  way.  In  this  trench,  the 
breaching  and  counter  batteries  are  constructed. 

The  traverses  employed  for  the  defilement  of  the  trench, 
are  usually  far  enough  apart  to  allow  the  introduction  of  two 
pieces  between  them.  The  intervals  between  the  pieces 
may  be  reduced  to  14'.  The  line  of  fire  in  the  broaching 
battery  should  be  as  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  scarp  to  be 
Breached  as  possible;  if  the  angle  is  less  than  30°  the  shot 
will  ricochet  and  the  breach  cannot  be 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  BATTERIES. 


259 


I./*' 


Fio.  20. 

The  profile  of  the  scarp  to  be  breached,  and  the  ditch  and 
covered  way  in  front  should  be  ascertained.  This  will  de- 
termine the  position  of  the  directrices, -and  inclinations  of 
the  soles  of  the  embrasures. 

The  parapets  of  breaching  batteries  are  14'  thick  and  8' 
high.  Those  of  counter  batteries,  have  the  same  height, 
but  should  be  five  or  six  feet  thicker,  as  they  are  more  ex- 
posed to  the  enemy's  fire.  In  each  the  terreplein  is  27' 
wide. 

CONSTRUCTION   OP   BREACHING   BATTERIES. 

During  the  day  all  the  necessary  material  is  collected,  the 
terreplein  excavated  and  the  platforms  laid. 

If  the  trench  has  been  well  constructed,  and  the  soil  is 
good,  the  revetment  of  the  trench  may  be  retained  for  that 
of  the  battery,  otherwise  a  new  revetment  is  formed,  simi- 
lar to  those  described  under  the  head  of  full-sunken  batteries, 


MANUAL   FOR  ENGINEER  TROOPS. 


with  this  exception,  that  the  upper  course  of 
gabions  must  be  crowned  with  three  fascines  to 
bring  the  parapet  to  the  required  height. 

The  line  marking  the  reverse  of  the  terreplein 
is  laid  out  parallel  to  and  27'  from  the  interior 
slope. 

The  directrices  of  the  embrasures  are  deter- 
mined and  four  pickets  driven  to  mark  the  posi- 
tion and  height  of  the  corners  of  the  platforms. 
The  excavation  of  the  terreplein  is  commenced, 
part  of  the  earth  thus  furnished  is  used  in  form- 
ing the  foundation  of  the  platforms,  the  remain- 
der in  increasing  the  height  of  the  adjacent 
traverses.  The  figure  shows  the  necessary  al- 
terations, from  a  trench  to  a  breaching  battery. 
To  construct  the  embrasure,  a  double  row  of 
gabions  filled  with  fascines,  is  formed  along  the 
exterior  crest  of  the  parapet,  as  a  mask,  or  pro- 
tection against  musketry. 

A  gabion  of  the  revetment  of  the  interior 
slope  is  removed,  to  form  the  throat ;  into  this 
opening  a  sapper  enters,  and  commences  the  ex- 
cavation of  the  embrasure,  throwing  the  earth 
on  the  merlons,  until  he  has  formed  a  seat  for 
the  second  pair  of  gabions  of  the  cheek,  which 
he  places,  and  is  then  relieved  by  two  sappers, 
who  continue  the  excavation,  throwing  the  earth  into  the 
gabions  just  placed,  until  they  are  full,  then  on  the  merlons ; 
they  each  place  a  gabion,  forming  the  third  pair  in  the  em- 
brasure. In  the  'same  way  a  third  relief  places  the  fourth 
pair,  &c.,  until  six  pairs  are  placed.  During  this  operation, 
the  direction  of  the  cheek  and  inclination  of  the  sole,  are 
indicated  to  the  workmen  by  a  straight-edge  resting  on  the 
heads  of  two  pickets,  one  in  the  throat  of  the  embrasure  the 
other  in  the  terreplein. 


FIG.  27. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   BATTERIES.  261 

After  the  embrasure  is  finished,  the  mask  is  either  removed 
by  drawing  the  gabions  into  the  battery,  with  sap-hooks,  or 
is  left  to  be  blown  out  by  the  first  discharge  of  the  piece. 


FIG.  28.— SECTION  ON  at  a/. 


The  parapet  of  the  counter-ba-ttery  being  five  or  six  feet 
thicker  than  that  of  the  trench,  which  increase  is  gained  on 
the  inside,  it  will  always  be  necessary  to  renew  the  interior 
revetment.  In  other  respects  the  construction  does  not  dif- 
fer from  that  of  breaching  batteries. 

MAGAZINES 

Are  usually  built  fifteen  yards  in  rear  of  the  parapet  of  the 
battery  or  communication,  sometimes  at  the  end  of  the 
batteiy  parapet  or  in  that  of  the  communication. 

The  figure  represents  a  rectangular  magazine  in  rear  of 
the  parapet.  An  excavation  4'  deep  receives  the  five  mining 
frames,  each  composed  of  a  cap-sill  6'  X  8"  X  6",  two  stanchions 
4'  6"X6"X6",  and  one  ground-sill  5'  6"X6"X3".  The  in- 
tervals between  the  frames  are  2'  6".  The  ground-sills  are 
brought  to  the  same  level,  and  surrounded  with  sheeting  one 
inch  thick,  and  covered  with  timber  or  plank  at  least  6"  thick. 
The  frames  for  the  communication  may  be  of  somewhat 
smaller  scantling,  that  of  six  inches  square  will  answer  for 
the  cap-sills.  These  frames  are  2'  6"  wide  in  the  clear,  and 
of  the  same  height  as  those  in  the  magazine.  The  sheeting 
is  also  the  same. 

The  roof  may  be  still  further  strengthened  by  layers  of 
timber  or  fascines.  The  whole  must  be  covered  with  earth 
to  the  depth  of  7'. 

As  a  precaution  against  moisture,  a  mound  of  earth  is 
raised  over  the  magazine,  in  the  form  of  a  roof,  and  about  2' 


262 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


high  in  the  middle,  over  which  a  tarpaulin  is  laid  and  the  re- 
-2j*  mainder  of  the  earth  thrown 
on. 

The  earth  for  this  covering 
is  partly  furnished  by  the  exr 
cavation  for  the  magazine,  and 
the  remainder  from  a  trench 
cut  around  it,  leaving  a  suffi- 
cient berme  to  prevent  the  em- 
bankment caving  in. 
I 


Fio.  29. 

When  the  soil  is  favorable  the  magazine  may  with  advan- 
tage be  sunk  two  or  three  feet  lower. 

The  magazine  is  connected  with  the  battery,  by  a  trench 
4'  wide,  and  3'  6"  deep,  whose  direction  is  such  as  to  avoid 
being  enfiladed. 

The  entrance  to  the  covered  passage  should  be  turned 
from  the  enemy.  The  passage  having  a  return  or  change  of 
direction,  so  that  there  may  be  no  danger  of  fragments  of 
shell  finding  their  way  into  the  magazine. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   BATTEKIES. 


203 


264 


MANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


FIG.  82. 


When  suitable  timber  cannot  be  obtained  for  the  above 
construction,  those  shown  in  the  following  figure  may  be 
used,  in  which  the  interior  revetment  is  principally  of  fas- 
cines and  gabions. 


CONSTRUCTION    OF    BATTERIES. 


265 


FIG.  84. 


REMARKS. 

The  dimensions  given  for  the  preceding  constructions 
are  not  invariable. 

In  ordinary  soil,  the  thickness  of  parapet  and  covering  of 
the  magazine,  are  a  sufficient  protection  against  the  artillery 
usually  employed  in  the  defence  of  a  work.  In  the  case 
however,  of  a  light  soil,  or  when  the  enemy  is  provided 
with  very  heavy  ordnance,  as  in  the  siege  of  Sebastopol,  this 
thickness  may  frequently  require  an  addition  of  six  or  eight 
feet. 

The  throats  of  the  embrasures  must  also  correspond  with 
the  pieces  which  are  to  be  fired  through  them.  For  how- 
itzers the  width  should  be  2'  6",  and  when  pieces  are  intend- 
ed for  ricochet  firing  only,  an  embrasure  of  peculiar  form 
may  be  employed,  the  sole  having  a  reverse  slope,  and  but 
two  gabions  being  used  in  the  revetment  of  each  cheek. 

The  subject  of  siege  platforms  is  fully  treated  in  a  work 
on  heavy  artillery,  published  by  the  war  department,  and  is 
therefore  omitted  here. 
12 


INDEX. 


PAGK. 

Advance-guard  bridge  equipage 31 

Anchoring  paniers 40 

Approaches,  execution  of  the,  connected  with  the  first  parallel 118 

executing  the,  connected  with  the  second  parallel  and 

commenced  by  the  flying  sap 125 

"  modifications  in  the  construction  of 130 

"  on  irregular  ground 132 

"  reliefs  of  workmen  for,  in  easy  soil 128 

"          tables  of  comparative  excavation  in 127 

Arming  working  parties  in  a  siege. . . ; 106, 108,  109 

Arrangements  for  military  working  parties  in  a  siege 135 

Attack  of  a  system  of  countermines 234 

Balk  carriers 20 

Basket-work  described .• 68 

Batteries,  breaching  and  counter 258 

"         construction  of , 241 

"         distribution  of  the  working  parties  in  the  construction  of . .  245 

"         fullsunken 255 

"         half  sunken 254 

"         mortar 256 

"         remarks  on  the  construction  of 265 

"         sand-bag 252 

"         tracing  of 243 

Blindage | 197 

Blinded  descent 193 

Boats 10 

"    of  commerce,  bridges  constructed  of 38 

Branches 207,  221 

"        dimensions  of 208 

Breaching  batteries 268 

Bridge,  construction  of  trestle  and  ponton  by  successive  pontons  over 

watercourse 22 


268  INDEX. 


PAC1 


Bridge,  to  construct  a,  over  a  watercourse 23 

"      construction  of,  by  parts 28 

"               "             "    by  rafts 29 

"      construction  of  a,  by  successive  pontons  when  the  balks  are 

not  lashed 32 

11      constructed  of  boats  of  commerce 38 

"     by  conversion 29 

"      dismantling  over  a  watercourse 27 

"      dismantling  by  parts 28 

"      dismantling  by  conversion 31 

"     equipage,  modified  French 17 

"      equipage 18 

11      floating 11 

"      flying 12-34 

"      gabion 15 

"      miUtary 14 

"     pile 15 

11     ponton 14 

"      ponton  and  trestle,  construction  of 17 

"      preservation  of 46 

"      Rhine  flying 36 

"     trestle,  to  dismantle 22 

"     to  construct  a,  over  a'watercourse 23 

"     trail -..  12 

"      trestle 14,  45 

Brushwood,  detail  of  men  for  cutting 54 

-  "          preparation  of,  for  military  purposes 51 

"          required  in  a  siege  or  campaign 53 

"          tools  required  for  cutting 53 

Canvas  pontons 32 

Carriers,  balk 20 

I     "        trestle 20 

Casks,  raft  of 44 

Cavalier,  trench 184 

Charging  of  mines 228 

Chess 21 

Construction  of  batteries 241,  246 

"           of  breaching  batteries 259 

of  a  bridge  over  a  watercourse 23 

"             "        "       by  parts 28 

"             "        "  •     by  rafts 29 


INDEX.  269 

PAGB. 

Construction  of  a  bridge  by  successive  pontons  when  the  balks  are 

not  lashed 32 

of  flying  bridges 34 

of  ponton  and  trestle  bridges 17 

"  of  a  raft 41 

of  trestle  bridge  over  dry  ravine 19 

of  trestle  and  ponton  bridge  by  successive  pontons  over 

watercourse 22 

Corrugated  iron  gabions 77 

Counter  batteries 258 

Countermines,  attack  and  defence  of  a  system  of 234 

Covered  w  ly,  descent  into  the 199 

Covering-fascines 65 

Debouche  by  the  simple  or  double  sap  from  the  extremity  of  the  simple 

sap  in  course  of  construction 162 

"         by  the  simple  sap  from  one  or  both  sides  of  the  double  sap  170 

"         by  the  double  or  simple  sap  from  a  sap  not  enlarged 175 

"         by  the  simple  or  double  sap  from  a  trench  of  the  ordinary 

width 180 

"         by  the  double  sap  from  a  trench  of  the  ordinary  width 184 

Defence  of  a  system  of  countermines 234 

Descent  into  the  covered  way 199 

"         "      "    ditch 189 

"       time  for  executing  the 199 

Discharge  of  material. 18 

Dismantling  trestle  bridge » 22 

bridge  over  a  watercourse 27 

"      by  parts 28 

"      constructed  by  rafts * 29 

"      by  conversion 31 

Ditch,  descent  into  the 189 

"      passage  of  the 199 

"    main 200 

Double  sap 157 

"        debouching  by  the 167 

"        debouche  by  the,  from  a  trench 184 

"        to  debouch  by  the,  from  a  sap  not  enlarged 179 

Drag 1 49 

Embrasures 242 

revetted  with  fascines 248 

"  "     gabions 251 


2  TO  INDEX. 

PAGE. 

fepaulement 241 

Equipage,  advance-guard  bridge 31 

Excavating  and  blinding 196 

Fascine-choker 61 

Fascine-pickets 64 

"  time  required  for  making 65 

"  weights  of 65 

Fascine-trestles,  method  of  preparing 56 

Fascines  described 55 

u        detail  of  men  for  making 55 

"        making,  described 58 

"        method  of  choking 61 

"        revetment  with 247 

"        rules  for  making 55 

"        time  required  for  making 64 

"        tools  for  each  squad  of  men,  making 55 

"        weights  of 64 

Firing  mines 230 

First  approaches,  arranging  the  working  party  and  commencing  the,     91 
•'                 method  of  tracing  the,  connected  with  the  first  par- 
allel      90 

"  •  remarks  on  commencing  the 92 

"  rules  for  executing  the 110 

First  parallel,  arranging  the  working  party  and  commencing  the 85 

"  execution  of  the  approaches  connected  with  the 118 

"  first  task  in  executing  a,  by  three  reliefs 113 

"  "         "  "  by  two  reliefs  hi  easy  soil 140 

"  method  of  tracing 83 

"          profile  proper  for  a v 110 

"          reliefs  of  workmen  for  a,  and  its  approaches 95-97 

"          remarks  on  commencing  the 92 

"  rules  for  executing  the 110 

"  second  task  in  executing  a,  by  three  reliefs 113 

"  "        "  "  by  two  reliefs  hi  easy  soil.   141 

tasking  of  military  working  parties  in  the  formation  of  a  111 

"          third  task  in  executing  a,  by  three  reliefs 114 

Flanking  boyaus 129 

Floating  bridges 11 

Flying  bridge 12,  34 

Flying  sap 99 

"         executing  a  second  parallel,  commenced  by  the 121 


INDEX.  271 

PAGE. 

Flying  sap,  rules  for  tracing  and  commencing  approaches  by  the 102 

Fords -. 7 

French  bridge  equipage 17 

Full  sap 147 

"      change  of  direction  of  the 161 

"  to  the  right  or  left 161 

"      execution  of  the 149 

"      time  required  for  executing  the 154 

Full-sunken  batteries 255 

Gabionade,  crowning  the,  with  fascines 163 

Gabion  bridges 15 

Gabions,  corrugated  iron 77 

"        description  and  dimensions  of 67 

"        detail  of  men  for  making 71 

"        embrasures  revetted  with 251 

"        method  of  finishing 73 

"        method  of  making  light 71 

"  "  "         of  very  small  brushwood 75 

iron 76 

"  "         of  thick  brushwood v.     76 

"        mode  of  carrying,  with  tools 106 

"        revetment  with 249 

"        time  required  for  making 78 

"        to  place  new 151 

tools  for  each  squad  of  men,  making. 71 

"        weight  of • 78 

"        wooden  circles,  for  making 75 

Galleries 207 

"        dimensions  of 208 

'    "        driving,  with  mine  frames 214 

"        incUned 217 

"        men  and  tools  required  for  driving 216 

"        ventilation  of 233 

Gallery-frame 214 

Half-double  sap 159 

Half-full  sap 156 

Half-sunken  batteries 254 

Hurdles 80 

"       number  of  men  required  for  making . .     83 

"       time  required  for  making 83 

"       tools  for  making 83 


272  INDEX. 

PAGE. 

Hurdles,  weight  of 83 

Ice , 9 

Inclined  galleries 217 

I     "        soil,  observations  relative  to 155 

Iron  gabions,  method  of  making 76 

Large  timber  required  in  a  siege  or  campaign 51 

Magazines 261 

Marshy  soil,  construction  of  parallels  and  approaches  in 130 

Material,  discharge  of 18 

Men  required  for  driving  a  gallery 216 

"            for  sinking  a  shaft 210 

Military  bridges 14 

Mines,  charging  of 228 

"       firing  of 230 

"       tamping  of 228 

Mining  operations,  tools  required  for 208 

"       practical  operations  in 207 

"      with  cases 223 

Mortar  batteries 256 

Parallels,  commencing  the  tracing  of,  by  compass 93 

"        execution  of 117 

"        modifications  hi  the  construction  of. 130 

"        on  irregular  ground 132 

"         reliefs  of  workmen  for,  in  easy  soil 128 

"         rules  for  tracing  and  commencing  the  first,  and  the  ap- 
proaches  0 83 

"         rules  for  tracing  and  commencing  the    second,  and  ap- 
proaches, by  the  flying-sap 98 

"         tables  of  comparative  excavation  in 125 

"         tracing  of,  in  a  fog 93 

Parapet 241 

Passage  of  rivers 7 

"       "    by  fords t 

"       "       "    byice 9 

"       "       "    onboats 10 

"        "       "     on  rafts - 10 

Pile  bridges 15 

Ponton  bridges 14 

"          "      construction  of 17 

Preservation  of  bridges 46 

Bafts..  10 


INDEX.  273 

PAGK. 

Rafts,  construction  of 41 

"  "  "  a  bridge  by 29 

"    dismantling  bridge  constructed  by 29 

"    of  casks 44 

"    of  timber 40 

Regulations  for  military  working  parties  in  a  siege 135 

Reliefs,  number  of  troops  necessary  to  furnish  proper,  in  a  siege 142 

"       of  workmen  for  the  first  parallel  and  its  approaches 95-97 

"     "  second  parallel  and  its  approaches 103 

Revetment  with  fascines 247 

"     gabions 249 

Rhine  flying  bridges 36 

Rivers,  passage  of 7 

Rocky  soil,  construction  of  parallels  and  approaches  in 130 

Rules  for  executing  the  first  parallel  and  approaches 110 

"  second  parallel  and  approaches 121 

"      "    making  fascines 55 

<;      "        "        gabions  and  hurdles 67 

".      "    tracing  and  commencing  the  first  parallel  and  approaches. . .     83 
"      "        "        "  "    second  parallel  and  approaches 

by  the  flying  sap 98 

Sand-bag  batteries 252 

Sand-bags,  saps  constructed  with » 203 

Saps  constructed  with  sand-bags 203 

Sap-faggots ^ 66 

Sap-fork 149 

"    hook •. 148 

Sap-rollers 78 

"        time  for  making 79 

"        weight  of , 79 

Sappers,  to  change  the  posts  of  the 154 

Second  parallel,  arranging  the  working  party  and  commencing  the,  by 

the  flying  sap 99 

"        crowding  the  workmen  in  commmencing  a 105 

"        reliefs  of  workmen  for  the 103 

"  "  "      "          "         in  executing  a 122 

"        remarks  on  commencing  the, 105 

"        rules  for  executing  the,  and  approaches, 121 

"  "        rules  for  executing  a,  commenced  by  the  flying  sap,.  .121 

•'  *        tracing  of,. 98 

Shafts 207 

12* 


274  INDEX. 

PAGK. 

Shaft,  men  and  tools  required  for  sinking  a, 210 

"    sinking  a,  in  bad  soil 219 

Side-rails 21 

Siege,  arming  working  parties  in  a 106,  108,  109 

"      arrangements  and  regulations  proper  for  military  working  par- 
ties in  a 135 

"      practical  operations  of  a 49 

Simple  sap 147 

"        "  debouching  by  the 162 

"       "  debouche  by  the,  from  a  trench 180 

"        "  to  debouch  by  the,  from  a  sap  not  enlarged 175 

"      saps,  to  unite  two,  into  one  double  sap 172 

Small  timber  required  in  a  siege  or  campaign -, 53 

Splinter-proof  traverses 242,  249 

Stockades 47 

Tamping  mines 228 

Terreplein 242 

Timber,  large,  required  in  a  siege  or  campaign 51 

"      preparation  of,  for  military  purposes 51 

"      rafts 40 

"      small,  required  in  a  siege  or  campaign 53 

Time  required  for  executing  the  full  sap 154 

"          "        "    making  fascines '. 64 

"          "        "         "       fascine-pickets 65 

"          "        "         "       gabions 78 

"          "        "      *"       hurdles 83 

"          "        "          "       sap-rollers 79 

Tools  for  each  squad  of  men  making  fascines 55 

*     "      "        "      "      "         "       gabions 71 

"      "    making  hurdles 83 

"      mode  of  carrying  gabion 106 

"     required  for  cutting  timber  for  military  purposes 51 

11            "       "        "      brushwood 53 

"     for  the  full  sap 148 

"     required  for  mining  operations 208 

"       "  sinking  a  shaft 210 

"       "  driving  a  gallery 216 

Trace 257 

Tracing-fascines 65 

Tracing  of  batteries 243 

Tracing-pickets 66 


INDEX.  275 

PAGE. 

Trail  bridge 12 

Traverses 250 

Trenches 120 

"       preserving  the,  dry 115 

Trench  cavalier 184 

Trestles 44 

"      fascin/e,  method  of  preparing 66 

Trestle  bridges 14,  45 

"      construction  of 17 

"      bridge  over  dry  ravine,  construction  of. 19 

"      carriers 20 

"     to  construct  the 20 

Troops,  number  of,  necessary  in  a  siege  to  furnish  proper  reliefs 142 

Uncovered  descent 199 

Ventilation  of  galleries 233 

Weight  of  fascines 64 

"      "    fascine-pickets 65 

"       "    gabions 78 

"      "    hurdles 83 

"       "    sap-rollers 79 

Withes,  method  of  preparing  and  using 59 

Wooden  circles.for  gabion  making 75 

Wooden  linings 209 

Working  parties,  arming,  in  a  siege 106, 108,  109 

"  "       mixed 135 

"  "      relief  of ^ 139 

"  "      regulations  proper  for  military,  in  a  siege 135 

"  "       superintending 135 

"  "      tasking  of,  in  the  formation  of  a  first  parallel Ill 

Workmen  crowding  the,  in  commencing  a  second  parallel 105 

"        reliefs  of,  for  a  first  parallel  and  its  approaches 95-97 

"  "       "for  the  second  parallel  and  its  approaches 103 

"  "      "  in  executing  a  second  parallel 122 

"  "      "  in  finishing  parallels  and  approaches  in  easy  soil. .  128 


CATALOGUE 


OP 


Military,  Naval,  and  Scientific 


BOOKS, 


PUBLISHED  BY 

D.     VAN     NOSTRAND, 

192  BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


*llc*  On  receipt  of  price,  copies  of  any  of  these   Books  will  be 
sent  by  mail,  postage  paid,  to  any  part  of  the  United  States. 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND, 

PUBLISHER, 

IMPORTER,  AND    BOOKSELLER, 

192  BROADWAY,  NEW   YORK, 

would  respectfully  solicit  orders  from  Public  and  Private  Libraries 
for  the  purchase  of  any  Books,  Apparatus,  or  Philosophical  Instru- 
ments, in  this  country  or  Europe.  From  his  long  experience  in  the 
Book  Business,  he  is  confident  of  giving  satisfaction  in  any  commission 
that  may  be  entrusted  to  him. 

Books  imported  from  London  and  Paris  by  every  steamer,  and  at 
the  lowest  possible  rates,  and,  for  Public  Institutions,  free  of  duty. 

Owing  to  the  high  rate  of  Exchange,  and  the  increased  tariff,  the 
prices  of  foreign  books  have  been  advanced ;  but  only  sufficient  to 
cover  the  extra  cost  of  importation. 

A  LARGE  STOCK  OF  THE  PRINCIPAL 

French,  English,  and  American 

MILITARY, 
NAVAL,    AND     SCIENTIFIC    WORKS 

ON  HAND. 

* 

Catalogues  sent  free  by  mail,  on  application. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


coTT's  MILITARY  DICTIONARY. 


Comprising  Technical  Definitions ;  Information  on  Raising  and 
Keeping  Troops ;  Actual  service,  including  makeshifts  and  im- 
proved materiel,  and  Law,  Government,  Regulation,  and  Admin- 
istration relating  to  Land  Forces.  By  Colonel  H.  L.  SCOTT, 
Inspector-General  U.  S.  A.  l  vol.,  large  octavo,  fully  illustra- 
ted, half  morocco,  $6;  Half  russia,  $7.50  ;  Full  morocco,  $9. 

"  It  is  a  complete  Encyclopaedia  of  Military  Science,  and  fully  explains  every  thing  dis- 
covered in  the  art  of  war  up  to  the  present  time."— Philadelphia  Evening  Bulletin. 

"  We  cannot  Bpeak  too  much  in  legitimate  praise  of  this  work."— National  Intelligen- 
cer. 

"  It  should  be  made  a  text-book  for  the  study  of  every  volunteer.1" — Harper's  Mag- 
a»ine. 

"We  cordially  commend  it  to  public  favor." — Washington  Globe. 

"This  comprehensive  and  skilfully  prepared  work  supplies  a  want  that  has  long  been 
felt,  and  will  be  peculiarly  valuable  at  this  time  as  a  book  of  reference." — Boston  Commer- 
cial Bulletin. 

"The  Military  Dictionary  is  splendidly  got  up  in  every  way,  and  reflects  credit  on  the 
publisher.  The  officers  of  every  company  in  the  service  should  possess  it." — N.  Y.  Tablet. 

"  The  work  is  more  properly  a  Military  Encyclopaedia,  and  is  profusely  illustrated  with 
engravings.  It  appears  to  contain  every  thing  that  can  bo  wanted  in  the  shape  of  informa- 
tion by  officers  of  all  grades.''''— Philadelphia  Nortfi  American. 

"This  book  is  really  an  Encyclopaedia,  both  elementary  and  technical,  and  as  such  occu- 
pies a  gap  in  military  literature  which  has  long  been  most  inconveniently  vacant.  This 
book  meets  a  present  popular  want,  and  will  be  secured  not  only  by  those  embarking  in 
the  profession  but  by  a  great  number  of  civilians,  who  are  determined  to  follow  the  de- 
scriptions and  to  understand  the  philosophy  of  the  various  movements  of  the  campaign. 
Indeed,  no  tolerably  good  library  would  bo  complete  without  the  work."— New  York 
Times. 

"The  work  has  evidently  been  compiled  from  a  careful  consultation  of  the  best  author- 
ities, enriched  with  the  results  of  the  experience  and  personal  knowledge  of  the  author.'' — 
N.  Y.  Daily  Tribune. 

"  Works  like  the  present  are  invaluable.  The  officers  of  our  Volunteer  service  would 
all  do  well  to  possess  themselves  of  the  volume."—^  Y.  Uerald. 

u  It  is  a  book  to  be  referred  to  on  the  spur  of  the  moment,  to  be  consulted  at  leisure,  and 
to  be  read  with  deliberation.  It  reflects  honor  on  the  military  service  of  the  United  States, 
and  gives  new  glory  to  one  of  the  noblest  of  the  names  connected  with  that  service."— 
Boxton  Traveller, 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


C 


AVALRY;  ITS  HlSTORY,  MANAGEMENT,  AND 
USES  IN  WAR. 


By  J.  ROEMER,  LL.  D.,  late  an  Officer  of  Cavalry  in  the  Service  of  the 
Netherlands.  Elegantly  illustrated,  with  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
seven  fine  Wood  Engravings.  In  one  large  octavo  volume, 
beautifully  printed  on  tinted  paper.  Price  $5.00. 

SUMMARY  OF  CONTENTS. — Cavalry  in  European  Armies ;  Proportion 
of  Cavalry  to  Infantry ;  What  kind  of  Cavalry  desirable ;  Cavalry 
Indispensable  in  War ;  Strategy  and  Tactics ;  Organization  of 
anArmy  ;  Route  Marches ;  Rifled  Fire- Arms  ;  The  Charge  ; 
The  Attack ;  Cavalry  versus  Cavalry ;  Cavalry  versus  Infantry ; 
Cavalry  versus  Artillery ;  Field  Service ;  Different .  Objects  of 
Cavalry;  Historical  Sketches  of  Cavalry  among  the  early 
Greeks,  the  Romans,  the  Middle  Ages ;  Different  kinds  of  Modern 
Cavalry ;  Soldiers  and  Officers ;  Various  systems  of  Training  of 
Cavalry  Horses;  Remounting ;  Shoeing ;  Veterinary  Surgeons, 
Saddlery,  etc.,  etc. 

WHAT  GENERAL  It'CLELLAN  BATS  OF  IT. 

u  I  am  exceedingly  pleased  with  it,  and  regard  it  as  a  very  valuable  addition  to  our 
military  literature.  It  will  certainly  be  regarded  as  a  standard  work,  and  I  know  of  none 
so  valuable  to  our  cavalry  officers.  Its  usefulness,  however,  is  not  confined  to  officers  of 
cavalry  alone,  but  it  contains  a  great  deal  of  general  information  valuable  to  officers  of  the 
other  arms  of  service,  especially  those  of  the  Staff, 

"  With  the  hope  that  it  may  find  a  large  circulation  in  our  armies,  I  am,  very  truly  yours 

"GEO.  B.    MCCLELLAN,  Maj-Gen.  U.  8.  A." 

"We  can  truly  say  that,  from  no  single  volume  have  we  obtained  so  much  information 
on  the  art  of  war  as  from  this." — Phila.  Press. 

"  Beading,  culture,  and  practical  experience  united,  give  this  work  a  value  and  impor- 
tance that  will  cause  it  to  be  regarded  as  a  standard  authority."— Saturday  Eve.  Gazette. 

"By  far  the  best  treatise  upon  Cavalry  and  its  uses  in  the  field,  which  has  yet  been 
published  in  this  country,  for  the  general  use  of  officers  of  all  ranks,  is  this  elaborate  and 
{Interesting  work.  Eschewing  the  elementary  principles  and  tactics  of  cavalry,  which  may 
be  learned  from  any  hand-book,  the  author  treats  of  the  uses  of  cavalry  in  the  field,  of 
strategy  and  tactics,  and  of  its  general  discipline  and  management.  The  range  of  the  work 
includes  an  admirable  treatise  upon  rifled  fire-arms,  a  historical  sketch  of  cavalry,  embod- 
ying many  interesting  facts,  an  account  of  the  cavalry  service  in  Europe  and  this  country 
and  a  treatise  on  horses,  their  equipment,  management,  Ac.  The  work  is  copiously  illus- 
trated and  elegantly  printed.  It  is  interesting  not  alone  to  military  men  but  to  the  gen- 
eral reader,  who  will  gain  from  its  pages  valuable  historical  facts  and  very  clear  ideas  of 
pome  branches  of  the  art  of  war,  such  as  the  employment  of  spies,  gaining  information  in  nn 
enemy's  country,  advance  movements  and  other  strategical  maneuvrcs.— Boston  Journal' 


B 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

ENfir's  MILITARY   LAW. 


A  Treatise  on  Military  Law  and  the  Practice  of  Courts-Martial,  by 
Capt.  S.  V.  BEN£T,  Ordnance  Department,  U.  S.  A.,  late  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Ethics,  Law,  &c.,  Military  Academy,  West 
Point.  1  vol.,  8vo,  law  sheep.  "$3.50. 

"This  book  is  manifestly  well  timed  just  at  this  particular  period,  and  it  is,  -without 
doubt,  quite  as  happily  adapted  to  the  purpose  for  which  it  was  written.  It  is  arranged 
with  admirable  method,  and  written  with  such  perspicuity  and  in  a  stylo  so  easy  and  grace- 
ful, as  to  engage  the  attention  of  every  reader  who  may  be  so  fortunate  as  to  open  its  pages. 
This  treatise  will  make  a  valuable  addition  to  the  library  of  the  lawyer  or  the  civilian ; 
while  to  the  military  man  it  seems  to  be  indispensable." — Philadelphia  Evening  Journal. 

"Captain  Bene"t  presents  the  army  with  a  complete  compilation  of  the  precedents  and 
decisions  of  rare  value  which  have  accumulated  since  the  creation  of  the  office  of  Judge- 
Advocate,  thoroughly  digested  and  judiciously  arranged,  with  an  index  of  the  most  minute 
accuracy.  Military  Law  and  Courts-Martial  are  treated  from  the  composition  of  the  latter 
to  the  Finding  and  Sentence,  with  the  Eevision  and  Execution  of  the  same,  all  set  forth  in 
a  clear,  exhaustive  style  that  is  a  cardinal  excellence  in  every  work  of  legal  reference.  That 
portion  of  the  work  devoted  to  Evidence  is  especially  good.  In  fact,  the  whole  performance 
entitles  the  author  to  the  thanks  of  the  entire  army,  not  a  leading  officer  of  which  should 
fail  to  supply  himself  at  once  with  so  serviceable  a  guide  to  the  intricacies  of  legal  military 
government" — IT.  Y.  Times. 

"  This  volume  has  been  carefully  prepared  by  the  author  in  order  to  present  in  a  col. 
lectcd  form,  the  able  decisions  issued  from  the  War  Department  since  the  establishment 
of  the  office  of  Judge- Advocate  of  the  Army,  and  the  opinions  given  by  the  Attorneys- 
General  on  points  requiring  legal  interpretation.  It  is  full  of  information  for  military  men, 
founded  on  the  authority  of  these  decisions  and  opinions,  and  is  a  valuable  contribution 
to  the  science  of  military  law."— Providence  Journal. 

JtTDGE-AnVOCATE   GENERAL'S   OFFICE,  ) 

October  18, 1862.  f 

*  *  *  So  far  as  I  have  been  enabled  to  examine  this  volume,  it  seems  to  me  carefully 
•nd  accurately  prepared,  and  I  am  satisfied  that  you  have  rendered  an  acceptable  service  to 
the  army  and  the  country  by  its  publication  at  this  moment  In  consequence  of  tho 
gigantic  proportions  so  suddenly  assumed  by  the  military  operations  of  the  Government, 
there  have  been  necessarily  called  into  tho  field,  from  civil  life,  a  vast  number  of  officers, 
unacquainted  from  their  previous  studies  and  pursuits,  both  with  the  principles  of  mili- 
tary law  and  with  the  course  of  judicial  proceedings  under  it  To  all  such,  this  treatise 
will  prove  an  easily  accessible  storehouse  of  knowledge,  which  it  is  equally  tho  duty  of  tho 
eoldier  in  command  to  acquire,  as  it  is  to  learn  to  draw  his  sword  against  the  common 
enemy.  The  military  spirit  of  our  people  now  being  thoroughly  aroused,  added  to  a 
growing  conviction  that  in  future  we  may  have  to  depend  quite  as  much  upon  the  bayonet 
as  upon  the  ballot-box  for  the  preservation  of  our  institutions,  cannot,  fail  to  secure  to 
this  work  an  extended  and  earnest  appreciation.  In  bringing  the  result-  of  legislation  :md 
of  decisions  upon  tho  questions  down  to  so  recent  a  period,  tho  author  has  added  greatly 
to  the  interest  and  usefulness  of  the  volume.  Very,  respectfully, 

Tour  obedient  swvaut,       J.  HOLT. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


E 


LEMENTS  OF  MILITARY  ART   AND  HlSTORY. 


By  EDWARD  DE  LA  BARRE  DUPARCQ,  Chef  de  Bataillon  of  Engineers  in 
the  Army  of  France ;  and  Professor  of  the  Military  Art  in  the 
Imperial  School  of  St.  Cvr.  Translated  by  Brig-Gen.  Geo.  W. 
CULLUM,  U.  S.  A.,  Chief  of  the  Staff  of  Major-Gen.  H.  W.  HAL- 
LECK,  General-in-Chief  U.  S.  Army,  i  vol.,  octavo,  cloth.  £4. 

"  I  read  the  original  a  few  years  since,  And  considered  it  the  very  best  work  I  had  seen 
upon  the  subject  Gen.  Cullum's  ability  and  familiarity  with  the  technical  language  of 
French  military  writers,  are  a  sufficient  guarantee  of  the  correctness  of  his  translation." 

U.  W.  HALLECK,  Major-Gen.  U.  S.  A. 

"  I  have  read  the  book  with  great  interest,  and  trust  that  it  will  have  a  large  circulation. 
It  cannot  fail  to  do  good  by  spreading  that  very  knowledge,  the  want  of  which  among  our 
new,  inexperienced,  and  untaught  soldiers,  has  cost  us  so  many  lives,  and  so  much  toil 
and  treasure." 

M.  C.  MEIGS,  Quartermaster-General,  U.  8.  A. 

"I  have  carefully  read  most  of  General  Cullum's  translation  of  M.  Barre  Dnparcq's 
'Elements  of  Military  Art  and  History.'  It  is  a  plain,  concise  work,  well  suited  to  our 
service.  Our  volunteers  should  read  and  study  it  I  wish  it  could  be  widely  circulated 
among  our  officers.  It  would  give  them  a  comprehensive  knowledge  of  the  different  arms 
of  the  service,  and  invite  further  investigation  into  the  profession  of  arms  which  they  have 
adopted.  A  careful  study  of  such  works  will  make  our  officers  learned  and  skilful,  as  well 
as  wise  and  successful ;  and  they  have  ample  time,  while  they  arc  campaigning,  to  improve 
themselves  in  this  regard." 

S.  K.  CURTIS,  Major-Gen.  U.  8.  A. 

"Barre  Duparcq  is  one  of  the  most  favorably  known  among  recent  military  writers  in 
France.  If  not  the  very  best,  this  is  certainly  among  the  best  of  the  numerous  volume* 
devoted  to  this  topic.  Could  this  book  be  put  into  the  hands  and  heads  of  our  numerous 
intelligent,  but  untrained  officers,  it  would  work  a  transformation  supremely  needed. 
"We  can  say,  that  no  officer  can  read  this  work  without  positive  advantage,  and  real  pro- 
gress as  a  soldier.  Gen.  Cullum  is  well  known  as  one  of  the  most  proficient  students  of 
military  science  and  art  in  our  service,  and  is  amply  qualified  to  prepare  an  original  text- 
book on  this  subject" — Atlantic  Monthly. 

"  That  Gen.  Cullum,  Chief  of  Staff  to  the  Commanding  General,  should  have  chosen  to 
translate  and  edit  his  work,  rather  than  to  prepare  an  original  one  himself,  gives  tho 
highest  professional  testimony  to  its  value.  The  work  contains  a  History  of  the  Art  of  War, 
as  it  has  grown  up  from  the  earliest  ages;  describes  the  various  formations  which  have 
from  time  to  time  been  adopted;  and  treats  in  detail  of  the  several  arms  of  tho  service,  and 
the  most  effective  manner  of  employing  them  for  offensive  and  defensive  purpose.".  It  is 
fully  illustrated  with  diagrams,  displaying  to  the  eye  the  formations  and  evolutions  which 
find  place  in  ancient  and  modern  armies.  Though  the  book  is  especially  designed  for  tlie 
instruction  of  oflicers  and  soldiers,  the  non-professional  reader  cannot  fail  to  perceive  the 
clearness  of  its  statements  and  the  precision  of  its  definitions."— Harpers"  Monthly. 


B 


D.   VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

ENTON'S  ORDNANCE  AND  GUNNERY. 


Course  of  Instruction  in  Ordnance  and  Gunnery;  compiled  for 
the  use  of  the  Cadets  of  the  United  States  Military  Academy, 
by  Capt.  J.  G.  BENTON,  Ordnance  Department,  late  Instructor 
of  Ordnance  and  Gunnery,  Military  Academy,  West  Point. 
Principal  Assistant  to  Chief  of  Ordnance,  U.  S.  A.  Second 
Edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  l  vol.,  8vo,  half  morocco,  cuts. 
$5  oo. 


"  TTo  cannot  commend  this  work  too  highly,  both  for  the  substance  it  contains,  and  th« 
highly  finished  manner  in  which  it  has  been  issued  by  the  publisher.  There  is  no  one 
book  within  the  range  of  our  military  reading  and  study,  that  contains  more  to  recommend 
it  upon  the  subject  of  which  it  treats.  It  is  as  full  and  complete  as  the  narrow  compass 
of  a  single  volume  would  admit,  and  the  reputation  of  the  author  as  a  scientific  and  prac- 
tical artillerist  is  a  sufficient  guarantee  for  the  correctness  of  his  statements  and  deduc- 
tions, and  the  thoroughness  of  his  labors."—^.  Y.  Observer. 

"The  present  edition  is  the  second  one,  and  is  revised  and  enlarged,  being  rendered  al- 
together invaluable,  not  only  to  the  student,  but  as  a  standard  book  of  reference  on  the 
subject  of  which  it  treats.  Apart  from  its  great  merits  as  a  treatise,  it  is  as  respects  bind- 
ing and  printing,  a  truly  splendid  work." — Louisville  Journal. 

"A  GREAT  MILITARY  "WORK. — "We  have  before  us  a  bound  volume  of  nearly  six  hundred 
pages,  whii-.h  is  a  complete  and  exhaustive  '  Course  of  Instruction  in  Ordnance  and  Gun- 
nery,1 as  its  title  states,  and  goes  into  every  department  of  the  science,  including  gunpow- 
der, projectiles,  cannon,  carriages,  machines,  and  implements,  small  arms,  pyrotechny, 
science  of  gunnery,  loading,  pointing,  and  discharging  fire-arms,  different  kinds  of  fires,  ef- 
fects of  projectiles  and  employment  of  artillery.  These  severally  form  chapter  heads  and 
give  thorough  information  on  the  subjects  on  which  they  treat.  The  most  valuable  and 
interesling  information  on  all  the  above  topics,  including  the  history,  manufacture,  and 
use  of  small  arms  is  here  concentrated  in  compact  and  convenient  form,  making  a  work  of 
rare  merit  and  standard  excellence.  The  work  is  abundantly  and  clearly  illustrated." — 
Boston  Traveller. 

"This  work  is  designed  for  a  standard  work,  not  only  for  the  soldier  and  the  sailor,  or  as 
a  vade  mecumfor  reference  on  the  quarter-deck  and  in  the  officer's  tent,  but  from  its  plain 
and  forcible  diction  and  familiar  illustrations,  must  interest  the  general  reader  in  the  na- 
ttiro  and  effects  of  15-inch  Columbiads,  and  all  kinds  of  artillery,  down  to  a  signal  rocket. 
All  who  desire  a  work  of  reference  upon  the  subject  at  large,  will  find  this  book  a  useful 
»nd  interesting  informant." — C/ycago  Journal. 


T 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 

HE   ARTILLERIST'S  MANUAL: 


Compiled  from  various  Sources,  and  adapted  to  the  Service  of  the 
United  States.  Profusely  illustrated  with  woodcuts  and  engrav- 
ings on  stone.  Second  edition,  revised  and  corrected,  with 
valuable  additions.  By  Gen.  JOHN  GIBBON,  U.  S.  Army,  i 
vol.,  8vo,  half  roan.  $5. 

This  book  is  now  considered  the  standard  authority  for  that  particular  branch  of  the 
Service  in  the  United  States  Army.  The  War  Department,  at  "Washington,  has  exhibited 
its  thorough  appreciation  of  the  merits  of  this  volume,  the  want  of  which  has  been  hither- 
to much  felt  in  the  service,  by  subscribing  for  700  copies. 

"It  is  with  great  pleasure  that  we  welcome  the  appearance  of  a  new  work  on  this  sub- 
ject, entitled  "The  Artillerist's  Manual,'  byCapt  John  Gibbon,  a  highly  scientific  and  mer- 
itorious officer  of  artillery  in  our  regular  service.  The  work,  an  octavo  volume  of  500 
pages,  in  large,  clear  type,  appears  to  be  well  adapted  to  supply  just  what  has  keen  hereto- 
fore needed  to  fill  the  gap  between  the  simple  Manual  and  the  more  abstruse  demonstra- 
tions of  the  science  of  gunnery.  The  whole  work  is  profusely  illustrated  with  woodcuts 
and  engravings  on  stone,  tending  to  give  a  more  complete  and  exact  idea  of  the  various 
matters  described  in  the  text.  The  book  may  well  bo  considered  as  a  valuable  and  impor- 
tant addition  to  the  military  science  of  the  country."— New  York  Herald. 


H 


AND-BOOK  OF  ARTILLERY, 


For  the  Service  of  the  United  States  Army  and  Militia.  New,  re- 
vised, and  greatly  enlarged  edition.  By  Maj.  JOSEPH  ROBERTS, 
U.  S.  A.  1  vol.,  i8mo,  cloth.  $1. 

"  A  complete  catechism  of  gun  practice,  covering  the  whole  ground  of  this  branch  of 
military  science,  and  adapted  to  militia  and  volunteer  drill,  as  well  as  to  the  regular  army. 
It  has  the  merit  of  precise  detail,  even  to  the  technical  names  of  all  parts  of  a  gun,  and  how 
the  smallest  operations  connected  with  its  use  can  be  best  performed.  It  has  evidently 
been  prepared  with  great  care,  and  with  strict  scientific  accuracy.  By  the  recommenda- 
tion of  a  committee  appointed  by  the  commanding  officer  of  the  Artillery  School  at  Fort 
Monroe,  Va.,  it  has  been  substituted  for  '  Burns1  Question  and  Answers,'  an  English  work 
which  has  heretofore  been  the  text-book  of  instruction  in  this  country." — ITeic  York 
Century. 

The  following  is  an  extract  from  a  Report  made  by  the  committee  appointed  at  a  meet- 
ing of  the  staff  of  the  Artillery  School  at  Fort  Monroe,  Va.,  to  whom  the  commanding 
officer  of  the  School  had  referred  this  work : 

*  *  *  "In  the  opinion  of  your  Committee,  the  arrangement  of  the  subjects  and  the 
selection  of  the  several  questions  and  answers  have  been  judicious.  The  work  is  one 
which  may  be  advantageously  used  for  reference  by  the  officers,  and  is  admirably  adapted 
to  the  instruction  of  non-commissioned  officers  and  privates  of  Artillery. 

"  Your  Committee  do,  therefore,  recommend  that  it  be  substituted  as  a  text-book  in 
place  of  '  Burns'  Questions  and  Answers  on  Artillery.' " 

(Signed,)        I.  VOGDES,  Gnj*.  \st  ArfiBtry. 

(Signed,)        E.  O.  C.  ORD,  Capt  3d  ArtiUcry. 

(Signed,)       J.  A.  HASKIN,  Btt.  Maj.  and  Capt.  l»t  Artillery. 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


T 


HE   AUTOMATON  REGIMENT;  OR,  INFAN- 
TRY SOLDIERS'  PRACTICAL  INSTRUCTOR. 


For  all  Regimental  Movements  in  the  Field.  By  G.  DOUGLAS  BREWER- 
TON,  U.  S.  Army.  Nearly  put  up  in  boxes,  price  $1 ;  when 
sent  by  mail,  $  1 .  40. 

The  "Automaton  Regiment"  is  a  simple  combination  of  blocks  and  counters,  so 
arranged  and  designated  by  a  carefully  considered  contrast  of  colors,  that  it  supplies  thy 
student  with  a  perfect  miniature  regiment,  in  which  the  position  in  the  battalion  of  each 
company,  and  of  every  officer  and  man  in  each  division,  company,  platoon,  and  section,  ia 
clearly  indicated.  It  supplies  the  studious  soldier  with  the  means  whereby  he  can  con- 
sult his  "  tactics,"  and  at  the  same  time  join  practice  to  theory  by  manoeuvring  a  ininiio 
regiment. 

HEAD-QUARTERS,  MILITARY  GOVERNOR,  ) 

Department  of  the  South, 
Beaufort,  South  Carolina,  Oct.  21st,  1SC2.  ) 

I  hereby  certify  that  I  have  examined  the  "Automaton  Regiment,"  invented  by  G. 
Douglas  Brewerton,  late  of  the  U.  S.  Regular  Army,  and  now  serving  as  a  Volunteer  Aide 
upon  my  military  staff,  and  believe  that  his  invention  will  prove  a  useful  and  valuable 
assistant  to  every  student  of  military  tactics.  I  take  pleasure  in  recommending  it  accord- 
ingly. K.  SAXTON, 

.- General  Volunteers. 


T 


HE  AUTOMATON    COMPANY  ;  OR,  INFAN- 
TRY SOLDIERS'  PRACTICAL  INSTRUCTOR. 


For  all  Company  Movements  in  the  Field.     By  G.  DOUGLAS  BREWER- 
TON,  U.  S.  A.    Price  in  boxes,  $1.25  ;  when  sent  by  mail,  $1.95. 


T 


HE  AUTOMATON  BATTERY;  OR,  ARTIL- 
LERISTS'  PRACTICAL  INSTRUCTOR. 


For  all  Mounted  Artillery  Manoeuvres  in  the  Field.  By  G.  DOUGLAS 
BREWERTON,  U.  S.  A.  Price  in  boxes,  $1  ;  when  sent  by 
mail,  $1.  40. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 

QYSTEMS  OF  MILITARY  BRIDGES, 

In  Use  by  the  United  States  Army;  those  adopted  by  the  Great  Eu- 
ropean Powers ;  and  such  as  are  employed  in  British  India.  With 
Directions  for  the  Preservation,  Destruction,  and  Re-establish- 
ment of  Bridges.  By  Brig.-General  GEORGE  W.  CULLUM,  Lieut.- 
Col.  Corps  of  Engineers,  United  States  Army,  i  vol.,  octavo. 
With  numerous  Illustrations.  $3.50. 

"  It  is  a  trito  remark  that  of  all  the  operations  of  war  none  is  more  difficult  and  hazard- 
ous than  the  passage  of  a  large  river  in  the  presence  of  a  bold  and  active  enemy.  The 
importance  to  this  country  of  such  a  work  as  the  present,  when  our  armies  have  to  pass 
so  many  great  rivers,  cannot  be  over-estimated.  We  have  no  man  more  competent  to  pre- 
pare such  a  work  than  Brigadier-General  Cullum,  who  had  the  almost  exclusive  supervi- 
sion, devising,  building,  and  preparing  for  service  of  the  various  bridge-trains  sent  to  our 
armies  in  Mexico  during  our  war  with  that  country.  The  treatise  before  us  is  very  com- 
plete, and  has  evidently  been  prepared  with  scrupulous  care.  The  descriptions  of  tha 
various  systems  of  military  bridges  adopted  by  nearly  all  civilized  nations  are  very  inte- 
resting even  to  the  non-professional  reader,  and  to  those  specially  interested  in  such  subjects 
must  be  very  instructive,  for  they  are  evidently  the  work  of  a  master  of  the  art  of  military 
bridge-building."—  Washington  CJironide. 


M 


ILITARY   AND   POLITICAL   LlFE   OF   THE 
EMPEROR  NAPOLEON. 


By  BARON  JOMINI,  General-in-Chief  and  Aide-de-camp  to  the  Emperor 
of  Russia.  Translated  from  the  French,  with  notes,  by  H.  W. 
HALLECK,  LL.  D.,  Major-General  U.  S.  Army.  4  vols.,  Royal 
octavo.  Fully  Illustrated  by  Maps  and  Plans.  In  press 


D 


ELAFIELD'S  REPORT. 


Report  on  the  Art  of  War  in  Europe  in  1854,  1855,  and  1856.  By 
Col.  R.  DELAFIELD,  Corps  of  Engineers  U.  S.  A.  i  vol.  folio, 
cloth.  With  maps  and  views.  $5. 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

A  UTHORIZED  U.  S.  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 

For  the  Instruction,  Exercise,  and  Manoeuvres  of  the  Soldier,  a  Com- 
pany, Line  of  Skirmishers,  Battalion,  Brigade,  or  Corps  d'Armee. 
By  Brig.-Gen.  SILAS  CASEY,  U.  S.  A.  3  vols.,  241110.  Cloth, 
lithographed  plates.  $2.50.  , 

VOL.  I. — School  of  the  Soldier ;  School  of  the  Company  ;  Instruc- 
tion for  Skirmishers. 

VOL.  II. — School  of  the  Battalion. 

VOL.  III. — Evolutions  of  a  Brigade;  Evolutions  of  a  Corps  d'Armee. 

The  manuscript  of  this  new  system  of  Infantry  Tactics  was  carefully  examined  by  Gen- 
eral MCCLELLAN,  and  met  with  his  unqualified  approval,  which  ho  has  since  manifested  by 
authorizing  General  CASEY  to  adopt  it  for  hia  entire  division.  The  author  has  retained 
much  that  is  valuable  contained  in  the  systems  of  SCOTT  and  HARDEE,  but  has  made  many 
important  changes  and  additions  which  experience  and  the  exigencies  of  the  service  re- 
quire. General  CASEY'S  reputation  as  an  accomplished  soldier  and  skilful  tacticiau  is  a 
guarantee  that  the  work  he  has  undertaken  has  been  thoroughly  performed. 

"These  volumes  are  based  on  the  French  ordonnancea  of  1831  and  1845  for  the  manoeu- 
vres of  heavy  infantry  and  cJidftseurti  &  pied :  both  of  these  systems  have  been  in  use  in 
our  service  for  some  years,  the  former  having  been  translated  by  Gen.  Scott,  and  the  latter 
by  CoL  Hardee.  After  the  introduction  of  the  latter  drill  in  our  service,  in  connection 
•with  Gen.  SCOTT'S  Tactics,  there  arose  the  necessity  of  a  uniform  system  for  the  manoeu- 
vres of  all  the  infantry  arm  of  the  service.  These  volumes  are  the  result  of  the  author's 
endeavor  to  communicate  the  instruction,  now  used  and  adopted  in  the  army,  to  achieve 
this  result." — Boston  Journal. 

"Based  on  the  best  precedents,  adapted  to  the  novel  requirements  of  the  art  of  war,  and 
very  full  in  its  instructions,  Casey's  Tactics  will  be  received  as  the  most  useful  and  most 
comprehensive  work  of  its  kind  in  our  language.  From  the  drill  and  discipline  of  the  in 
dividual  soldier,  or  through  all  the  various  combinations,  to  the  manoeuvres  of  a  brigade 
and  the  evolutions  of  a  Corps  D'Arm<io,  the  student  is  advanced  by  a  clear  method  and 
steady  progress.  Numerous  cuts,  plans,  and  diagrams  illustrate  positions  and  movements, 
and  demonstrate  to  the  eye  the  exact  working  out  of  the  individual  position,  brigading,  or- 
der of  battle,  &c.,  &c.  The  work  is  a  in<JGel  of  publishing  success,  being  in  three  neat 
pocket  volumes." — New  Yorker. 

"WAR  DEPARTMENT,  "WASHINGTON,  August  11, 1862. 

The  System  of  Infantry  Tactics  prepared  by  Brig.-Gen.  Silas  Casey,  U.  S.  A.,  having 
been  approved  by  the  President,  is  adopted  for  tho  instruction  of  the  Infantry  of  the  Ar- 
mies of  the  United  States,  whether  Kegular,  Volunteer,  or  Militia,  with  the  following  modi 
fications,  viz. : 

Fir^  That  portion  which  requires  that  two  companies  shall  be  permanently  detached 
from  the  battalion  as  skirmishers,  will  be  suspended. 

Second,  In  Title  First,  Article  First,  the  following  will  be  substituted  for  Paragraph  C, 
viz.: 

"  A  regiment  is  composed  of  ten  companies,  which  will  be  habitually  posted  from  right 
in  left  in  tho  following  order;  first,  sixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third,  eighth,  fifth,  tenth,  seventh, 
wi-i.iicl,  according  to  tho  rank  of  Cuptain."  EDWIN  M.  8TANTON, 

/Secretary  of  War. 


A 


RMY  OFFICERS'  POCKET  COMPANION. 


Principally  designed  for  Staff  Officers  in  the  Field.  Partly  translated 
from  the  French  of  M.  DE  ROUVRE,  Lieutenant-Colonel  of  the 
French  Staff  Corps,  with  Additions  from  standard  American, 
French,  and  English  Authorities.  By  WM.  P.  CRAIGHILL,  First 
Lieutenant  U.  S.  Corps  of  Engineers,  Assist.  Prof,  of  Engineer- 
ing at  the  U.  S.  Military  Academy,  West  Point.  1  vol.,  i8mo, 
full  roan.  .  $1  50. 
"  I  have  carefully  examined  Capt  CRAIGIIILL'S  Pocket  Companion.  I  find  it  one  of  the 

very  best  works  of  the  kind  I  have  ever  seen.    Any  Army  or  Volunteer  officer  who  will 

make  himself  acquainted  with  the  contents  of  this  little  book,  will  seldom  be  ignorant  of 

his  duties  in  camp  or  field.'' 

H.  W.  HALLECK,  Major-General  U.  S.  A. 

"  I  have  carefully  examined  the  '  Manual  for  SUiff  Officers  in  the  Field.1  It  Is  a  most  in- 
valuable work,  admirable  in  arrangement,  perspicuously  written,  abounding  in  most  useful 
ma'  ters,  and  such  a  book  as  should  be  the  constant  pocket  companion  of  every  army  officer, 
Regular  and  Volunteer." 

G.  W.  CULLUM,  Brigadier-General  TJ.  8.  A. 
Chief  of  General  Halleck's  Staff,  Chief  Engineer  Department  Mississippi. 


M 


ANUAL   FOR   ENGINEER   TROOPS. 


Consisting  of 

Part  I.  Ponton  Drill. 

II.   Practical  Operations  of  a  Siege. 

III.  School  of  the  Sap. 

IV.  Military  Mining. 

V.  Construction  of  Batteries. 

By  Major  J.  C.  DUANE,  Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  Army.      1  vol., 
I2mo,  half  morocco,  with  plates.     82. 

"  I  have  carefully  examined  Capt.  J.  C.  Duane's l  Manual  for  Engineer  Troops,'  and  do  not 
hesitate  to  pronounce  it  the  very  best  work  on  the  subject  of  which  it  treats." 

H.  W.  HALLECK,  Major-General,  U.  8.  A. 

"  A  work  of  this  kind  has  been  much  needed  in  our  military  literature.    For  the  army'* 
sake,  I  hope  the  book  will  have  a  wide  circulation  among  its  officers." 

G.  B.  MCCLELLAN,  Major-General,  U.  S.  A. 


V 


IELE'S  HAND-BOOK. 


Hand-Book  for  Active  Service,  containing  Practical  Instructions  in 
Campaign  Duties.  For  the  use  of  Volunteers.'  By  Brig. -Gen. 
EGBERT  L.  VIELE,  U.  S.  A.  I2mo,  cloth.  $1. 


E 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

VOLUTIONS  OF  FlELD  BATTERIES   OF   AR- 
TILLERY. 


Translated  from  the  French,  and  arranged  for  the  Army  and  Militia 
of  the  United  States.  By  Gen.  ROBERT  ANDERSON,  U.  S.  A. 
Published  by  order  of  the  War  Department.  l  vol.,  cloth,  32 
plates.  $1. 

WAR  DEPARTMENT,  Nov.  2d,  1859. 

The  System  of  "  Evolutions  of  Field  Batteries,"  translated  from  the  French,  and  arrang- 
ed for  the  service  of  the  United  States,  by  Major  Robert  Anderson,  of  the  1st  Regiment  of 
Artillery,  having  been  approved  by  the  President,  is  published  for  the  information  and  gov- 
ernment of  the  army. 

All  Evolutions  of  Field  Batteries  not  embraced  in  this  system  are  prohibited,  and  those 
herein  prescribed  will  be  strictly  observed. 

J.  B.  FLOYD.  Secretary  of  War. 

"This  system  having  been  adopted  by  the  "War  Department,  is  to  the  artillerist  what 
Hardee's  Tactics  is  to  the  infantry  soldier;  the  want  of  a  work  like  this  has  been  seriously 
felt,  and  will  be  eagerly  welcomed." — LoitArriUe  Journal, 

OTANDING  ORDERS  OF  THE  SEVENTH  REGI- 
MENT, NATIONAL  GUARD. 

For  the  Regulation  and  Government  of  the  Regiment  in  the  Field 
or  in  Quarters.  By  A.  DURYEE,  Colonel.  New  Edition,  flex- 
ible cloth.  40  cents. 

"This,  which  is  a  new  edition  of  a  popular  work,  cannot  fail  to  be  eagerly  sought  after 
&s  presenting  clearly  and  succinctly  the  principles  of  organization  and  discipline  of  a  most 
favorite  corps.  An  appropriate  index  facilitates  reference  to  the  matter  of  the  volume." — 
New  Yorker. 


L 


IGHT  INFANTRY  COMPANY  AND  SKIRMISH 
DRILL. 


The  Company  Drill  of  the  Infantry  of  the  Line,  together  with  the 
Skirmish  Drill  of  the  Company  and  Battalion,  after  the  method 
of  General  LE  LOUTEREL.  Bayonet  Fencing ;  with  a  Supple- 
ment on  the  Handling  and  Service  of  Light  Infantry.  By  J. 
MONROE,  Colonel  22d  Regiment,  N.  G.,  N.  Y.  S.  M.,  former- 
ly Captain  U.  S.  Infantry,  l  vol.,  321110.  60  cents. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


M 


ANUAL  OF  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  MILITARY 
SURGEONS, 


In  the  Examination  of  Recruits  and  Discharge  of  Soldiers.  With  an 
Appendix  containing  the  Official  Regulations  of  the  Provost  Mar- 
shal General's  Bureau,  and  those  for  the  formation  of  the  Invalid 
Corps,  &c.,  &c.  Prepared  at  the  request  of  the  United  States 
Sanitary  Commission.  By  JOHN  ORDRONAUX,  M.  D.,  Professor 
of  Medical  Jurisprudence  in  Columbia '  College,  New  York. 
izmo.  Half  morocco.  $1.50. 

"The author  has  drawn  his  materials  from  the  best  accredited  sources  of  information 
and  the  highest  authorities  in  both  hemispheres.  lie  selects  France  and  Prussia,  as  the 
representative  military  nations  of  Europe,  and  he  has  adopted  as  closely  as  possible  their 
order  of  instruction  on  the  subjects  of  the  enlistments  and  discharges  ot  soldiers;  and,  in 
the  form  of  an  Appendix,  he  has  embodied  the  Code  of  Instructions  relating  to  the  U.  S. 
Army,  adopted  by  the  Board  of  Medical  Officers,  convened  at  Washington  for  that  purjwse, 
on  the  15th  of  April,  1SG3,  to  which  are  also  added  the  Regulations  governing  the  forma- 
tion of  our  Invalid  Corps.  Nothing  ol  importance  to  army  surgeons  has  been  omitted."— 
Army  and  yavy  Gazette, 

"  In  a  condensed  form  it  is  an  admirable  treatise  on  the  important  subjects  of  which  it 
treats.  The  author  has  aimed  to  be  brief  without  being  obscure,  to  omit  nothing  of  real 
importance,  and  to  draw  his  materials  from  the  best  sources.  He  treats  of  the  physical  dis- 
abilities which  have  relation  to  the  military  service,  and  of  these  alone."  Medical  Exami- 
ners are  instructed  in  their  duties,  and  the  method  of  discovering  feigned,  artificially  pro- 
duced, and  concealed  diseases  is  pointed  out  The  book  will  prove  valuable  to  all  who  are 
concerned  in  the  manipulation  of  recruits  or  conscripts.  An  Appendix  contains  official 
regulations  and  instructions  relative  to  the  Provost-Marshal's  office,  the  Invalid  Corps, 
<fcc." — Commercial  Advertiser. 


H 


INTS  ON  THE  PRESERVATION  OF  HEALTH 

IN  ARMIRS. 


For  the  use  of  Volunteer  Officers  and  Soldiers.    By  JOHN  ORDRONAUX, 
M.  D.     New  edition,   i8mo,  cloth.     50  cents. 


D.     VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


ARTILLERY  TACTICS.— 1863. 

Instruction  for  Heavy  Artillery ;  prepared  by  a  Board  of  Officers,  for 
the  use  of  the  Army  of  the  United  States.  With  service  of  a 
gun  mounted  on  an  iron  carriage.  In  one  volume,  1 2mo,  with 
numerous  illustrations.  Price  $2. 

"WAR  DEPARTMENT,  ) 

"  WASHINGTON,  I).  C,  Oct.  20, 1SC2.       f 

M  This  system  of  Heavy  Artillery  Tactics,  prepared  under  direction  of  the  War  Depart- 
ment, having  been  approved  by  the  President,  is  adopted  for  the  instruction  of  troops 
•when  acting  as  heavy  artillery." 

EDWIN  M.  STANTON, 

Secretary  of  War. 

"  We  presume  that  this  is  the  most  complete  treatise  on  Heavy  Artillery  that  has  ever  been 
published  in  this  or  any  other  country.  It  seems  to  take  in  every  tiling  bearing  on  the 
subject,  and  its  instructions  are  ample  and  exceedingly  clear.  Some  forty  illustrative 
plates  are  given,  and  the  text  is  clearly  and  legibly  printed." — JT.  Y.  Commercial  Adver- 
tiser. 

"  This  volume,  prepared  under  the  direction  of  the  War  Department  and  officially  adopt- 
ed as  the  code  of  artillery  instruction  for  the  public  service,  like  all  Van  Nostrand's  mil- 
itary publications,  is  got  up  in  the  most  substantial  and  elegant  style  both  of  printing  and 
binding.  Its  contents  are  evidently  the  work  of  thorough  practical  and  scientific  military 
engineers,  and  embrace  all  the  important  as  well  as  miuuto  details  of  heavy  artillery  prac- 
tice. 

"The  First  Part  consists  of  sixteen  lessons  relating  to  the  service  of  the  single  piece,  in 
eluding  the  gun,  howitzer,  mortar,  and  columbiad ;  also  the  formation  of  batteries,  the  art 
of  aiming  pieces  and  firing  hot-shot.  Part  Second  relates  entirely  to  mechanical  manoeu- 
vres and  appliances,  for  handling,  mounting,  dismounting,  and  transporting  heavy  pieces. 
Part  Third  is  of  a  miscellaneous  character,  containing  directions  for  embarking  and  disem- 
barking artillery  and  ordnance  stores;  also,  tables  of  dimensions  and  weights  of  trims,  car- 
iages,  shot,  shell,  machines,  and  implements,  with  charges  for  and  ranges  of  heavy  artil- 
!•  ry-  These  in.-tnicti<>ns  are  not  only  copious  in  detail,  but  aptly  illustrated  with  thirty- 
nine  elegant  steel-plate  engravings." — Bulletin* 


u 


S.   TACTICS   FOR   COLORED   TROOPS. 


U.  S.  Infantry  Tactics,  for  the  Instruction,  Exercise,  and  Manoeuvres 
of  the  Soldier,  a  Company,  Line  of  Skirmishers,  and  Battalion, 
for  the  use  of  the  COLORED  TROOPS  of  the  United  States  Infantry. 
Prepared  under  the  direction  of  the  War  Department,  i  volume, 
plates,  81.50. 

"WAR  DEPARTMENT,  WASHINGTON,  March  9,  l^CO. 

"This  system  of  United  States  Infantry  Tactics,  prepared  under  the  direction  of  the  War 
Department,  for  the  use  of  the  Colored  Troops  of  the  United  states  Infantry,  having  been 
approved  by  the  President,  is  adopted  for  the  instnicli<wi  <»f  MH-'H  troop*." 

EDWIN  M.  STANTON,  Secretary  of  War. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 

WORD-PLAY. 

The  Militiaman's  Manual  and  Sword-Play  without  a  Master. — Rapier 
and  Broad-Sword  Exercises  copiously  Explained  and  Illustrated ; 
Small-Arm  Light  Infantry  Drill  of  the  United  States  Army ; 
Infantry  Manual  of  Percussion  Muskets ;  Company  Drill  of  the 
United  States  Cavalry.  By  Major  M.  W.  BERRIMAN,  engaged 
'  for  the  last  thirty  years  in  the  practical  instruction  of  Military 
Students.  Second  edition.  1  vol.,  i  zmo,  red  cloth.  $1. 

"  Captain  Berrirnan  has  had  thirty  years'  experience  in  teaching  military  students,  and 
his  work  is  written  in  a  simple,  clear,  and  soldierly  style.  It  is  illustrated  with  twelve 
plates,  and  is  one  of  the  cheapest  and  most  complete  works  of  the  kind  published  in  this 
country." — New  York  World. 

"  This  work  will  be  found  very  valuable  to  all  persons  seeking  military  instruction ;  but 
it  recommends  itself  most  especially  to  officers,  and  those  who  have  to  use  the  sword  or 
sabre.  We  believe  it  is  the  only  work  on  the  use  of  the  sword  published  in  this  country." 
— New  York  Tablet. 

"It  is  a  work  of  obvious  merit  and  value." — Boston  Traveller. 


A 


SYSTEM  OF  TARGET  PRACTICE. 


For  the  use  of  Troops  when  armed  with  the  Musket,  Rifle-Musket, 
Rifle,  or  Carbine.  Prepared,  principally  from  the  French,  by 
Captain  HENRY  HETH,  loth  Infantry,  U.  S.  A.  l8mo,  cloth. 
50  cents. 

"WAR  DEPARTMENT.  ) 

"  WASHINGTON,  March  let,  185&  } 

"The  System  of  Target  Practice,  prepared  under  direction  of  the  War  Department  by 
Captain  Henry  Heth,  10th  Infantry,  having  been  approved,  is  adopted  for  the  instruction 
of  troops  when  armed  with  the  musket,  rifle-musket,  rifle,  or  carbine." 

JOHN  B.  FLOYD,  Secretary  of  War. 


C!CHOOL  OF  THE  GUIDES. 

Designed  for  the  use  of  the  Militia  of  the  United  States.     Flexible 
cloth.     50  cents.  » 

"This  excellent  compilation  condenses  into  a  compass  of  less  than  sixty  pages  all  the 
instruction  necessary  for  the  guides,  and  the  information  being  disconnected  with  other 
matters,  is  more  readily  referred  to  and  more  easily  acquired." — Louisville  Journal 

"  It  has  received  high  praise,  and  will  prove  of  great  service  in  perfecting  the  drill  of  ou» 
Militia."— 2V.  American  and  U.  S.  Gazette,  Phil. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


N 


CLAN'S  SYSTEM  FOR  TRAINING  /  CAVALRY 
HORSES. 

By  KENNER  GAJIRARD,  Captain  Fifth  Cavalry,  U.  S.  A.    1  vol.,  i  zmo, 
cloth.      24  Lithographed  plates.     $1.50. 

*  *  *  «  ^e  are  glad  when  competent  men  bring  forward  works  that  are  intended  to 
facilitate  the  formation  of  an  effective  cavalry  force.  Of  this  class  is  Nolan's  Syst&m  for 
Training  Cavalry  Iforses,  prepared  for  use  in  this  country,  by  Captain  Kenner  Garrard, 
U.  8.  A.  Captain  Nolan  was  distinguished  in  the  British  service  for  his  knowledge  of  tho 
cavalry  arm,  and  for  his  general  talents.  As  the  work  had  become  out  of  print,  Captain 
Garrard  has  done  well  in  reproducing  it:  he  has  added  to  it  a  chapter  on  Karey's  Method 
of  Training  Horses,  and  another  on  Horse  Shoeing.  The  volume  is  well  illustrated.  It 
cannot  be  too  warmly  ttimniendod  to  general  use." — Boston  Daily  Evening  Traveller, 


A  USTRIAN  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 

Evolutions  of  the  Line  as  practised  by  the  Auftrian  Infantry,  and 
pted  in  1853.  Translated  by  Capt.  C.  M.  WILCOX,  Seventh 
Regiment,  U.  S.  Infantry.       1  vol.,  izmo.     Three  large  plates, 
cloth.     $1. 

"The  movements  of  armios  engaged  in  battle  have  often  been  compared  to  those  of 
the  chess-board,  and  we  cannot  doubt  that  there  are  certain  principles  of  tactics  in  actual 
war  as  in  that  game,  which  may  determine  the  result  independently,  in  a  great  measure, 
of  the  personal  strength  and  courage  of  the  men  engaged.  Tho  difference  between  these 
principles  as  applied  in  the  American  Army  and  in  the  Austrian,  is  so  wide  as  to  have 
suggested  the  translation  of  the  work  before  us,  which  contains  the  whole  result  of  the 
famous  Field-Marshal  UADETZKY'S  experience  for  twonty-flve  years,  while  in  supremo 
command  in  Italy."— New  York  Century. 


R 


HYMED  TACTICS,  BY  "  Gov. 


l  vol.,  i8mo,  paper.     With  portraits.     25  cents. 

"It  will  strike  tho  military  man,  familiar  with  the  tedious  routine  of  drill,  by  theory, 
practice,  and  memory,  as  a  most  unique  and  valuable  method  of  strengthening  the  latter, 
with  the  least  mental  exertion.  The  author  is  a  thorough  soldier,  and  his  ability  aa  a 
rhymester  will  be  conceded  by  any  intelligent  reader." — New  York  Leader. 

"Our  author  deserves  great  credit  for  the  ingenuity  he  has  displayed  in  putting  into 
verse  a  Manual  which  would  at  first  glance  seem  to  defy  the  most  persistent  efforts  of  tho 
rhymer.  The  book  contains  a  number  of  illustrations  representing  some  of  the  more 
rtimrult  positions,  in  the  figures  of  which  portraits  of  several  prominent  officer*  of  th« 
Ni-w  York  Volunt»«r»  may  be  recognized."— N«w  York 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


T 


REATISE  ON  GRAND  MILITARY  OPERATIONS. 


Illustrated  by  a  Critical  and  Military  History  of  the  Wars  of  Frederick 
the  Great.  With  a  summary  of  the  most  important  principles 
of  the  Art  of  War.  By  BARON  DE  JOMINI.  Illustrated  by  Mapa 
and  Plans.  Translated  from  the  French,  by  Col.  S,  B.  HOLA- 
BIRD,  A.  D.  C.,  U.  S.  Army.  In  two  vols.,  octavo.  In  press 


H 


ISTORY  OF  WEST  POINT. 


And  its  Military  Importance  during  the  American  R^olution ;  and  the 
Origin  and  Progress  of  the  United  States  Military  Academy.  By 
Captain  EDWARD  C.  BOYNTON,  A.  M.,  Adjutant  of  the  Military 
Academy.  With  numerous  Maps  and  Engravings,  i  vol.,  octavo. 
Blue  cloth,  $5.00. 


M 


ILITARY  BRIDGES, 


For  the  Passage  of  Infantry,  Artillery,  and  Baggage-Trains ;  with  sug- 
gestions of  many  new  expedients  and  constructions  for  crossing 
streams  and  chasms ;  designed  to  utilize  the  resources  ordinarily 
at  command  and  reduce  the  amount  and  cost  of  army  transporta- 
tion. Including  also  designs  for  Trestle  and  Truss  Bridges  for 
Military  Railroads,  adapted  especially  to  the  wants  of  the  Ser- 
vice of  the  United  States.  By  HERMAN  HAUPT,  Brig.-Gen.  in 
charge  of  the  construction  and  operation  of  the  U.  S.  Military 
Railways,  Author  of  "  General  Theory  of  Bridge  Construction, 
&c."  With  300  Plates  and  Illustrations.  Octavo. 


R 


EPORT  OF  THE  ENGINEER  AND  ARTILLERY 
OPERATIONS  OF  THE  ARMY  OF  THE  PO- 
TOMAC, 

From  its  Organization  to  the  close  of  the  Peninsular  Campaign.  By 
Brig.-Gen.  J.  G.  BARNARD,  and  other  Engineer  Officers,  and 
Brig.-Gen.  W.  F.  BARRY,  Chief  of  Artillery.  Illustrated  by 
numerous  Maps,  Plans,  &c.  Octavo.  $3.50. 


D.     VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


OlEGE    OF.   BOMARSUND     (1854). 


Journals  of  Operations  of  the  Artillery  and  Engineers.  Published 
by  permission  of  the  Minister  of  War.  Illustrated  by  Maps 
and  plans.  Translated  from  the  French  by  an  Army  Officer. 
l  vol.,  izmo,  cloth.  75  cents. 

"  To  military  men  this  little  volume  is  of  special  interest.  It  contains  a  translation  by 
an  officer  of  the  United  States  Army,  of  the  Journal  of  operations  by  the  artillery  and  en- 
gineers at  the  siege  of  Bomarsund  in  1S54,  published  by  permission  of  the  Freiu-h  Minister 
of  War  in  the  Journal  des  Arrne.es  speeialea  et  de  VEtat  Major.  The  account  of  the 
same  successful  attack,  given  by  Sir  Howard  Douglas  in  the  new  edition  of  his  work  on 
Gunnery,  is  appended;  and  the  narrative  is  illustrated  by  elaborate  maps  aud  plans.1' — 
New  York  Paper. 


M 


AXIMS  AND  INSTRUCTIONS  ON  THE  ART 
OF   WAR. 


Maxims,  Advice,  and  Instruction  on  the  Art  of  War ;  or,  A  Prac- 
tical Military  Guide  for  the  use  of  Soldiers  of  all  Arms  and  of 
all  Countries.  Translated  from  the  French  by  Captain  LENDY, 
Director  of  the  Practical  Military  College,  late  of  the  French 
Staff,  etc.,  etc.  l  vol.,  i8mo,  cloth.  75  cents.  • 

"We  do  not  pretend  to  much  military  science,  but  we  have  found  this  small  volume  easy 
to  understand  and  interesting  to  read.  It  is  compiled  from  old  works,  but  is  adapted  to 
new  notions  and  improvements,  and  it  gives  in  a  nut-shell  a  general  idea  of  the  whole  busi- 
ness of  war.  Some  men  who  have  always  maintained  'Quaker1  principles,  and  \vho  luivo 
never  studied  the  trade  and  mystery  of  fighting,  find  it  difficult  to  comprehend  the  various 
strategic  movements  that  are  chronicled  from  day  to  day  in  the  newspapers.  These  men 
should  look  into  the  subject  of  war,  and  we  advise  them,  as  &  beginning,  to  read  this  book. 
It  will  probably  help  their  cloudy  perceptions,  and  enable  them  to  see  clearly  the  mean- 
ing of  military  operations,  which  now  they  cannot  understand.11 — Providcnca  Journal. 


N 


OTES  ON   SEA-COAST  DEFENCE: 


Consisting  of  Sea-Coast  Fortification ;  the  Fifteen-Inch  Gun ;  and 
Casemate  Embrasure.  By  Gen.  J.  G.  BARNARD,  Corps  of  En- 
gineers, U.  S.  A.  l  vol.,  8vo,  cloth,  plates.  <$i  50. 

"This  small  volume  by  one  of  the  most  accomplished  officers  in  the  United  States 
service  is  especially  valuable  at  this  time.  Concisely  and  thoroughly  Major  Barnard  dis- 
msse.n  the  subjects  included  in  this  volume,  and  gives  information  that  will  bo  read  with 
pn-sit  profit  by  military  men,  and  by  all  interested  in  the  art  of  war  as  a  defensive  force.'1 — 
yew  York  Coimnerciul. 


D.   VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


M 


ANUAL   FOR  QUARTERMASTERS  AND  CoM- 
MISS  ARIES, 


Containing  Instructions  in  the  Preparation  of  Vouchers,  Abstracts, 
Returns,  &c.,  embracing  all  the  recent  changes  in  the  Armjf 
Regulations,  together  with  instructions  respecting  Taxation  of 
Salaries,  etc.  By  Captain  R.  F.  HUNTER,  late  of  the  U.  S. 
Army.  I2mo,  cloth.  §1. 

"This  is  a  compendious  volume  of  110  pages,  containing  a  large  amount  of  useful  infor- 
mation in  a  small  compass.  The  directions  for  making  up  the  abstracts  and  returns  of  the 
Quartermaster's  and  Commissary's  departments  will  afford  great  facilities  to  persons  chur;:- 
ed  with  those  duties  ;  and  as  this  is  the  only  work  in  existence  which  is  devoted  to  these 
particular  objects,  and  ns  the  accounts  of  Quartermasters  and  Commissaries  are 
to  the  most  rigid  scrutiny,  this  Manual  supplies  a  want  which  has  long  been 
and  sensibly  felt  by  those  for  whose  use  and  particular  bone  fit  the  book  is  intended.  The 
arrangement  of  the  matter  is  extremely  perspicuous,  and  the  explanations  are  complete  and 
easily  understood." — Army  and  Navy  Gazette. 

"This  is  the  only  work  of  the  kind  extant.  It  is  based  on  the  latest  regulations  of  tho 
War  Department,  and  will  be  regarded  as  authority  by  those  officers  for  whose  uso  it  is 
4esigned." — Saturday  Evening  Gaaette, 


A  RMY  PAY  DIGEST,  AND   READY  CALCULA- 
TOR; OR,  REGIMENTAL  PAY  TABLE. 

Compiled  by  Major  EZRA  WEBB.      Octavo,  cloth.     $2. 

"  A  complete  condensation  of  the  military  laws  and  general  army  orders,  as  relates  to  pay 
emoluments,  &c.,  in  the  United  States  Army,  from  the  commencement  of  the  Eebellion  to 
the  present  time— an  invaluable  companion  to  paymasters  as  well  as  to  all  officers  and  sol- 
diers in  our  armies.  It  is  desirable  to  every  one  interested  in  the  pay  of  the  army  or  seek- 
ing information  on  the  subject  (including  pensions,  claims  against  the  United  States  and 
mode  of  procedure),  saving,  as  it  will,  a  great  amount  of  research,  putting  very  desirable- 
information  within  the  reach  of  every  one.  All  may  see  at  a  glance  the  pay  of  officers  (in- 
cluding subsistence,  forage,  servants  and  their  clothing,  transportation,  fuel,  and  quarters-) 
and  men  of  all  arms  and  grades  per  day  or  days,  month  or  months ;  the  organization  of  tlu> 
army,  from  ,'the  company'  to  the  ' corps  d'  arme>.'  Indeed,  it  is  emphatically  the  hook 
for  the  times;  and  a  copy  should  be  in  the  hands  of  every  man  in  the  army,  as  also  bank- 
ers, contractors,  claim  agents,  &c."— JVreio  York  Herald. 


D.   VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


R 


IFLES  AND   RIFLE  PRACTICE. 


An  Elementary  Treatise  on  the  Theory  of  Rifle  Firing ;  explaining 
the  causes  of  Inaccuracy  of  Fire  and  the  manner  of  correcting  it; 
with  descriptions  of  the  Infantry  Rifles  of  Europe  and  the  Uni- 
ted States,  their  Balls  and  Cartridges.  By  Capt.  C.  M.  WIL- 
cox,  U.  S.  A.  New  edition,  with  engravings  and  cuts.  Green 
cloth.  $1.75. 

"  Although  eminently  a  scientific  work,  special  care  seems  to  have  been  taken  to  avoid 
the  use  of  technical  terms,  and  to  make  the  whole  subject  readily  coinprchensililo  to  the 
practical  enquirer.  It  was  designed  ch icily  for  the  use  of  Volunteers  and  the  Militia  :  but 
tlu-  War  Department  has  evinced  its  approval  of  its  merits  by  ordering  from  the  pub- 
lisher one  thousand  copies  for  the  use  of  the  United  States  Army." — Louixville  Journal. 

'•  The  book  will  be  found  intensely  interesting  to  all  who  are  watching  the  changes  in  the 
art  of  war  arising  from  the  introduction  of  tho  new  ri tied  arms.  We  recommend  to  our 
readers  to  buy  the  book." — Jf Hilary  Gazette. 

"  A  most  valuable  treatise." — Xew  York  Herald. 

u  This  book  is  quite  original  in  its  character.  That  character  is  completeness.  It  ren- 
ders a  study  of  most  of  the  works  on  the  rifle  that  have  been  published  (juitc  unnecessary, 
AVi-  eordially  recommend  the  book.'' — United  Service  Gazette,  London. 

"The  work  being  in  all  its  parts  derived  from  tho  best  sources,  is  of  the  highest  author- 
ity, and  will  be  accepted  as  the  standard  on  the  subject  of  which  it  treats."— New  Yorker. 


N 


TEW   BAYONET  EXERCISE. 


A  New  Manual  of  the  Bayonet,  for  the  Army  and  Militia  of  the 
United  States.  By  Colonel  J.  C.  KELTON,  U.  S.  A.  With 
thirty  beautifully-engraved  plates.  Red  cloth.  •  $1.75. 

This  Manual  was  prepared  for  the  use  of  the  Corps  of  Cadets,  and  has  been  introduced 
at  thi!  Military  Academy  with  satisfactory  results.  It  is  simply  the  theory  of  the  attack 
and  defence  of  the  sword  applied  to  the  bayonet,  on  tho  authority  of  men  skilled  in  tho 
use  of  arms. 

The  Manual  contains  practical  lessons  in  Fencing,  and  prescribes  the  defence  against 
Cavalry,  and  the  manner  of  conducting  a  contest  with  a  Swordsman. 

'•  This  work  merits  a  favorable  reception  at  the  hands  of  all  military  men.  It  contains 
all  the  instruction  necessary  to  enable  an  officer  to  drill  his  men  in  the  use  of  this  weapon. 
The  introduction  of  the  Sabre  Bayonet  in  our  anny  renders  a  knowledge  of  the  exercisu 
more  imperative."1 — New  York  Times. 

MANUAL  OF  SWORD. AND  SABRE  Ex 

ERCISE. 
By  Colonel  J.  C.  KELTON,  U.  S.  A.     Thirty  plates.     In  press. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


E  WAR  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES. 

A  Report  to  the  Swiss  Military  Department.  Preceded  by  a  Dis' 
course  to  the  Federal  Military  Society  assembled  at  Berne,  Aug. 
18,  1862.  By  FERDINAND  LECOMTE,  Lieut.-Col.  Swiss  Confed- 
eration .  Author  of  "  Relation  Historique  et  Critique  de  la  Cam- 
pagne  d'ltalie  en  1859,"  "L'ltalie  en  1860,"  and  "Le  Ge- 
neral Jomini,  sa  Via,  et  ses  Ecrits,"  etc.,  etc.  Translated  from 
the  French  by  a  Staff  Officer,  i  vol.,  I2mo.  $1. 

"  Returning  to  Switzerland  from  a  campaign  authorized  by  the  Swiss  Military  Depart- 
ment, Col.  Lecomlo  addressed  a  discourse  to  the  Federal  Military  Society,  at  Berne,  in 
which  he  stated  very  clearly  and  concisely  the  circumstances  leading  to  the  present  war, 
the  situation  of  the  country  at  the  time  of  the  commencement  of  the  troubles,  and  the 
progress  of  events  up  very  nearly  to  the  present  time. 

"In  his  quality  of  a  Swiss  federal  officer,  Col.  Lecomte,  bearing  the  recommendations  of 
the  Federal  Military  Department  of  Switzerland,  of  Mr.  Fo^ir.  Ambassador  of  the  V.  EL  :;t 
Berne,  and  of  others,  was  well  received  by  Mr.  Soward,  Secretary  of  State,  and  by  Geni-ral 
McClellan,  and  by  the  Swiss  Consul  at  New  York.  General  McClellan,  at  Washington 
attached  him  to  his  staff  as  a  voluntary  aide-de-camp,  he  retaining  his  Swiss  rank  of  Major, 
and  with  the  condition  of  being  able  at  any  time  to  return  to  his  country,  should  he  bo 
called  thither  by  his  government.  He  met  on  that  staff  with  other  European  office; 
cupyingthat  position  on  the  same  terms  with  himself.  So  that  he  had  good  opportunities 
of  being  informed  on  the  merits  of  the  war,  and  the  manner  of  its  conduct,  and  being  an 
intelligent  man,  as  this  report  demonstrates,  he  made  the  most  of  that  opportunity. 

"He  very  lucidly  describes  the  theatre  of  the  war,  statistically  and  geographically,  the 
parties  in  the  strife  and  their  relations  to  each  other ;  the  causes  of  the  war ;  the  earliest 
hostilities;  the  relative  strength  of  tho  armies;  the  principal  military  acts,  from  Big  Bethel 
onwards;  the  armament,  equipment,  clothing,  materials,  subsistence,  &c.,  of  the  service; 
armored  vessels  and  their  transactions ;  his  own  personal  impressions  in  regard  to  the  de- 
fects of  the  American  Army,  &c.  Then  there  is  a  supplementary  report  of  great  interest, 
describing  the  later  events  of  the  author's  observation  and  experience :  the  -whole  making 
one  of  the  most  valuable  contributions  to  the  literary  history  of  the  war  we  have  had."— 
Express, 

LAW  OF  FREEDOM  AND  BONDAGE  IN 
THE  UNITED  STATES.' 

By  JOHN  CODMAN  HURD,  Counsellor  at  Law.  2  vols.,  octavo.  Price, 
bound  in  cloth,  87.  Law  sheep,  $8. 

"Mr.  Kurd  has  completed  a  work  which  must  take  its  place  as  the  standard  authority  in 
the  branch  of  Law  to  which  it  relates.    It  is  strictly  a  legal  work,  committed  to  no  theory, 
designed  to  sustain  no  individual  phase  of  opinion,  but  comprising  an  outline  of  the  entire 
legislation,  constitutional  and  statutory  of  the  general  government  and  the  individual 
<>:>.  the.  subject  of  slavery,  with  an  analysis  of  all  the  legal  decisions  and  judicial  <1<'<-t,i 
i  :•:  out  of  sucli  legislation."— Forth  American  Review. 


D.  VAN   NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 
E    "C.    S.    A.,"   AND    THE     BATTLE     OF 

BULL  RUN. 

(A  Letter  to  an  English  friend),  by  J.  G.  BARNARD,  Lt.-Col.  of  Engi- 
neers, U.  S.  A.,  Brigadier-General  and  Chief  Engineer,  Army 
of  the  Potomac.  With  five  maps.  1  vol.,  8vo,  cloth.  $1  50. 

"This  hook  was  begun  by  the  author  as  a  letter  to  a  friend  in  England,  but  ns  he  pro- 
.i:i<l  his   MSS.  increased  in  magnitude,  he  changed  his  original  plan,  and  the  book 
result.     General  Barnard1  gives  by  far  the.  best,  most  comprehensible,  and  complete 
:ii-count  of  the  Rattle  of  Bull  Uuii  wo  have  seen.     It  is  illustrated  by  some  beautifully  drawn 
maps,  prepared  for  the  War  Department  by  the  topographical  engineers.     lie  demonstrates 
to. -i  .-.  rtaiiity  that  but  for  the  causeless  panic  the  day  might  not  have  been  lost    The 
author  writes  with  viiror  and  earnestness,  and  has  contributed  one  of  the  most  valuable  re- 
cords yet  published  of  the  history  of  the  war." — Boston  Commercial  Bulletin, 

"The  work  is  clearly  written,  and  can  but  leave  the  impression  upon  every  reader's 
mind  that  it  is  truth.  "We  commend  it  to  the  perusal  of  every  one  who  wants  an  intelli- 
gent, truthful,  and  graphic  description  of  the  '  C.  S.  A.,'  and  the  Battle  of  Bull  Eun."— New 
York  Observer. 


^HE   POLITICAL  AND    MILITARY  HISTORY 
OF  THE  CAMPAIGN  OF  WATERLOO. 


I1 


Translated  from  the  French  of  General  BARON  DE  JOMINI.  By 
Capt.  S.  V.  BENET,  U.  S.  Ordnance.  l  vol.,  I2mo,  cloth. 
Third  edition.  $1.25. 

"Baron  Joinini  has  the  reputation  of  being  one  of  the  greatest  military  historians  and 
critics  of  the  century.  His  merits  have  been  recognized  by  the  highest  military  authori- 
ties in  Iv.irop.-.  and  \vore  rewarded  in  a  conspicuous  manner  by  the  greatest  military  power 
in  Christendom.  Ho  learned  the  art  of  war  in  the  school  of  experience,  the  best  and  only 
fi.'iisliing  school  of  the  soldier.  lie  served  with  distinction  in  nearly  all  the  campaigns  of 
Napoleon,  and  it  was  mainly  from  the  gigantic  military  operations  of  this  matchless  mas- 
ter of  the  art  that  he  was  enabled  to  discover  its  true  principles,  and  to  ascertain  the  best 
means  of  their  application  to  the  infinity  of  combinations  which  actual  war  presents. 
Joinini  criticises  the  details  of  Waterloo  with  great  science,  and  yet  in  a  manner  that 
•s  the  general  reader  as  well  as  the  professional." — New  York  World. 

'•Tiiis  book  by  Joinini,  though  forming  the  twenty^feecond  chapter  of  his  'Life  of  Na- 
poleon,' is  really  a  unit  in  itself,  and  forms  a  complete  summary  of  the  campaign.  It  is 
an  interesting  volume,  and  deserves  a  y\ano  in  the  affections  of  all  who  would  be  accom- 
:  military  men.'1— New  York  Times. 

'•The   present  volume  is  the  concluding  portion  of  his  great  work, 'Vie  Politiquo  ct 

Militaire  de  Napoleon,'  published  in  1826.     Capt.  Benet's  translation  of  it  has  been  for 

IBM  IK  fore  the  public,  and  has  now  reached  a  second  edition;   it  is  very  ably  cxe- 

c:i:.ed,  an  1  forms  a  work  which  will  always  be  interesting,  especially  so  at  a  time  when 

military  affairs  are  uppermost  iu  the  public  mind.—Fhlladelj)7ii<i  North  American. 


A 


TREATISE  ON  THE  CAMP  AND  MARCH. 


With  which  is  connected  the  Construction  of  Field  Works  and  Mili- 
tary Bridges  ;  with  an  Appendix  of  Artillery  Ranges,  &c.  For 
the  use  of  Volunteers  and  Militia  in  the  United  States.  By 
Captain  HENRY  D.  GRAFTON,  U.  S.  A.  l  vol.,  izmo,  cloth. 
75  cents. 


/^UNNERY  IN  1858. 


A  Treatise  on  Rifles,  Cannon,  and  Sporting  Arms.     By  WM.  GREENER, 
C.  E.      l  vol.,  8vo,  cloth.     $3.     Full  calf,  $4  50. 


M 


ANUAL  OF  HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


For  the  use  of  Volunteers,      l  vol.,  izmo,  red  cloth.     7 5  cents. 

"Should  be  in  the  hands  of  every  Artillerist'" — X.  Y.  lUuxtrut«l  Xeica. 

"This  is  a  concise  and  well-prepared  Manual,  adapted  to  the  wants  of  Volunteers.  The 
instruction,  which  is  of  an  important  nature,  is  presented  in  a  simple  and  clear  style,  such 
as  will  be  easily  understood.  The  volume  is  also  illustrated  with  explanatory  cuts  and 
drawings.  It  is  a  work  of  practical  value,  and  one  needed  at  the  present  time  in  the  ser- 
vice."—Boston  Commercial  Bulletin. 


H 


INTS  TO  COMPANY   OFFICERS  ON  THEIR 
MILITARY    DUTIES. 


By  Capt.  C.  C.  ANDREWS,  3d  Regt.  Minnesota  Vols.      i  vol.,  i8mo, 
cloth.     50  cents. 

"  This  is  a  hand-book  of  good  practical  advice,  which  officers  of  all  ranks  may  study  with 
advantage." — Philadelphia  Press. 

"  This  little  volume  contains  many  valuable  suggestions,  and  conveys  not  a  little  im- 
portant practical  information  to  military  men.  It  should  be  read  and  its  precepts  remem- 
bered by  every  young  officer." — Cincinnati  Daily  Gazette. 

"We  wish  it  could  be  read  and  studied  by  all  having  men  under  their  command."-^ 
N.  Y.  Commercial  Advertiser. 


OIEGE  AND  REDUCTION  OF  FORT  PULASKI, 
GEORGIA. 

Papers  on  Practical  Engineering.  No.  8.  Official  Report  to  the 
U.  S.  Engineer  Department  of  the  Siege  and  Reduction  of  Fort 
Pulaski,  Ga.,  February,  March,  and  April,  1862.  By  Brig.- 
General  Q.  A.  GILLMORE,  U.  S.  A.  Illustrated  by  Maps  and 
Views.  1  vol.,  8vo,  cloth.  $2  50. 

"  This  is  an  official  history  of  the  siege  of  Fort  Pulaski,  from  the  commencement,  with  all 
the  details  in  full,  made  up  from  a  daily  record,  forming  a  most  valuable  paper  for  future 
reference.  The  situation  and  construction  of  the  Fort,  the  position  of  the  guns  both  of  tho 
rebels  and  the  Federals,  and  their  operation,  are  made  plain  by  maps  and  engraved  views 
ol'  dirteront  sections.  Additional  reports  from  other  officers  are  furnished  in  the  appendix, 
and  every  thing  has  been  done  to  render  the  work  full  and  reliable." — Boston  Journal, 

DICTIONARY  OF  ALL  OFFICERS  IN  THE  UNITED 

STATES  ARMY, 

From  1789  to  January  1st,  1853,  and  of  the  Navy  and  Marine  Corps. 
Second  edition,  with  a  Supplement,  bringing  it  down  to  January 
1,  1860.  By  Col.  CHAS.  K.  GARDNER.  1  vol.,  I2mo,  cloth. 
$3. 


U 


NION   FOUNDATIONS. 


A  Study  of  American  Nationality,  as  a  Fact  of  Science.  By  Capt. 
E.  B.  HUNT,  Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  A.  1  vol.,  8vo.  30 
cents. 


pEXAS,  AND    ITS    LATE    MILITARY    OCCUPA- 
TION AND  EVACUATION. 

fly  Capt.  EDWIN   D.    PHILLIPS,  1st  Infantry,  U.  S.  A.     8vo,  pipej 
25  cents. 

A/foRDECAi's   REPORT. 

Military  Commission  to  Europe  in  1855  and  1856.  Report  of  Major 
ALFRED  MORDECAI,  U.  S.  Ordnance  Department.  1  vol.,  folio. 
With  Views  and  Maps.  $1  50. 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


A 


TREATISE  ON   ORDNANCE  AND  NAVAL 

GUNNERY. 


Compiled  and  arranged  as  a  Text-Book  for  the  U.  S.  Naval  Acade- 
my, by  Lieutenant  EDWARD  SIMPSON,  U.  S.  N.  Third  edi- 
tion, revised  and  enlarged.  1  vol.,  8vo,  plates  and  cuts,  half 
morocco.  $5.00. 


"  As  the  compiler  has  charge  of  the  instruction  in  Naval  Gunnery  at  the  Naval  Acad- 
emy, his  work,  in  the  compilation  of  which  he  has  consulted  a  large  number  of  eminent 
authorities,  is  probably  well  suited  for  the  purpose  designed  by  it— namely,  the  circulation 
of  information  which  many  officers,  owing  to  constant  service  afloat,  may  not  have  been 
able  to  collect  In  simple  and  plain  language  it  gives  instruction  as  to  cannon,  gun-car- 
riages, gunpowder,  projectiles,  fuzes,  locks,  and  primers ;  the  theory  of  pointing  guns,  rifles, 
the  practice  of  gunnery,  and  a  great  variety  of  other  similar  matters,  interesting  to  fight- 
ing men  ou  sea  and  land." — 'Washington  Daily  Globe. 

"  A  vast  amount  of  information  is  conveyed  in  a  readable  and  familiar  form.  The  illustra- 
tions are  excellent,  and  many  of  them  unique,  being  colored  or  bronzed  so  as  to  represent 
various  military  arms,  Ac.,  with  more  than  photographic  literalness,"—  Washington  Star. 

"  It  is  scarcely  necessary  for  us  to  say,  that  a  work  prepared  by  a  writer  BO  practically 
conversant  with  all  the  subjects  of  which  he  treats,  and  who  has  such  a  reputation  for 
scientific  ability,  cannot  fail  to  take  at  once  a  high  place  among  the  text-books  of  our  naval 
service.  It  has  been  approved  by  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  and  will  henceforth  be  one  of 
the  standard  authorities  on  all  matters  connected  with  Naval  Gunnery."— yew  York 
Herald. 


L 


UCE'S  SEAMANSHIP  : 


Compiled  from  various  authorities,  and  Illustrated  with  numerous 
Original  and  Selected  Designs.  For  the  use  of  the  United  States 
Naval  Academy.  By  S.  B.  LUCE,  Lieut.-Commander  U.  S.  N. 
In  two  parts.  Second  Edition.  One  royal  octavo  volume, 
cloth,  $10.00 


A 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


TREATISE  ON   MILITARY  SURVEYING. 


Theoretical  and  Practical,  including  a  description  of  Surveying  In- 
struments. By  G.  H.  MENDELL,  Captain  of  Engineers,  i  vol. 
8vo,  with  numerous  Illustrations.  $2.00. 


L 


IEBER  ON  GUERILLA  PARTIES. 


Guerilla  Parties  considered  with  reference  to  the  Laws  and  Usages  of 
War.  Written  at  the  request  of  Major-Gen.  HENRY  W.  HAL- 
LECK,  General-in-Chief  of  the  Army  of  the  United  States.  By 
FRANCIS  LIEBER.  izmo,  paper.  25  cents. 


I 


NSTRUCTIONS     FOR    THE     GOVERNMENT    OF 

ARMIES   OF  THE   U.  S.  IN  THE   FIELD. 


Prepared  by  FRANCIS  LIEBER,  LL.  D.,  and  revised  by  a  Board  of 
Officers,  and  approved  by  the  War  Department,  in  General  Or- 
der, No.  100.  I2mo.  Price  25  cents  paper. covers.  Red  cloth, 
50  cents. 


ALPHABETICAL  ARMY  REGISTER,  1863. 

Giving  the  Names,  Date  of  present  and  original  Commissions,  Rank, 
Place  of  Nativity,  and  from  whence  appointed,  of  all  the  Officers 
of  the  United  States  Army,  as  shown  by  the  official  Army  Regis- 
ter for  1863.  Octavo.  50  cents. 


H 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 

ALLECK'S  INTERNATIONAL  LAW. 


International  Law ;  or,  Rules  Regulating  the  Intercourse  of  States  in 
Peace  and  War.  By  Major-Gen.  H.  W.  HALLECK,  Command- 
ing the  Army,  i  vol.,  8vo,  law  sheep.  $6. 


"  In  preparing  this  work  on  the  laws  of  war,  Gen.  Halleck  appears  to  have  made  ft  very 
extended  research  among  the  authorities.  His  citations  range  through  most  of  the  writers 
niul  decisions  touching  upon  such  subjects,  including  the  leading  European  publicists.  for 
centuries  back.  His  use  of  authorities  is  valuable,  also,  as  being  not  only  legal,  but  histor- 
ical. Upon  points  of  military  usage  he  cites  examples  from  history  freely  and  with  effect 
referring  not  only  to  the  modern  military  historians,  but  even  going  back  to  the  military 
days  of  Eome  and  Greece. 

"General  Ilalleck  appears  to  have  thoroughly  digested  the  whole  range  of  topics  which 
he  has  to  consider,  and  forms  his  opinions  with  judgment,  and  expresses  them  clearly  and 
briefly."  —  Boston  Journal.  , 

"Gen.  Halleck  has  been  engaged  many  years  on  the  compilation  of  this  work  ;  in  fact 
he  began  collecting  the  materials  for  it  during  the  Mexican  War,  and  has  since  been 
diligently  adding  to  them,  and  the  result  of  his  labors  is  embodied  in  the  volume  before 
\is.  The  attentive  perusal  of  a  work  of  this  description  would  demand  far  more  time  than 
we  could  give  it;  dnd,  after  all,  the  true  value  of  it  can  only  be  ascertained  with  certainty 
by  the  test  of  constant  consultation,  as  cases  of  international  law  arise.  "We  do  not,  on  a 
hasty  glance,  perceive  that  General  Ilalleck  advances  any  new  opinions  of  his  own  on  any 
of  the  many  vexed  questions  in  this  most  difficult  department  of  jurisprudence,  but  we 
notice  evidence  of  indefatigable  labor  and  of  pains-taking  reference  to  the  best  authorities, 
which  must  give  his  work,  at  all  events,  the  value  of  a  faithful  compendium.  He  gives  a 
host  of  authorities  for  every  doctrine  that  is  laid  down,  and  cites  not  merely  from  the 
most  eminent  jurists,  such  as  Wheaton,  Kent,  Story,  Stowell,  Bynkerschoeck,  Vutt.-il.  (\\-»- 
tius,  Puffendorlf,  Laurent,  Ompteda,  Kamptz,  Phillimore,  Pando,  lleffter,  Martens,  Wild- 
man,  and  others,  but  from  the  best  authorities  on  military  and  naval  warfare,  such  as 
Joniini,  Schwartz,  Merlin,  Dolloz,  Lampredi,  Hautefeuille,  De  Cussy,  Kiquelane,  Ortolan, 
Pistoye,  Duverdy,  &c.,  «tc.  ;  on  Commercial  law,  as  Chitty,  Duer,  Manning,  Kutherforth, 
Masse,  Leiber,  Ac.,  &c.  ;  on  diplomacy  and  history,  as  Home,  Marcy,  Gardner,  Mackin- 
tosh, Hal  lam,  Alison,  Burlamaqui,  &c.,  &c.  The  work  is  very  systematically  and  clearly  laid 
out.  and  embraces  every  department  of  international  law.  Such  a  book  of  reference  as  thisi 
ought  to  be  in  the  hands  of  every  commanding  officer  by  land  and  by  sea,  and  it  is  not  too 
large  and  unwieldy  to  be  easy  of  carriage.  This  edition  is  well  printed  and  strongly  bound." 
iit  Inquirer. 


"The  work  will  bo  found  to  be  of  great  iise  to  army  and  navy  officers,  to  professional 
lawyers,  and  to  all  interested  in  the  topics  of  which  it  treats—  topics  to  which  present 
events  give  a  greatly  enhanced  importance—  such  as  "Declaration  of  War  and  its  KtTects;" 
4i  Sieges  and  Blockades;"  "  Visitation  and  Search;"  "Right  of  Search;"  "Prize-  Courts;" 
"  Military  Occupation  ;"  "Treaties  of  Peace;*1  "Sovereignty  of  States,"  &c.,  and  valuable 
information  for  consuls  and  ambassadors."  —  X.  Y.  Evening  Pout. 


E 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

LEMENTARY  INSTRUCTION  IN  NAVAL 
.NANCE  AND  GUNNERY. 


By  JAMES  H.  WARD,  Commander  U.  S.  Navy,  Author  of  "  Naval 
Tactics,"  and  "Steam  for  the  Million."  New  Edition,  revised 
and  enlarged.  8vo,  cloth.  $2. 

"  It  conveys  an  amount  of  information  in  the  same  space  to  be  found  nowhere  else,  and 
given  with  a  clearness  which  renders  it  useful  as  well  to  the  general  as  the  professional 
inquirer."— JV:  Y.  Evening  Post. 


N 


AUTICAL  ROUTINE  AND  STOWAGE. 


With  Short  Rules  in  Navigation.  By  JOHN  McLzoo  MURPHY  and 
WM.  N.  JEFFERS,  Jr.,  U.  S.  N.  i  vol.,  8vo,  blue  cloth. 
$2  50. 


T 


OTTEN'S  NAVAL  TEXT-BOOK. 


Naval  Text-Book  and  Dictionary,  compiled  for  the  use  of  the  Mid- 
shipmen of  the  U.  S.  Navy.  By  Commander  B.  J.  TOTTEN, 
U.  S.  N.  Second  and  revised  edition.  1  vol.,  I2mo.  $2  50. 

"  This  work  is  prepared  for  the  Midshipmen  of  the  United  States  Navy.  It  is  a  complete 
manual  of  instructions  as  to  the  duties  which  pertain  to  their  office,  and  appears  to  have 
been  prepared  with  great  caro,  avoiding  errors  and  inaccuracies  which  had  crept  into  a 
former  edition  of  the  work,  and  embracing  valuable  additional  matter.  It  is  a  book  which 
should  be  in  the  hands  of  every  midshipman,  and  officers  of  high  rank  in  the  navy  would 
often  find  it  a  useful  companion." — Boston  Journal. 


G 


UNNERY  INSTRUCTIONS. 


Simplified  for  the  Volunteer  Officers  of  the  U.  S.  Navy,  with  hints 
to  Executive  and  other  Officers.  By  Lieut.  EDWARD  BARRETT, 
U.  S.  N.,  Instructor  of  Gunnery,  Navy  Yard,  Brooklyn,  i 
vol.,  i2mo,  cloth.  $1  25. 

"It  is  a  thorough  work,  treating  plainly  on  its  subject,  and  contains  also  some  valuable 
hints  to  executive  officers.  No  officer  in  the  volunteer  navy  should  be  without  a  copy." — 
f!  > </on  Evening  Traveller. 


H 


ISTORY    OF    THE    UNITED    STATES  NAVAL 

ACADEMY. 

With  Biographical  Sketches,  and  the  names  of  all  the  Superintend- 
ents, Professors  and  Graduates ;  to  which  is  added  a  Record  of 
some  of  the  earliest  votes  by  Congress,  of  Thanks,  Medals  and 
Swords  to  Naval  Officers.  By  EDWARD  CHAUNCEY  MARSHALL, 
A.  M.  i  vol.,  izmo,  cloth,  plates.  $1. 

"  Every  naval  man  will  find  it  not  only  a  pleasant  companion,  but  an  invaluable  book  of 
reference.  It  is  seldom  that  so  much  information  is  made  accessible  in  so  agreeable 
a  manner  in  so  small  a  space."— New  York  Times. 


M 


ANUAL  OF  INTERNAL  RULES  AND  REG- 
ULATIONS FOR  MEN-OF-WAR. 

By  Commodore  U.  P.  LEVY,U.  S.  N.,  late  Flag  Officer  commanding 
U.  S.  Naval  Force  in  the  Mediterranean,  &c.  Flexible  blue 
cloth.  Third  edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  50  cents. 

"Among  the  professional  publications  for  which  we  are  indebted  to  the  war,  we  willing- 
ly give  a  prominent  place  to  this  useful  little  Manual  of  Ilules  and  Regulations  to  be 
observed^on  board  of  ships  of 'war.  Its  authorship  is  a  sufficient  guarantee  for  its  accuracy 
and  practical  value;  and  as  a  guide  to  young  officers  in  providing  for  the  disciplinei 
police,  and  sanitary  government  of  the  vessels  under  their  command,  we  know  of  nothing 
superior."—^  Y.  Herald. 


N 


AVAL  LIGHT  ARTILLERY. 


Instructions  for  Naval  Light  Artillery,  afloat  and  ashore,  prepared 
and  arranged  for  the  U.  S.  Naval  Academy,  by  Lieutenant  W. 
H.  PARKER,  U.  S.  N.  Second  edition,  revised  by  Lieut.  S.  B. 
LUCE,  U.  S.  N.,  Assistant  Inftructor  of  Gunnery  and  Tactics  at 
the  United  States  Naval  Academy,  i  vol.,  8vo,  cloth,  with  22 
plates.  $2.00. 

"The  service  for  which  this  is  the  text-book  of  instruction  is  of  special  importance  in 
the  present  war.  The  use  of  light  boat-pieces  is  constant  and  important,  and  young  offi- 
cers are  frequently  obliged  to  leave  their  boats,  tike  their  pieces  ashore,  and  manoeuvre 
them  as  field  artillery.  Not  unfrequently,  also,  they  are  incorporated,  when  ashore,  with 
troops,  and  must  handle  their  guns  like  the  artillery  soldiers  of  a  battery.  '  The  Exercise 
of  the  Howitzer  Afloat1  was  prepared  and  arranged  by  Captain  Dahlgren.  whose  name 
gives  additional  sanction  and  value  to  the  book.  A  manual  for  the  Sword  and  Pistol  i* 
also  given.  The  plates  are  numerous  and  exceedingly  clear,  and  the  whole  typogr* 
excellent."— Philadelphia  Inquirer. 


H 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


OLLEY'S  RAILWAY  PRACTICE. 


American  and  European  Railway  Practice,  in  the  Economical  Gener, 
ation  of  Steam,  including  the  materials  and  construction  of  CoaU 
burning  Boilers,  Combustion,  the  Variable  Blast,  Vaporization, 
Circulation,  Superheating,  Supplying  and  Heating  Feed-w^ter, 
&c.,  and  the  adaptation  of  Wood  and  Coke-burning  Engines  to 
Coal-burning;  and  in  Permanent  Way,  including  Road-bed, 
Sleepers,  Rails,  Joint  Fastenings,  Street  Railways,  &c.,  &c.  By 
ALEXANDER  L.  HOLLEY,  B.  P.  With  77  lithographed  plates. 
i  vol.,  folio,  cloth.  $10. 

"This  is  an  elaborate  treatise  by  one  of  our  ablest  civil  engineers,  on  the  construction 
and  use  of  locomotives,  with  a  few  chapters  on  the  building  of  Eailroads  *  *  *  All  the- so 
subjects  are  treated  by  the  Author  who  is  a  first  class  railroad  engineer,  in  both  an  intelli- 
gent and  intelligible  manner.  The  facts  and  ideas  are  well  arranged,  and  presented  in  a 
clear  and  simple  style,  accompanied  by  beautiful  engravings,  and  we  presume  the  work 
will  be  regarded  as  indispensable  by  all  who  arc  interested  in  a  knowledge  of  the  construction 
of  railroads,  and  rolling  stock,  or  the  working  of  locomotives." — Scientific  American. 


E 


UROPEAN  ORDNANCE  AND  IRON-CLAD  DE- 


FENCES, 

With  some  account  of  the  American  Practice,  embracing  the  Fabrica- 
tion and  Test  of  Heavy  Guns;  Projectiles  and  Rifling;  the 
Manufacture  and  Test  of  Armor,  from  official  data,  with  a  detail- 
ed account  of  English  experiment ;  the  principles,  structure,  and 
classification  of  Iron-Clad  Vessels ;  Marine  Steam  Machinery, 
&c.  By  ALEX.  L.  HOLLEY,  B.  P.,  Author  of  "  American  and 
European  Railway  Practice,"  &c.  i  vol.,  8vo,  cloth.  With 
250  illustrations.  In  press. 

^  I  AHE  PRINCIPLES  OF  STRATEGY  AND  GRAND 
TACTICS. 

Translated  from  the  French  of  General  G.  H.  DUFOUR.  By  WILLIAM 
P.  CRAIGHILL,  Capt.  of  Engineers  U.  S.  Army,  and  Assistant 
Professor  of  Engineering,  U.  S.  Military  Academy,  West  Point. 
From  the  last  French  Edition.  Illustrated.  In  one  volume, 
izmo.  $2.50. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


L 


ESSONS  AND   PRACTICAL  NOTES  ON   STEAM, 


The  Steam-Engine,  Propellers,  &c.,  &c.,  for  Young  Marine  Engi- 
neers, Students,  and  others.  By  the  late  W.  R.  KING,  U.  S.  N. 
Revised  by  Chief-Engineer  J.  W.  KING,  U.  S.  Navy.  Fourth 
edition,  enlarged.  8vo,  cloth.  $2  oo. 

"Tliis  is  the  second  edition  of  a  valuable  work  of  the  late  "W.  II.  KING,  U.  S.  N.  It  con- 
tains lessons  and  practical  notes  on  Steam  and  the  Steam-Engine,  Propellers,  &<•.  It  is 
calculated  to  be  of  great  use  to  young  marine  engineers,  students,  and  others.  The  text  is 
illustrated  and  explained  by  numerous  diagrams  and  representations  of  machinery.  This 
new  edition  has  been  revised  and  enlarged  by  Chief  Engineer  J.  W.  KING.  U.  S.  N., 
brother  to  the  deceased  author  of  the  work." — Boxton  Daily  Advertiser. 

"This  is  one  of  the  best,  because  eminently  plain  and  practical,  treatises  on  the  Steam- 
Engine  ever  published."— Philadelphia  Press. 

"Its  republication  at  this  time,  when  so  many  young  men  are  entering  the  service  as 
naval  engineers,  is  most  opportune.  Each  of  them  ought  to  have  a  copy." — Philadelphia 
Evening  Bulletin. 


OTEAM  FOR  THE  MILLION. 

A  Popular  Treatise  on  Steam  and  its  Application  to  the  Useful  Arts, 
especially  to  Navigation.  By  J.  H.  WARD,  Commander  U.  S. 
Navy.  New  and  revised  edition,  i  vol.,  8vo,  cloth.  $1. 

"A  most  excellent  work  for  the  young  engineer  and  general  reader.  Many  facts  rela- 
ting to  the  management  of  the  boiler  and  engine  are  set  forth  with  a  simplicity  of  lan- 
guage, and  perfection  of  detail,  that  brings  the  subject  home  to  the  reader.  Mr.  Ward  is 
also  peculiarly  happy  in  his  illustrations." — American  Engineer, 

QCREW  PROPULSION. 

Notes  on  Screw  Propulsion,  its  Rise  and  History.  By  Capt.  W.  H. 
WALKER,  U.  S.  Navy.  1  vol.,  8vo,  cloth.  75  cents. 

"  Some  interesting  notes  on  screw  propulsion,  its  rise  and  progress,  have  just  been  issued 
by  Commander  "W.  H.  WALKER,  U.  S.  N.,  from  which  all  that  is  likely  to  be  desired  on 
the  subject  may  be  readily  acquired.  *  *  *  *  After  thoroughly  demonstrating  the 
efficiency  of  the  screw,  Mr.  Walker  proceeds  to  point  out  the  various  other  points  to  be 
attended  to  in  order  to  secure  an  efficient  man-of-war,  and  eulogizes  throughout  the  readi- 
ness of  the  British  Admiralty  to  test  every  novelty  calculated  to  give  satisfactory  results. 
*  *  *  *  Commander  Walker's  book  contains  an  immense  amount  of  concise  practical 
data,  and  every  item  of  information  recorded  fully  proves  that  the  variou*  j>o>nts  bearing 
upon  it  have  been  well  considered  previously  to  expressing  an  opinion."— London  Mining 
Journal. 

u  Every  engineer  should  have  it  in  his  library."— American  Engineer, 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


TACTICAL  TREATISE  ON  LIMES,  HYDRAU- 
LIC CEMENTS,  AND  MORTARS. 

Papers  on  Practical  Engineering,  U.  S.  Engineer  Department,  No. 
9,  containing  Reports  of  numerous  experiments  conducted  in 
New  York  City,  during  the  years  1858  to  1861  inclusive.  By 

8.   A.   GILLMORE,  Brig.-General  U.    S.  Volunteers,  and  Majo* 
.  S.  Corps  of  Engineers.      With  numerous  illustrations.      One 
volume  octavo.     $3.50. 


~^HE  CONTRACTORS'  MANUAL  AND  BUILD- 
ERS' PRICE-BOOK. 

By  A.  B.  CLOUGH,  Architect,      l  vol.,  i8mo.      5?  cents. 

PRINCIPLES   AND  PRACTICE   OF  EMBANKING 
LANDS  FROM  RIVER  FLOODS, 

As  applied  to  the  Levees  of  the  Mississippi.     By  WILLIAM  HEWSON, 
Civil  Engineer,      l  vol.,  8vo,  cloth.     $2.00. 


W 


OODBURY    ON    THE    ARCH. 


Treatise  on  the  various  Elements  of  Stability  in  the  well-proportioned 
Arch.  With  numerous  Tables  of  the  Ultimate  and  Actual 
Thrust.  By  Captain  D.  P.  WOODBURY,  U.  S.  Corps  of  Engi- 
neers, l  vol.,  8vo.  Engravings.  Cloth,  $2.50. 


CjouADRON  TACTICS  UNDER  STEAM. 

Bv  FOXHALL  A.  PARKER,  Commander  U.  S.  Navy.  Published  by 
authority  of  the  Navy  Department,  i  vol.,  8vo.,  with  numer- 
ous Plates.  $5,00. 


D.    VAN    NOSTRAND  S    PUBLICATIONS. 


M 


ODELS  OF  FORTIFICATIONS. 


VAUBAN'S  FIRST  SYSTEM.  One  Front  and  two' Bastion?  — 
Scale,  20  Yards  td  an  Inch. 

THE  MODERN  SYSTEM.  One  Front— Scale,  20  Yards  to  an 
Inch. 

FIELD-WORKS.     The  Square  Redoubt— Scale,  5  Yards  to  an  Inch. 

The  above  models  are  moulded  from  those  made  by  Mr.  KIMBER,  of 
London,  and  are  intended  as  illustrations  of  his  works  upon  For- 
tifications. They  are  beautifully  modelled  in  papier  mache, 
colored  in  oil,  and  mounted  in  strong  covered  cases.  They  are 
admirably  adapted  for  teaching  the  first  principles  of  fortification, 
and  should  be  in  every  College,  Military,  and  High*  School. 

Mr.  KIMBER'S  three  volumes,  viz.,  Vauban's  First  System,  the  Modern 
System,  and  Field-Works,  will  accompany  the  models. 
Price  for  the  set  of  three,  with  books,  $60. 


R 


IFLED    ORDNANCE  : 


A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  Application  of  the  Principle  of  the  Rifle 
to  Guns  and  Mortars  of  every  calibre.  To  which  is  added,  a 
new  theory  of  the  initial  action  and  force  of  Fired  Gunpowder. 
By  LYNALL  THOMAS,  F.  R.  S.  L.  Fifth  edition,  revised.  One 
volume,  octavo,  illustrated.  $2.00. 


F 


IELD   TACTICS   FOR   INFANTRY, 


Comprising  the  Battalion  movements,  and  Brigade  evolutions,  useful 
in  the  Field,  on  the  March,  and  in  the  presence  of  the  Enemy. 
The  tabular  form  is  used  to  distinguish  the  commands  of  the 
General,  and  the  commands  of  the  Colonel.  By  Brig.-Gen. 
WM.  H.  MORRIS,  U.  S.  Vols.,  late  2d  U.  S.  Infantry.  i8mo, 
Illustrated.  In  Press. 


M 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 

GORE'S  TREASON  OF  LEE. 


"Mr.  Lee's  Plan — March  29,  1777.  The  Treason  of  Charles 
Lee,  Major-General,  Second  in  Command  in  the  American  Army 
of  the  Revolution.  By  GEORGE  H.  MOORE,  Librarian  of  the 
New  York  Historical  Society,  i  vol.  8vo,  cloth.  Two  Steel 
Portraits,  and  Two  Lithograph  Fac-similes  of  Documents.  $2. 

**  It  is  a  clear  and  most  interesting  development  of  one  of  .the  strangest  events  in  tho 
history  of  the  Eevolution.  It  is  as  important  as  it  is  curious,  for  the  acts  and  motives  of 
a  man  who  held  so  high  a  rank  in  the  army  and  in  the  public  estimation  should  be  known. 
They  affect  the  character  of  others,  and  throw  light  on  transactions  which  could  not 
otherwise  be  explained." 

JARED  SPARKS. 

"Your  paper  was  certainly  the  most  instructive  one  over  presented  (within  my  obser- 
vation) to  any  one  of  our  Historical  Societies. 

"The  work  does  you  great  credit;  it  is  full  of  interest,  of  facts  collected  from  far  and 
near.    The  story  is  well  told,  tho  criticism  careful  and  discriminating.    I  feel  certain  it 
will  bring  you  much  reputation  for  its  completeness  and  manner  of  execution.    *    *    * 
Go  on ;  and  you  will  win  honor  for  yourself,  while  you  will  assist  to  make  American  His- 
tory what  it  ought  to  be." 

GEORGE  BANCROFT. 

"  I  have  read  it  with  great  interest,  It  is  a  curious,  valuable,  and  conclusively  argued 
contribution  to  our  revolutionary  history." 

GULIAN  C.  VEEPLANCK. 

"  I  am  greatly  indebted  to  you  for  a  copy  of  your  beautiful  monograph.  *  *  *  I  re-. 
Joice  that  you  have  found  the  means  (and  made  such  good  use  of  them)  of  putting  his 
worthlessness  beyond  all  question." 

EDWARD  EVERETT. 

"You  have  done  a  good  service  to  history.    I  ran  it  through  with  the  greatest  interest." 

I:OP>EET  C.  WINTHROP. 

"  Many  thanks  for  Lee's  Treason.  *  *  *  *  Moore  has  made  out  the  case  against 
him," 

AV.  F.  DE  SAUSSURE,  (of  S.  C.) 

"Tho  Treason  of  !><•,  is  pl;wd  beyond  doubt,  and  the  original  documents  eslaMisliin- 
It  are  published  in  the 'recent  hi^hlv  valuable  monograph  of  G.  II.  Moore,  Es>q.,  on  !!i:it 
•ubj^ct —EDtretC*  Life,  of  Washington. 


D.  VAN  NOSTRAND'S  PUBLICATIONS. 


"We  commend  Mr.  Moore's  work  aa  the  most  valuable  contribution  to  our  Revolution- 
ary history  that  has  appeared  for  many  a  day,  and  assure  our  readers  that  the  perusal  of 
its  elegant  and  eloquent  pages  cannot  but  repay  the  few  hours  that  it  will  require."—  His- 
torical Jfagasin*. 

"  "We  commend  this  essay  to  the  attention  of  historical  students,  admiring  the  sim- 
plicity and  lucidity  of  its  style."—  Ettprew. 

*  A  work  which  we  have  read  with  great  pleasure,  *  *  *  *  well  worthy  the  at- 
tention of  our  readers,  and  we  take  great  pleasure  in  recommending  it  to  them."  —  Boston 


"  This  beautifully  printed  volume  is  an  important  contribntion  to  the  history  of  the  war 
of  the  Revolution.  It  establishes  beyond  a  question  the  treason  of  one  of  the  most  dia- 
ti  m:uished  generals  of  that  war,  who  was  second  in  command  to  Washington."  —  Provi- 
dence Journal. 

"  The  researches  of  Mr.  Moore  reflect  great  credit  on  his  Industry  and  penetration  as  a 
historical  student,  and  we  unite  with  those  better  capable  of  judging  than  ourselves,  that 
he  has  brought  to  light  important  facts,  which  tend  more  to  clear  up  obscure  points  in  our 
revolutionary  history  than  any  thing  that  has  appeared  since  the  events  alluded  to  took 
place."  —  Providence  Journal. 

"The  volume  abounds  with  curious  details,  and  will  be  read  with  great  interest  by  the 
student  of  American  history."  —  2f.  1'.  Tribune* 

"  No  student  of  American  history  can  afford  to  be  without  this  book."—  It.  I.  School- 
master. 

"  We  recommend  this  valuable  contribution  to  the  history  of  the  American  Revolution 
to  the  attention  of  our  readers.  *  *  *  *  Apart  from  its  value  as  an  authentic  and 
original  account  of  an  important  episode  in  the  American  Revolution,  it  shows  in  strong 
a  id  instructive  contrast  the  pictures  of  the  infamous  traitor  and  true  patriot,  *  *  * 
Charles  Lee,  *  *  *  and  George  Washington.  These  pictures  are  good  even  to  study 
»t  the  present  time."—  Courier  and  Enquirer. 

"One  of  the  most  valuable  contributions  to  our  Revolutionary  history  that  has  ever  been 
published.  *  *  *  Mr.  Moore's  carefulness  and  completeness  of  research  ore  fine  quali- 
ties of  the  historian,  happily  exhibited  in  this  volume."—  Christian  Intelligence)'. 

"  Another  of  those  startling  and  unique  works  that  occasionally  blaze  out  upon  the  sea 
of  literature,  amazing  every  one  with  its  strange  developments.  The  author  fixes  black 
and  damning  treason  upon  General  Lee,  by  indubitable  testimony,  as  strongly  and  clearly 
as  ever  it  was  attached  to  Benedict  Arnold."—  Chautavqua  Democrat. 

"  Sound  judgment,  thorough  research,  just  appreciation  of  character,  an  acute  perception 
of  the  logical  connection  of  events  chronologically  disjoined,  and  a  ready  command  of 
clear,  precise,  and  appropriate  language,  have  enabled  Mr.  Moore  to  make  a  volume,  which, 
taken  in  all  its  bearings,  may  unhesitatingly  be  pronounced  the  most  important  mono- 
graph ever  contributed  to  the  history  of  the  War  of  Independence."—  Xew  York  Times. 

"  Crammed  with  the  valuable  results  of  original  investigations.  Many  of  the  docu- 
ments never  published  and  throwing  a  new  and  unexpected  light  on  a  very  intercctiQ' 
episode  of  the  Revolution."—  Evening  Pvs{  .. 


Of 

UNIVERSITY 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT.  ' 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed.  ,  ^» 

Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recalL 


MOV    ' 


General  Li1 

of  California 
Berkeley 


; 


>  y»    rjv 


